(GE) AK Breakers Vol 2 Of

2018-02-16

: (Ge)-Ak Breakers Vol 2 Of 2 (GE)-AK_Breakers_Vol_2_of_2 QP_ing manuals pub

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 382

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

F-P Index

FEDERAL PACIFIC- Breakers
TAB#!

Selection &Application

F-P Air Circuit Breakers

SP-LV-CB-2

Specific Procedures

LV Air Circuit Breaker Calibration Test

I.L 12-957

Instruction Leaflet

Selenium Rectifiers for Breakers

Renewal Parts & Maint Instr.

DMB-15T

IN-810.2

Renewal Parts & Maint Instr.

DMB-25-1T

iN-810.3

Renewal Parts & Maint Instr.

Installation Instructions

DST-5(5&15kV)

IN-810.6

Instruction Manual

FP Power & FM Fusematic

IN-810.9

Instruction Manual

FP25-600. FM25-600. FP50-1600. FM50-1600

IN-810.4

Instruction & Renewal Parts

FP50-800. FM50-800

Retrofit Instructions

FP-SO

1100B6403

Time-Current Curve

FP25 & FP50 Motor Starting

1100B6402

Time-Current Curve

FP25 & FP50 Dual Magnetic TD1

1100B6406

Time-Current Curve

FP25 & FP50 TD-2 Timing Device

1100B6406

Time-Current Curve

FP75 Dual Magnetic TD-1 Timing Device

C-3-413

Instruction Book

Type H - LV. Breakers

C-3-230

Swgr Catalogue

Type H2 - LV. Breakers

C-3-222

Technical Data

Type H-3 & HL-3 Breakers

C-3-222-1

Instruction Book

Type H-3 & HL-3 Breakers

C-3-218

Swgr Catalogue

USD Solid State Relay

IN-820.4B & 4A

Instruction Book

Metal-Clad & LV. Switchgear

IN-820-3

instruction Book

Metal-Clad & LV. Switchgear

Miscellaneous Switchear Components

V-" ''"r^'X
. v'^. ' •
I;
•

•

.. iV

.\>(Vf v. -tV
I

i
'.;Vt''''.'-';''-,-'v

'•: t '.
V^r'.-;:ri:••

stei
i

t ••
=
I
, .-

iiJtt^tn— r—•

B6»iriTmririJ.iui^nnatttfaaias^'A': •'• -J*2.V-.;'•
' i»~'11'TBirragIt»
"
'•' ••: • ••.•••
'" '. '! <,'•'•••
•:.l.' •>•!.
••

•'

' • •'

• .; yy '-'y:0:';^icortwjiiptf

Subject
General Selection Factors .

Interrupting Ratings

. ....

Short-Time Ratings .

Operating Mechanisms.

.• .

Control Circuit Power ,

Time Current Characteristic Curves .

Continuous Ci,..' it Ratings .' .
Definition of Terms

r .•;? .

Scries Overcurrent Tripping Device . .
.

•

Determination of Shdrt-Circuit Currents

Tripping Characteristics Produced .

The Selective System . ' .

The Cascade System

. .

National Electtical Code .

Accessories for Federal Pacific Air,Circuit Breakers
Application Tables ; . .

R?
L. ^^ / a • iT- »-

.., ,/
• <•

Wa. -l'- -.iwal /-'..-A.L>LW. J-Vjairfti ii-iil»iik^ki*Li4ii.i5ilijliL-i«ltKWj^iaUrt'»V.r."; I Lia,Ua^:.*' /*.'1 j,.aLi -'...y/'' y
, -f;,

SEL2OT0^3 , y

:•

or D.C. amperes which they will carry continuously
without excccdmg the limi of: ohsemble temperatm'e .

The probletn of selectuig aircircuit breakers for the"
protection of low voltage circuits is similar to the
problsnt of selecting other types of equipment such as
motors or relays. As in the application of motors and

relays, the circuit breaker should be compatible with
the power system with which it is to be associated; it
should be able to withstand .the conditions imposed
during operation in the field. Most of these require
ments will be obvious upon'inspection of the power
system and the field conditions, and should be evalu
ated with reference to the text of this manual. The

maximum short circuit current: available at the point

of application will not be so seifrevident; it is usually
necessary to .calculate this value. The avaOable short

or exceed &e nominal voltage of the circuit to which

it is to be applied. Table No. T, page 16, lists the ,

greatly increased interrupting ra^gs available at Voltages lower than 600v. ;;" :y

; y

3. Available Shdit-Circuit Current

and interrupt, is imique with the power system and the
point of application of the circuit breaker.
This publication is intendedfor use in the selection
and application of general purpose low voltage air

The avaOable short-bireuit cureent at a given point
in a power system ii &e maximum current which the
power system, when operating yiyith rtiaiximum generrating capacity and cotmected
deliver
to zero unpedanceshort (Circuits dmriltaneously applied
from all phases or polarities to gfbund. For a-c sys

Standards for Large Air Circuit Breakem.

tems the rms value of themaximum asymmetric^ cur

The factors which will affect the selection of air
circuit breakers are as follows:
1.

Circuit load current.

2. Circuit voltage.

3. Available short oirciiit current at the point of
application.
4. System frequency.
.
5.

Local electrical codes.,

6. Limits 01 observable tempt-ature rise. ..

7. Unusual service conditions.

the particular, sections deling with thein in this
manual-'''

rent avaOable must be less than the interrupting rating
and short time ratmg of the circuit breaker. For d-c
systems the maximum steady state current should be
less thau the interrupting rating of the circuit.breaker.
For f\ulher discussion of the selection of air circuit .

breakers with respect to their interrupting capacity,
reference should be madeto the tables on pages 18 and
19 on intenupting capacity and the discussion on calr

cuiaJon ofavailable !^c^-clrcitit currient bn page 10,
.4. System Frequency

These factors and conditions should!be .referred to

'X.V

2. Circuit Voltage
The voltage rating of the circuit breaker should equal

circuit current, which the circuit breakers must carry

circuit breakers and the trip devices associated with
these circuit breakers; as recommended by the NEMA

r:\

rise. After a fault current intetruption .the current
carrying ability of a circuit breaker may be materially
reduced. Table No. 2, page 16, shows the continuous
current ratings of . Federal iPacific large air circuit
breakers and series trip cdil ratings. .

"'x'''•

1, Circuit toad CuiTont y ;
Tlic rated continuous current of Federal Pacific

circuit breakers is die designated limit in rms amperes

The frequent^

:;SS(P'
W.'

q£

circuit breaker shoidd

a^ee with the nominirf ffeqU^y.of the ppwjr system:,
Federal Pacific circuit breakers are rated:iorfrcquen- •i'
vies of 60^25 cycles oi .d-c, For frequencies, other ' '
than frequencies available as standard or for circuits '

on which higher order harmonics ,are present; special ;
recommendations shoidd^b© requested from the Fed-

i-x"

Rt-f.^l'rTiirrTfi'^'"'"
u w L ^ Vi^ w <•/ -Jt'
i' -i

eral Pacific Electric Company (hereafter called the
"Company).

5. Locaf Electrical Codes
Federal Pacific breakers are designed to comply

with the National Electrical Code. Where City or State
Codes are more restrietive than the National Elec

trical Code, the Company should be consulted for its
recommendations. Unless such recommendations art-

obtained in advance of placing orders, the Company

will notassume responsibility for compliance with such
codes.

6. Limits of Observable Temperature Rise
Federal Pacific air circuit breakers are designed in
accordance with "the NEMA Standards SG3-3.04 on

Limits of ObservableTemperature Rise above the Am
bient Temperature, the latter defined in the NEMA
Standard SG3-3.IS.

7. Unusual Service Conditions
When unusual environmental conditions or unusual
duty conditions are encountered, it is recommended
that these conditions be nullified at the site of the in
stallation. Unusual conditions referred to are those
considered by NEMA under SG3-2.02. When such

action is not possible and standard equipment adaotable to the condition is not listed, recommendations

for special features necesshry to adapt standard equip
ment to the conditions should be obtained from the

Company in advance of placing the order.
If^TEKRUPTING. RATEM.GS

The interrupting rating of a circuit breaker is the

highest current (rms ifalternating current) at a speci-.
fied operating voltage which the breaker is required
to interrupt under the operating duty specified and

with a normal frequency recover voltage equal to the
specified operaiing voltage. ^ .
Interrupting ratings of Federal Pacific air circuit

breakers arc based on test prWediirci applicable op
erating duty (dutycycle),^rtormance, and conditions
given in paragraphs SG3-3.07, SG3J.OS and SG3-3.19
01 the NEMA Standard for large air -ircui* brtaVc.7i

Tnese paragraphs read essentially as.follpws:—,
Short-Ciircult Interrupting Tests
The ,iesi procedure and;characteristics of the. test

-:z.m

circuit to be used for verifying the ability of the cir
cuit breaker to interrupt the lotaLamperes (rms if al-.
ternating current) given by the interrtipting rating for
the applicable operating duty shall be as follows;

A. RMS Total Amporos

The rms total amperes shall be determined by ?}
measuring the current flow in the test circuit dsi)
follows:
.
^
The circuit breaker shall be short circuited W. omitted.

•

In alternating-current circuits, the current mea-' •

sured shall be the rms total current including if any,
the direct-current component. It shall be measured
at an instant one-half cycle after the short circuit
occurs and shall be calculated in accordance with

American Standard Methods for Determining the
Rms Value of Sinusoidal Current Wave a.nd a .
Normal-frequency Recovery Voltage. (For « i-

phase test circuit the rms total current 'sHcdl be'the}

average of ihe currents in ail3 phases. For asingle-;:^
phase test circuit, 3 successive tests shall be made

to determine the average current in that circuit.)
The circuit constants for the test circuit, with the ?
required current flowing, shall be such that the i'•
X/R ratio is at least 11.72,

In direct-current circuits, the current measured

shall be the maximum value.

The transient characteristicsof the testingcircuit
for a circuit breaker with delayed tripping in the
fault current range shall be such thai the 3-phase
average current at the end of 30 cycles (based on

a 60-cycle frequency) shall be not less than 75 per
cent of the average rms total current at the end of
the first half cycle.
' . •: "
B. Performance

At the end of any performance at or within its
interrupting rating, the circuit breaker shall be

the.foUowirig condition: ^ • • •

A"•••

1, Mechanical—The circuit breaker shall be in

substantially t',mechanical conditioii }C[^^ :,'
as at the beginnings

- /

2. Electrical—The circuit breaker shall.be co- -"'.
.. pable of w///iy/anrf% rated

•jvjvSj

• isb^u-'K^ii-uue ^c:iL/;q£>
:

open positionand of carryingrated current at

2. Circuit breakers having a continuous current
rating above 2000 amperes—
' .
a. 12 times the rated continuous cidttr^ntof the 'v•,,

rated voltage for c limited time but not nec
essarily without exceeding the rated tempera- .

circuit breaker, or

ture rise.

After performance at of near its interrupting
rating, it is not to be inferredthat the circuit breaker
can again meet its interritpting fating without being
. inspected and, if necessary, repaired,

whichever is lowest.

; Ta

•

Direct-Acting Delayed Overcurrent Trip Devices

for Fault Currents

The conditions which are assumed in assigrung

SHORT-TIME RATINGS • •
The rated short-time current of a circuit breaker is

the highest rms current, including the d-c component,
which it will be required to carry for specifiejd shorttime intervals.

Short-time rating of Federal Pacific air circuit
breakers is based on test procedure^ operating duty

The operating duty for determining the inter
rupting rating of circuit breakers with instantaneous
overcurrent trip devices for fault currents shall con
sist of an opening operation, followed after a 15-

(duty cycle), performance, and" conditioni giyen in
paragraphs SG3-3.10 and SG3-3.16.. The paragraphs
read essentially as follows:-—

second interval by. a close-open operation.

Short-time current tests are made io.deterntlne'[ ff'.0i^^:-..^
the ability of a circuit breaker 0 carry ^ wiferf

rupting rating of circuit breakers with delayed overcurrent trip devices for fault currents shall consist

short-time current without infury.

of an opening operation, followed after a iS-second.
interval by a close-open operation, the,tripping be
ing delayed by the associated tripping devices.

A. RMS Total Amperes
Determined same as for interrupting rating.
"

if,ft'

At the end of any performance ot or within it's

short-time rating, the circuit breaker shall be'capa^^trif/:f^^r--

Currents

1. Circuit breakers having a continuous current
rating of 2000 amperes and below —15 times
the rated continuous current of the circuit

. ..'X'
'

B. Performance

B. Interrupting Ratings for Circuit Breakers with

,u!!:wi..g ^.'icU cause instantaneous ope. ation:

• fr -i:

Short-Time Current Tests

The operating duty for determining the. inter

rent trip devices, current values in excess of the

Interrupting ratings of Federal Pacificvak circuit
breakers are shown in Table No. 1, page 16,
;J

Rating {Duty Cycle)

For circuit breakers with 'direct*acting overcur

bands associated with selective trip device's,

A. Operating Duty for Determining the interrupting

The interrupting ratings given in 8(13-3.05, are
based on direct-acting overcurrent tripping.

.y..

The interrupting ratings are based on the maxi-

instcn'rr.suus Overcurrent Trip Devices for Fault

mum, intermediate and minimum short-Ume delay-

Determination of Interrupting Rating

breaker.

^ \ 7' ' '

C. Inlerrupling Ratings for Circuit Breakers With

an interrupting rating to a circuit breaker include
the stored electrostatic arid tnagnetic energy of the
system, the re-establishment of an arc under tran
sient voltage conditions, the decrement of the systems, and other variable conditions. These condi-'
tions are considered as not differing widely in aver
age systems and are to be taken into account in the -.
factor of safety employed hi the rating, of (he circuit

•^n

b. 75 per cent of the interrupting rating, or
c. the short-time rating,

C. Conditions

breakers.

J.V— ••

ble of carrying rmed continuous current wiiiwut^^i-^rik
exceeding tne rated temperature ribe OpUs 'yariOu^ X^Mff^f^^
parts and shall be capable of meeting its irtierrupt<^•
ing rating.
Short-Time Duly Cych

The short-time duty cycle shall consist of rnalri-.
taining rated short-time current for two periods of-

- :• -t',

one-half second each, with d 15-secorid interval of
zero current between the one-half secondi perfods,'.
'rT

Short time ratings of Federal Pacific air circuit
breakers are shown in Table No. 3, page 17. Applic.%tion of bre.akers and series trip devices, where trip

ping is delayed to provide selective tripping, is further
discussed on pages 11 and 12.

MSCHAWSSMS

When the breaker is closed full contact should be
established quickly and positively. This is required
since hesitation or slowness oil closing, particularly

when closing the circuit breaker against' a short cir
cuit, causes excessive arcing, consequently burning of
the contacts, and other danjage to. the breaker. When

closing manually, the operator may hesitate or be un
certain m his efforts to close the breaker, giving rise
to the conditions described.

To insure greater safety, as well as ease of opera
tion, the following limitation recognized by the AIEE
and NEMA applies to manually operated breakers:

•rating shall be electrically operated from a remote
position only, to provide protection for the operator
when closing against fault current.

1. Direct Monual-Oporatins Mechanism
Direct manual-operating mechanisms arc inte^al
with the breaker, structure in DMB15, DMB25fl,

.'•'I

DMB50 circuit breakers. The operating handle of '^e

mechanism protrudes through the dead front panels'
or the doors of the metal encldised drawout switchgear
units, depending on the enclosure.

2. Electrica! Operuvlr.g Mechanisms
Electrical Closing of DMB 15, 25-1 and 50 circuit
breakers is accomplished by a solenoid actuated
mechanism. The solenoid is controlled by. closing

the control lelay provided for this purpose.'
COS^TKOL CLRCUJ7 POWER
The control circuit must have a reliable source of

Manually operated circuit breakers shall be limited
to applications where the interruptingrequirements do
ot exceed 50000 amperes and where tripping is in
stantaneous for current above 15000 amperes for
dead-front and enclosed breakers or where interrupt

ing requirements do not exceed .10000 amperes for

power for successful operation of the control .cdmpo-nents. The control circuit power source ^oiiild be
independeni to the degree that the voltage is main
tained constant, particularly when fault conditions are
encountered, and should never be allowed to fall be

live-front breakers and rated cpntinupus current idoes

low the minimum value required for successful opera
tion of the components.

not exceed 1600 amperes. For selective tripping, man
ually operated circuit breakers shall
limited to ap
plication in which delayed tripping requirements do

The following table lists rated control voltages and
minimum and maximum ranges. These voltages are

not exceed 150*00 amperes. Allcircuit breakers sub

to be measured at the terminals of the various control

jected to fault currents in excess of their interrupting

mechanisms with full operating current flowing.

FEDERAL PACIFIC AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Rated Control Voltages and Ranges
' Ralod
Control

:• ' •

closing Voltage Range, Volts

Solenoid
DIRECT CURRENT*

•
• 28-60
.'v- •• V 70-140 • ; -

90-130

.
, •

l40-280-;,y;;;

180-260
alternating current

'• •i96.2'5ov;.'^":-^''.': •-

190.250
"

380-5(10 • ; ; .

124-voU tripping is not rtfcommcnded.
i Lncludes heater circiiits.

"• Control'iroih'exciter circuits is not recotatr.endcd.

:, <\.<,:::yyti!.'r -\ ./

hMii

ifj

THIPPS^iG DHV5CES

Tripping ''evices in DMB breakers have two dis
tinct functions:

a. To perform the normal siyitching operations

either manually or from a remdted source.

b. To protect the circuit when abnormal conditions,
exist.

The normal switching tripping o^w ^I'w-i is .-erformed by a shunt trip which is energized by a con
stant potential source. Automatic protective trip is of
three types; undervoltagc trip, shunt trip, and overcurrent trip.

1. The undervoltage device is a spring mechanism
retained by a shunt holding coil. Upon a re
duction in voltage, the mechanism is released
to trip the breaker.
2. The shunt trip .device is energized from a con
trol source thpugh an auxiliary sv/itch which
is closed when the breaker is closed. The con
trol source may be from a current transformer
in the main circuit.

3. The .series over'^^ritu: trip device is in serjes
with the power cucuit and is actuated by the

main circuit. A more detailed description of
various methods and their associated systems
follows.

J4c-'das
. .. .:.'>^n;vi*.--

SnilSE-3 OVE.^.Cb"E2.«l£?^5T TRIPPING

:^lte

DEViCS 5=OR prv^215, DMB25-1. DJyIBBO
The .series bvcrcurrcnt tripping device consists of a

current to the time indicated by the curve of tlie band

series coil and a magnetic circuit with two armatures;

specified at 600% of the pickup current. The linkage
between the armature and the timer isa heavy factorysetspring (E). Depending on thesetting of this spring,

one activating a long tinie delay, escapement mecha

nism and the other ,a short-time delay ^escapement

mechanism. These armatures, though inthe same mag
netic circuit, act indopehdently at selected currents to

trip the circuit breaker. Instantaneous tripping may be
used in conjurictLi. with either long ime-delay or
short-time-dcliiy. The long~iime'
changeable from one interruptiiig rating to another,.;
Table No. 3 shows permissible interrupting rating'''!
range of various series, trip coils.

The long-tirae.^elay curves am shown .as the sum-; Sir

mation of the tripping device timing plufthe brisker
clearing time. The broken line below the operating"

3. insiantaneous:

curve indicates the reset tiihe, i.e., the maximum time
for which the overcurrent can be maintained through;

. Alone or in combination wiUi the shon-tiine-delay
and/or the long-time-delay. Available from 8-15 times
the continuous current rating of the trip coil or in
special .settings, but not exceeding 90% of the inter-:
ruptiiig rating of the breaker. Unless otherwise speci
fied, the standard setting of 10 times the trip coil rat
ing will be supplied.

the series trip device without ultimately tripping ,tlie

breaker. If the current i? instantaneously r^uccd tO;
and maintauied at 80% of the Jong time delay pickup
current, ai or below this broken line, the tripping'
device will automatically reset.
The short-time^elay curves are also shown as the

TABLE
Typo of Broofcer

TifflO Characteristic

DMB-IS, 2S-t,S0

Inter.
Max.

} V»' ; ''

Time-Current Characteristic Curves

A
Lowor limit of bond ti

Pickup Toloronco

« 600% of Pickup Seftiho*

• Field adjustable from 80 to 160% of trip coil rating.

TABLE'-B
Typo of Breokar

"•'Field adjustable 5, 7'/i. and 10 times the trip coil rating.

t Th-

• : lower liliiii of Kfrnd p!:

;. 'V .250% of Pickup Sotlinoy^'.. . • ,
'21 cyclos

'cr limit of the band is the time for which the overcurrent may persist at the given value and thea drop til BO percfcht of ,,

.•kc long time delay pickup current without tripping the'circuit breaker. (See Curyesi, pj&;>s j «->rt

. i.

t The lower limit of the band is the time for which tlic overcurrent may persist and then drop' to 20 per cent of the short time delay:

pickup current without tripping;the circuit breaker. Bunds are factory set. (Sdc Curves, pages 8 and 9).'

Soric« overcurrant trip eoili. hove

. INSTANTANEOUS SEHtNCS F20M
3X TO 15X TRIP COtl HATING

odiuttoble foclory cdlibrolod lol-

tiiiEIs oi from 80% to l60Va of
coil rating for long- ' time doloy •
pick-up ond from 5 limet to 10

llmai coil Votitig for »hor! time
Qoioy picK-up*

INST,
TRIP
SKOV/N AT lOX TRIP COIl RATING

/fii-

NOTES—

l.ong.time-doloy arid initontoneout

tripping (hown ore nofmolly
supptiod In oil

DM& Air Clreto

Dreokeri. For lalocfiva tripping
appllcotiont, the chorl-time-deloy
shown it supplied oioner or in

combination with Ibhg-limo.delayi
or In. combinotion with inttontoncouj tripping) or in combinotion

SHORT TIME
RESETT.
OEUY

with long-time-delay ohd instanto-

neoiit tripping. Type, of tripping

jk •ym'

CURRENT IN ..Mis nATiivw Cr li.iiiwS TRIPPING DEVICE

Typical Dual Selective Overcurrent Tripping Curve

'W^.yakmm

':'; , i^;.V(:r'• vv;..-,, ~•'iyfrfl:i.ir}^

i: i.'jV

• • : f'-.-r"- •'(
••..•«!

•

* . •[, ••

V*XiTime Delay Curves

'.: *

•

Nema Standard SG3-3.25A

NOTEi THE PJCK-Uf CURRENT SETTING FOP. EACH BAND IS ADJUSTABIE TO 5, ^Vj, and 10
TIMES THE RATING OF THE SERIES OVERCURRENT TRIPPING DEVICE,

Shorf-Time belay Curves
Nema Standard SG3-3.2Sa ^->'

•v'V
r^X'i

-jp- tf«Tj

^e^fionr^soc^ e>? ijoitlw
suiTJ-nation of the timing of the tripping device plus

device, resulting in the subsequent tripping of the circuit breaker with which the trip device is associated.

the breaker clearing time. The broken line below the

operating curve indicates the reset time, i.e., the time

Cajibravion: •

for which an overload may persistthrough the device

•

Circuit breakers with adjustable overcurrent trip

without ultimately tripping the breaker.
the current
is instantaneously reduced to and maintained at 20%

shall be calibrated at 80, 100, 120, 140, and 160 per
cent of their continuous current rating. The toleiaiicc

of the shoft-time-delay pickup current at or below this
line, the device will automatically reset.

shall be plus or minus 10%.

Overcurrent trip coils shali be selected so as to

Both the long-time-deiay curves and the short-time-

vide the minimum trip'setting required.

delay curves are average curves pnd include the varia

tions between individual units, the manufacturing tol
erances, and the differences between single phase and

Short Time Delay Pickup:'
*
Shall be set at 5, 7'/z, and 10 times the ampere

three phase tripping. '

rating of the overcurrent trip coil.

Where palibratipn adjustment has been set so as

Series Overcurrent Tripping:
Trip coil in series with main circuit!

to-co-ordinate devices properly in a selective system,

the calibration-should not be disnirbed for. proper
operation of the system. ' "

;

trip coils, in amperes, is iishovm. in Table. No. 2,,
'

DEFINSTI0N OF TERMS

Functions above a predetermined value orcurreni:!fepC

•

without any purposelydelayed action.

shall remain closed and continue to carry the remaining

ic^ly reset when tlie current is reduced within a pre- r-V ' -

scribed time to a value within the rated continuous
current.

breakers nearest the source of power shall have inteirupting ratings equal to, or Inexcess of, theobtainable

fault current and where one or more breakers further

Dual Selective Overcurrent Trip:

removed from the power source have interrupting rat
ings less than obtainable fault -it the point of

a selective overciinent trip.

Combines the function of adelayed overcurrent trip •
;' ; :

•t

• '

DETERMINATION OF SHbRT-CSRCUST

•

CURRENTS:

A qualifying terra indicating that no delay is pur-

;

.: '''V;-

Low-yoltagc air circuit brcakcrs'are toapplied

posely introduced in the action of the device.
Pickup Currem:

•with which it is associated, and which will automat- v .-

The application of air circuit breakers in which the

•

the rated interrupting current of the circuit breaker

load current.

Cascading:

Vrf'!*

Selective Overcurrent Trip:
•
Functions with a purposely delayed action at ali ' : '
values of current between a predetermined value and

current conditions and the breakers nearest the source

Irtsfanfaneous:

Dual Overcurrent Trip:,
Combines the function of a delayed and an instantaneous overcurreni trip.

breaker nearest the fault operates to remove the over-

application.

. i

Functions above a predetermined value of
» current with a purposely delayed action.

The operation of circuit breakers in series so that,
of the breakers carrying the fault current, only the

.!.
:,: :

•

Delayed Overcurrent Trip:

SelecHve Qvercurrent Tripping:

,•

Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip:

CONMUOyS CURRENT RATSNGS
Continuous current of circuit breakers and series

page 16.

to circuits in the usual manner by ob.sexvihg that the, "•
ratings defined as stand* id a'u noi exceeded. The in-

' •

tcrrupling nitings, given ji.s the .st.nntlard, as.sufhc litai

"Pickup current" as applied to an ovcrcurrcnt trip
ping device (for a given calibration setting) is the min

the maximum .shqri-circuil current available at li.e ;
point ofapplication of the circuit breaker is calculated
according io the following outline. • '

imum current which will cause operation of the tripping
10"

'' ' ' i

current component, i.s dcicrmined by multiplying -dz
symmetrical current as obtained from the preceding

(a) For d-z circuits, the current calculaicd shall be
the maximum value, taking into account all resistance

up to thc 'source side of the circuit breaker but not

method by a factor to account for the increase in the

including any of its own resistance.

average three-ph.nsc current caused by the presence of
the direct-current component. While this factor de
pends on the X/R ratio of the total impedance to the
point of fault, a good approximation is obtained by

For d-c faults of 100,000 amperes and above, conr
sideratioh should be given to the rate of ri.se' of the

A <'

current as compared with the interrupting speed and
rating of the circuit breakers.

the use of a multiplying factor of 1.25. The use of

(b) For three-phase a-c circuits, the current cal
culated shall be the average value of the three phases
of the total current, including the d-c component, at
an instant one-half cycle after the short circuit occurs.

X/R ratio for each low voltage circuit breaker appli
cation, is generally accepted practice. This factor of ^

This value is computed by.first determining the total
symmetrical current from all sources, including syn

1.25 corresponds to a ratio of 11.72.
(c) For single-phase a-c circuits, the current is cal

chronous motors and induction motors. .Then this,
total symmetrical current is multiplied by a factor to
determine the average three-phase current at an in-.

culated in the s.Tmc manner as that used for three-

phase circuits, as tiic maximum asymmetrical current
in a single-phase circuit is identical with the current
'•f-G

in the highest phase of a three-phase circuit. (Sec
American Standard on Low Voltage Ail' Circuit

stant one-half cycle after.&e short circuit occurs.

Determination of Symmetrical Current. The £y.mmetrical current consists of the sum of system and
motor contributions, calculated in the following .mari
ner: F

, ,#•

this approximate factor, in preference to the determi
nation of the exact factor obtained for the specific

Breakers C3 7.13)

THH SELECtSVS" SYSTEM*" FV;

'•

1. System contribution is determined for all sources

.When service to a number of circuits'is to be

and all impedances up to the source side of the circuit
breaker, but. not including any of the circuit breaker
impedance. At 600 volts and below, even small im

and protection to all circuits must be provided, the

maintained, despite a faiult in any one of the circuits
selective system is applicable. In Figure .1 the main

pedances should be taken into account as they may

breaker A, the tie breakers B, and the feeder breakers

greatly affect the result.
2. Induction and synchronous motors connected to

C are between the source and the loads. In the selec

tive system, a fault at any load will trip the feeder
breaker C which is bettveen the load and the circuit ,

the bus act as generators, and at one-half cycle after
the short circuit occurs, cphtributc current which may

tie. breaker B, The remaining loads, however, will still

be calculated from the subtransient reactance of the^

GGGG:
/IF"'
..A

motor. Where the reactances of the motors are not

known, values are assumed for induction motors of 3.6

SOURCE

times motor full-load current, and for synchronous

motors of 4.8 times motor full-load current.

A -A-y'U' •;

•v-v- vf

When the motor load of the installation is not

known, assumptions may be bPsed oh system voltages.

For system voltage of 120.and 120/208 volts, it is
usual to assume that the connected load is 50 percent
lighting and 'JO pcicent motor load. This corresponds
to an equivaich.. »y».«.»»;a'ic£lcontiibution of twice the

• , ,F.t"

full connected load. •

'v-

For system voltage of 240 to 600 volts, it is usual
to assume that the load is 100 percent motor iPad and,
in the absence of exact information, that the motors
ai'e 75 pcrcnt sy??chronoust ahd,75 percent ind\irti/>n.
This corre.sponds to an equivalent symificiricul con-

tiilhidoh of four times tlic full connected load.

FICU&E t

Determination of the /Symmetrical Current. The
asymmetrical or total rms current,^including the direct-

'* Selective trip and short time delay app'dcaticns limited to ' 'V ,i -.

inlcrruptins current ratines shown in table No. 3,. Page 17.^^ . ;

be fed even though the faulted circuit is cleared. This

element.

is accomplished by "delaying the tripping time of the

Note: Attention is directed to the fact' that opera
tion of selective tripping requires coordination with

tie breaker B to the extent that the feeder breaker C

therest of the system. Asan example, the low-vokage
side of a transformer bank requires that, in the appli-

serving the faulted circuit, will clear the circuit before

B trips. Correspondingly, the tripping time of the

calion of relays or fuses on the higli-voltagc" side,

main breaker A is still further delayed so that in the
event that any tie breaker B clehrs the circuit as the
result of an overload between it and the load, the re
maining tie circuit is being fed. All the breakers in
the system are timed so as to protect their associated
circuits and to trip in suihcient time to protect the
breakers themselves within their respective interrupt
ing capacities. The following arc requirements for
breakers in a selective arrangement, as outlined in the
American Standard on Low Voltage Air Circuit

(•

proper coordinating steps should be taken.
Examples of application of Federal Pacific air cir

CASCADk system*

jf • •

•

Although the selective system is the best recom

Requirements for Circuit Breakers in Selective

mendation in all cases, there are applications where it
is not feasible, economically, to use feeder breakers
with full interrupting, capacity at all loads. Iii such
cases the cascade system may be employed. This

Trip Arrangement

means that only the breakers nearest the source of

power must have interrupting ratings equal to the

Properly selected air circtiit .breakers may be ap
plied to low voltage circuits to obtain selecUve trip
ping. The following requirements shall be observed:

average total calculated rms current, &d stated for
breakers between the source and the load.. Breakers

further from the source may have lower interrupting
ratings. The following are requirements for breakers,
in cascade as outlined by the American Standard on

(a) Each air circuit breaker must have an in-

terrupting rating equal to or greater than the available fault current at the point of application.

•

/'V • ' •

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers:— .

(b) Except for the one farthest removed from
source of power, each air circuit breaker must have
a short-time rating equal to or greater than the
available current at the point of application.

Requirements for CircuR Breakers in Cascade
Arrangement
Circuit breakers are considered lb be ..in cascade

(c) The iime-current characteristic of each air
circuit breaker, at all valu^ of avaflable overcurent, shall be such as to insure that-the circuit

when a plurality of low voltage air circuit breakers are
connected in series in a distribution system, and the
circuit breakers beyond those nearest to the source
are applied in the following correlated manner.

breaker nearest the fault shall function to remove
the bvercurrent conditions. Hiose nearer the source

In this cascade arrangement, circuit breakers toward

shall remain closed and continue to carry the ro-

thesource arc provided with instantaneous tripping de
vices for current values which may occur for faults
beyond otlicr circuit breakers hearer the load. Hence,

mainmg load current.
(d) To insure that each circuit breaker shall

function to meet these requirements, the time-

circuit breakers in the series other than the circuit

currcn} characteristics of associated circuit breakers

breaker closest to a fault may trip and interrapl loads
on other than the faulty circuit. SaCL< hijraagements
are used only where, the consequent jpossiblc sacrince.
in service continuity is acceptable..

must no* tvviJap. The pickup settings and time de.

cuit breakers on typical selective trip systems are
given in Table No. 4, page 18. f
.

Breakers:—

-'0%.

Jay bands of ooth tbe long-time and short-time delay. elements must be properly selected.
(e) Manually-operated circuit breakers shall be

(a) ""Cascading shall be limited to two. or some

limited to applications La which delayed tripping

times three steps of interrupting rating.

requirements do not exceed 15,000 amperes or 15
fees
vvip-f.-i>i; mting, whichever is gre' ici,

•

1. The, interrupting rating of a circuit breaker or.

breakers nearest the source of powershall bo cqual to

(f) The time-current characteristic: of circuit

at least 100 percent of the short-circuit current as calr".
culatcd in accordance \vith preceding paragraphs of

breakers in a selective system shall be such that
four circuit breakers may be operated selectively in
scries when required., One of these shall be a load

;v...

this guide. The circuit breaker or breakers in this
Cascading at 240v. and 4S0v. maximum intcmipling ratings

circuit breaker equipped with an instantaneous trip

is limited to two steps of .intcmipting' ratinj.

« ®
•.
13 ^'.-•'\y~'* "

to voltage, current, and interrupting rating, previously,

step shall be equipped with instantaneous trips set to
trip at a value of current that will give back-up pro

cited herein.

tection whenever the circuit breaker in the next lower

Ser\'ice Ci.cuifs (Sections 2351, 2354, 2356,

step carries current greater thaix 80" percent of iis in
terrupting rating.
' . "

2357, 1953 Code)

2. The circuit breaker or breakers in the second

step shall be selected so that the calculated short-

circuited iurre.nt through the first step", plus motor con

The NEC Rules require that "each set of serviceentrance conductors shall be provided with a readily
accessible means of disconnecting all conductors from
the source of supply." Air circuit breakers approved
for this application are specified-as "manually opeiS
able, .... equipped with a handle or lever for me
chanical operation by the hand." A push-button type
of electrical remote control ihay be used in addition

tribution in the-second step, wUl not exceed 200vpercent of their interrupting ratitig.
For the second step of a 2-step cascade, the circuit
breakers shall have an instantaneous trip set above the
starting inrush- current of the load. For the second
step of a 3-step cascade, the circuit breakers shall be
equipped with instantaneous trips set to' trip at a
value of current .that will give back-up protection
whenever the circiiit .breaker in the next lower step
carries current greater thait SO percent of its interrupt
ing rating. •
,
. • .
3. The circuit breaker or breakers in the feird step

electrically operated breakers is permitted if the
breaker can be operated manually, in case of an emer
gency, by means of an. operating lever. Such a lever
is available with Federal Pacific electrically operated
breakers. An enclosed breaker must be "externally
operable," or capable of being operated without ex

shall be selected so that the. calculated short-circuit

posing the operator to contact wltii live pafis. The

current through the.first'Step,.plUs ntotor contribution

ofthe second and third step/"will not exceed 300 per
cent of their-interrupting rating. They shall have in-.,
stantaneous trips set above the starting inrush current
of the circuit.
- ,• » oi,.'
(b) All circuit breakers.subjected to fault currents •

in excess of their interrupting rating shall be electri
cally operated from a remote position only, to provide"
protection for the operator when closing against fault
current.

*♦

insure proper coordination be^een circuit breakers.
Molded case circuit breakers

not recommended

for use in cascade.

(d) The operation of circuil^breakers in excess of

their interrupting rating is liniited; to one interruption,

after which inspection or f^iacemeni may be re•'quired.'.,'
' ; . "
'
• •
Examples of application of Federal Pacific air cir
cuit breakers in typical 2-stcp cascade systems are
given in Table No. 4, page 18.
(i:

MATSOIvJAL EISCTRSCAL CODE 1953
The iT'er of the National Electrical Code cited

here are those which apply specincidly to air circuit'
breakers and air circuit breaker application. These

rules refer to the number of pOics per breaker, the

to the manual handle. This means that,the use of

Code recommends that a service circuit breaker shall

have a rating xiot less than 50 airiperes. ;.
The requirement that ,each conductor be discon

nected means that the breaker should lie supplied
with as many poles as there are conductors-;- Jt further
specifies that "each ungrounded service-entrance con
ductor shall have overcurrent protection." This means
that for a three-phase, three-wire entnmce circuit, a
three-pole breaker—each pole having an overcurrent
trip device—^will be required.
The code also requires that "not mprc than six cir
cuit breakers may serve" for the service-entrance pro
tection, when these breakers are "in a common en- closure, or in a group of separate enclosures, located
at a readily accessible point nearest to the entrance.
of the conductors, either inside or;outride••the btiild-

ing Wall." This means that if there kre notimorc thah,;
••'x feeder circultf the fceder-cir^rit bjeaker in babh'
circuit will also serve as the service brcake^i'.: Ifi iMcTt
case, each breaker must be considered as an incom
ing-line breaker, and must be provided with an over-;
current device in each ungrounded conductor". If there
are more than six feeder circuits, there must be a

separate or main seivit . >r.-.aVe<'.
. .
The object of the limitation is to provide, under the
condition of a common "available space,";not more

calibrnliuii of overciirrciU devices and the location of

than .six circuit breakers, which Would have .to be

breakers, etc. Ucfcrcntcs to the Natiohal Electrical

operated to cut oil the entire system served fespecially
a residence or oilier building).
, ,

Code arc not a modification of the rules, with regard

• 'I '.V

•
"T*.

r». ^ '/T'^» ip^
L-V'-!

np
-! *'; •••> /t-r :?r.
fftfh .r»n \\ ->,
% 'iiO /^i.'.'-

r'a
/^.rr>

"that where the overcun-ent protection' specified in
the table isnot sufficient for the starting current of the .

Feeder Circuits (Sections 2403 and 2405,
1953 Code)

motor, it may be increased, but shall in no case ex-

The general requirements' for circuit breakers and
feeder circuits are that each ungrounded conductor be
disconnected when the breaker opens, and that therating of the overciirrent trip device be as follows:
Adjustable-trip circuit breakers of the time-delay,
magnetic-trip tj'pe, or of the instantaneous-lrip type,
shall have a setting of not more than 150 per cent of
the allowable carrying capacity of the conductors.
Motor circuits are exceptions to these requirements.

For motor-feeders, (Section 4362, 1953 Code) the

circuit breaker setting "shall not be greater than the ; ^
largest rating or setting of the branch-circuit protcc- ! v !
live device, for any motor of the group (based on ;
Tables 26 &27, Chapter 10), plus the sum of the
full-load currents of the other motors of the group.
'^i;
"If two or more motors of equal horsepower rating
are the largest in the group, one of the motors should
be considered as the largest for the above calculations. .
"If two or more motors of a group must be started

Motor circuits are classified as "motor feeders" and

simultaneously, it may be necessary to install larger '
feeder conductors and correspondingly larger ratings
or settings of feeder overcurrent protectibh."
Power and light loads. If a feeder supplies a motor i

"motor-branch circuits." A motor-branch circuit may
serve only one motor or it may serve two or more
motors.

For an individual motor, "the motorrbranch-circuit
overcurrent device" (that is, circuit breaker) (Section

load, and, in addition, a lifting or a lighting and
appliance load, the feeder circuit breaker should have ;

4342, 1953 Code) "shall be capable of carrying the

a rating or a setting sufficient to meet therequirements; f

starting current of the.motor. Overcurrent protection
shall be considered as being obtained when this over-.

of. the motors [a sin^ motor (Section 4342) br: ai
group of motors (Section. 4362)], plus the normal
load current of the lighting and other loads. (Section
4363, 1953 Code)

current device has a rating or setting not exceeding
the values" given below:
Single-phase "Code Letter A" (where the.

Motor controllers. From the Code "the term 'con

locked rotor current is not in excess of

troller'-includes any switch or device normally used to
start or stop the motor." (This.refers to devices con

3.14 times the normal current)...
150%
Single-phase "Code Letters B to E" (where
the locked rotor current exceeds 3.14, but

nected in the main circuit.)

is not more than 4.99 times normal cur

•

"A branch^;ircuit type circuit breaker may be used
200%

as a controller. When this circuit breaker is also used

Single-phase—all other
;
; 250%
Polyphase squirrel-cage and synchronous
motors wito full-volmge, resistor or re

for overcurrent protection, it shall conform to the

appropriate provisions ... governing overcurrent pro
tection." (Section 4383d, 1953 Code)

actor starting:

Section 4331 (1953)—^ RATING OF PROTEO^

"Code Letter A" (locked rotor current
not exceeding 3,14 times normal cur
rent)

TIVE DEVICE. Motor-running ovefcuhrent de- •'
150%

vices other'toan fuses shall have a rating of at Vleast 115 per cent.of toe full-load cuncni rating

200%
250%

Section 4347 '1953) —RATING OF CDUiJCJrr- ^

"Code Letters B to E" (ioclm(l rotor

of the motor.

current exceeds 3.14, but not more,

than 4.99 times normd current)
All others

cccd 400 percent of the motor full load current."

Motor Circuits (Section 430, 1953 Code)

rent)

•>.

BREAKER. Circuit-breakers for motor-branch-

Polyphase squirrel-cage and synchronousmotors with auto-tiansformeis starting '

circuit protection shall have a continouous cur-} ^
rent rating of not less than, 115 per cent; of the:

"Code I.etter A" (locked rotor current
not more than 3.14 times normal)
....150%
All/others
j 200%
Wound-rotor motors
;
150%

ifuil-load current ratings of. the motors.

Section 4403 (1953)—CARRYING CAPACITY ' ;

AND INTE^-PTTNG

f. •

a. The disconnecting means shall have" a carry
ingcapacity of at lca:>t 115 per dcrlt ol the namc-

Direct-current motors
150%
An exception to the settings specified above is

plate current rating of the motoi*;: •.
14

The following tables show standard and Optional

A large number of accessories arc available for use
with both manually and. electrically operated Federal Pacific DMB breakers.-^These-accesories are factoryinstalled in the'breaker; aid .wired and tested to per
form correctly their function within their rated ciperating.range. Rated control voltages and ranges are
tabulated on page 4.

accessories available with the various sizes of DMB
^

breakers. These accc.ssories are available-with draw-

out type or fixed mounted (stationary-type); breakers
used in metal enclosed switchgear and also witli indi-'
vidual, wall mounted DMB circuit breakers.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
1.

FEDERAL PACIFIC CIRCUIT BREAKEKS

Duol-mognetic time over>currenl

.;v"

Irlp dcvicoi—one per polo
Manual Trip

Poiition lndi(alor

.....i.....,...™.,

Tsrminol Conneclori

motntalned contact control
Padlocking ProvUlon

' .y . Shunt trip device 4 circuit :

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

. Attached Monvol Cloiing Hoiidle
Electricat Clodng' Mochaniict
Qoiing relay willi cut ott, teol-ln
and anii.pump (eoluret for

)<^9>ptional accessories
—-y

Auxiliary Switch 4 or 8 Circuit! ......
Undervollage device—Initantoneoui

• X

or time deloy
OvorcurrepI bell alarm—band reset

Key Inlerlocfc

X
X
X
X
X
X

Shunt Trip Device—4 circuit
ouxil.iory switch

OvercurrenI lockout device—lio.nd reset ™.....

—

Eleclricoi lockout device

Key lock ....

•"

Closing Swi^h (mounted or unmounted) ......
•

•

Field discharge contact
Copacilor trip

SERIES OVERCURRENI TRIP DEViCES
• b-

•

long lime deloy ond
in'slantcineous (standard)
long lime deloy. only toptionol)
long time delay and

X
X

X .

* •

Any combination of long time delay, -

X
f

short lime delay, ond inslan- loneovs tripping or ony one

short time deloy (opt'onol)

pt these alone (optional)-

NUMBER OF CONTROL CIRCUIT COMTACts AVA«."i3LE
Vi..
r.--J

Qrvokort

OMB

^i^wijiory Swilch ....

:p. r. .INTcJJSUPTiMG RATUMGS OV
• ;.V •. ;-ACi?iC AIR CISCUIY ni;jsAKe2is
These Currents Calculated in Accordance witli AIHE and NEMA Standards.
INTERRUPTING RAVINGS OF FEDERAL PACSrlC D.V.3 AlR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

250
300
350
400
300
400
800

.i;V4 yyy
2,000
2,500 .
a.coa ,

4.000

tiliilii
TV-,'";

Tho values undorltned ore continuous ratings of
circuit breokore oxciutive of serins trie coils.
.: •

:•

•Id

4-r

4'7 4'-4''i'7^4V7;5;7'.-.

i, •^V>'i''Vi;

i» }*V.. ',»a

SHOi^T TIME AND SclKCriVE TRiP RATi:-viGS O? ?-:DlRAL ?ACmc

CiuCUlT B^lEAKI^;;.:

These Currents Calculated in Accordance with AIEE and NEMA Standards.
Froquency—60 cytlat
Maxiffluffl Design Vai'n£|n~~^26 Volts
Dlotoctric Wilhiland Tost Voltage—2200 Volts
Conlinuous Current Ratings, Amperes
Fodoral
FaelUc

Coil Ratings Applied if V-^pping is

Delayed to Provido Soloelivo Tripping®

. 250 to 600
500 to 1600

.'•••

2000.1ft 2000' •
4000 ..

1. If ttripping instantaneous above 1500% coilrating for DMB 15, DMB 25-1 and DMB 50; 1200% for DMB 75 and DMB 100.
2. On currents above 1500% of coD rating for DMB 15, DMB25-1 and DMB 50; 1200% for DMB75 and DMB 100. •,

^CUIT CUSSi2!NST AP?LICA.TJOM[

SHORl

BrsSAKES TABLE
nVV:-''
•
Tiemfftint)

,'• .. •.

'
tfliifiBS-pfe KVi^ciuf

f*rt$nl

Shert^ircult C'J<'6r.l

MoK-Stmrt. 1N«'me
CrcvliKVA

l»ed

Tdia) PlMS A/v^e'et
{Averaj^a 9*^hD» Acnp.

DMB » (690.1600)
DMB 50 1693.1600)

DMB 35-1 (150-6W)
DMB :S-1 (1W.6C0)

DMB 25*1 050.600)
DMB 25.1 0M.6C0)
DM6 25') (IX'600)

OmB

DMB

(690.1690)

0M3 ?S 1 OX.dX)
Ma MoU

DMB 35.1
DMB 25.1
OMR 25-)
OMi 2M

DMA 75 170X 3003) ArnUelile

PrAiible !>«•
No Mr«iA

Avietebie

DMB 73 (2030.3000)
DMB 199 (4990)

DMB 75 (2W0.10CD)
DMB lOO (40C9)

DMB 100
No B* r.
Av.-iSr

DMB 25.1 050.6^9)
DMB 50 (6O9.16D0)

0MB 25.1 (150 600)
DM9 25.1 (160.6001
DMB 25-1 (150.600}

DM3 2M
DMB 2S.) OSO./rOO)

Om8 75 UvrOsiiyrfJ:
.

nCOMMEKDED ffoe?!.'! ?AC[f|( A!S CircUiT EimKtil —feeder Trip KongoU Mtown wilMn

iq:co
I06C0
10700
10300

fully-rated system
rr-^rr •.»_

DM3 15
DMB 14
0M6 14
PMt 14
DMB 14

{20-225)
{73 2231
CO 225)
(20224)
C9 723)

0^3 25-) nOO 600)
0M3
73

DM8 59 <400.1600}
DM8 50 (400.1600)
DMB 50 (400.1600/
DM? 50 (400.1600)

DMB
73

0M8 73 tCCiM^SOOO)
DM? 73 (»yi.30»1

DMB 14 129-324)
DMB 23.1 (lOO-fiCOj
DMB 25-1 (1CO-630)
DMB 25-1 (100-6001
DMB 35-1 ,'100-6{>0|
DM8 75-1 (100 403;

DMB

DMB 50 (400-1600)
DMB 50 (400.l6Ou)
DMB 39 (400.1600)

DMB50 (400-1609)'
DMB 73 (2000.3000)
DMB 73 (330O.50CO';

100000
ISOOOO
2SOCOO
5GOCOO

331C0
35100
36900
38400
40100

DM& 23.1 (40-60v)
DMd2S.1 {49.6C9)
DMB 23*1 (40-6001
0M6 50 (200-1603)
DMB 50 (200.1600;
OMO 50 (200*1600)

DM6 40 (200.1600)
DMB 50 (200.1600)
OMO 50COC UOC)
OMS 50 (200-16005
DMB 74 t20CC :-3Cr0'
DM& 73 (25CC jOCO)

165C0
taioo
10700
19200

DM8 15
DMB 35.1
DM8 34-1
DMB 24-1
DM8 38-1
DMB 75-1

(14-323)

OMB 24-1
DMA 24-1
Da;&?4.1
OMB 25-1

|43 630)
(43.600)
(40-600)
(49 6O0)

(40-600)
(43.600}
(40 600}
(40.6001
(40 600/

DM& !0 COO.I&CO)
DM3 40 {200-16091

DMB
30 .

OMS 25.1 (40.600: . DMB 75-1
DMB 25-1 (40.693) ; DI.^9 34-1 '
DMB 25-1
DMP
0-600;
DMB srOMb 50 (7tfr-l600l
DMB SO
DMB 50 (200-1600)
DM3 50
DMB 40 (300-1600)
OMB
30

DMB

40.

(300.)6W).

OMB 50 (200-1660)
D'AO

0M& 50
DMB 4C
DMB 50
DMO 74
OMB 75

(W0.1690i
(209-1600)
(20O.)6OC«
(200O-)0CO)
(2000.2X0}

DMB so •'
DMB 50
DMA 50 •
DMB 50

LOW VOLTAGE POWER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (DRAWOQT TYPE)

Drawout air circuit breakers shall be tripped open and withdrawn from cell,
Fixed mounted circuit breakers shall be inspected in place, completely
de-energized, unless repairs warrant removal.

Arc chutes and interphase barriers are removed and inspected for burning,

cracking, chipping and misalignment. Adetailed listing will be '
compiled of any interrupting components which have sustained damage

or wear i.e. accumulation of scale on ceramic plates sufficient to
render their respective efficiency questionable.

All contacts (Main, Arcing, Auxiliary, etc.) are inspected for burning
and pitting and will be cleaned, dressed, adjusted for wipe, travel,
pressure as required.

Operating mechanism and linkages are cleaned, lubricated and adjusted
for proper operation, clearance, pressiires and tensions. All retaining
rings, pins, springs, screws and bolts-are checked to be certain thev

are in place and tight.

Control coils, closing coils, shunt trip coils, charging motors, integral

control relays and auxiliary switches and relays are cleaned, lubri
cated, adjusted and inspected to be in proper working order. Contacts

are burnished or replaced as requij?ed.

The primary disconnect stabs on drawout circuit breakers are inspected
for wear, pitting or burning and cleaned and adjusted.

The circuit breaker frame, insulators, and main copper details are
cleaned of all extraneous foreign material (dust, dirt, carbon,
moisture, etc.).

Insulating material is tested for adequate dielectric strength from

phase to phase and phase to ground with a megger type insulation tester.

When a recalibration of the circuit breaker is also specified, in
ad^tion to cleaning, inspecting, adjusting and minor repairing, the
pole is tested by applying necessary current to cause

the ciMuit breaker to trip open. The time to trip is compared to the

characteristic curves and, if required, adjustments are made to insure
operation within specified limits.

This quotation includes current vs. time calibration on all low voltage
drawout air circuit breakers.

SPECIFIC PROCEEDURES:

LOW VOLTAGE POWER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (PRftWOUT TIPE)
In general, the list of major points that are Included in a calibration
test are as follows:

Long Time Delay Pick-up.

Long Time Delay Resetable Point.

Instantaneous Pick-up.

Long Time Delay Time to Trip Check.

Short Time Delay Pick-up.

Short Time Delay Time to Trip Check.

INSTRUCTIOIJ LEAFLET 12-957

' •V.:A""-r.'-•? • "•

''i'"r
,.••••.•)'--v,

SELENIUM RECTIFIER'S FOR

CIRCUIT EHEAKER OPERATION,

wMm"-

INTERtJiTTSJT DUTY

A-C IKTEHRUPTED TIPE
<(A ''K*.' .

. •" • w"
.-v.-,-'.'I

• '•C':S.-i't'-R : ,•
-a: "
' .'•

FEDERAL PACIFIC ELECTRIC Ca-lPAi'a'
SCR/C!TCN, FiaaiSXLVANIA ' R

•

•-•

fV---

;c.Li,riiUM R^:.c?iri .U3 ?c::i circuit BRriARiR r

"iRvTRa^IITJsT GU'IX
'U,'
I,

•g-RV^vG^ncral

This rectifier is designed to deliver direct-current at

• "•' • •' '• .fipi^rciadjBat©iy 120 volts at- any commercial -frequency^ The D-C voltage
:- • \ will depend on the A-C voltage which can be anyid'ore from 20S to 2A0j
•- ' -and also on the D-C load of the circuit; breaker solenoid, •;•,

;

The compl ete unit consists of a full-v.--av'-: rect5 iVir.g element

• ' i n ' t h e A-C line,
.

RIvO is positive-,

BLACK, is negativ-r.j and YCii.C is a-^1.

The rectiiier units should not be immersed in oil.

; AyR •U-U ; Disassembly

•

Selenium rectifier st'a.cks cannot be considered a simple

components. Disassembly or reassembly of
R;V : f v.'selenium rectifier s-oacks will almost certainly result in permanent

: •.damage: or-'total failua?e.' The assembly-huj^S .should'not;,
" • or loosened under any; circumstances.

. :' • •

- ' y
I

• Expbsvtrfe to r-iercury Vapors

: Selenium rectifiers should hot .be Used or stored 'where mercury ,

If: A , j j c e s e h t i Deterioration of rectifying properties and •ultimate burnva.ll hesultv. Special protective msasiires can 'be talcen where Hg vapors
®

occur, ' Our engineering staff should-ybe consulted'inv such cases.

Soldering

:•

Cairo is,necessary iia solderingyfleads to rectifier terminals,

•'The rectifier should be shielded from hot drops of solderwhich may,

• fall between the cells.

Hot s'olde-ring irons should be handled carefully

to avoid touching the selenium cells.

. ,

Refinishing

. No finish-shovfLd be applied over the factory .finishes already
i-.fe'-ri.ift'

present' on the selenium r.ectifier^ because such c.Ocd..'n^gs can per-.'-auently
• damage the. rectifier. Paints,/iaco.uersydnd varnishes'' may have solvent ,
or chemical effects on the finish'or may damage the rectifier directly>
and the additional coatings may decrease •tho ability of the cells to

•".I-'tBHU.-i HEC?iFIEi^ FO;^ GI:^CUi?- ^j-ica
^
. lUTEKi^mXT^TY

•• Hanaiinp;

,!:

Selenium rectifiers should be handled and transported vath careo

Dropping the rectifier or scratching ius protective coating is^""^c be

avoided" •

cells are bent, damage may be done to the rectif*Ang

^face, 'icroasing the forward current capacity or even shoi^iiing the cell,
Dxist .Reaov?-l

•

• .

,
•

Compressrd air can be used to clean rectifiers vihich have accurulated oust betv;t?n the cells. Dust interferes v.iih the circulation of

cooling air, iixperience shcv;s that, other than checking for dust at fairiy
long intervals, once a selenium, rectifier is installed, i^ requires no

further care or attention.
'. .•

•'I.','

•

,Da-forming , , ,
i<-:i •!

_, ;

• i : ' ' ^ t'i'V. -li "

•

Upon storage or disuse for a long period of time, selenium
rectifiers may de-forni' to a cert^h extent. The effect is-opposite to'
that of the forming' process during fabrication, and is manifested by a _

larger than normal momentarj'" reverse current when AC is. initially app^.edt.

:.
... •

V/itiiin seconds, the rectifier re-forms and permanently reestablishes its
normal rectif'/ing characteristics. This phenoraenon rarely has any.sign
ificance in practical applications. For applications v^ere de-forming
•would be objectionablo, special nranufacturi.rig techniques can be used to
. greatly reduce the de-formirig effect,
:Operation

The rectifier is desired for intermit'tent operation only, and
must not be used to su 'ply loads other thari the breaker solenoid.

The A-C voltage must not bo applied to the rectifier fon ••longer
than 1 second nor for more than 10 operations within a 5 minute period.

•

The rectifier rating must not be exceeded, as for instance by
the operation of 2 solenoids at once.
Overloads

•;• •- /•

•

The criterion for overloads is that overheating of the cells

•must bve prevented. The id'S voltage rating of the rectifier should-not

normalls" be exceeded. ' Reverse losses increase very iMpidly as voltage
is increased aViove the normal rating due te ^ne' non-linear reverse re-

siti'.v-ce characteristic, • Ovexn'oltage must be lirriit.. i to -•'•er^vr short
durations and sm-all excesses, cthc;-vdse ovei-heauing and Xjossibie iall
ure will result,

'r:- ,

, " i-:

SELSJIUH Ri;CTvpi:.:nS ?.:?i ClKCUI? BKiiy-m UPHtaTIOK
INTii;F^!XTTS5T VJTl

, Overloads

(Cdhu'd.)

••:

Current overloads can be borne much bsttere

seleniujn

rectifiers than voltage overloads, since the forward resistance de-r
creases as the curi'ent increases.

Current overloads *of several.- tbr.cs

the normal rating can be handled by selenium rectifiers for short
;durations without causing overheating of the cells»

;

Maintenance .and Adjustment

. a«.

•I

Fuses

• : Use current limitins fuses having rating of approximately
1/^ :dZ the inaxium d-c load current dram by the breaker
solenoid.

!
•I'.V-

'iii*

Fuses, of this rating aro used in order •to

protect the rectifying unit in case load should retrain
:

: i; connected, to the.; outfit for longer th^ the permissible

;•

/bime,,;;.
bo. • Sectifier

.0: >

" ' , /X

X- '

vihen the rectifier is shipped from;.the-'^fict^

it is set i •

. . to give proper breaker operating speed at r
a~c. line
-Voltage. Upon'installation, the bteaker clpsi'ng-time

• \

• should be ohecked to see that coirect operation .is .obtainedj
isincerline voltage conditions:, may .be f^fferent from tbpee
•,.\-

at tHe factory. .This should be.done by-means of.a cycle • '
counter after all mechanical and dashpot adjustments have .
been checked.

t'lf closing time is incorrect, the A-C ypltage must be changed,
• To obtain quicker breaker operation, raise the A-C .voltage,.

To obtain slower.brealcer. bperation, .iower the A-C voltage.
t;

Note •.

•Approximately 30 day.s i. '^ter the unit has been installedj.'
the breaker closing .time should be again chocked under
the same conditions of supply volta.ge as existed during
installation. Ad justmant to take care of tuiy change dviring
the first 30 days ia made by adjusting the, A-C vb3.tage-.
FoUovang this: adjustment no flirther .attention should-b»s
necessciry except at. normal, .periods of brc-lcrr r.air.tenAr":e,
say e;y«ery 6 months.

3-'

SoiiiKIU}'! •R;:CTj:FIiaS FCR CIRCUIT BRI U. vR OPiCH^VTIO;

»•* !

»';'r ., '

Maintenance -sj^d Ad.iustoenfc - Cont'-d.
•

''• .

Curr.ent and Voltage Measurdnients

' i"
' 'r;

Considerable care is necessary in mal; proceed'ds 'follows

••k.

,;ijai :iCheck the a-c supply sobrcb'to^ see that ade^udte voltage
lislavraiiablQ when the I^ilrlo^ ds. being drawas k^

k k

Check the rectiiier-fuses to see that they are ;not blown-.
c.

d'.

Inspect all ocnnectlons to see'.that none are open. •
'If .all of the above appear to be satisfactory then probably

.a rectifier, unit .has failed k^less. the breaker -mechani'sm
is.,.out of adjustmenlfi,.

• ' • S.:'

v ..-

A. The failed vinit ma.y be detected as foHows;

•' a. Disconnect the rectifier from ths a—c and d~c. circuits.

bo Appier 110. volts a~c if/ith, a 3.00 v;att lamp in seri.es to the a-"
temiinals of the rectifier for not .'more than one second^

•C» If ;the -lamp lights, one or more of .the individu^ stacks .have
failed. ' _

'-i

.
.

atteript to disassemble the,.'stack, aiad install new cel3.s,
' Supply a complete nevr stack,
• k ."

- 4

??SW|S5j<5?
•••'•"

•SEISKIUM RFCTXFiiSn;:

CIRCUIT DRE;U(ZR OBIIiATlGU

••- ."'iv.lL'iv,'.
'/if

If the insi^l^liion consists .of severail stacks connected .by vdres;.
i

• as ih; a.: bridge circuit;

'el» .Disconnect all-the stacks from, each other,

; • •

' ' 'bo Apply to"the a~c, teminals oif sich stack in turn the iiO;voit
a-c, mth the 100 vfatt lanp in . series as before;,

•• • ';.V. .* ' -vv:.

AI3. iinits v;hich light up the lainp..should be rem~/oa.

..-.Av'-TT':
•SI "• :.. ;•••

'r'TA..''
>'•: ;• -."v
.•;. .•.=•

' -g'-'
.: Jj., . . ; , .

a: AyT'" ::,.'';,Ta..T:;A .
.
. .! •
. .'..A. •-'
•'•, "A, •• .>.,..>A"i.ATTT; .

y-yytmyy
. • ..'aTT:
..A'-':'.-j, ..^T

-•

••-•- VX' ;.: ;K;.,
vA..
. ...-; ...

-•.Av' /G. •
• '.A.
..• 'tV'.

•INST.^ATION, SHEET ^

••ci n«IB-15 and DI-S-25-1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKEaS ,

r - ' •,

Before inserting breaker in cubicle or cabinet;
^

f
^L

Inspect- contact

' • ' io Rcaaove screws'in arc chuteSo
2, Pull arc-chute fon'^ard and oxit of'breaker, thus: exposing

f•

contacts for inspection.

Check op-eraticn of breaker, slovdy rotating the rcanual operating handle,,

and observing the operation, of all' parts'. If electrically operated,
• :W'ork the closing relay, the solenoid,'shunt trip, '^.dervoltage device>
. bell-alar^ switch. Kirk interlock,'.etc. by haiid .to laak© siu-.e .that; the
.•
" >.V

^lit."
!•'
V I «I -I

- %7'V i#r.'

;. Replace s^Crchute and breaker is ready for'ihstallation.
.

,• ' Make sure that all connection-copper, cables and controL wiidng

do-

• '.energised xmldil breaker installation" is;-coiKpleted;V' :'f ^
, ..Installe.tioh - Fixed ,.

- M

v.:

bolted into position it iray be .Necessary

center the face plate in the cutout in the door^

;•
;;

; 1« Loosen screvjs at top and bottom of face plateV.' 2» Close door and line-up face plate "with cutoutt-in door,

5o'•-iTighteh -tbp^'and' bottbm screvbH&-fbce'platei.)^^

.^,f • v" . Installation - Drav/oirt
\

3, .V/hen faceplate is lined-up, move breaker hah(ii.e ..to the ri^t, . . ; . • ^
exposing,^small .Allen-Head setrscrevj,
.•
.
i v.'
'':Tighten --sbfc-screw,^''raiease bailee .rsnd open booro
•

:,••,• . ; • •

, . Insert breaker jrn. cubicle or cabinet,-.first "'test'position then
• I'bpsrating" position-as-fdllov/sr
/
'v

. ..V Push breaker iritp cubicle, until it'sxops and rabi'buttpn on, lower , .
ielt-hand side of breaker pops up.'f Breaker id
"test" position'.
PraJnary discorniecting contacts are not engagedy but secondary dis-•
.:

connecting contacts are in contact with similar .contacts in cubicle <,

Press dovsi on read ^ut+on end punh breaker in t5.ii .•' !••
Release red button the moment breaker, starts to move in,

resistance.
.Insert 5/6"

i'ack3..ng-in handle-bar in right-hand side of levering-ix*. '''.urretat
bottom of carrj.age voider the breaker face pj-atei .. P\ish handle-bar to

V:.ori will i;. w^nCvS

':..o'..' '^n^/S'^ec

liocked end o:? handle-bar into turrebo

Remove breaker from cubicle or cabinet:

To move breaker from "operating" position, inserf; handle-bar in

turret^ press do^vn momentarily on red button, and push handle

bar to the right as far &S .u Vvdll go," Remove handle-bar and pull
brealcer forward gently until red button pops upo .-Breaker is no\';
in "test" positiono

To remove breaker from cubicle, press red buttpii down, ,and pull
breaker forward and out 'of the cubicle..
^ ^

Wbte that pressing down on the red button always: trips the bres.!-ev';
It is impossible to move from ."test" to "operating", or from "op-nrating" to "test" vjithout first tripping the breaker.
After the above test operations, the face plate should be: adjusted
in the same manner as described under installation Fixed.

The breaker should nov7 be pushed into "test" position, and secondary
circuits checked.

If it is a manual breaker vJith:,shunt-trip, or under-

voltage, or bell-alarm, the'control circuits can:~be energized and the,'
above accessories checked: If it is an electricallyvoperated breaker^"
the Control circuits can be energized, and the breaker operated several,

time-s to make sure that it functions correctly-.t .fc
•series

:
"
V-: '

can be checked at the same time.,',

; Rack the ;break'w^
complete. '

acces--

"operating" position, and installation. is
'' •
IX'lB-15 and lIiB-25-1 Instruction Book

For description and maintenance see:

For details and characteristic curves of Manual 3-266 (.Selection and Application:.'

overcurrent devices refer to;
v:>»
^11

•

'of Federal Pacific Air Circuit Breal<:ers) .y, l

.•
i.iiii)Miu..iiiwii

-'i;, V : :
<

•

teEAL PACIFIC ^CTRlC COM?^ -f •
f- Eastern Switcbgear: hivisioh

' vr. • • •

•Meith Keyser Ayenua) P.; 0. Box 1510 •
. Scranton, Permsylvatiia

•.'i':."-••V-..

•;

rfido.'cii IiiociT'i.

VN'V

Compcny.

i'fj;.J.':

'' ' •••'•{ y-. h- :'
'.T

INSTAltAtiON, OPiEitAIEidNI, AMM MA!NViiMAHCt
: Vj; '•

Fi0oa«-PAS6FIC ASa CiSCUIT BtSSAKSaf

TYPSS BMB-25 ' anA ' 0^3-^'

Interrupting Roting;
.-' r

•'SffitM
. ; '•."•N r-.-"

FEDERAi ElgS;Tft1C' PAGDUCTS
exDcupyE crffcEi: so >AHfs it. ntA-Asx s. h. j

Fociera! Electric Prcni.'c''

Aar;:;i9F4

CONTENTS

Certain general instructions given herein contain extrocjs from
Petit 7 of Standards for Lorge Ciicuit Oreekers, Pub. No.SG3~
1951

of National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

•

Page.

General Description
Standard Equipment

5 ^
5

Optional Accessory Equipment

..y...

Shipment, Receiving, and Storing

Installation and Operating inspection

Inspection of Manual Operation

Connections

Drawout Mounting
Phase-isolating Batriers
Electrical-Operation Inspection

9
10
10
* N'

Method of Operation
IOSIng .. *«

^...........

12
12

Opening by Release of Trip Larch
. Manual Opening, Handle-Shaft Assembly, Locking

13
13

Dual Overcunent Trip Device
Closing Control Relay
Auxiliary Switch, Shunr Trip
Bell Alarm, Undervoltage Trip
Key Lock and Other A.ccessorlei

15
15
16
17
18

Maintenance and Adjustmeiit

'-I \ vU -i -.V, .
' J

Contact Mechanism

Handle-Shaft Assembly

Closing Solenoid

Overcurrent Trip Device
Control Re lay

^.
...v......

Auxi Ilory Svritch

Shunt Trip Accessory .....'...............a*.....,......'........
Bell Alarm, Undervoltage Device, Key Interlock/
and C^i her Accessorloc

20
,20,

21
21
'

.....................................

f '»•, j

,*a:

INSTRUCTION SKETCHES

A-9031,
A-9032,
,a-9033.
A-9034,
A-9035,

Rev.
Rev.
Rev.
Rev.
Rev.

0 — Figs. 3, 4, and 5
0 — Figs. 6, 7, and 8
0 — Figs. 9 to 13, incl.
0--Figs. 14 to 21, incl.
0 — Figs. 22 to 25, incl.
and Diagrams of Connections

Federal-Pacific Type DMB-25 Air Circuit
Breaker with drowout mounting, ds viewed

when ready for contact inspection.

Two arc chutes have been removed, and
the •^hiici is in its "up" position.

Fode.-al Electric P.-oc'ecls Compony

' 1 •':'7 "": '."•*.i'.'>

/T '?• •I •V" .'.• '. •= y
fil

•

•-'

,. jkS '• j
'if "•"'I

Fig. 1 (at left)
•;:
Federal-Pacific Aype PMB-5Q.

Circuit Breaker, with 8-stage ;:-vf
auxiIiary switcK -f- Xmmouhted.' 7'

r.v, ;-:ii v';-" •:.'.;;i«^-v

- \<' '•

{i«»•.;:!»«, )l'} ]t • .

.. I- J-iiiv

7:"
\r. 7?- S.f !•M
=i-v A
f
^ . I -J li

i i;, .•••' 7' .7 ^ ,,

"*/•' "

i"'

.as
A

Federal-Pacific Metni-Fhclosed :v7."'>

Switchgeor Uniii One Type
DMB-25 and two Type DMBr^ ;;
50's are shown with phoseisolating barriers in place..

.'•'iiifV;.'
.'.*• ''•'.•"^f^'•^.*.

Apr!;, l'vA.4

' '^s

' '

Po'defQl Electric Products Cofi-.pony

TYPES DMB-25 AND DMB-50 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

These circuit breakers are of exceptionally sturdy design, built for long service of
frequent load switching and automatic interruption of overcurrents within rating. They
embody features thathave been field tested formany years In thousands of circuit breakers of this design. The circuit breakers ore electrically and mechanically trip free in

any position of the closing stroke, end they will olso latch closed in the case of either
electrical or manual operation when they are closed against a sustained fault the current
of which does not exceed interrupting rating one-half cycle after contacts moke, Tho.

. '

interrupting rating of the breaker is not affected by the selected standard.continuous
rating; that is,'the interrupting rating of rhe Type DMB-50, for example, is..50,000 amp

even though the overcurrent coils hove any of the standard continuous ratings from 100
to 1600 amp.

^
: , A:

STANDARD EQUIPMENT"

The following operating features are regularly supplied with all circuit breakers
orranged for electrical control:

^
^^^

1. Dual-magnetic time overcurrent tripping — one device per pole—provides
inverse time-delay tripping throughout the lower range of overcurrents and instantaneous ''
tripping at the larger overcurrents. The percent of continuous current rating at which : .
the device changes from time-delay to instantaneous tripping is qdjustoble. The usuar-^j
pickup and timirig ad|ustments are also included.
'^

2. Manual tripping and closing from the operating handle, with provisioh for padlocking in open position. This padlocking prevents manual closing and it also maintoins
the breaker in trip-free condition so electrical closing cannot be completed. If the-.

' 'A
,- .

breaker is mounted in a cell, the door cannot be opened when handle is padlocked.
3. Flec''r'''.al closing from solenoid. The control circuit energizes the operating
coil of a relay, the main contacts of which estoblish the circuit through tlit olenoid.
Seal-in and anti-pump features are provided for maintained contact control.
4. Shunt trip device for remote electrical tripping.

A;
^
^

5, Fo'.'r-circuit auxiliary switch of which one ciiccit is required for switch oper
ation; the balance are available purchaser's use.

Suitable interlocking of operating and control functions ds de^crited herein, ore
provided to protect the breaker from the effects of mlsoperotion.
•; •l&ryV*

Fcderd ElccHc Prodoct; Corr!j;u-.-ry

" • April, l'?5''
, j;/ .

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

Depending on the conditions of application, some or all of the following listed
features are supplied as optional accessories. Most of thera are described in detail else-r".
where in this Instruction.
... , •

1. Eight-circuit auxiliary switch, instead of the four-circuit switch^as reguIurly V .
supplied,

•

. ,

• .

2. Undervoltage device — instantaneous or tlme-qeioy type — mechanical reset. •
3. Overcurrent bell alarm device—electrical and hand reset. Operates only when.
tripping is the result of overcurrent. If required, provision is also made so thatelectrical •
or manual closing is prevented until the bell alarm device has been reset.

?•
.

4. Key interlock
locks breakei in operj position and also opens the solenoid
control circuit so electrical closing cannot be initiated. The breaker must be'in open
position before the key can be removed. •

:
„ :" •
.;;

5. Reverse current trip device—direct current.

6. Mounted closing momentary button at the breaker.
7. Mounting Interlocks and drawout platform — for drawout-mounted breakers.
Comprise mechanical interlocks that prevent breaker movement in the cell unless breaker

•

is in open position. An auxiliary interlock also must be released before breaker may be
withdrawn completely. If mounting is within cells provided by Federal-Pacific,a special
levering-in device is included for ease of fixing final position.

" •

8. Drawout terminal sets—comprising high-pressure main terminals and moderatepressure ground and control terminals of number specified. Supplied with the latter are .
the matching stationary terminals that permit withdrawal to test position without disengagement. The stationary main terminals that match the main terminals on the breaker'
and their insulated housings are supplied as a cell accessory; not as a circuit-breaker

.".v

••
. .=*
:
' J-

accessory.

9. Dead front, back box, and other met,!iuriicGl features that have to do with

housing the breaker ore considered a part of the breaker mounting, and are supplied as
specified.

' : ;•
*

10, Special overcurrent tripping devices. See Special Instruction or.referto factory
for description of these devices ^ Iiicii •• wi'ls- .'criety is available.
...
-•
"
.
11.. "
Rectifier
for use
when alternating current
is used
for solenoid supply. Note; if
specified, a-c supply can be used for the shunt trip device without need of a rectifier.

:'
^0^':-

sag

(:»!«. ¥

F&deral Electric Prcducti Compony

•

V-;;

. Pcci-:

SHIPMENT, RECEIVING, AND STORING

Each circuit breaker before leaving the factory i^ carefully inspected, tested, and

packed. • It Is shipped in a wood crate. Hooks should not be used when handling. Ap

proximate net weights are as follows (with regular accessories). Add iO % for breakers
mounted on drawout platforms.
Type DMB-25

Upon receipt examine all equipment carefully for.indication of damage sustained

v-ij. • .
v;. '-

in transit. If damage is found call for inspection by the delivering carrier at once, and
file claim with carrier. For assistance in filing claim it is odvisable that information os
to the extent of the damage be sent immediately to Traffic Manager, Federal Electric

Products Company, 50 Paris St., Newark 5, N. J., giving description of the damage,
identification of the breaker damaged, the delivering carrier's name, and if shipped by

.Vr'^

manufaclurer to be of help in filing the claims

\ ' S;!

rail, the car number, waybill reference, and any other information that will enable the

'..-M-

When unpacking the circuit breakei, the crating or boxing must be removed care-

^ ' '^v

fully. Check all parts with packing list Avoid bending, breaking, or injuring any

parts. Do not leave screws, bolts, nuts, etc., in the packing material, Clean all. parts
befbf^ assembling them; use compressed air, if possible. See that instruction books,
drawings, and tags are kept with the breakers,

When the circuit breaker can be Installed immediatel^y in its permanent location, it

is advisable TO do so even though it will not be placed in service for some time. When
set up in buildings under construction, it should be protected from dust/ dirt, and molsture.

^
-

. •l.'^-v.-

'v'. V'
• .'t '

If the circuit breaker cannot be installed in its permanent location irrimediately and
it IS necessary, to store it, it should be kep'- .r. u ciean, dry place. It must not be exposed
to dirt, to the action of corrosive gases, ur lo ^ussiblc .mechanical injury. Special care

should be taken to prevent injury to the apparatus through shocks or jars due to rough
handling. It is recommended that stored breakers be covered with paper instead of by

materiols-that may absorb or retain moisture. Do not lubricate the breaker. .Sufficient

lubricant was applied at the factory; additional amounts only attract d.irt,
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSPECTION ,

Indoor .circuit, breakers should be placed iri a clean, dry location, which is free from
.thedestructiveaction of acids, alkoiies, or gasesy and v/here good ventilation can;be:

secured. Open-type circuit breake'-s should be rr.eu!-.icd high eribugh tb -prsvent.injury-'

Fedorcl Elecrric Products Corr.p'any

••

•- •-, • '' .•

April, 1934
>

to the operator clue to arcing or parrs movement during cutoniotic opening. Spoce must
be provided for cleaning and inspection and for protection of adjacent apparatus from
flashover. Enclosed breakers should be placed in, cells or housings hoving minimum
clearances as per Figs. 5 and 8,

;

•

V":

inspection OF MANUAL OPEKATION:

;

The breaker should be inspected for manual operation before it is connected to the
main and control circuits.

/•

- V'

1. Check for removal of oil tie v/ires^ blocking, etcl See that breaker is in open
position. Mechanism should be as in View A, Fig. 9; not as in View D»

2. Raise and lower the overcurrent trip shoft 52 (Figs. 12 and 13) to be sure it moves
freely.

3. Turn handle slowly in a clockwise direciloii to move the contacts tov/ord closed
position. Note that all ports move freely except for spring resistance. Note that con

tacts touch approximately simultaneously toward end of closing stroke. Continue closing
until completion of stroke. There should be o distinct drop-off of force required to turn
the handle as end of stroke is approached. This Is on Indication that the linkage has
properly moved "over toggle" so it is self-holding, sometimes referred to as "latched

closed". Return handle to neutral position. Are clearances Mand N (\/iew B, Fig. 9)
as specified? Is trip trigger 37 well clear of pin on end of trip lever 21 (Fig. 9) so
normal vibration will not be likely to cause unexpected tripping? Check jam nuts on
spring studs to see they ore tight (part 22, Fig. 9A), for example. Visually check but
dc not measure clearance P(F:g. 98). This clearance assures adequate pressure on lower

•
• t \: -

main contacts 13 in case of normal expected wear of contacts. Check cll compression
springs 10 and 11 (Fig. 9). None should have coils solid.

• . 1 •.

4. Rotate handle counterclocky/ise until breaker trips. The mechanism assumes the.
position of View D, Fig. .9, for an instant, and then it returns to position of View A

becouse of pull of opening reset Spring 23, Return handle to neutral position. Did ports
move freely? Check cotters, and all accessible screws, nuts, etc., for tightness. It is
suggested that the section on Manual Operation on page,13be studied for explanation of
whot happens during the preceding closing and opening.

/
: i;. Vi"^
'y

5. So for as it rriay be done without electrical connections, check the action of

the electrical devices and accessories. This will old in assuring proper operation of the
linkage to \ ich they ore ttoched whe; electrical operotion can be effected. The
explanation of how these ports normally operote os given in lover pages Will indicate
what should be done. For exomple, after again closing the breaker move'overcurrent
trip shaft 52 (Figs. 12 arid 13) in the tripping.direction to see if tripping occurs. Simliariy try the action of the shunt trip and overvoitage release if used, etc. In these
cases trip trigger 37 moves clockwise sufflnlently to engage pin of trip.lever 21 so as to "

1?:

release the trip latch.nThe larch should always reset ouromaticoily so the tinal position
of the mechonism should be as in View A, Fig. 9.
'

, ... 4
• '
, , .^-4'."-^' ' ;'4':-4cvi

•Fcflorq! Elecfric Prcciucts Cor-pcr.y

Pago

CONNECTIONS; -

Before making electrical connections every precowtion must be taken to see that all

leads that are to be connected to the circuit breaker are de-energized and will remain

so throughout the work. For ncn-drav/out connections be sure that all joints ore clean,
bright, and free from dents or burrs and that fostenings of the connection studs are tight..
All nuts on a current-carrying stud should turn freely; they should never be forced down
with a wrench. If they cannot be turned freely by hand, tap them lightly on the outer
surface with a hammer and turn by hand at the same .time, A nut that cannot be worked

down in this manner will ruin the thread if an ortempt is mode to force it. ff the joints

are not correctly made, dangerous heotlng of the circuit breaker may result.

•M•

Cables and connections should be properly supported so that the clrcuit breaker is

not subjected to unnecessary strains. Any strain v/hich at first has no apparent effect on
the stud alignment may. In time, force the studs to take up a new alignment due to
vibration during opening and closing of the circuit breaker, and poor contact may result.

To ovoid overheating of the circuit breaker, the connecting leads must hove a

current-carrying capacity at least equal to that of the current-carrying parts of the
circuit breaker. Control wiring should be so installed that trouble on one circuit breaker
cannot be communicated to the control wiring of another breaker.

The control voltages and currents listed on the next page are a guide for determin
ing conductor sizes for the control circuits;

|n the case of drowout mountings, it is important that the non-movable parts of the

main and control terminals be located cccjrately in order that the contact springs of
the terminals will apply proper pressure. Even a slight variation of location rnay couse

a large variation of contact pressure. Do not use the approximate dimensions as shown
in Figs. 5 and 8 herein. Use only such dimensions as are shown on prints certified as
correct for construction applying to the particular circuit.breaker being installed. •
This Ifistructiori Manual shows several typical connection diagrams but hot all vari
ations ore included. In all caises, a certified print of the applicable diagram should be
used.

DRAWCIT MOUNTING.

^ : ^

Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 8 show the circuit breaker mounted on drawout platform with
to the lower^part of the deft si.de frame (Fig.. 16 shoves one form- —slightly modified on
some models). Cell^ Interlock, lover 58 shotilrl ho kept pushed down so the'- interlock rod
will not interfere with entry otthe circuit oreoker Into the ceii or cause it to be stopped

support and side-guide rollers for use in the cell. Adrowoul locking device is attached

in test position. When lever 58 Is pushed dov/n, trip trigger 27 moves to such posiflon
that the breaker will be tripped if it is not already in open position. Ease of movement
complete to full-in position aga.inst the resistance of the springs of the termihdT contacts

•s assured by the leyerihg-in device (see the "turret" at front of platform in FlgdCS) that;-

is used on circuit brrokers in cases where Federal-Pacific supplies the enclosures. Insert

a rod in the turret and turn it clockwise (looking down on tne turret) for the final move
ment to full-in position.

If the platform is equipped with cell-catch lever 61, the end of the lever will be
seen to move inwards slightly as a stop pin in bottom of cell is passed. When withdrav/ing breaker from the cell it is necc^-u. y tc p-ish lever 61 irward near the end of the
withdrawal to release a catch before ct viute v/ithdrowal con be accomplished. Some
models have on equivalent device that is part of the side-frame Interlock assembly.
VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS FOR CONTROL AND SOLENOID CIRCUITS

Type DMB-50

Type DMB-25
Normal
Control

Minimum Volts

Current In Amp

Voltage at Coil Terminals at Normal Voltage
Close

Trip

Minimum Volts
at Coil Terminals
Close

Trip

24v d-c

48v d-c
125v d-c
250v d-c

115v a-c
230v o-c
460V o-c

Current in Amp
at Normal Voltage
Close

By use of dry-metallic rectifier
PHASE-ISOLATING BARRIERS:

As on aid for assuring complete isolating of phases and as an added precaution under
some conditions of installation, a barrier assembly, if supplied, is used to supplement
the effectiveness of the ore chutes (see breaker insrallotipii of Fig. 2).-- if a barrier u
supplied it is important that it be installed on the circuit breaker when it is ready for
use.

ELECTRICAL-OPERATION INSPECTION;

After it is certain that the wiring connections have been tested fcr possible grounds

or short circuits and that the circuits are correct in accordance v/ith the certified print,
the circuit breaker should be tested for electrical operation, but with the main leads
opened at the disconnecting switches or by having the breaker in "test position" in its
cell. This provides a complete check of the electrical control of the breaker.

1. Repeat the manual operation tests described on page 8 but without checking

clearances, etc.. Check to see that ports move freely and have not become affected by

:th6 installation work of connecting. Leave.breaker in closed position*

•77u:K'#r'
• 7": •

„ ^ f • '7
Fycv.tral Rlscfric Products Cciiupony .

•

Fo -j- -* '

2. Momentarily close the shunt trip circuit. The breaker should open and the latch

should automatically reset. If the lotch did not resetmove handle to latch-reset position
(see Figs. 5 and 8) and make a note to check the reoson why it failed to reset (see oaae
19).

3. Momentarily close the closing-control circuit. The breaker should close from

operation of the solenoid. Check to see that clearance between trip trigger 37 (Fig, 9B)

and the pin on trip.lever 21 is the same as when the breaker is closed manually (tr^y.all
manual closing and compare the clearances).

4. Repeat shunt trip and electrical closing severe! times to make sure thatoperation
Is normal. Check clearance betv/een contact kickoff 64 of control relay and top of
collar 63 on stem 62 (see Fig. 17).to see if it is as specified. Place the mechanism in
trip-free condition by holding trip trigger 37 so it engages pin of trip lever. 21; mean
while move handle to closing position. The handle and shaft action should befree with

out evidence of binding. The handle parts will move tov/ard closed position but the
shaft parts will move only slightly.
5. Check of accessories should then be made.

• Bell Alarm; With breaker closed, move overcurrent trip shaft 52 (Figs. 12 and
13) in tripping direction. Breaker should open and alarm ring. Move handle to

tripping position; the alarm should stop. Again close breaker and trip by turning
shaft 52. Close shunt-trip circuit; the alarm should stop. This assumes that an
auxiliary-switch contact momentarily completes the circuit through the shunt

trip coil even though the breaker .is in open position. This description applies :
to the usual normally open bell-alarm switch installation (see Figs. 20 and 21).

Also trip by shunt trip and again ky manual trip. In neither case should the
alarm ring.

Kirk Key Interlock; The electrical feature of this device is that the closingcontro! relay circuit is opened when the breaker is key locked in the open
position. Lock the breaker in open position by the Kirk key lock and close the

closing-control circuit. There should be no operation of the control relay.

Undervoltoge Device; If facilities permit, arrange for applying-reduced voltage
to the coil of the device end note the voits at.which the breaker.is tripped. Did.

the mechanical reset rod extending from arm on main shaft (see Figs. .10.and. 11)

p^ooeriy reset the device? If the d<=yii_e is of the time-delay type, allow about

one minute for reseiting.

Other Accessoi ies; Perform such operotions as required to check the effectiveness of any other accessories that embody electrical features.

With the breaker in open poi.lic.,., vicsu ihe disconnecting swii -h in the main leads

or move the breaket to full-in position if it is in c cell. Apply some load end repeat
manual and electrical closing and opening as a test of normal switching. Remove the
breaker from its cell and completely check connections,, bolts, and linkage to see that
nothing has become loosened or displaced during the test operotions. ;• Reicistb!!- circuit
breaker; it is now ready for service;. . • "
•
' • •

. - Fecferal Electric Prob'ucii CoTipc •<

""/.rr.'i, i9c '/

METHOD OF OPERATION!

Complete Information as to how the circuit breaker operates is of help v/hen tr/Ing
to locate the cause of improper operation. It oiso serves as a guide for understanding

the reasons for the adjustments and checks made during installation or maintenance in
spections,
CLOSING:

Fig, 9A shows the position of the principal ports when the circuit breaker Is open.
To close the breaker^ main shaft i Is rotated clockwise by the closing solenoid or by the,
handle until the parts are ds shown in Fig. 9B. During this operation trip link 5arid,
strut 6move as one piece because they are latched iogerher by the trip latch (in trip'
link 5). Because links 7approach toggle position" as closed position is reached, a lorge
force is applied to turning square shaft 8. Contact springs 10 and_ 11 are thereby com
pressed to assure high pressure at main contacts 12 and 13, and moderate pressure at the

auxiliary arcing contocts 15-16. Ajumper 14 shunts contacts 13 and electrically con
nects qii moving contacts to the lower main terminal as is necessary during arcing when

opening. Contact 16 does not touch arcing horn 17 when in closed position. The arcing
horn is electrically connected to the upper terminal through a magnetic blowout coil

(^hown diagramatlcolly). On the Type DMB-50, jumper 36 shunts the main arc to ener

gize the blowout coil, but.there is on auxiliary air gap in the blowout-coil circuit (in
the arc chute) that opens the blowout-cpi! circuit when the main arc is extinguished.
It is not necessary to apply closing force after the breaker is fully closed because in

the final stage of closing, link 6, trip link 5, and main crank 48 are in a straight line;
in fact, they are "over center" so the mechanism is positively held in closed position by'
the force of springs 10 and 11. Such action is sometimes referred to as'"latching closed",
although there is no closing latch in the usual sense.

The Type DMB-25 circuit breaker has one complete moving-contact structure per
pole (see Fig. 3). Type DMB-50 has two such complete structures per pole and eocb
structure also includes a shorter structure that comprises only an d^embly of main con
tacts 12 and 13 and associated contact springs 10. Thus there are four spring-applied

••

•

moving contact structures in parallel per pole in the larger circuit breaker (see Fig. 1),"

'--r

" •

Note fr'-ot neither electrical nor mon'.'s! closing can tqke.place unless trip link 5 ,
oiid strut 6move rigidly as one piece. Theretore ir tor any reason the trip latch is re
leased, or it did not^reset properly during the previous opening, the straight-line reld-:
tionship of the ports is no longer maintained and closing cannot occur. The breaker thus

cannot be closed if the shunt trip coil is energized, the low-voltage release operates,
or the breaker is not in its eel1at least as far as test posi; ion.' Also when closing against
°
''"c sul^f'cient to cause
ii ifjpip.g , the breakerW.If trip as soon as
the circuit is established even before the breaker "iatci-cs cioaod" provided the over-

current
acts instontaneously.
closing
hov/ever,
Isvrge
to
CQUaedevice
The breaker
to latch closedTheoven
whenfcrces,
the fauii
currentareissuffibiently
as lorgeosrated
interruplmg current, provided the overcurrent device permits sufficient time, deldy for
complete closing to occur.
1-

Fcdorc! Eloc^r'c r'.'od^crc Co- "ur.v

i- - ■♦•''

^Gce i :

OPENING BY RELEASE OF TRIP LATCH:
;;

Current above pickup amount through the series trip coil In each main lead causes,
either time-delay or instantaneous tripping according to the type and setting.of the
overcurrent device (see Figs. 12 and 13 for tripping oction). Trip trigger 37 (Fig. 9B)

moves clockwise to move trip, lever 21 to release trip latch 38 (Fig. 9D), thereby col
lapsing the linkage and causing" the mechanism to move to the position of Fig. 9D as a
result of the force of contact springs 10, The upper main contacts 12 separate somewhat
before the parting of arcing contacts 15-16 (see Fig. 9C). The mechanism is then rapid

ly brought to the position shovyn In Fig.:9A by action of reset spring 23 which turns mqitt.

shaft 1 counterclockwise. The trip latch resets during this movement," thereby joining
link 5 and strut 6 so they act as one piece.
Opening by release of.the triplotch; as described, takes place in all cases of overcurrent tripping as well as when tripping is the result of the action of the shunt trip"
device, no-voltage release, reverse-current device (d-c only), the drawout locking
device, or by any action that moves trip trigger 37 so it engages "pin on lever 21. Trip
ping takes place at any point of the closing stroke because trip trigger 37 extends Vfertically alongside the path ofvertical travel of trip link 5, so engagement will occur when
ever trip trigger 37 is moved clockwise regardless of the position of trip link 5.

':;r

MANUAL OPENING:

The trip latch is not released during manual opening. Instead, the opening comes
about from handle movement which causes main shaft 1 to rptate counterclockwise
(viewed as in pig, 98) sufficiently to collapse the "over center" condition, of main crank

48, trip link 5, and strut 6. The force exerted by springs 10 and 11, supplemented by
the pull of spring 23 and other springs, completes the opening. The parts move directly
to their position as shown in Fig. 9A without need of going through the intermediate step
shown in Fig. 9D.
HANDLE-SHAFT ASSEMBLY:

The Operation of this assembly on the Type DMB-25 circuit breaker is exploined by
reference to Fig. 10. The parts and their connection to each other ate as follows:
Handle shaft— extends from handle 3 to alarm cam 72.

Coupling crank 44 -- turns loosely on shaft 40. Clutch jews extend from the left hub of

the crank. Also pin 82 extends from the left flcnge as shown. This pin has a flat
surface that can be engaged by the clutch [aw of sliding-cqm clutch 42.
Only a pert of this shown in Fig. 10 becouse it is
icgc:/ surrounded by siidir.j cc clutch 42, Jew projections extend from the right
of. main dutch 43, ' "

Main clutch 43 — fixed to shaft 40,

Sliding cam clutch 42 —concentric with and loosely turns on main clutch 42,. Avetti. .; col pin .(not shown in Fig., 10) extends through .shaft 40 and mQ'h clutch 43, into q,
^Ibt.'n cam clutcK 42, This pin sei'ves to control pen t ofthe motion of slid.in9

'c (••1''?

Fcclorcl tiocfiic r'i-oducts Cornpony

•

• April, 193-1

clutch 42 hccai:e the slot-cut thrcrj.;!'. h: bvi&n -.-d i-},© pin permit the cam to
move lengthwise along shaft 40 by a limited amount, ond also assures that cam

•/=.

clutch 42 will rotate along with shaft 40 and main clutch 43.

•

•. is a groove com recess•in its outer.surface,
The essential feature ofcam clutch 42

.S-

—

Fixed pin 50 extending from the frame into this groove cam holds cam clutch 42
without any movement lengthv/ise ofth" shui'r during ai) normal closing and .ripping

•^ ^
,'

movements of handle 3. . However, if handle 3 is moved to latch reset position (see

. --^iv

Fig. 5), then cam clutch 42 moves to the front because of the curve in its recessed •
groove cam. "

•

• f. ',

'';'nl'

Alarm cam 72 —attached to left end ofshaft 40,is bell-alarm accessory, if specified.
Position spring 41 and arm 83 and associated pins return handle assembly to neutral
position atend of either on opening or closing stroke. Coupling crank 44-f however,
will remain in either open or closed position.

,
V.
;v?
• *' "r

The operation ofthese parts is OS follows:

; ; ilf

Normal Manual Closing; Fig. 10 shows ports in normal open position of the circuit
breaker, Shortly after start of turning handle 3 clockwise main clutch 43 engages

the clutch portion of coupling crank 44 so it also rotates clockwise with the result .
that main crank 48 of main shaft 1 moves in a direction to. close the breaker. After

handle is released, return spring 41 moves the. parts to neutral position, except that •

s:"'

coupling crank 44 remains in ."up" or closed position.

Normal Manual Tripping: Shortly after turning handle 3 counterclockwise, main clutch
34 engages the clutch of coupling crank 44 so it rotates counterclockwise with the

result that main crank 48 moves beyond to^le position ond the breaker opens.
Coupling crank 44 rapidly moves during this opening because the contact springs of
the breaker move it regardless of handle-shaft movement,

Monudl Control of Latch Reset; If for any reason during normal manual tripping (or even,
during electrical tripping), the trip latch in trip link 5 becomes released and the
pull of reset spring 23 (Fig. 9A) does not reset the latch, then movemenf of handle
3 to reset position (Fig. 5) will produce positive movement of main crank 48 some-

^
'

•

what beyond normal open position, thereby forcing the trip latch to reset. The ;

action is as follows: Movement of handle 3counterclockwise.to reset position (Fig.;

5) causes com clutch 42 to rotate so for that fixed pin 50 and the curved groove \
cam move com clutch 42 toward the front so its clutch engages pin 82 on coupling

crank 44. This produces sTmildr movement to that of normal manual'tripping,' but"
the motion is carried farther, thereby assuring latch resetting unless there is
condition in the latch assembly that prevents it.

The descriptiori of hdndle-shaft operation OS given In the preceding opplying 'to Vhe^ ^
Type DMB-25 circuit breaker also applies to, the Type DMB-50 circuit breaker except \

that ^in the latter breaker the general arrangement of the parts is reversed: The coupUng ^

crank is in back of the main clutch, and the sliding cam clutch moves toward theVear/of
the breaker when if engages fbr resetting of the trip latch. The alarm.com is located its

-i!, 1954

Federal Eiecfric ?fodi-ats Comrony

•'090

an Intermediate position instead of being on the end of the shcft. Also instead of there
being a pin attached to a flange of the coupling crank, the crank is of the two-arm
type, only one of which is engaged through a long pin by the sliding com clutch. Fig.

n identifies the parts with numbers that generally correspond to those of similar parts as
shown in Fig. 10.
HANDLE LOCKS;

Neutral Handle Lock: When handle is down, a pin enrerSrthe.framejSo it is neces
sary to retract it by applying the thumb to the metal eye at top of handle before the

handle can be turned. Padlocking at this point prevents withdrawal of the pin, thereby
locking handle so it c-not be turned. The lock does not prevent electrical operation,
so it is useful principally to prevent handle movement by unauthorized persoris,
Complete Open-Position Handle Lock; When handle is in pddlock-open. position
(see Figs, S and 8), padlocking of the handle eye prevents manual or electrical closing
because main clutch 43 engages and holds coupling crank 44 (Figs, 10 and 11) in the
open position. The cabinet do<«rof enclosed breakers cannot be opened when the hand|e •

is locked in this manner. There is no closed-position lock because the breaker must al
ways be free to trip.
v';.

DUAL MECHANICAL OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICE:

Figs, 22, 23, and 24 show the overcurrent trip device, comprising a coll in the
main lead, atii armature moved by the magnetic force in the coil when current exceeds
pickup amount., an escapement-type mechanical time-delay device that deloys move
ment of the overcurrent trip shaft 52 (Figs, 12 and 13), and an. instantaneous magneti
cally operated element that moves the trip shaft immediately if current exceeds a sched
uled percent of pickup amount.

As ordinarily supplied, an external knob is provided for adjustment of the current

at which.the device "picks up" and starts the time-delay'device. The indicator for'this
adjustment is calib'ated at 80, 100, 120, 140, and 160 percent of continuous current
rating of the trip coil (tolerance plus or mirius 10 percent). An internal setting provides
for adjustment ofthe time after pickup at which tripping will occur, and another internal
setting provides adjustment of the percent of pickup current at which the instantaneous
element becornes effective.

. ;

Modificoilwris of this basic device to meet various condiiioiv^ of service are avail

able, Information concerning them accompanies circuit breakers with which they are
supplied, or It is available on application to the factory.

CLOSING-CCNTROL RELAY:

. '" order to relieve the electric closing contact of carrying the large current re-

quired^for the closing solenoid, the closing control circuit only energizes the operating

^ andcontacts
the connection
diagrams)/
The clp^hg'?
so enoid circuit is energized when the double
of the control
relay close
because

4i '>« *

Fcdsrol Eloct/ic ?rcduc(s Company .

April,,!'•?" •

of force exerted b/ the relay operating coll. Asea I-in of the" operating coil is provided
through a resistor connected between the two main contacts (see connection diagram). •'
IP-

As soon as the circuit breaker closes, the double main converts of the control relay

pre opened mechanically by upward movement of stem 62 (Fig. 17), which also de-

energizes the seal-in circuit of the operating coil. Blowout coils aid in extinguishing
the arc of interruption of the inductive current of the closing coil.
Should the breaker trip before the operator's finger is removed from the closing
control contact, the breaker will not reclose because the main contacts of the control

relay do not recouple to the armature of the relay operating coil after breaker opening
unless the coil is de-energized. This prevents "pumping" (successive open and close) if
the closing-control circuit remains energized under overcurrent conditions.
AUXILIARY SWITCH:

This switch is directly connected to the circuit-breaker mechanism so the switch

position, open or closed, corresponds to the breaker position. The auxiliary-switch
contacts thus provide a means of controlling circuits that are to be responsive to circuitbreaker position. Each switch unit has four stages, and one or two such switch units are

mounted on the breaker depending on its specification. Each 4-stage unit normally has
two "a" contacts (closed when the breaker is closed) and two "b" contacts (clpsed when

the breaker is open). However, the contacts ore convertible from one type to the other
by removal of shaft assembly and changing contacts as required.

' f-l'-

One "a" contact is required for use with shunt trip and one "b" contact If bell alarm

is used, so with such devices it is often the practice to have two 4-stageauxiliary-switch
units on the circuit breaker.

No auxiliary-switch contact should be used in the circuit

of on undervoltage device.

The contacts carry 15 amp continuously or 250 amp for three seconds. The inter
rupting rating of the auxiliary-switch contacts is as follows:
Interrupting Amp
Volts

The drive shaft of the auxiliary switch is extended and connected to" the ON-OrF
circuit breaker. G.eeii ond red signal lamps, if required, are supplied

through auxiliary-switch contacts.

•SHUNT.TRIP;'\

;•

: •••A.

The oction.of this device requires no explanation.
• rv

Fodero! Becfric Products Company

Page 17

BELL ALARM:

The usual orrangentent provides a normally open switch so connected mechonicolly
that it closes when the overcurrent device opens the circuit breaker.

An alternate

arrangement sometimes used provides a normally closed switch connected in thfe some
way; in this case the switch opens when the overcurrent device opens the breaker . The
latter arrangernenr Is useful when ft is desired to block associated control circuits ds d

parjt of ageneral protective scheme/ which may or may not include an alarm.

In either case/ the iswitch is operated by mechanical means. as shown in Pigs. 20
and 21/ according to type of circuit breaker". Drive rod 73 always moves when the
breaker is opened by any method. However/ if trippingjis manual or from on electrical
accessory (shunt trip/ etc.) drive bar 81 is moved aside mechanically so it connot engage
switch plunger 76. In the case of manual trip, a cam on handle shaft actuates the rod
or lever that deflects drive bar 81; and in the case of accessory trip, it is a similar rod
or lever, as illustrated.

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP;

;•

••-.•••

The essential external features of the undervoltage trip device with mechanical
immediate reset Ore shown in Fig. 25 in their position when the breaker is closed. When
the coil is subject to line voltage above that for which the device is set, reset level 85 '

• '

.'niT

and trip lever 84 are in the solid-line positions. The slot in the end of reset bar 57. is
also positioned so that main shaft 1 con move between open and closed positions without -

1:"

lengthwise movement of bor 57.

When voltage is reduced so far as to cause the undervoltage device to operate, re
set lever 85 moves down end trip lever 84 moves up to the dotted-line positions shown.
Reset bar 57 is thereby caused to move to the left so its slotted opening will no.longer
permit free movement of the arm on'main shaft 1 when breaker opens without movement
of reset bar 57.

. •;

By the means previously described, the upward movement of trip lever 84 causes the
circuit breaker to open with the result that the arm on main shaft 1 moves to the dottedline position which" again moves reset lever ,85 to its solid-line position. The undervoltage device is thusreset ond trip lever 84 will remain down provided the voltage is
above that for which the device is ser. If the voltage is still too low, tr ip lever 84 will
remain up and the breaker will be trip free so it cannot be closed as long os thn und'?'-

•

voltoge condition continues.

The time-delay, attachment to the undervoltage device, if supplied, Comprises rheans
for slowing down rhovement of the solenoid core pneumatically through on adjustable
needle-valve opening. The device does "not reset immediately, so one minute should
plr>n<«» before the breaker can be restored to service" after the undervoltape condition no
longer exists.

Connection to the. dndervoitage device should be.to the line side of the bredker if ]
-!•' ..
. I .
.1
I . I' « f
I
.1*1
«
•"t
imrnediate
reset is used,' and
to the
lood
side if time-delay
reset. Is
usedM-''
. '".•AAs' the uridenyoltage device is" connected to the main leads, its coil must be suitable for the;

ohd kiiid of current interrupted by the circuit" brsoker (a-c or d-c, as the case may^be).

FoH&rol fclectric Products Company

KIRK KEY interlocks"

Af.ril, K;'

• .

The opplication is as shown in Fig». 18 and 19. The lock plunger causes locking

latch 69 to enter a slot in lower shaft 39 (Fig. 10) of Type DMB-25 circuit breaker or to"

&
• • -:;-iYV
. v' • .

enter handle shaft 40 (Fig. 11) of Type DMB-50, in either co.se locking them in the open
position of the breaker. At the same time linkage opens an electricaf contact in the

closing-control relay circuit. The device embodies mechanical means for preventing
completion of locking when the breaker is in closed position. .

•.::;W

To lock; With breaker in open position/ handle neutral, key in place, turn key
counterclockwise 180® to lock breaker in open position—after which key can

be removed. The breaker is locked in open position.

To unlock; Insert key (unless already in place) and turn clockwise-to unlock.
The key connot be removed. The closing-control-relay interlocked contact will/

be closed. So closing of the breaker may proceed either electrically or manually.

':H';

OTHER ACCESSORIES:

Instructions relating to accessories other than those described herein ore supplied
with all circuit breakers using such devices. '
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT

The safety and successful operation of connected apparatus depends on the proper

action of the circuit breaker. Therefore the circuit breaker must have systematic care
and inspection. The following points require special attention:

K Be sure that the circuit breaker is in test position in its cell for all inspections
in which it is necessary to have control current available, or disconnect the main leads

if the breaker is not in on enclosure. Adjustments that can be rriade when the control
circuits are energized may be performed when the breaker is in the test position, but if
there is any doubt remove the breaker entirely from the cell —or disconnect control
leads if the breaker is not mounted in an enclosure.

2. Inspect the operating mechanism periodically and keep it clean.

3. Examine the-contacts frequently. See that they are aligned and that contact "
surfaces bear with r firm, uniform pressure. Replace badly pitted Or burned contacts •

before tl.'-y are burned away so far as to prevent full contact or are likely to ^uuse

damage to other parts of the circuit breaker. All main and control leads should be dis-

;..v

connected wheri working on the contacts-.

4. All contact members, both main and control, must be kept clean and bright to

insure maximum
operating^ efficiency.
If has been found by experience that
operatina
^
/
liiui upcrurmg

".'i.
.
i. v/ill
•!< reduce
<
.
rhe circui.t oreaker several times at intervals
of not* over two.
weeks
the
'"
effects.or oxidation and materially prolong the effective life of the circuit breaker. It -"•
15 recommended that this practice be followed excppt vhct a circuit breaker which is f
the

regulorly operated every few days will not require such oitention.
-lie 18, Rev. 1, fN-302

V
''

/A&r;i,'954

i-ec'cralE!ocfric Products Company

Pp.g<-'

5. See that bolts, nuts,- washers, cotter pins and all terminal connections are in
place and tight. .

6. Clean the circuit breaker at more frequent intervals than usual where abnormal
conditions prevail, such as when near salt spray, cement dust, or acid fumes —to ovoid
flashovers as a result of the accumulation of foreign substances on the surfaces of the
circuit breaker.

Special Instructions relating to maintenance and adjustment of various units of the
circuit breakers are given in the following:

Perform steps 2, 3, and 4 of the Inspection for Manual Operation (see page 8 )
including check of clearances M, N, and P(Fig. 9B) and adjust if required. When the

;•

s-,.

circuit breaker is in closed position, the pressure of the contact springs should be main

tained at 50 lbs for the upper main.contacts 12 (Fig. 9) and at 32 lbs for arcing contacts

9. Pressure should be measured by fish scale and pull-away sling attached to straddle
the contact surface so the pull will represent average pressure at center of contact. The
scale should be read just as the contacts part..
The contact surfaces should be dressed with a fine file or sandpaper^ Each contact

assembly is removable after disconnecting jumperand releasing the springs by unsdrewing
holding nuts. The lower end of the assembly has only a pin-in-slot connection*

The amount of effective toggle when handle moves to closed position is adjusted by

the jam nut on the right-^and link of toggle links 7(Fig. 9), but as this is carefully adr
justed ot the factory, it is unlikely that further adjustment will be required. •

Failure of Trip Latch to Reset: If there is frequent failure of the trip latch to reset

so it is found necessary to move handle to reset position to reset the latch more

often than occasional intervals, the ports and linkage that produce "tripping through
movement of trip trigger 37(Fig. 9) should be examined in detail. Check all clearances betw.-en parts where there should be clearance. Check fastenings for "tight
^

ness, Check any condition m the mounting of the circuit breaker that would be

.. '«•*

likely to cause abnormal vibration during opening. Particularly see that trip trigger

37 is well clear of pin on trip lever 21 at all points of the stroke. Check condition
of reset spring 23 (Fig. 9) and its fastenings.

If nothing can be found that would cause the latch failures, check th"^ condition

of the latch itself by inspecting the latching surfaces of trip latch 38 and latch prop
86(Fig. 9). If the surfaces are worn or indicate the possibility of not holding firmly
when reset, replace trip link 5 entirely; it includes the latch assembly. The re

iffi*

moved trip link may then be repaired if practicable.
"

handle-SHAFT ASSEMBLY:
_

See that sliding cam clutch 42 rides freeiy on main clutch 43 (Figs. 10 and 11) and

thatdutch engaging surfaces are not broken or blunted at edges.

„

, •. V-

" • ' -••y•-:•s•J'y-•v

l-o.Jorci cif'clvic Prodycts Corripa,-'^

Ap-d- i?54

CLOSING SOLENOID;

The solenoid is designed for intermittent duty. To remove the Solenoid: Hove
breaker in open position. Disconnect leads to control relay and to terminal block. Re

move pin in link that connects to the core.. On Type DM3-50 remove three hex head

cap screws at bock of coil/ and pull out horizontally. On Type"DMB-25 remove four
bolts underneath the coil. The disassembly of the device after removal from the circuit
breaker is obvious. However, o list should be kept of the parts and of the order of re

moval so replacement may be made in the correct opposite manner.,
OVERCURRENT TRIPPING DEVICE;-

" ^

Each device is removable after withdrawing six bolts from bock frome of the circuit,
breaker. The series coil and the overcurrent-device assembly are withdrawn as a unit.
Do not remove the tripping unit from the coil.

ifi

There are several forms of ovet current devices available, and suitable instructions
accompany any that differ from Form A (see Figs. 22 and 24) to which the foilowirig In
structions apply:

• • -i--- a"-'".

Pickup Adjustment: The percent of coil rating at which pickup takes ploce (the current
at which timer starts its operation) is altered by turning the exposed knob. A pointer on
a calibrated dial controls this adjustment,

•f:A
"AA, :

Time-Delay Adjustment: Remove molded cose, to expose the escapement timer at bottom
of assembly. On the opposite side from that shown in Fig. 24 is a circular disk that has
thin metal projections which can be altered by rotation so they may be brought near to
or moved owoy from adjacent thick bosses. To increase the time of pickup', move the •
thin metal projections "toward the thick bosses; to decrease the time, move them away
from the thick bosses.

Instantaneous Adjustment; Refer to Fig. 24. Place spring end in slot No. 4 for greatest,
percent of coir rating at which the device changes from time-delay to instantarieous:
operation. Place spring in slot No. 1 for the smallest pertent of coil rating at'which

• AfcH

the instantaneous eieme/.t becorhes effettive,
CONTROL RELAY;

;•
.

With oil control circuits and main leads open, remove cover from relay'housing/
dress contacts, clean the interior, end check all connections for tightness. Reconnect
the control leads.

With the circuit breaker in test position in the cell, or with main leads otherwise

disconnected, momentarily energize the closing-control circuit.

The-breaker should

close. Trip the breaker. Again energize the closing-control circuit, but this time keep
it continually energized during both tbe closing ofthe breokerand a following trip. The

breaker should ^not close after the tripping, thereby showing that the anti-pump,feature *
of the reloy is in operating condition. It v/iil also show that the resistor which ifupplibs
the seol-in contact is intact.

Federol ElecJ/ic Prodych Compony

•

Pogo 21

•

Remove cover from front of control relay. Disconnect leads from the relay contacts

that go to the closing solenoid and the terminal block. Energize the relay operating
coil and close breaker slowly by handle. Note the point in the closing srroks at v/hich

the relay contacts are opened because of engagement of coMar 63 with kickoff bar 64

(Fig. 17) • The contacts should not open until it Is no longer necessary to apply strong
force to move the handle. The breaker is then {ust beyond the "sncp-^over" point very
near the end of its stroke. If the condition is incorrect/ adjust at jam nuts dt top of stem
62 until it is correct. HoweveV/ be careful to see that the contacts will open each time
aff®'" several closings are made, because it is very important that enough leeway be left
*:

: r\ : •

so there will never be an instance in which the contacts fail to open at the end of the
a'asing stroke of the breaker, yet it must also be certain that the solenoid willremain
®nergized as long as any force is required from it for breaker closing;

After being sure that the preceding adjustment is correct, trip the Isreakerand again
energize the relay operating coil and keep it energized throughout a manual closing
followed by manual tripping. With the operating coil still energized, check to see that
coupling link that connects the operating coil plunger to the relay contacts remains
uncoupled. De-energize the operating coil and note that the link now couples the
plunger to the contact frame. Again energize the operating coil, which should result in
closing of the relay contacts. • If an incorrect condition is found make such adjustment
as is necessary..
AUXILIARY SWITCH;

Remove front cover and inspect contacts. Dress or replace as required-. The switch
is designed so that contacts close somewhat before the end of the stroke. This insures
complete engagement even if there is some rebound of contocts.of the circuit breaker

during opening. The auxiliary-switch contacts should be so arranged on the shaft that
they are squarely and firmly applied to the contact fingers ofthe switch when the circuit
breaker is fully closed or open, as the case may be.
SHUNT TRIP ACCESSORY:

With breaker open, move the core of the coil against the trip frame assembly and
slowly try tp close the breaker manually. The breaker should not close because of being
trip free. When the shunt trip is not energized there should be 1/32" minirnum clear

ance between the small trip lever that extends from the bottom of the shunt trip assembly
and the frome thot it engages during tripping.

BELLALARM,.UNDERVpLTAQEr.D?VICE, KEY INTERLOCK,
AND OTHER ACCESSORIES:

The inspection of these accessories is made by performing the work described in the
oDnlicobie pr-agraphs of the section, F'ectrlcal-Operotlon Inspection (page 10), after

•s\-: - • ^

which remove covers of the devic.is, dress contacts, clean "all ports, check for loose

connections. The undervoltage trip lever 84 (Fig. 25) should have clearance at" least

1/32" from the tripping frame that It engages. Ameasured undervoltage source should
be available to make certain that the undervoltage device operates when the voltage is
reduced to the omquht at which the device is supposed to operate.
/ 4.

•

imcrlock Switch NO. 63

P^ey Lock 67
Celt interlock

Rod 59"'

Adjusting
Screw 60

Locking Latch 69 ( engoges
slot in cottar on tower shaft

Futt-tn

39 if breaker is open

Position Hole

Fig. 18-KEY INTERLOCK on TYPE DMB-25
Test rPosi tion Hole -

Showing Ports in Lock Position

Fig.20-BELL ALARM

. Fig. 16-FORM A CELL INTERLOCK r

Drive Rod for
Alarm Switch 73

ASSEMBLY-TYPE' .
DMB-25

Fig.i9-KEY INTERLOCK on

Shown reody for tripping
•Drive
Bar at

TYPE DMB-50

Showing Ports in Lock Position

• •

Cam for Alarm Switch 72

•• n

Key Lock 68, and Switch On reoij

. Handle Shaft 40"^^
^Plunger 76

t^Januat Trip

Lockout Rod 77
H I l9(®

Handle Shott 40 Locking Piote 70

block 7!

in suplh d.i'^<
thaf-ldc^^:;
cpn^fibe^^:
brddHer0W

Drive Rod for
Alarm Switch r.

Alarm Sv/itch 74

cl6sed}pcish^
'V

Plunger 76 —

\-Manual-Trip
Lockout Lever 80
. !
t

ActuOl Cli uy

21- Bel] ALARVi ASSEMBLY

Drive Bar 81

Shown reody for tripping

.Cam on Hondto
Shaft for LAan-

TYPE DMB-50

ual Lockout

Accessory-Trip Lockout Rod 79

Fija.j7;^><#

•

KICKOFPfc
TACTS

END of'.Cki.
Type 0MB,!4
• sV'
: >•.
• .t' *>i - *?f •

Closing
Solenoid 4 - •

'y-fdis Bar omitted on Type Dt^B-ZS,
\^;:land Trigger 37 moved by direct contoc;
I ; of Wifbdroival Trip Lug 53 ( see Fig. tZ )

• Cell Catch Lever 6t
1

—Cell Interlock Lever 58

Normal Open Position
Doffed-lines-shaw
maximum trove!

opening Reset Spring Z3

• TYPE DM B

during closing

Rg. [4- DETAIL of SOLENOID ond LINKAGE .
-.-J

TYPE DMB-25
AWWWmWWTO!

Spring 65
Clearance R

Vis"' minimum
Plunger 66

Lower Shaft of

Type DMB-Z5
twain

Shaft I

Position immsj.' ^ely
after dosing

—''

opening Reset

Spring Z3
Position after Trip Latch Resets
Kickoff bever 46.
Note: The action is simlliar

S^KE.

in Type DMB-50
except for method of upward
movement, for which see Fig. It

Rg. 15-DETAIL of CLOSING SOLENOID"and LINKAGE:'
. TY^ DMB-50

In normal open posifiori

' '

f
..]•

••• • ' •" sii®

FEDERAL ELECTRIC PRODUCTS CO.
M PARIS STlIEET. NCVrARK. N, J.. U. S' *. '

TYPES DMB and DS CIRCUIT BREAKERS^-:;
CLOSING COi'L ar:d hVTcPLOCKtNC ClETAltS-'.

Sliding Cam Clutch 42
Pin 82

Main Clutch 43

Uppei Main
Contacts 12 -r

1- Hondic

From Closing Solenoid

Shaft 40
Load Contact

Lower Main / y'
Coritacts 13^ y
•

Main Crank 48

Bevel Gears ^9 J

For Resetof Undervoltage Release

Lower Shot, 39
.

Relay Kicnoff Lever tC

Jumper 14 /

Strut 6

Trip Link 5 —

in- MANUAL DRIVE for TYPE 0MB-25

Coupling Crank 44 (loose on. shaft)

Handle Return Spring 4!

• *
• . •• -3 vi;^.
Fia. 12-TRIGGER TRIPRti>.G- LlNKA%:j^y^

Oilite Bearing

—

Sliding Cam Clulcti 42 "

''N.-,,,*-

• W:.m

of TYPF DMB-25

Main autch.43 & Belt Alarm Cam 72 Handle

To Handle Shaft ^ ^ Oilite Bearing
Jo Reset

Main Shaft I —

Spring

To Trip-^l.atch Assembly
' and Contact Shaft
(see Fig. 9)

Overcurrcnt

Trio Shaft. 52

To Solenoid

Bronzb Ci':tc P'"-"rg3

KicHpff Spindle 51
h-

Main
"^Bronze Oilite
CranK 48
Bearing

For Reset ot Unaet •
voltage Release

Trip Frame 54 Wilddrawa! Trip;Lr^^^^^

Ciecrance N- '/iq '

.'''CjCt l€.

•J'Brj.'.'-O'j! Coil,
supplied

^ l^Arcino Contact
Spring ft
i

Shafts
Fig. 9C ( above )

I .' ^^Toggle Links 7

ARCING CONTACT ASSEMBLY
Clearance

otter start of Opening

•y^J\
V

'> Trip Lever 2!
5.EUUENCE

s^Main Shaft I

OPERATIONS

•H

Fig'.9B-BREAKER CLOSED

Fig. 9D-BREAKER OPEN, ^uf Lotch Not Reset

Overcurrent Trip Shaft
52 (insulated)

Fig.l3-TRIGGER TRIPPING LINKAGE of:TYPE DMB-SO

—Overcurrenr Device 20

Ta Shunt Trip, Undervoitage Device,
•^Ta Bell
Alarm Lockout

•\

ana Bell Alarm Lockout

ier~

^ftage Device

Trip Frame 54

£) FEDERAL ELECTRIC PRODUCTS CO
y

50 PAHIS STREET RfWAHK h J USA

~iTp Shunt Ttip

TYPE DMB CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

OPERATING and TRIPPING DETAILS
- •'

For Co// 25" Min, C. td

Alarm Switch,
if Supplied

——
HO" to Close

Shunt Trip —H
; Vr
tr.

:':i.' ' '•• '•^(x P • -^-AS-V
•

•

Underuoltoge
Device, if

• ••""'7 • - ^
•"''W
-"^'irl
iii
Fig.7-WITH ARC CHUTES of TWO POLES REMOVED

}. ',i

FR0N1 ELEVATi^f^

-f'®if^

•-^ /1-. q./.( •, •
•-

i^^-RONT VIEV/ on DRAV/QUT MOUNTING.
Two Arc Chutes removed;

the third moved up for
contact irtspection.

: Vi , .| j. '..y .•'••

••ly

-"ll'-,, =•-/

• ' - 1^-Ua

!'•' • • .4 J.Iv- . !•' /

n i

rrv

,>i

^"" .•.•i'.:4.•••;s"! •r?u
!•• •
.. •
'

•BEAR-ViEW ^ DRAWOti MCL'N"; .NG

iw-

Note: The control terrolnois

•- •'-• y

ore in the "alternote"
'Jj

locotion ( see Fig. 5 ) ..

•' ,

1'
^•c

i<- 3 ->i

OPENING In DEAD-FRONT DOOR

/O?—— I yip .A'ot for Construction

Kay ipck^ 'i 'if Supplied

Cell and Door Nor hicludtd

In Breaker Style Number

1..

H
Cell Depth 20" MIn.

C.to C.

Bonier Assembly, If Supplied

^^•'Barrier Assembly,
if Supplied

Extra C.T.'s,
if Supplied

Alternate Location
of Control Term

inals, if Supplied

•Extra Aux. Sw.

IV; ./:t» »ii-

if Supplied
Electrical
Solenoid

Lockout, if
Supplied

—Alarm Switch,
if Supplied
Overcurrent

Key Interlock,
if Supplied

to. Trip
v Vj
•i" ;^".. ilf,'j

m::3
•Grounding Terminal

federal ELECTRIC PRODUCTS CO.
so PARIS STRErr. NE»VARK. N. J.. U.S.A.
TYPE

•-I

DMB-25

CIRCUIT BREAKER .

Apprcx. Dimensions-Not for Construciioh "

TYPl CAi- COiW'ECTION DI AG RA"

OVERCURRENT
SERIES COILS

RELAY

Key Interlock
N-C Contact in

this lead, if
CONTROL

used.

CONNECTIONS

POWER

SCHEfwATIC
To line side it
OV is immcd'Qie

Beil alarm conlar>. Closes onfy when
breohTr *ripped (rom I'vercurrent
Undervoiioge du.i.u

^ Contact closed -nei. urealcer it open c< de- r.e
is de-energized |"b" switch) ^

Contact open when breohcr is open or device
CTO
CS

• OPERATIOt4

Is de-energized ("o" switch)
Conloct closed when CS is operative

b)
e)
d)
e)
0-

Elecn-ic control switch (stolion)

Red Icmp, indicatus closed

G Green lomp, Indlcotcs open
Electric control trip eonfoct
Electric control closing eontoct
Trip coil
.
Closing coil (solenoid).
Control reloy

Control twitch CS/C cloicd.

Contro! relay Xcloses xj.ord xj which teolt-in Xthrough xj and resistcnce.
Closing coll CC closes which cfosEt the brcoher.
During closing the brcolccr mcchnnicoliy opens xj end X2 so Xdrops outi

^ eokrY Is in closed position, x^ end xj orr incc

J front coil of X.

When brcoker is tripped, xj cr.d xj recouplc to Xpr.,vided Xisnot energized,

-.•iViS-i-o;..''.

''.'AV'-''?-:,:

thereby assuring no pumping,

'
NOTE:

These connection drogroms ere rypicol ond for information only. Actuol
instollotions rr.oy cii'fer ronsideioisly'according to' specificotion. ALWAYS
USE THE CcRTiFlfO PRINT rCH .VtAKING CONNECTIO.NS.

Note: When bell ola'm is used omit

fP-m

lead from 3 of auxiliary Switch to
drowoul tei minol 9 and odd new ieods
05 shown.

SELL ALARM CONNECTIONS
for ELECTRICAL RESET from
Shurl Trip circuit ond rnechotiicol reset from handle.

I- • ••'•I

:i '

This scheme for d-c shuni trip.
' It requires modtficotioi) for o-c.
BELL

P- -"v"''I•? ••-V.v'''Y-

Fig.23-F0RM S (.ieffj.-i
DUALOVERCURRENT

I.I 20

TRIP DEVICE- 600 crfip

AUXILIARY SWITCH orid TERMINALS
JNOEftVOLTAGE DEVICE

2—1 Fig. 24-FORM A (right)
dualOVERCURRENt

ofOropout VoUoge

^Device Normal

raise dropout
' vice rsrso)

Wit/] Cover removed, showing

^''^•••1

i-lI

instanraneous pickup
adjustment

Undervolioge Device 31

y
'VOtTAGF orvirr
ArronQement for Trip ond Reset,
^—T— Solid lines of De^rice shQw Reset Position

•

federal electric PRODUCTS CO
SD PARIS STHEET wewxan HI USA...

TYPE DMB CIRCUIT BREAKER

DATE

"t'

;

''?,'£s -ao\'tjrc'ioN niAGRAMs

SrJt.-S', W'-

Rt^EWAL PART^'&ATALoe APJD
M'AINTENANCE INSTRUCTiONS

Federal Pacific
TYPE DM3 15-T
Air Circuit Breakers
January I960

RENEWAL PARTS DAtA •v-'f:>

Renewal F^rts Data wi ll provide you witli the proper Wentificatiphrof those Ren^^
..•. ^•V;..'',v >' may require in the maititif^ance of your Federal Pacific eQuipmE^t ' .

i .

which you

., •

't 'S desirable to forecast as accurately as possible yoUr requirema^ts for Renewal Parts to -^s-ur-^ fhrt ^

• SiSSs'S.S'S"'

- oniricManS

The recommendations .or stock are tiic minimum quantities that should be.a^liabie for servici'io thi'

equipm^L f^el Lrot you are in a better position tlian v/e to decide how much you wish b inv^s!
Renewal Par.s. ine importance of minimizing shut-dovro Urnedue to possible break-down^ no -/t
(ogefiier. with uw- dislarice from source of supply and transportation facriities; should bo c^ot .d.n'ed Ion,
n

ed by'
i^s-.co.-i.,.i...ied
i

you when orcienng renewai parts.

WiraUis anftik

,, u.ia„

'nrjine

1. Obtain the complete'namepla'te feadirig of the

, apparahis for whfch the part is deslrea.

jSh'/yo"-'}

2. Turn to tiie Apparatus index and with the name-'plate reading find the page' humbe'r. of the

-. • .1^, •

Renewal Parts Data sheet,

where tlie desired part is d^cribed and
IdcnL'fied.
y^t

•:S^y

ordering INSTRUCTIONS

ilEifJwS, ;;Fl^'iJiS

" t"

,nd adrnt tho p,,,. Oivi it. cmolct, ddmcpte,

ll lu apparafus.

'' ''-i''"; W""'F«' -.d.=d,L Scvu. llL ,=
••-' '•'I "a„, C.d c„„.p,,d..c,, Sdi l„, p,p. ,, ,p.

(iKt your

•v^i i i - ' • r'-'yi'

. *o'i2ge to be .applied'to'breaker as indicated;

IIMS ^J!' "S''^

, , r- ••

•

lo be 1680 vofts, 60 cycle (field test)

circuits and grpuna/ahtf;nwSinirtil^W^ conbcts

Alarm,.seeBreak^
item ll.
shoul(?

''''' pushed upward breaker should not close '

" ••''•'I'A

.-HC • .

i= ^p.ssudjc
breaker shuuS trip frs^ beibra brp
V-^^ • ,,• 1

breaker w trip-|e\i^nioving ifveor genfe^

^ W) Electrical Operation

'48 volt DC •
250 volt DC
115 volt AC
230 volt AC
460 volt.AC

UndervoltogO

trip

24 volt DC
125 volt DC

;
•

'V.;A'A:v.28^(id:v;g

90-130
180-260
95-125
.190-250
380-500

•v..

'. -_','u> •

Less than

•90-130 , •; : 70-140 •
180-260 '
140-260
•A .

Reset

• 95-125

' - . 190-250•
• . , 380-500

.l inve delay 3 to4
-• -Cl)
.CD .lime
to 4 seconds.

^tikerii dosed!

, ; .

./. A

.Xe) If Bell Alarm is supplied refer to'I ten 11. ' • V^: —. •

•;V-.

'•

;: ,oA

switch 3or 4;tio-r^ 'while',

'"•

"- '• '(M

'-0

'fuii r.?-;ai-;;,ui rinc^

"'rCna-.iC^r.or eiecfrk faiiuro. Special aUenii: ,j v:> ,i(.

one end and cotter pins"are bpenfi°"'

•lit-

are in place, springs are net

. W) Trip roo insulation shouifinotsiip
. ":
:.. • (e) Insulation on shafts should not be scratched. '.

• i-'. ;.?>•

(6) ' ConJocv Prossuro

•'

,...:y

.j|)v?&ip:brpakerWitivb»e^u„^
... •y:i-.'V,sk

.,'u • .•-•.; .••••"•.'

^
• "
V-Gi) HntinQ
100
125

^;,i5Q

•'

9v:.y i :ci:up
r^;o Trip

i ;ip V(i:-ii in
Ti.ioe (3) Mihcftcs

SpST^'icItup
Coil Rating.

WiV, ;*•'.• v-i-J: » •

•C-

.:•

V•}, '[J-yr-:-:
.;;.*v. .'

V -,». -.- --rj^.-^v'

I -a /' •••"^!::i$' •

. ^:s"£?sat

•••• J'f ' •
.M'l
':12^'

•.•••'.';•••-t^li.;..

•

t." i"^rr C'f; ;

• ' -i.U •••<-. V . .

..^,v:-i-: o, ,v

. .rj,.. v , j •

on vhis (is? VnoScr .:! Mcni.:- c-JvI;

♦

Ciccii^

tERS

Those Parts Ai'e fllostrorted/See Figure 2 I

Solenoid Assembly 125V DC .

•

•;,*.VjV r. •: :.•-;
:

Solenoid Assembly 250V DC •
VIA - Solenoid Coil 125V DC . •
Solenoid Cor! 250V DC

Vv-v&VV 2

. *•

- Top Auxiliary Switch

Undervoltags Device 250V DC Instantaneous

.- '• d'; 1151-0952'.

• V--V^-1152-0952^v:V;:j •i'*> "i f*
. VV "'V-'A.'';.- • , • . ; • 1153-0952bV yy$y'§§.
'

;d ; .I151-b693;y. j
il6ld54iA ?:

;

Il54d757 .
.

Shunt Irip Assembly 250V DC or ^uGVAC

Vy,

;iV'" .

15 - Shunt-Trip Assemblv 48V DC or 115V AG ' •
'
.
Shunt Jrip Assernbly 125V DC or 230V AC ' •. '

ISA - Time Delay Assembly used with Undervoltage .peyic^V,' •
14 - Handle

099-007
039-004 ..

. • .

.1 t|ndervoltage.OeVicf 125V D^

V,:;:- .;-V V16- - Control Relay Assembly 125V DC Continuous Duty

. C o n i r o l Relay Assembly 250V DC Continuous Duly

Conifo .Relay Ass-eniily 115V;AC Continuous Duty-V • Control Relay Assembly 220V AC Coiitinuous Duly •
'Cori -oi Kelay Assembly 440V Ad Continuous Duty
16A-dontrol Relay Cpver;

13 ; - Undervoltage Device 115V AC Instantaneous

•

"d' • 1101-0589 .

;-Av-'; ; "---iV-r •

10 - Arcing Tip (Movable)
11 - Arcitig.Tip (Stat.)
12 —4-Point Secondary Contacts (breaker) •

•V-;V,

024-012

099-004- y

9- -Jj-Point Secondary Confacts.(cell)

1101-0499

Bell Alarni Switch (N.C.) '

v-V.

" ydKy-y-y'

'1159-0581
: U51-0973

y =; ; 2701-Glll'
dV^vv y; B4-()01 A

•

5 —Breaker. Grounding Contact
.6 . —5;0hm Resistor
7. —400 Ohrri Reisisfdr

*•;

1152-0951

4 , —Basket Assernbly 225 Anip. (4 fingers)

—Bell Alarm Switch (N.O.) '

'VV'~
Auxiliary Sv/itch Assembly
/j:V 2B - Auxiliary Switch Front Cover •
";-?Ar';'V ^ 20 —Auxiliary Switch Rear Cover
^ —Arc Chute Assembly
•VV;'. ••

•

. 1158-0791: ':VA,;'7.y;y:d
•"
1159-079T' •; :'A.;rA;V;
• v , :ii&6-0791 V

1168-0791 d;. Vd::,;|A:d'V

' X •V;.'''dvF ,'vA^A:y;ddlpl;.o59^y;•;: •IV VJ.riSld: •
•''."-'".'-''-v V : - " '.-A.';/''.''' y..

or'ic :: :."r-.-no'vai 'ptj.-ts civs type ''V V.'e-1.!;,- -wr.a sc-rini

r.l'ov.T, on nopcplcte of brooker.

•li:51rl3T2
.IIOI7IO43

,. Indicalbf Wameplate. Assembly

Coil Spring

V •••••. =r ^

mWl74

Negator Spring
• Connacttng Strap
•

Connc'ctino Strap
Moldecl Faceplate
, . Auxiliary Shaft Support
Shaft Auxiliary,
• Clutch Tubing •!;

12 V

-vr

:•.: ••^

Ind'oa'or Pvelainer •

F::Rf9i:::F%o-

1101-0960

vrr'--r,W

Intllcalor Pivot Shaft.

...
. •.'i
V;-^, ;v,-;
••;,• • « •••;'.,

: >/..-iV;,
..v.- •
- •../•»-I'

•{•V

•
•:.

;::77O9iOnR0''''- . • •

'' • • • ' - ' '
; •••
,: •••
•• • •

Pin .-e'e; "-;
,' •;
pin , , E -i'"
_•

,37;"

••,>;•.
;'-I'i'i•
• •?-

J;,..: . ..

Mark "Q" Assembly (completei. ;•

•31. •.i'
K'i-v-iV . ?• v-

• - cji' : . :.. a: .: •.;r'>f-i;:

•I-?''!'

22
-

•

• '••i^66i;i^rrh;:...

... Ass'emb
............
, Coup!ing Lever
ly

20
•21

'':v: !

;

;;Link Rod • •:• ^- v ^

1?
V:tr

" :"V -

1101-0311

^/Cam Welded.:A^^mb1y:.• ••

®?R«coiiH.iGn<:iL"d'Spore Ports,'See Page 7-,.

:]T0i-bi71
H1SM328';,S;:3'
•

. : '•'

•.

' . . 1" '

•;>; r.
' ••-%'J'
^ A>.;'

Handle Spacer
Coil Spacer
Lever Assembly

Lever Weld Assembly
Angle and Stud Assembly

ViAuxijlary ShaftSupport: ~:

58'

,,>in;> •-•

1101:0474
•./ • •

c-./1101:0340::
•
, .

Conbct & Ffexifale Connector

Square Shaft Assembly
Compression Spring .

Leading Insulator
,
Arcing Contact Assembly •'•

Upper Terminal

Lower Terminal Block
,i .,

. 110i:p445;,
llQl-0332^

;• 1101-.0423
: 1101-0539

' '

Trip Bar Irisulation
Plato

. ii01-05"40 •

• Trip Lever

76;'

10 - 32 X1/2 Ig. rd, hd; nyfon screw
: 10 —32 X1-1/8 ig. rd. hd. nyibnscrew

'.V

. p:;.; TTrip Lever Assembly
'• .'ijii-Rod

110t4}^2:.,
'VCiisiMo'
1151^741:;
1101-0431

.iiowm3^

• :ilbl-0432 "'•

Cup K Frame
Clamp K Frame '

•.'•s-.Vf'-'K
•
»* * .' ..4i

Rea r Ro j.ler V/eI Ass embly'
Guide Roller V/elded Assembly

V •;••'

•

. Lever Base Assembly
'Retaining Ring ;
Lever Base Spring

/ 1' A.'^^iT'Xli01-b343 ':;Ax'

- yX-Xi'ifT'XX

'V •.••»• XT"- •-. ..Iipi;;034.4 ,v •>'.

.-V-

•

X X .1151-0612 •.;
•1151-0613 ,

iibLte \tt:|XXa
. 1101-1023 ••;-.XtA.;-.

Ii5i4qp8v,-.XTXXTXXA vxX,3|f
id2-ob6:' .•'•'X-^

Xuis^imXx'T -x • •
'-'XT;AX'; •.n-'r.
v rr-T15MC^'
.toi-iuj/ ^•' . X • • ^
•., -.XXA

AhxP'-At- -.'x-xv
•a: vX'-;-.

•Xv;«aat-:A. . ' •A.x.X:

X .'T-'-'L
-X

• X'A XXXxX:Xxx-x-:,x' • .
.,Xx--a;x':x,.xx
^

./AT;; '
• -A':,..
....

-•

,• .

• •

•--^•:XASXX..AAXX---X.;T.:X^i
X.--'--'XAT'..XX,...X.' ?
.X-.''

-X'. ' •iXXXyA^i .. uX' i-;''

.XX.0Xy

xXxfxxxxnA''
'."x.
/-vv- -- ry;v- .

Trip Trigger.
Secondary Contact Support Weld;. Assembly
: • . 1151-0756 '
X tii^oVabfe.Contact Assembly AX;XA X; • ..X ^ • jlsLos^L ' ^

IIZ
V1 V

ilOirto •X::3X AX-X-' .••••XXr

Basket Assembly .X-X
Brass Tubing

...
, v.,A.
• .-T-iXT'

' 1101-102.5

. X' yShdulder Screw '

' Spring^

'•••"xT,X

1101rl0.il

• ;; ^rip Rod-V/eld Asisembly

yyL Spring Support
-'• -i- '
105
Spring
\'- r;:'
106 •
• • Basket Washer

•i/;T-llOl-0504 XXXf X
• ' . .1101-1111- . •

V, ; Locking Pin • .. .•. •

Can-iage Plate V/elded Assembly

- ^ •-•XyXX« •I'l ».*-. i .
vvLv;-

.'xfexXxXxxXgxA;'#
..X'X.

Lorig Island City, NewYork
.Los Angeles, Califorhia ,

Atlanta, Georgia
Boston, Massnchusotts

Chicago, Illinois

Newark, New Jersey

Clcvoland, Onio

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania ^

Oaiias, Texas

St Louis,'Missouri.

Santa Clara, California

'Scrantbh, Pennsylvania :

•. * l-

Seattle,-Washington
• Toronto, Ontario, Canada

Vancouver, 8. C., Canada

Granby, Quebec,iQanada

FUSLiJ OFFiiC
Akron, Ohio

Hafrisburg. Ponnsylvariia

Albiiqusrque.'Nev; Me^Jco

l-!artford, Connecticut

Philadelphiai Pennsylvania
Phoeriix, Arizona

Armdale, Halifax. Nova Sco' ia Havana, Cuba

•,/Mf

A'Jr'r.ia, Georgia

Houston, Texas

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

Baltimore, Maryland

Indianapolis, Indiana-

Portland, Oregon

Birmirigh'am, Alabama

Kansas City, Missouri '
Knoxvilie, Tennessee; ; -.

Readirtgi Pennsylvania

Boca Raton, Florida,

Rich.mpnd, Virginia.

Boise, Idaho'

Little .Rock. Arkansas v. • . i c ,Rocherfer,"Newj^Yor^

Buffalo, New York

Long island City, New, York ^Saginaw, Wlchi^n;:
Longmeadow, Massachusetts St. Louisvii^issourj' ••jf

Calgary, Alberta. Canada

Los Angeles, California

Charlotte, North Carolina

Lo.uisviUe, Kentucky - ' , . :

Chicago, lillnois

Lubbock, Texas

Cincinnati. .Ohio
Cleveland, Ohio

Memphis, Tennessee-V'';
Mexico City, O.F., ;Mexico

Columbia, South Carolina .

Miami, Florida

Columbus. Ohio

Milwaukee, Wisconsin^

Corpus ChfistI, Texas .

Minneapolis,. Minnesota'

Dallas, Texas

Montreal, Q-ucbec, Canada ,'. Shreveport, Louisiana

. Boston, Massachusetts

;St. pkersburg,'Flbri'da . '
SaitLake City, Utah .

•;'

Santui^cai Puerto Rjcd
Gcrantoii,, Perinsylvania'

, Seattle,: V/ashingtoh

Nashville, Tennessee ' v ,' ., Spokane, Washington
Mov/ark, New Jersey • •

Sy.-acuse, New York '

Detroit, Michigan

New Orleans, Loulsiaria

Toronto, Ontario, Canada •

Edmonton. Alheaa, Canada

Griand Rapids. Michigan

Tuisa, Okiahonia
:
r' :,
New Yorki New York ,'
Norfolk,.Virginia •
• ' Vancouver, B. C., Cariada ;;.
Oklahortia; City, Oklahorria..' .Washipgton, Dv C.v', ..''
Omaiia. Nebraska
•
•Wichitai^Kansas•
Ormond Beach. Florida..' !''..Winnipeg, .Manitoba; C'anadi

Greensboro, North Carolina

Pcnsacola, Florida 1 'F :

port Vo'th, Texas

San Francisco, California :.-

Eltharh, London, England

•v

-'si

' ' Peoria, lllitiols,.':

v..

E='/\i©,ii F=i O'
G e N E R A L -O-r I C.E S : S CJ

PARIS

E^is.ECT'ft
S T R-E E T,

RATINiCS. DIMENSIONS, PACKAGING—STANDARD SIZES
[

ECN.l
ECN.IS
ECN.2
ECN.3

"EfNlVr'
ECM •
Ef":; 'i

ECS<.5'":.
BCS5.0' • ;

ECH30 .
ECN3S
ECMO
Ecms

MIDGET FUSES—Dimensions! Overall length, 1Vi"j Cap diameter 13/32".
I

240 VOLTS
MEN.l
.VEN.15

MEN.S'
MEN.8
MFNl.O
V;N:.;25

Carton quantity; 10
I

RATINGS, DIMENSIONS, PACKAGINO—STANDARD SIZES
I

US2SQ
LES300
US35I3
LESiOO

• ;X X#-X:X X'.
-/xv-x.^
:.ev-.^'ivl'rxXX-TxXX
-:eX
''' V.v-.-'.r;.-

•'

•- " y.:--'.' \. ,; - •

. X;-.xx-ti-e;?VeX^y. .-•-•-X?:X-X'-~
-IX-

^,x-^xx-™:.•:•

mmm'mVemmtmgisMf> •,i-•«•: v^Sr: Sho

••
- ;••;,•,
h 3. Turn to the indicated Renewa!;Parts Data Sheet

-i:

where" the desired part is described and
identified.
.
; •

V .

. '

ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS .

Give the Pnrf // or other iricntifyin^ itcrrnxrp end name-tlio port. Givo'the complefc numcplatc redding 6f:the cipparotus.
State wh'^ i'T shiprnent is dosircH l;y f-eicjhl, cxprc?ir», or by pcrce! post. For mainrenoncc Service contact your
noorest Fi £ oalcs Office to whorn you should iicnd all orders and correspondence:- See last pogc of hook for
addresser, of FPE Solos Office-

i'Qlx iViM-> .•,.1 - ! ; Avl'>'

aLIJi i i"i'iM::.f:,A:~f<':> , ;>

(i) Piolocfric Test

• •^
•^

• , (3)1 Voltage to be 1650 volts, 60 cycle (field test). • • • • • • • ,
Voltages wi ll .be applied for one(1) minute without arcing.. .'•
Voltage in be applied to breaker as indicated;
V

.If.
•

1).

coniacis ciosea voltage 10 be appjied between phase and ground and between phases.

'• y-.y.. 2- with contacts open voltage to be applied between line and load termihWls,ahd:^^^
;

•

and load terminafs and ground.

3 - voltage to be applied between controrcircuits and ground, and line.tenainals Ay^^^
.-./closed.

(a) -Bre?.!.?.: will be msnually closed and opened no less than iv/snty-five (25) b'lties,- BrGa!- r

b'tnri, .•landle sho'i'ri .'eiurii to

pcsiticn.

(b) I'V-lts btsake-f is supplleci wiln a Bell Aiar.-.i, see item 11.

(a) V/itiV trip bar pushed upward breaker should not close. ;;

, /V

y ;, (b); ,lf drawout breaker carriage locking handle is depressed the breaker should trip ffee;-before%e;

/:r';«!;'Pln'-releas.es' tj^.ker-.jfrdm.cell.
. :
f-p,
Ccl.' Tnp breaker wJth' tfip lever, movirrg itVery gentlyhr . r

' sYY/ y:-.'

. ,(4) ElectircaI Operation • • •

Electrical accessorieswill operate satisfactony for at ledst five (5) operations with maximum and
minimum voltages as given in following chart. = /-f ,
, • v' ;/

tb) Items to be checked are solenoid control relay, shunt trip and underydltage trip.whlth should •
; operate satisfaclpry in the rangedf voltages shown.
Control Devices

I'f .r/A',-^s^voit'bc-

• 115 volt AC i •
230 volt AC

••

•

thsn
jiBiss than

.'28-60';:
90-130
180-260

346^69:
;A;-:69-i38 /•:;

92'
184

(c) Undervoltage frip shall operate between 30-60/O of voltage rating dnd'mechanjcally.reset uridf^rvoltage trips ihall seal in at SOS of rated voiLiC t.fsee table 4b)f•/•i//'
' v

W** t,

, (1)'.Tinie delay 3..tO:4:.second3.

•

pP':pp'::'Y.-P'.

/ /"i

: .(e) If 3,d(l.;^lafnris'5up|^^

hefefito 11^.'11. . ' •

' y

.• :i'

Anti-pump feature of breaker shall be checked by operating cloSihgfswrtpiii/S orJl'times^^
breaker is.ciosedf. ,-'/

• . (5) Yrsui! Inspoctioa
r

ffv.; •yy'Yp,

(a) •Breaker will
'ill be inspected for signs of mechanical or electrical fa Iipira. Special dttenli on should be

;ee that retaining rings and E-rings on contncls/.etc., are in place,, sprin^/ere not- '
; :-..given, to see

' . v/.->

'».»

oi; ..

•••:•.•. .;.v! ..; It. r-1 •'..•!'i..-iol ".cf-.i? -ifcing tip cr» .-••ijfi'flr v.hi-r. r-rcina

vjr-vnrcj.

v .-

(d) Trip rod insulation should not slip.

Insulation.on shafts.should not be scratched.

•

} h:'''''':i /

( 6) Contact Pressure

. i'/,*' I

i»•.*

(a) Toleranceon pressure to be + or -.10%.
( 7)' Contact Sequence

•

' '

f'M,'

.. (a) DiM8 25-lT contact sequence.

V^v;

•

(1) Arcing, contacts touch. Gap between main contacts should be,appro^irnately.*i/8 incli - it is
important to'keep.gap at mis partof closing as great as pQSsfble;^!:^:^
• "
12) f/iain contacts close.

(3) When main cor.iacts arc- completely closed arcing contacts should be open no more Uian
1/16 inch.

{ $) Contact Spoc.ing,& Angles

(a) DMB 25-lT (f^efer to Figure #1.)
,, (1) Breaker open..
•.

•'

•
' r;

(a) 1-1/8 betweei center line ofmovable main contact and stationary contact;
. (2)..-Breaker closed
'
.
"(a) 1/32--3/32 between arcing tips.

•

':Wy%

x..--. .Wv
•'

(-9) ;Cfiec!;'af'CoJibrotton;6f .Coilrofter Assembly in Circuit Breaker .• / '

v'-tl;-v'.!

v'
"i.

fa)'Long Unie delay
.
•>: . . ..
v.- :
;v;:=;
l.-.Set;indicator to 80i% an(f pass 110% pick-up current indicated in ,table-mrough each cpiL ..r^^^
'^rrentshoiiid not be allowed to drop off. Trippihg'wiH occur^n tJifeeT3). minuiesv:_ ; W; ;
• 2ASet.current at;90% pick-up current indicated in;tab)e.-Gear:in. trip unit sh6Uld,hpl;rndve; -: : ';,:v;t^^^

X. ' 3;>;Reset calibration position of overCurrent trip unit to currentivaiue G^re^^ndihigf to'br^

•; -^reiting unlesis otherwisespecified, betbre turning breaker over.for shipmeht.^;iv4^W;k"^^ br-?•'
.••1
,y. I i . ,
-VCib) Kirk
Key. Interlock
' '

(a) V/hen lock-is. installed on breaker check for followmg;

/ 'X' -

operated
operated hfeaker, switch
switch should
should be opened.
opened. .
2 - \Vith breaker closed key cannot be renidved.

•.•.r-iW'- •

-VV

.1—With breaker,open turn key and remove.. Key should not stick in loCk^jf electrically •

(11) Bclj Alarm

(a) Trip breakef:;matiu'ally. Bell alarm should not operate.
.
' "X
(b) Trip breaker witJvsliunt trip or undervoltnge, if supplied on breaker. Bell aflarm shouidi. • ,
nr»f operate.
nnorafo "
not

Coil RoHr.j
100
• 125
150

"rip V/jThin
Three (3) Minutes

..V25fr'„., ; /;
:30b:^

I: ,
1'••in ••':V.';l):.

- V: r/G. • •'•7 '\VDM3

25-IT WITH

arcing tips
TOUGHING,

'h •
"-• • fV ••
•M
• • •-•

. ,'. .V-{;•;••'/ .'• v .-''jIV I J*-":".

••^ fy.r".' •' " ' 'r?!!^^•••''E. ••'-v '

i-4p'444 •
•'.; •Y/yiil*'- I'i.' 'r''-''

..vcrv.- ••.-V-..'»^: .• :• .• • • V" r-V-TV^^.;;-.

-iwl

• !t.?£i5AJ -,'
.'r-.'."<—»

••••,.;v.')4<;

.•4 4^^

-.-yVA r 4-44:!--4^i,
'
;• .-"y •. •

• *" ' . J." .•• V*''

r^riH'-'

•i^l'-?vf;-'.»S \U.
• • t-'f -.y-^v

y'y.y^:4.,i,-r;

( Figure 2) , ',

• ' . -J'.V - ''
•A
ti.

i"i .:^: ••• ;^(: '-•M*
:5';}r '

• ...

......^ .

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR DMB 25-lT BREAKERS

•

•Those ports are illustrctod. See Figure 2 -; ^

r 1 • - So lenp.id Assembly 125V DC
Solenb.id i^sembly 250V DC
lA - Solenoid.Coil 125V DC .

^^•1151-0968
,1152-0968

;• .1158-0581

Solenoid Coil 250V DC
•

•

—Bottom Auxiliary Switch Assembly

2A
2B
2G
3

-Top Auxilian,/Sv/itch
—Auxiliary Switch Front Cover
—Auxiliary Switch Rear Co'ver
—Arc Chute Assembly

•1159-0581

;

/"727P1-0111';
•

- Basket assembly 600 Amp. (6 fingers)

.5
Break^ Grounding Contact •
6 "r 5 Ohth'-Resistor•
' v.

1152-0951
1151-0973 :
024-012 ,

7 v —.406 Ghm Resist^^^
8. ' -"Bell Alarm Switch (N.O.)^F
Bell Aiaftri Svvitch (N.C.) '
9 -4-Point Secondary Contacts'(cell)
- '• : .

12 :, - 4-Point Secondary Contacts (breaker)

• undsrvoitage.DeVice230V AC Instantaneous
• undervoitage Device 125V DC Instantaneous

1152-0952
1153-0952

•

^
DC Continuous butv^ . j-vonlrol Relay Assembly 250V DC CDriijnuous Dut\'
.Rsiay. Assembly 115V AC Contimious Duly

• Contro Relay Assembly 220V, AC C^.nfihuous Duty '
: Control Relay Assembly 440V AC Continuous Duty
16A - {Control Relay Cover •

.. '-1 • ;•••

'•••.,*

•7Sf:'7siliS
cV-:.;

,^'1101^0580 •
•115^57.

15 - Shunt-Trip Assembly /fSV DC or li5V AC
. 3hunt Trip Assembly 250V DC or'460V AC • '
;4>JV;,''"v V-.,i • .-

• .v;

: ,U54-0952

13A - Time.Delay Assembly used v/ith Undervol.tagp, pevicd
—Handle

1151-0670

Undervoitage Device 250V DC Instantaneous

""-Bk

• r

' •

• 13 - Undervoltage Device 115V AC Instantaneous

•

77'

2751-0068:'::'•:

10 —ArdngTip (Movable) : ,

•llv_-;Arcing-tip7stat)
•;'•.= ^-* 'f\K "

,039-003:.' 'c,;-: 7

•:v.;.

7-.

1156-0757
1158-0791
• • •1159:-0791
1166-0791

••"-•-v.-,-7'77:77
•-7".^'.77 77

::7;:'7.7--f7,
i
•'-'-••A.

v.A'--''..--- y'-.'-" ••

>. •

•"••'^ x:; ' ; ..• •
r, f

• H fU-' ;;i

type c.; •
i>.;,.>i• '-r
bsx-nker.

••• n; r.-.X'ji siitiwi; -.-j

undXorioI

*' Re=c
Lover Case Spring
Carriage Lever

, :;..-^d;'c^l5I-06n-V

•1151-0613'

: 1151-0697
1101-0018
1101-0019

Carriage Plate Y/elded Assembly

,1151-0918

• '••••'iionni'

RfilcDse Rod
Trio Rod Guide

''"iJ'-; .'.•'••••.•r.i; '•'•••

Trip Rod V/eld Ass.embly
SpringSup[x)rl

Secondary Contact Support V/eld, Assembly

•: 102-006

.•••; 1101-0173
• -.v.: ;.1101-1280;

Basket Assembly . ,
Brass Tubing
Trip Trigger

**113

.,:lici-1022

',1101-1025

Spring
Locking Pin
Stop Pin

Movable Contact Assembly

Long Island City, NewYork

Boslon, Massachusetts

Los Angeles, California

Santa Clara; California
.;Scrant6n,'Pfennsylvanla

Chicago, IllinoisClcveJancl, Ohio

Nev/ark, New Jersey
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

Dallas, Toxas

St Louis, Missouri

,, battle/ Vfashingtori ,"
iTdrohtO; Ontario, Canada
.Vancouver;;S. C,,;Oanad[a

Granby, Quebec', Canada

1:.

FgB:E.„D OFFIGiHS - <
Akron, Ohio

.Harrisburg, Pennsylvania

Peoria, Illinois

Albuquerque, New Mexico
Hartford, Connecticut
Armdale, Halifax, Nova Scotia Havana, Cuba

^ l'
'i '• - •)'
.,
•}'.••-^r ;
••••• ••
,
.- . •

Baltimore, Maryland
Biriifilngham; Alabdnia'

Indianapolis, Indiana.
Kansas City, Missouri

Philadeiphla^lrPennsylvatrfa
Phoenix, Ariipna ' ;;
Pittsburgh,'Pennsyfvariia

•Portland; Ore^ri ;'; .. ,;

•r/

fiteadingrlpanns^lv^

Boca Raton," Florida •

Knoxyille, Tennessee'

Boise, Idaho
Boston, Massachusetts

Little Rock, Arkansas
v./' :Roche^e,r,'N^"Yp^^^ '
Long Island'City, New York
Sagfr)aW,|Mr6higanN: :•;

Buffalo, New York

Lorigmeadow, Massachusetts St. Lp.uis,.Missouri •

Calgary, Alberta, Canada

Los Angeles. California

.LouisvjilB, Kentucky

Cincinnati, Ohio

Memphis, Tennessee

jBian Frapcisco^.Califbi^

Mexico, "city, D.F.,'Mexico':

Jsyntiago|5lCtii|e •
Santurde, Puert^^^

ir'

Coiiimbia, South Caroiina

Miami, Florida •

Columbus. Ohio

Milwaukee, Wisconsin

Corpus Christi, Texas

Minneapolis, Minnesota •
Montreal, Quebec,,Canada

Dallas, Texas

• 1

.V-iCl?:

Scrantdri. jPennsyivanid, :

:•

•'.vv.

/ ss-:-1,

•Shrevepiart, t'ouisian^^ •'

Spokane^ Woshihgtoh

Nev/ark. New Jersey

Syracuse, NewiYork -

New Orleans, Louisiana

.Torohtb, bhtarip, Canada

Edmonton. Alberta. Canada

New York, New York

Tulsa, Oklahoma : . , • :
Vancouver, B. C., 'Canadii'
. y/ashington.
;Wichira',.KUneas-^^;

;• . • Norfolk, Virginia

Elfham, London. England

Oklahoma City, Oklahorna

Fort Worth, Texas :,: -

Omaha, Neb'- -ka '

Ormond Beach. Florida
Pcnsacola, Florida .

h'r

Seattlei'washlh^btif • : '

Nashville, Tennessee'

Grand Rapids, Michigan
. Greensboro, North Carolina

San Antohioi Texas. •

Dayton, Ohio
Denver, Co'orado .
Detroit, Michigan

El Paso,-Texas . -'i;

• St, •Petersburg.. Florida. •

Charlotte, North Carolina
Chicago, Illinois

Wihnlpeg;:'jf,iariitpbei'^

'•Ak.

C. 'V-'"
•

igj e E.N ERAL OFFI,C ES: S O PA,R 1S :s T'R EET, ,N, EV"/A RK:,. i",. "N;^ W, J

' F^riNDA/TXL PARTS'C/IS^^LOS AMD

Z.ZJ MAiMTEMANCE INSfRUCTlOMS

TYPE DMB 50-T
Air Circuit Breakers
January 19©0

This Renewal Parts Data will provide you with the proper identirication of those Renev^al Parts wnich vou
may require in the maintenance of your Federal Pacific equipment.

.i.

It Is desirable to forecast as accurately as possible your requirements for Renev/al Parts to assure that
the necessary parts and materials will be available when needed to keep your equipment in efficient and
continuous operating condition.

The recommendations for stock are the minimum quantities that should be available for servicing this

equipment We feel that you are in a better position than we to decide how much you wish to invest in

Renewal Parts. The importance of miniini^iiig shut-dGv\n time due to possible break-downs in operation
together witli the distance from source of supply and transportation facilities, should be considered by'
you when ordering renewal parts.

Maintain the maximum operating characteristics of your appaialus and its dependability by using genuine
Federal Pacific Renewal Parts.

The services of FPE engineers and Customer Service Ceniets areavaiiabie to help with your main
tenance problems.

•••

PROCEDURE FOR IDENTIFYING RENEWAL PARTS

1. Obtain liie complete nameplate reading of the

-v- .''"'V "'-'

apparatus for which the part is desired.
•'•'V • '- C:

2. Turn to the Apparatus index and with the nameplate reading find the page numbei of the
Renewal Parts Data Sheet

..-;p

3. Turn to tne indicated Renewal Parts Data Sheet'
where the desired part is described and

•.

.r-

identified.

ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS

Give the Port » ot other identifying number ond nome rhe port. Give the eomplcre namcploro reading ofthe oppoiorua.
toto vvhether shipment is desired by freight, express, or by parcel post. For mointononce Service contoct your neoreat

• • ;

Sales Office to whom you should send all orders end correspondence. Sec lost page of book foroddress uf
FPE Solos Office.

SUGGESTED MAlNTHMAHeE PROCEDURE
FOR DMB 50-T AiR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(1) Dicloctric Test

(a) Voltage to be 1550 volts, 60 cycle (field test)..
(b) Voltages will be applied fot one (1) minute without arcing.
(c) Voltage to be applied to breaker as intiicated;

1-wilh contacts closed voltage to be applied between phase and ground and between phases.
2-with contacts open voltage to be applied between line and load terminals and between line and
load terminals and grcund.

3-voltage to be applied-betv/een control circuits and ground, and. line terminals with contacts
closed,
' X'

(2) Manual Operation

(a) Breaker will be manually closed and opened no (ess than twenty-five (25) times. Breaker shall not
bind, handle should return to normal position.
(b) If the breaker is supplied with a Bell Alarm, see item 11.
(c) Trip breaker,by manually activating shunt trip. Breaker should trip before plunger reaches end of
its travel.

(3) Trip Free Operation

(a) With trip bar pushed upward breaker should not close.

(b) If drawout breaker carriage locking handle is depressed the breaker should trip free, before the pin
releases breaker frorti cell.

(a) Electrical eccessories v/ill operate satisfactory for at least five (5) operations with maximum and
minimum voltage as gjven in following chart.

(b) Items to be checked are solenoid control relay, shunt trip and undervoltage trip which should
operate satisfactory in the range of voltage shown.
Rated Control

Control Devices

Solenoid

Shunt Trip

Voltage
24
48
125
250
115
230
460

volt
volt
volt
volt
volt
volt
volt

95-125
190-250
380-500

14-30
28-60
70-140
140-260

95-125
190-250
380-500

Reset

Less than
37.5-75
75-150

(c) Undervoltage trip shall operate betwee.n 30-60% of voltage rating aiid mechanically resetunder
voltage trips shall seal in at 80% of rated voltage (see table 4 b).
(1) T'r.c delay 3 to 4 seconds.

(d) Anti-pump feature of breaker shall be checked by operating closing sv/itch 3 or 4 times while
breaker is closed.
• •.
(e) If Bell Alarm is supplied refer to item 11.
r;;'

, -r':'

Vir.:JoI inspection

(a) Breaker will be inspected for signs of incchanical or electricai

Special attention shoulfl

be given to see that retaining rings and £-,rings on cqnLacls, etc., are in place, springs are not
•unhooked on one end and colter pins are opened.

•

.n'
-

DMB 50-T
CONTACT DATA

U , j ; ^ : 1 si 'V
^ l.^ Ud
tj
..;

f«i

1101-0059

•T-' ""V- H'.Pw'";-.',
•••

• r's t •/i'-rjAf'

RENEWAL. PARTS- FOR .DMB -50-T (Con-nnired)•

'•jm
JTEM
129
•DO
-V.

Pin Support fot Spring.

-FL.AWTS
Atianta, Gcoigia

Long Island City, N«.w VorK

Santa Clara, California

Boston, Massachusetts

l.ns Angeles, California

Scranton, Pennsylvania

Chicago, lllirois.. - ... .

Newark, New Jersey •.

Seattle, Washincton

Cleveland, Ohio

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

Toronto, Ontario, Canada

Dallas, Texjs

St. Louis, Missouri

Vancouver, B. C., Canada

Granby, Quetjec, Canada

FIELD OFFICES
Akron, Ohio
Harrisburg. Pennsjlraniu
Albuquerque, New Mexico
Hartiord, Conueciiicut
Armdale, Halifax, Nova Scotiaa Havana, Cuba
Atlanta, Georgia
Houston, Texas
Baltimore. Ma.'yisnd
Indianapolis, lndiai><,
Birmingham, Alabama
Kansas City, Missouri
Boca Raton, Florida
Knoxvllle, Tennessee

Phoenix, Arizona

Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania

Portland, Oregon
Reading, Pennsylvania
Richmond, Virginia

Boise. Idaho

Little Rock; Arkansas

Rcchsster, New York

Boston, Massachusetts

Long island City, New York

Ssginaw, Michigan

' Buffalo, New York

Calgary, Alberta, Canada

Lcngnioadov/, Massacnusctts 'St. Louis, Missouri Los Angeles. California
St. Petersburg, Florida

Charlotte, North Carolina

San Francisco, California

Cleveland, Ohio

Mexico City, D.F., Mexico

Santiago, Chile

Columbia, South Carolina

Miami, Florida

Sanlurce, Puerto Rico

Columbus, Ohio

Milwaukee, Wisconsin

Scranton, Pennsylvania

Corpus Chrlsti, Texas

Minneapolis, Minnesota

Seattle. Washington

Dallas, Texas

Montreal, Quebec, Canada

Shreveport. Louisiana

Dayton, Ohio

^ Dp.nvBr, Colorado.

Peorla, Illinois

Philadelphia, Pennsylvania

Nashville, Tennessee

., Newark,. New.Jersey

Spokane, V/ashlngton

. Syracuse, New. Yqrk

Detroit, Michigan

New Orleans, Louisiana

Toronto, Ontario, Canada

Edmonton, Alberta, Canada
El Paso, Texas

New York, New York

Tulsa, Oklahoma

Norfolk, Virginia

Vancouver, B, C.. Canada

Eltham, London, England

i
Oklahoma
City, Oklahoma

Grand Rapids, Michigan

(Ormoncj Beacn, rTunua

V/innipeg, Manitoba, Canada

Greensboro. Nortr: Carolina

1Pensacola, Florida

Lv' » s.

ELHCTR8C

.jjQENERAL OFPICES: oO PARIS STREET. NEWARK 1, NEW JERSEY

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TYPE DST-2 SKV & 15KV
MAGNETIC AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

IN-820.11 DATED APRIL, 1972

150 AVENUE L,NEWARK, NEW JERSEY 07101

PRINTED IN U,8.A.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I- GENERAL INFORMATION

1. Introduction
1.1
Foreword
1.2
General Description
1.3
Construction
1.4

3
3
4
4

Features

2. Shipping
3. Inspection
4. Storage Prior to Installation

4
5
5

5. Installation

5.1
5.2
5.3

Preliminary Operations
Safety Precautions
Mechanical Checking

5
5
5

5.4

Installation

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
5.6
5.7

Lifting
Arc-chute Fitting
Racking Operations
Manual Checking of Operating Mechanism
Electrical Checking of Operating Mechanism

5
5
6
7
7

PART II - GENERAL MAINTENANCE

6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
62

Periodical Inspection
Arc-chute Inspection
Arcing Contact Inspection
Replacement and Adjustmentof Arcing Contacts
Main Contact Inspection
Main Contact Replacement
Operating Mechanism Maintenance

7
7
7
7
8
8
8

PART III - DETAILED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

7. Operating Mechanism
7.1
Characteristics
72
Principles of Operation
7.2.1 Breaker Open-ClosingSprings Discharged
7.2.2 Breaker Open-Closing Springs Charged
7.2.3 Breaker Closed with Closing Springs Discharged
7.2.4 Breaker Closedwith Springs Charged
7.3
Troubleshooting
7.3.1

The Breaker Cannot be Closed

7.3.2
7.3.3
7.4
7.4.1

Problem with the Spring Charging Motor or inthe Chain
The BreakerCannot be Opened Electrically
Checksand Adjustments
Adjustmentof the Closing SpringMechanical Lock

7.4.2
7.4.3

Checkingthe Trip Bar for Breaker Opening
Checking the Closing Release for Closing the Breaker

7.4.4

9
8
8-11
9
8
11
11
11
11

11
11-12
12
12
12
12

Adjustment of the Clearance between the Ratchet Pawl and

the Sprocket Wheel to Prevent Overstressing the Pitch Chain

PART IV - APPENDIX

7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8

Fitting, Replacement and Adjustment of the Trip Latch
Replacement of the Closing Spring
Hydrauiic Shock Absorber
Fitting the Operating Mechanism to the Breaker

13
13
13
14

8. Schedule of Maintenance

9. Operating Time & Contact Velocities
10. Control Power Requirements
11. Wiring Diagrams: ACclose;DCclose

Refer to IN-820.4A for metal-clad switchgear installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
\

PART I — General Information
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 FOREWORD

Metal Clad Switchgeaf, and othertype Electrical Apparatus

Federal Pacific Electric Company apparatus is built to the
highest standard of quality to insure continuous reliable

are as follows;

(a) Cleaning of cells with low pressure air or vacuum.
(b) Inspection of cell bushings, cable connections and

service with a minimum of maintenance. Some routine

preventative maintenance is, however, required on semi

bus joint connections.

annual or annual basis in accordance with the various uses

of the product It is suggested that, due to the precision
craftsmanship involved in the construction of this appa

components.

ratus, no attempts (with the exception of few minor
adjustments) should be made by the customer to fix or
adjust clearances.

(d) 2500 Volt DC M^erTests and DC Hi-pot Tests for,

Should the need occur, the Field Service Department of the

Time Delay.
(f) 5KV and I5KV circuit breaker electrical and mech

Insulation Reliability.

(e) Protective Relay Calibration Tests for Response and

Power Equipment Systems Division of Federal Pacific

Electric Company is equipped to assist you with any
maintenance or repair which may be required throughout
the anticipated longlifeof this equipment.
FPE "On-Site Test Facilities" are available to you. This
service includes engineering inspection and testing of elec
trical equipment planned to supplement yourregular main
tenance program, to improve equipment reliability and to
protect your investment. Such services, for MetalEnclosed,

anical operating checks coordinated with relay
response.

(g) Transformer oil or askarel dielectric Hi-pot Tests
(also on minimum oil breakers and tank typo oil
breakers).

For further information regarding service, please contact
the Manager of Field Service Department at Newark, New
Jersey.

SkV 75,150 and 250IMVA CIRCUIT BREAKER
Figure 1

1.2 GENERAU DESCRIPTION (Figure 1)

The DST-2 Magnetic Air Circuit Breaker is electrically .
operated, horizontal drawout for use in indoor and outdoor

1.4 DST-2 FEATURES (Ffe JirntessorAcnvisenofet/;

It is designed for international application and service;
therefore, the dimensional daU isgiven in both the metric
and English systems. The hardware is based on the metric

All breakers are equipped with the following parts and

It is composed of three separate poles supported by a
welded steel frame (1) and provided with wheels (2j so it
can be easily moved in and out of its cell.
Each pole consists of two separate parts:

(a) Arc-chute (4) - isa chamber filled with ceramic baffles.

provisions.

(1) Arc-chutes (4)
(2) Barrier (1, Fig.2)

(3) 5 Unit auxiliary switch with 2"a" and 2"b" extra
contacts (1, Fig. 5). Other types available upon
request.

(4) Lockout switch. (Blocks closing and motor circuits)
(17)

It has a magnetic structure that forces thearc intoconstric
tions provided by the baffling. The magnetic field is

(5) Latch check switch (2,Fig. 5)

quick extinction of the arc.

(7) "Y" relay (5, Fig. 5)

(b) Contact unit - is made upof the main contacts, fixed
(6) and moving (9) and the arcing contacts, fixed (7) and

(9) Charging motor (4, Fig. 5)

generated by coils (5) within the arc chute. Cooling and
elongation of the arc within the baffle structure forces

moving (10).

Themain contacts, of silver plated copper, carry the normal
service current. They are not affected by the interruption
since they open before the arcingcontacts separate.

(6) Mechanical operation counter (counts trip operations)
(18)

(8) TC trip solenoid and 52X close solenoid (3,Fig. 5)
(10) Mechanical indication of"Charged" and "Discharged"
(11) Mechanical indication of "Open" and "Closed" (20)
(12) Mechanical indication of"Charged" and "Discharged"
(19)

The fixed and moving arcing contacts are made with

(13) Mechanical drawout interlock (prevents movement of

interrupting high short circuit current without damage.
The puffer nozzles (8) arelocated under the fixed contacts.
The moving contact group is operated by the shaft 1),
through insulated links (12). The metal frame is grounded

(14) Mechanical interlock discharges closing spring when

tungsten-copper arc resistant inlays and are capable of

personnel.

metal-clad switchgear.

^stem.

breaker, covers the live parts providing protection to

through the groundcontacts(16).
A welded sheet steel front barrier is grounded thus assuring

"•safety to operating peisoimel. The contact structures are
separated by insulated interphase barriers.
Tlie breaker can be either manually operatedby means of a
knob(13) or remotely operated.
The motor charged spring closing mechanism (3) is espe

breakerin or out of cell with contactsclosed) (14)

inserting or removing breaker from celL

(15) Padlock provision. (Lock breaker tripped with pedal
down or lock to prevent raddng in or out with pedal
up-(14)

(16) Provision for manual charging ofsprings (21)
(17) Manual trip —dose control knob (13)
(18) Automatic Secondary contacts in "Cormected" posi
tion (22)

(19) Manually operated secondary contacts in 'Test"
position.

cially designed for medium volt^e circuit breakers. It is
completely enclosed for safety and dirtexclusioiL

(20) Meehanism is medianically and electrically trip free.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION

2 SHIPPING

The DST-2 is a drawout type breaker. It is built to allow
<>a«» of ntaintenance and operation. The breaker isavailable
complete with cell or for insertion intoa metal-dad breaker

All circuit breakers are assembled and tested for optimum

cell.The breaker can be positioned as follows:

one crate. The 5kV 350 MVA and 15kV circuit brewers are
shipped in two crates. The basic circuit breaker on its truck

1."Connected" position —where primary andsecondary
disconnects are automatically connected.

2. "Test" position("Isolated" position) - whereprimary
disconnects are disconnected and secondary discon

nects can be manuallyconnectedor disconnected.
3. Removed from the cell by operating the "racking in"
lever. It is provided with a pedal operated interloddng
device(14).
The circuit breaker is fitted with springloaded, self aligning

primary disconnects which ei^ge the stationary studs
mounted in insulating bushings in the cell (15).
¥nien the breaker is in 'Test Position" or drawn out of the

cell, the cell shutter, operated by racking action of the

performance in the factory before shipment. The 5kV 250

MVA circuit breaker is shipped completely assembled in

with interphase barrier is in one crate. The three arc chutes
arepacked in a second crate.
The serial nutiiber of each drcuit breaker is on its

nameplate. It is also stenciled on both breaker frame and
operating medianism frame as indicated in(24, Fig. 1). The
cratesare markedwith the factory order number.

A copy of the packing list, endosed in a waterproof
envelope is nailed on the outside of the drcuit breaker
crate. Only onq envelope is furnished with orders for more

than one circuit breaker shippedto a single destination.
Each circuit breaker, in its crate, is enclosed in a polyethyelene dust-and-moisture-proof bag.

3 INSPECTION
UPON RECEIPT OF SHIPMENT
When a shipment of circuit breakers is received, each crate
should be examined before it is removed from the railroad

car or truck. If any damage or indication of rough handling
is evident, a description of the condition should be written
on the frei^t bill, a claimshould be filed against the carrier
immediately, and notice of the extent of damage sent
without delay to Federal Pacific ElectricCo. at the address
from which shipment was made, givingserial number of the
breaker, the carrier's name, and the car number if shipped
by raiL This information enables the company to supply
needed information to assist the purchaser in support of the
daim. (See 6.1.1)

4 STORAGE
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
A breaker can be safely stored provided that the following
instructions are observed:

(a) Handle the breaker with the utmost care, lift circuit
breaker less arc diutes using a hoist or amilar means

and attach the sling hooks to the holes on the sides
of the breaker. The S and ISkV circuit breakers

witti arc chutes are lifted by fitting the sling under
the wheel channels and securing top to prevent
tipping.

(b) Upon receipt of the breaker an inspection should be
made. The circuit breaker should be stored,

(a) Check the alignment between the ground contact
(16, Fig. 1) and the grounding blade located on the
cell floor.

(b) Insure that the arc chutes are properly connected.
(c) Check the main and secondary electrical
connections.

(d) Never rack the breaker into the "Operate" position
without the arc chutes and interphase barriers prop
erly installed.
5.3 MECHANICAL CHECKING

Each drcuit breaker is carefully inspected and operated at
the plant before sliipment; yet it is advisable to carry out
some closing and opening operations before putting a
breaker into service. For detailed inspection remove arc
chutes and interpliase barriers and follow the instructions
for "Manual Checking of Operating Mechanism" (Section
5.6).
5.4 INSTALLATION

5.4.1 Lifting

Lifting is to be done as described in Section 4 (a). Handle
the breaker with the utmost care, lift it using a hoist or

similar means. Inspectfor breakage. (See6.1.1)
5.4.2 Arc chute Fitting (Fig. 2)
5kV 350 and 15lcV Arc Chute Mounting
Arc chutes are shipped separately from circuit breaker and
must be mounted before installation. Arc chute return

connection and arc chute must be positioned as follows:

"Opened" and "Discharged", in its original shipping

container. The ISkV and SkV 350 arc routes
should be stored in the original shipping crate.

(c) Keep the breakers in a dry place, protected against
dust and chemical agents, preferably in cells with
cell or auxiliary heaters energized.

5 INSTALLATION
5.1 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS

Before setting a breaker into operation, the following
operations should be carried out:

(a) Carefully clean all parts of the breaker with a dry
cloth.

(b) Check the condition of contacts and terminals. The
main contacts are coated with a thin layer of
contact lubricant. If the main contacts are dirty
they should be cleaned with acetone and sparingly
relubricated with FPE #1551 A 5853 contact

grease. The terminals and arcing contacts should be
cleaned with acetone. The three moving arcing
contacts must dose and open simultaneously. See
section 6.13, Page 7 for adjustment specification.
Tighten all the parts listed in Appendix 8 under
"Maintenance to be carried out."

5.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following checks should be made before putting a
breaker into service.

SkV 75, ISO AND 250 MVA

Figum2a

It is imperative that arc chute return connection is securely
against arc chute support plate. Check that both nuts are
tight affording a good electrical connection.
Before fitting the arc chutes on the ISkV circuit breaker or
5kV 350, make sure there is no foreign matter inside them.

It is imperative that the arc chute return connection is
securely against arc chute support bracket. Checkthat both
nuts are tight affording a good electrical connection.

5.5 RACKING OPERATIONS (Fig. 3a, 3b, 3c)

(a) Roll the breaker on the rails using handling dolly

Then:

(a) Remove screws (2) and remove the interphase bar
rier (1).

(b) Lift arc chute with liftingyoke (Page 18) and fit the
conductor pin (3) into saddles (4). Arc chute lifting
station is provided in aisle units.
(c) Rotate the arc chute downwards until plates (6) are
fitted to stud (7).

(d) Fix the arc chute by means of nuts on studs (7),
making sure that the connector (8) is assembled
outside of the plates (6). See Fig. 2b and 2c.
ArtChtitt

©support
plates

and check that it moves freely.

(b) Move the breaker to the "Test" poation using the
raddng lever,as shownin Figure3a. Shift leverback
and forth until you hear the clicking sound of the
lock engaging the interlock rail. Lockout switch,
(3), must be reset if operating circuit breaker in
"Test" position is desired.
(c) To continue racking, repeat the preceding oper
ations after releasing the interlock bar (1) by press
ing the pedal (2). Trip the circuit brealmr before
pressing the intertock pedaL Reset the lockout
switch each time after pressing interlock pedal to
peimit electrical operation.
(d) To rack the breaker out; place the lever as diown in
Fig. 3b and perform the same operations as above.

VWastier
Wadwr

Front Are

Chute Support

Nuts adjustod to
width of support
plates.

5kV, 75,150 and 250 Arc Chute Mounting
Arc chutes are shipped already assembled to circuit breaker.
In the event of arc chute removal, the arc chute return

connection and arc chute must be positioned as follows:
Figure 3a

5.6 MANUAL CHECKING OF OPERATING

MECHANISM (Circuit Breaker Out of Cell)
Giarge the closing springs by means of manual charging
handle, then close and trip the breaker manually. Check
mechanical operation of the mechanism. The breaker

diould operate smoothly and freely without any indication
of binding.
Check that the control voltage agrees with the breaker

nameplate and is within the limits specified in Appendix
10.

It is suggested that several mechanical closing and opening
operations be performed.

5.7 CHECKING ELECTRICAL OPERATION
OF MECHANISM

The circuit breaker may be electrically operated safely in
the cell in the "Test" position. Move the breaker in the cell
until the interlock bar drops into the first notch. This is tlte
Test" position. The shutter should remain down isolating
the breaker from the hi^ voltage bus. The secondary
circuit is completed by manually pushing the secondary

contact operating handle (right side of breaker frame) all
the way in (22, Fig. 1). Reset the lockout switch (17, Fig.
1) by lifting the toggle handle. Close and trip the breaker
several times from the control switch. After each closing

operation the motor will recharge the closingsprings.

PART II — General Maintenance
6.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION
A schedule for maintenance of a breaker in service is

included in Appendix No. 8. In addition to the listed
operation it is recommended to carefully clean the breaker
at least every six months.
The contacts and arc chutes should be frequently and
carefully inspected, as instructed in 6.1.1 — 6.1.5, if the

breaker has been subjected to frequent operations on shortcircuits or overload.

Appendix No. 8 indicates the maximum number of oper
ations the breaker should be expected to perform without
replacement of the contacts.

6.1.3 Replacement anil Adjusting of Arcing
Contact (Figure 4}

Draw the breaker out, remove the interphase barrier and arc
chutes (Fig. 2). Replace the arcing contacts as followsr
(a) Open the breaker and discharge the closing springs.

The breaker, and in particular the operating mechanism,

(b) 5kV 250, 350 and 15kV 750 MVA - Remove nut

should be ^quently inspected if the breaker has been

from contact pivot pin and remove pin. Remove
spring pin retainer and spring pin. Remove 2 shunt

subjected to dust or corrosive industrial atmospheres.

6.1.1 Arc Chute Inspection (Figure!)
Draw the breaker out, remove the safety barrier (1) as
instructed in 5.4.2, loosen the nuts of studs (7), rotate the

arc chutes approximately 45° backward one at a time by
rotating aroimd pins (3) then check the conditions of the
arc chute plates.

If any breakages or flaws on arc chutes or ceramicplatesor
burning on blow-out coils are found, it is advisable to
replace the arc chute. Replacement arc chutes may be

ordered direct from the factory, by contacting Switchgear
Marketing, Newark, New Jersey.

screws and remove moving arcing contact. Install
new contact in reverse procedure.
ISkV 500 - Remove 3 studs securing moving arcing
contact to the blades. Install new contact making

certain that nuts are securely tightened.
(c) Remove stationary arcing contact springs (5) (Fig.
4b and 4c) by removing adjusting nuts and stud.
Remove upper shunt screw. Remove arcing contact
assembly, remount shunt onto new arcing contacts
and install in reverse procedure.
(d) Adjust the moving arcing contact, makingsure that
all 3 poles close simultaneously and fixed to moving
main contact gap as arcing contacts touch: 5kV 250

= 8 ± I'mm (.32 ± .04 in.); 5kV 350 = 4 ± 1mm

6.1.2 Arcing Contact Inspection
Draw the breaker out, remove the interphase barrier and arc
diutes.

The arcing contacts should be reasonably clean, without
pits and deformations. Small pits can be filed without

modifying the shape of the contacts. In normal use, when
cunents of approximately the rated value are being inter
rupted, the arcing contacts might be slightly worn; replace
ment, however, is uimecessary.
In more severeservice when appreciable wear is noticed, the
arcing contacts should be replaced as described in 6.13.

(.160 ± .04 in.); 15 kV = 11 if mm (.44

in.).

Contacts may be slowly closed using the mainte
nance bar (23, Fig. 1) for the 5kV breaker, and

"Maintenance Close De^" (Page 19) for the 15kV
breaker. '

(e) Close the breaker (Fig. 4c) and adjust the length of
springs (5) to 11mm (.44 inch) for 15kV 500 and
14.5mm (37 inch) for other ratings.
(f) Open and close the breaker several times to check
mechaiucal operation.

(g) Remount the arc chutes and the interphase barrier
as instructed in 5.4.2.

aoHd" Portion

Optn Position

6kV 75,150,250 AND 350, AND 15kV TCO
Fq|ura4b

Rguro4a

6.1.4 Main Contact Inspection
Draw the breaker out, remove the interphase barrier, and

tilt the arc chute back approximately 45° one at a time.
Inspect the main contacts making sure they are in good
condition and see that the face of the contact is coated

lightly with FPE #1551 A 5853 Contact Lubricant. Use
only minute quantity. Since these contacts do not break
any current they diould not be pitted or burnt.
(See Appendix 8 for the number of operations the main
contact ican withstand before replacement is necessary.)
15kV500MVA
>•11 lOAnm

6.1.5 Main Contact Replacing
Drawthe breaker out, remove the interphasebarrier and arc

diutes. Replace the main contacts asfollows: (Fig. 4d)
(a) Open the breaker and disdiatge the closing springs.
(b) Remove the spring by mi^wing the lockout and
removing the adjusting screw.Remove main contact.
Irtstall new contacts in reverse procedure. NOTE:
New self lockingnut should be used.

Atl other ratings:

(A3t.02in.) jmci

14.5±0L5mm

MINIMUM CLEARANCE WITH

Loefcnut

CONTACTS ENQAGEO -

(S7±.020in.)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE WITH

CONTACTS ENGAGED - .25inin (.01 in.)
ARCING CONTACTS

Figure 4c

.25(nm (.01 in.)

lOiOAnm

(A0i.020iii.)
MAIN CONTACTS

Figure 4d

To check contact alignment, use maintenance close handles
(see Accessories Section).

6.2 OPERATING MECHANISM MAINTENANCE
(Figure 9a and 9b)

The operating mechanism is suppliedthoroughly lubricated
and does not need any special care during its lifetime. It is,
however, advisable to clean it carefully after every 2000

Primary Disconnect inspection

Check primary disconnect Angers to assure that they are
positioned in a circle, not bent, and clean of residue.

operations or once a year, whichever comes Arst.
The cleaning should be done by means of a paint brush

Secondary Disconnect Inspection

drenched with acetone or other similar solvent with the

Check molded contact assembly and moving carriage assem

breaker "Open" and springs "Discharged".
The links, levers, pins and chain drive mechanismshould be
lubricated with good quality light greaseSAE Grade I.

bly to assure they they are not damaged and that the
contact pins are not bent.

SPRING CHARGING MOTOR (4)

LATCH SWITCH (2)

AUXILIARY SWITCH (11
(TO SHUNT TRIP
OR

(52X1'CLOSE
ASSEMBLY (3)
y RELAY ASSEMBLY (5)

FIguraS

Maintenance Procedure

PART III 7 OPERATING MECHANISM

(TYPE "AEM")

7.2 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

The operating positionsof the mechanism are described and
diown in the following pages.

7.2.1 Breaker Open-Closing Springs (1) Distdiarged
7.1 CHARACTERISTICS

The dosing springs of the operating mechanism are charged
by the motor. The spring charging time is approximately 10
seconds.

The medianism performs the following cycles:
(a) Starting with the breaker open and springs charged:
CO

TC —

Where: CO is a "C^ose-Open" operation
TC is the Spring charging time
(b) Starting with the breaker closed and springs
charged:

(Figure 6a)
The breaker is in this posiAon after eadi "Close-Open"
^cle before recharging.This is a transient position.

7.2.2 Breaker Opoi - ClosingSprings (1) Charged
(Figure 6b)

This is the usual operating position of the open breaker.
The sprii^ can be charged as follows: (Fig. 6a).
(a) Manual Charging.
Turn the shaft (3) half a turn clockwise usingthe crank
(2). This corresponds to complete charging of the

springs. When the shaft (3) isrotated,it drives the shaft

Where: O is an "Open" operation

(S) by means of the ctmin (4). The shaft, being con
nected to lever (6) through connecting rod
and

t is the reset time

crank,(8) causes, in its turn, the duuging of the springs.

•t —CO^—TC — C O

BREAKER OPEN: CLOSING SPRINGS DISCHARGED

0000Q

• /

FigunSa

BREAKER CLOSED: CLOSING SPRINGS CHARGED

BREAKER OPEN: CLOSING a>RINGS CHARGED

FIguraSd

FIguraSb

BREAKER CLOSED: CLOSING SPRINGS DISCHARGED

At the end of this motion the trip latch assumes the
latch position.
When fully chaiged, the primaiy closing latch (13) is
held rixed by the secondary closing latch (IS) on shaft
(16) by means of bearing (14) assuring the springs aie
kept charged. The sprocket wheel(17) is then free from
ratchet (18) and idles. The breaker will not close if
springs(1) are not completely charged.
Although the ^ring charging can be done manually as
described above, the usual procedure is to perform this
operation by means of a motor.

7.2.4 Breaker Closed with Springs Charged
(Figure6d)
This is the usual operating position of the dosed breaker.
The trip operation can be performed as follows:
(a) Manually, by rotating knob (23).
(b) Remote, through the shunt trip.
7.3 TROUBLE SHOOTING
7.3.1 When the Breaker Cannot be Closed

This may be due to the following:

(a) Looseness of the eccentric (6, Fig. 7) - adjust as

(b) Motor Charging.
When motor (19) is energized, it rotates camshaft (20)
through the reduction gear (21); the clutches (22) are
actiuted in sudi a way as to charge the springs in the
same way it is done manually (see 6a).
If during the operation, the voltage supply fails, the
motor is always in a position to continue charging once
the power is restored. Charging can of course be

instructed in 7.4.1.

(b)Warpage of the trip rod (8, Fig. 7) — check as
instructed in 7.42.

(c) Wear of lever (7, Fig. 7, Page 10). —This trouble is
very uncommon and may occur after a number of
operations much greater than that recommended.
The lever (7) is to be replaced at our plant or by an

continued manually, if necessary.

7.2.3 Breaker Closed with
Discharged (Figfare6c)

FPE Field Service Engineer.

Closing

(d) Clearance between the ratdiet pawl (3, Fig. 8) and
the sprocket wheel (4, Fig, 8) is different from the
prescribed dearance. —See 7.4.4 for adjustment.

Springs

This is a transient state for the breaker. It occurs whenever

the breaker is closed and before the springs are recharged.
The breaker mechanism is changed to this position as

7.3.2 Problem with the Spring Cherging Motor or
in the Chain (16) (Figures)
This happens if the clearance between the ratchet pawl (3)

follows:

The shaft (16) is rotated either by the electrical close
operation or manuaUy with knob (23).

and the sprodcet wheel is incorrect. See 7.4.4 for
adjustment.

The latch(13) is released and springs (1) rotate the lever
(6) counter-clockwise. This drives the shaft (25)

7.3.3 The Breaker Cannot be Opened Electrically
This may be due to the auxiliary circuit not being dosed.

dockwise through lever(11) and trip link and doses the
breaker.

Verify the circuits and their connection to the switchgear

7.4.3 Checking the Closing Release (7) for Closing

termina] blocks.

the Breaker (Figure 8J
With breaker open and sprinp discharged:
(a) Check for free movement of closing release bar (7)
and make sure that when it is in the stop position,

7.4 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENT

the right end of lever (6) is stopped by the slot (9)

7.4.1 Adjustment of the Closing Spring Mechani
cal Lock (Figure 7)
Since this adjustment is to be made with the breaker closed,
the eccentric (6, Fig. 7) should first be locked by tightening
screw (I) in such a way as to position the lobe opposite the
pin (7); then, with the breaker closed and springs

in the dividing plate.

(b) Roller (5) should engage lever (6) with a minimum
overlap of l.Smm (.06 inch).

7.4.4 Adjustment of the Clearance between the
Ratchet Pawl (3) and the Sprocket Wheel (4)
to prevent undue stresses to the Chain or to
the Spring Charging Motor (Figure8)

discharged, perform the following operations:

(a) Loosen screw (1) slightly.
(b) Turn knob (2) counter-clockwise until the clearance
between the lever (3) and the pin (4) of trip bar (S)
is between 0 and .04 inch (0 and .1 mm).
(c) Rotate the eccentric (6) until it is touching pin (7)
of knob (2); lock it in this position by tightening the
screw (t).

Starting horn spring "Discharged" (1) position, rotate the

diaft (2) half a turn clockwise, whii^ corresponds to the

full closiiig spring charging.
The ratchet, pawl (3) must clear the sprocket wheel (4) at

the instant when ^e bearing (5) presses against the upper
part of lever (6) of closing release bar (7), thus assuring the
spriitg"Charged" position.
If the ratchet pawl (3) clears the sprodcet wheel (4) before
the bearing (5) presseson the lever (6), the closing springs
(1) are not completely charged and the breaker carmot be

7.4.2 Checking the Trip Bar (8) for Opening the
Breaker (Figure 7)
When the breaker is closed, the clearance between the pin
(9) of the trip lever (10) and the trip rod (8) actuated by
the knob (2) is to be 3 to 4mm (.12 to .16 in.). Should thh

dosed.

If, on the other hand, the ratchet pawl (3) clears the
^rocket vdieel (4) after the bearing (S) has pressedon the
lever (6), the pitch chain (16) would be subjected to undue

^^clearance be less, the pin (9) would hit the trip bar (8) thus
tripping the breaker.

stresses and the motor would be excessively overloaded.

Therefore, it is necessary to check that:

Therefore, with the springs in "Charged" position, the
dearance between the ratchet pawl (3) and the sprodcet'
vdieel (4) must be 4 ±.Smm(.16 ±.02 inch). This is set by

(a) The trip bar (8) is not warped and is not held
upward by foreign matter.
(b)That the pins (11) are provided with washers and

adjusti^ the eccentric (8) fixed tothe base plate toget the

dearance required.
The mwual diarge crank will override if an operator
continues to charge after the mechariism is fiiUy vg 9w •nay

^9«7i9 ArfMf 0f>^>W7aMt

9U 'J«

wtfvA/ry

OMOOV

g^o0'9'00^\
iw<«<
MOrfftvO 3UVU3ftX ZJSO

l>co«rg '9K9fim*m'i

^9MmfU^^9CT JOmMS ywffit/WP
•r

'jiwa'amia'jy^
(•II til iiagw»»^m»w

sf^»mm •JMW w a w *9 w

umnwufy ww .mil
wa»»t "OW

<--S«!SV«S5^
a/wiryytr
•SSTfiiaS

ps/XM^Hsr 90
St079 U**nNf

*»-«»' «^; ^'j" '.»,' rf.

Standard and Optional Accessories
SPRING CHARGING CRANK

DWG. NO. 1551 A 5539 (Standard)
2. Rotate until ratcheting ceases. The closing springs arc
then charged.

1. Attach crank to square shaft at front,left of mechanism.

(2)
CRANK

RACKING HANDLE,
DWG. NO. 2251 B 5412 (Standard)

RACK OUT

RACK IN

2. If circuit breaker is in either test or operating position,

1. With circuit breaker on rails of cell, attach racking handle

depress pedal (14, Fig. 1) and rack. Rackingfrom other
positions does not require depressing of the pedaL

in accordance with above diagram.

HANDLING DOLLY

DWG. NO. 2254 C 4327 (Optional)
LEVER

1. Position dolly against left side of rackinghandle engage
ment block and with lifting angle under frame.
2. Rotate lever by pressing on r^t side until circuit
breaker front wheels are off the ground.

HANDLING DOLLY

ORCUIT BREAKER
FRONT CHANNEL

3. Circuit breaker couldnowbe pushed in any direction.
ORCUIT BREAKER

4. Disengi^e by pressing on left side and then allowing lever

WHEELS

to rotate upw^.

TRANSFER TRUCK

^.^or outdoor non-walk-in Sand ISkV switchgear.

owe. NO. 2251 C 4842 (Standard)

HANOUNQ DOLLY

1. Position wheel below circuit breaker racking block with

dolly handle up.
2. Lower handle to approximate position as shown.
3. Circuit breaker' could now be pushed in any direction
by turning handle.

ENQAGEMENT^IN
CIRCUIT BREAKER

FRONT WHEEL

5kV ARC CHUTE LIFTING YOKE, DWG. NO. 1552 B 5597

^kV ARC CHUTE LIFTING YOKE, DWG. NO. 1551 B5597

(Standard)
1. Attach arc chute lifting yoke and tighten damping

€-50R1SkV
ARCCHUTE

screws securely.

2. Lift by means of lifting hook or sling at point "A"; arc
chute will swing at proper angle for removing or
assembling on to circuit breaker.
FRONT

REAR

5kV MAINTENANCE CLOSE HANDLE DWG. NO. 1551 B 5628

(Standard)
MAIN SHAFT

1. Attach handle to main shaft as shown.

2. Rotate downwards until contacts touch and inspect

ROTATE TO
CLOSE CONTACTS

contact sequence.

REAR OF FRAME

ISkV MAINTENANCE CLOSE,
DWG. NO. 1551 C 5820 (Standaitl)

TEST jumper; DWG. NO. 2251 C 4509 (Optional)

ACCELERATING
SPRING

jmijm

CIRCUIT BREAKER
TERMINAL

COMPRESS LJ

CELL TERMINAL

1. With circuit breaker near the ceil, insert one end of the

1. Attach handle to extension of accelerating spring as

jumper to the circuit breaker secondary disconnect

shown.

terminal.

2. Compress accelerating springby turning handle COW.
3. Rotate contact blades by hand and inspect contact

2. Insert the other end to the cell secondary disconnect
terminal. The circuit breaker could now be tested

sequence.

electrically from switch on instrument door.

TEST CABINET ASS'Y DWG. NO. 2251 D 4340 (Optional)

1. With the circuit breaker removed from the cell and

moved near the test cabinet, insert one end of the test

jumper to the circuit breaker.
2. Cormect the other end to the Test Cabinet secondary

disconnect terminal. The circuit breaker can now be

tested electrically from the test cabinet.

APPENDIX 13

TABLE OF SPARE PARTS FOR BREAKER SERIES OST-2
Typical part numbers shown. Breaker Serial Numbers must be
givenwhen ordering replacement parts.
Sketch

TABLE OF SPARE PARTS FOR BREAKER SERIES OST-2
Sketch

15kV500MVA1200A
15kV750MVA 1200A

lSkV500&750MVA
2000Aand3000A

5kV250MVA2DOOA
5kV35DMVA
1200 & 2000A
15kV 750 MVA 2000A

Leading Finger for
Moving Contact

1556D5641

1557D5641
7

Fixed Aidng

5kv250MVA
1200A
5kV350MVA3000A
15kV750MVA
1200 & 3000A

250 MVA, 350 MVA.
andl5kV750MVA

TABIE OF SPARE PARTS FOR BREAKER SERIES DST-2
No.

Arcing Contact
Spring

250MVA,350MVA,
andl5kV750MVA

5kV350,1200,
2000& 3000A

15kV,750-3000A

Mechanism
1553 B 6044

5kV 250,1200 &2000A
15kVS00,1200 & 2000A

1ABLE OF SPARE PARTS FOR BREAKER SERIES OST-2
No.

Shunt Trip Assembly
115/230VAC
CAP. TRIP.

Basicbreaker is equipped
with 5 unit aux. switch

which provides "2a"and"2b*'
spare contacts. It is not
necessary to spediy this

switch on breaker orders.
7 Unit aux. switch with

Sa & Sb spare contacts.

Convertible contact

bl3-bl4 is adjustable
with infinite resolution.
8 unit aux. switch with

6a & 6b spare contacts.
Lockout Switch

Basicbreaker is equipped
with 2 pole lodcout switch
used for internal control.

AC Charging
1501 A 5592

It is not necessary to

Motor

Applications

specify this switi^ on
breaker order.

DC Charging
Lockout switch with one

additional spare contact.

1502 A 5592

Motor

Applications

1ABLE OF SPARE PARTS FOR RREAKER SERIES OST-2
No.

16 Contact Blodc if req'd.

5kV350
3000A
&15kV500
or 750
3000A

Quantity for
1 Breaker

bS^

"-S-JL
Secondary
Disconnect

Contact Assembly
with 24 contacts

INSTRUCTIONS FOR
INSTALLATION

>ERAI-

PACIFIC

Type DST 5&15 KV
Magnetic Air
Circuit Breakers
IN. DST
November 1959

' •».
-•

m bottom
comer.

(b) Adjust by varying spacers in latch.
2. Adjust prop to roller.

position of the roller is altered, it breaks the
connection between these parts, and the main
shaft is then free to move to the open position.

(a) Tangent point 1/8". Same as closing-lever.
(b) Adjust by castle-nut on prop spring guide." '

The roller is held in its fixed relationship to the
moving pans by the latch assembly.

3. Adjust solenoid travel.
(a) Close breaker manually.

Depressing ihe magnet armature releases the
latch, allowing the two internal toggles to collapse

(b) Push solenoid plunger until it hits lightly
against closing lever and frip-frae roller.
(c) Gap between brass washers and solenoid

and thus release the roller from its relatively
fixed position.

back plate 3/32"-1/8". (over-travel)
(d) Adjust by changing shims inside plunger.

During a normal closing operation this latch
linkage remains firm, allowing the solenoid and
closing lever to rotate the main shaft all the way
to its closed position. At this point a prop snaps
into place engaging the latch roller and holding
the main shaft in the closed position. Simultane
ously, the solenoid cut-off switch operates to deenergize the solenoid, and, after the necessary
decay of current, the solenoid and closing lever
return to their initial position leaving the operating
shaft in the closed position as held by the roller
and the prop.

4. Over-travel stop adjustment. Adjust so that:
(a) Mechanism cannot go over dead center.
(b) Puffer piston does not hit rear spacer tubes.

(d) Gap between stop and main shaft should be at
least 1/8" minimum when breaker is closed.
CautionI A check should be then made (manu
ally) to insure that this adjustment does not
allow the mechanism to lock on dead center.

5. Solenoid back-travel check.

4 - Mechanism Adjustments

(a) Space between closing lever and roller,
when circuit breaker is open, should be
1/16" to 1/8".
(b) SKV only - Projection of solenoid plunger

The most important adjustment of the mechanism
is that of the roller. The tangent point between
the roller and the flat surface it rests against
should be approximately 1/8" from the lower cor

beyond breaker frame 1-1/4" maximum,

ner of the flat surface. There are two such flat

Latch Adjustment

4. Piston should not hit tubular spaces in back.

1. Latch armature engagement with segment,

Shock Absorber

(a) 1/16"to 5/64".

1. Should be lubricated inside with Lubriplate or

2. Gap between armature and segment when latch is
unloaded 1/16" to 3/32 ".

equivalent.

2. Orifice size selected will permit 10% bounce or
normal opening. Trip-free opening will have more
bounce (approximately 25%).

3. Adjust magnet frame to allow 1/32" to 1/16 " over-

travel of armature after latch trips.
(a) Gap between armature rivets and magnet pole
face approximately 3/8" when latch is set.

3. Plston-rlng gaps should be 180" opposite from
each other.

4. Force to trip breaker approximately 4 lbs.
5. Latch

should break freely

Auxiliary Switch

when armature Is

depressed when latch reset spring is overcome

1. Linkage should not go over dead center on closing.

by hand.

2. "A'' switches make just before arc contacts touch.

6. Latch engaging surfaces on armature and segment
should be free of paint or foreign matter.

3. Trip coil "A" switch makes 1" or sooner before
arc trips make.

7. Magnet pole face should be lined up with armature
face.

Mechanism Check Points

contacts make after

of the breaker

Contacts

1. Latch must reset under all conditions (mechanical
and electrical).

2. With latch armature depressed, breaker should
trip free before contacts
way closed.

"B"

opening stroke.

Main Contacts

(a) 1/8" il/32" deflection at top of bars on all

have traveled half

3 poles.

(b) Make certain the two bolts at each end of

3. Latch must have at least 1/32" clearance.

the Insulating support are tight.

4. At least 1/8" clearance between closing lever

Note: The vertical insulating piece that supports

and trip free roller.

the lower bushing from the breaker frame
must be tight before these adjustments are
made. Any loosening of the bolts holding
this support will allow an upward move
ment of the lower bushing when the breaker
is being closed, thus reducing contact

5. Cut-off switch operates simultaneously when
prop engages roller.
6. Over-travel stop is not hit before the closing
armature has touched the solenoid backplate and

deflection.

will not let breaker lock on dead center.

Solenoid Cut-Off Switch Adjustment

(d) 50% of line to line when checked with carbon
paper and thin tissue on manual closing.

1. The solenoid cut-off switch is adjusted so that it
closes its contact as prop snaps into position.

(e) 3/8"gap ± 1/16"when arcing contacts touch.

2. When the mechanism settles back onto the prop,
the cut-off switch contacts must remain closed.

2. Adjustment of Arcing Contact

Puffer

(a) To adjust arcing* contact, close breaker
manually until the main upper contacts are

1. Should be free of any binding.

separated by 3/8 ?. At or near this point, the

2. Should be air-tight enough to restrict opening of

merely adjust the nut at the end of arcing

arcing contacts just touch. To adjust this,
breaker when nozzles are closed.

contact spring rod.

(b) With the individual phase thus adjusted, fine
adjustment may then be made .to effect simul-

3. Should not be lubricated.

taneously making of the three arcing contacts

6. Periodically test tightness of bolts. Fig. 20-F;

1/16" of each other.

Fig. 21-B.

7. Adjust main contact deflection by rotating pushrod on threaded clevis, 1/2 turn 1/32" on main

3. Cluster Contacts

(a) Inside diameter of fingers. (Without tension).
1200 amp.
2000 amp.

upper contact. Fig. 21-A.
8. Main pivot axis. Fig. 21-C.

1-1/8" - 1-1/4"
1-5/8" - 1-3/4"

9. Interlock, Fig. 19-B, should trip the breaker
before crank can be inserted into hole. Fig. 19-A.

(b) aiould be free to align to stud that is 3/18"
off center in any direction without reducing
contact pressure.

Interlocking must be adjusted to insure tripping of the
breaker before the racking-in handle can be inserted.
Pig. 19-A. This is done by adjustment of the eccentric
cam on the interlock. Fig. 19-B.
1. Main contacts should be open 3/8" when arcing
contacts touch. Fig. 20-A.

2. Arcing contact adjusting nut. Fig. 2D-B.
3. Main contact bridging member. Fig. 20-C.

4. Pull pin to adjust push-rod. Fig. 20-D.
5. Shunt carries full current only during a portion of
the interrupting time. Fig. 20-E.

15KV DST Mechanism Adjustments

in and will remain energized until contact cs/c opens.

1. Over-travel stop, Fig. 22-A, keeps main shaft
from going dead centm*, but should not contact
main shaft during electrical operation.

The normally closed 52/y contact in the control relay
(52/x) circuit opens, thereby de-energizing 52/x which
in turn breaks its seal-in contact and de-energizes the
breaker closing coil.

2. Adjustment, Fig. 22-B. should be 3/32" approxi
mately. This gives enough travel to insure prop

Should the operator close the control switch when the
breaker is already closed, the closing circuit will not

snapping into place.

again be energized - the 52/y coil will be energized
through the cs/c and 52/aa contacts thus keeping the
control relay (52/x) circuit open.

3. Fig. 22-C is de-energized position of solenoidplunger when breaker is in either open or closed
position.

4. Manual closing lever. Fig. 23-A.

Anti-pump Feature:

5. Neoprene pad to reduce shock. Fig. 23-B.

If the operator closes the control switch, and holds
the switch in that position when there is a short

circuit on the load 'side of the circuit breaker, the

6. Exhaust orifice of shock absorber. Fig. 23-C.

overcurrent relays will function and energize the shunt
trip coil, which will trip the breaker open.

7. Fig. 24-A - Latch rotates and permits toggle to
collapse when armature is depressed.

Reclosure (pumping) of the circuit breaker is prevented
because at that instant the 52/y coil is energized and
its 52/y contact in the circuit of the 52/x coil is

8. Main opening springs. Fig. 23-D.

9. Varying number of spacers will adjust position

open. Therefore, the control relay 52/x cannot be

of latch-roller to closing lever. Pig. 24-B.

energized and thus attempt to close the breaker again.

10. Solenoid cut-off switch should operate only after

Suppressor Rectifier:

prop snaps into position shown (breaker is closed).
Pig. 25-A.

This rectifier is shown across the solenoid closing

11. Tangent point of rolle- on surface to be 1/B"
approximately from lower comer of surface.

coil 52/cc. Its function is to limit the inductive kick
when the circuit is opened and thus reduces the arc

across the 52/x contacts in series with the 52/cc coil._

Pig. 25-B.

12. Adjust roller to closing-lever by moving latch-

It is used only when the control circuit is direct

assembly. Fig. 25-C.

current.

13. Nut to adjust prop to roller. Fig. 25-D.
Opening:

14. 3/8" or enough gap to insure b-ipping. Fig. 24-C.

Assuming breaker is in the closed position, energizing
the trip coil from control switch or relays opens the
circuit breaker by mechanical action of its operating

METHOD OF OPERATION

SEE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • Figure 26

mechanism.

Closing:
Special Note:

Assuming breaker is in the open position with voltage
on the control bus, close control switch contact cs/c.
Control relay 52/x is energized through a normally
closed 52/y contact. Two (2) circuits are made simul

This instruction covers the circuit breaker as
manufactured in standard form. It is necessary to

refer to the actual diagrams supplied with the cimuit
breaker, because the diagram shown is typical, and

taneously when control relay 52/x contacts close.

there are many variations for meeting job reauirements.

a. Seal-in circuit: Control relay 52/x is sealed
SOURCES OF CONTROL

in through its own contact which parallels
cs/c contact.

Federal Pacific Type DST Air Circuit Breakers are
operated by d-c solenoids and shunt trip coils. The

b. Closing coil circuit: Control relay 52/x
energizes the breaker closing coil 52/cc

following methods of operating are available.

which closes the breaker.

Station Battery Closing and Tripping. The recommended
method of operation of the DST air circuit breaker is
by means of 125 volt d-c station batteiy-the most
reliable source of power because it is essentially

Cut-off switch 52/aa closes just prior to the breaker

main contacts, energizing the anti-pump relay, 52/y,
through the 52/x seal-in contact. 52/y seals itself

30 A. I2SV. C.UF. J_CS

30 A. I2SV.C.L.
P.O. FUSE BLOCK

(-)•

»>

2^ P.O. JUMPER

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
LEGEND
7

CONTROL SWITCH CLOSE

CONTACT OPEN WHEN DEVICE

CONTROL SWITCH TRIP

IS DE-ENERGIZED.
CONTACT CLOSED WHEN DEVICE
IS DE-ENERGIZED.

® CONTACT.
T CONTACT.

®REO INDICATINB LIGHT

(CLOSED)

GREEN INDICATING LIGHT

AUXILIARY RELAY

AUXILIARY RELAY
CC CLOSING COIL
TC TRIP COIL

(OPEN)

DRAWOUT DISCONNECT

OPERATING COIL OF DEVICE

P.O. PULL OUT
aUF. CURRENT LIMITING FUSE

RECT SUPPRESSOR RECTIFIER FOR
D.C. CONTROL ONLY.

FIGURE 26

independent of t)ie a-c system conditions, and is
available at all times.

recommended that a d-c tripping battery be supplied.
A constant, reliable source of tripping power is
essential for a well-designed, dependable substation.

Rectified AC Closing. This type of operation finds
its greatest application in outdoor installations or

small isolated indoor installations where the housing
and maintenance of a 125 volt station battery creates

Capacitor Trip. In applications where it is impractical
to supply a source of d-c control, a 240 volt a-c
capacitor trip may be used. This requires that a poten
tial transformer be connected to the incoming line
ahead of the circuit breakers so that the capacitor
trip device is energized before the breaker is closed.

a major problem. A single phase operating transformer
is used to supply 240 volt a-c to a rectifier, which

furnishes 125 volt d-c to operate the breaker.
Tripping Battery. If a breaker is a-c closed, it is

A 125 volt d-c shunt trip coil is used.

RATED CONTROL VOLTAGES AND THEIR RANGE
and power supply of operating mechanisms of breakers,
when measured the terminals of the mechanisms are;

Rated control voltages and their ranges for control

230 AC (Note jKl)
230 AC (Note §2)

Symbol
With Latch Check and Lockout

Scheme

Without Latch Check

DC close and trip
AC close DC trip
AC close capacitor trip

Nomeplate Marking
DST 5-75, 150, 250

Closing and trip volts are coil voltages not source voltages.

NOTE #1 - For use with DST 5-250, 15-500, 1200A and an.2000A breakers.

NOTE jSR - For use with DST 5-75, 5-150, 15-150 and 15-250, 1200A breakers only.
FIGURE 27

chutes, arc-contacts, many contacts etc. allow a
complete inspection in a minimum of time.

Coil Data

Closing coil

Closing time approximately 5 cycles after coll is
energized.

Particular attention should be paid toNEMA SG4-5.07,

paragraphs A & K, and a maintenance schedule put in
effect based on the frequency of operation or six
month intervals, whichever comes first.

Shunt trip coil

This coil is also used when capacitor trip device
is specified.

Breakers installed under ideal operating conditions
naturally should require less maintenance than tiiose
operating under more adverse conditions.

Tripping time approximately 3.5 cycles from the
time the coil is energized until the arc is broken.

A convenient air circuit breaker log sheet is provided
Test Data

for each breaker.

50 Micro-ohm resistance top to bottom of main contact.

NEMA - Standard for Power Circuit Breakers

Insulation test

SG4-5.07 repetitive duty and normal maintenance

10,000 megohms to ground

Power operated breakers, when operating under usual
service conditions, shall be capable of operating the
required number of times given in the table on Page 34.
The operating conditions and the permissible effect
upon the breakers are given in the following paragraphs.
For each column, all paragraphs listed must be given

Dielectric test - DST-5 air circuit breaker 19 KV,
60 cycle, one minute dielectric withstand. (Test
should be made with arc-chutes and interphase
barriers in position, and from phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground).

consideration.

Dielectric test - DST-15 air circuit breaker 36 KV,
60 cycle, one minute dielectric withstand. (Test
should be made with arc-chutes and interphase
barriers in position, and from phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground).

Note: Conditions of switching of arc-fumaces or
capacitors may require special consid
eration.

All parts of a breaker that function during a normal
operation shall be included. Other parts such as over

Secondary control wiring

load coils, that function only during infrequent ab
normal circuit conditions shall be excluded.

1500 volt, 60 cycle one minute dielectric with
stand.

Servicing

Milli-Voit Drop Tests

Servicing shall consist of adjusting, cleaning,
lubricating, tightening, etc., as recommended by the

Subject to Modification

manufacturer. The operations listed are on the basis
of servicing at intervals of six months or less.

accordance with NEMA SG4-2.13.

AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE

DST
DST
DST
DST

Federal Pacific Electric Company high voltage air

DST

5-75
5-150
5-150
5-250
5-250
15-150
15-250
15-250
15-500

1200 amp Line
1200 amp Line

1
4

2000 amp Line 5
1200 amp Line 6
2000 amp Line 7
1200 amp Line 13
1200 amp Line 14
1200 amp Line 16
2000 amp Line 17

circuit breakers are designed, tested and manufactured
Visual Inspection

in accordance with NEMA Standards for power circuit
breakers. Pub. No. SQ4-1954 and as amended.

Arc-Chutes: Tip the arc-chute back on the hinge pin
and check the condition of the blow-out coils,

Aperiodic maintenance schedule should be established
in accordance with NEMA Standards to insure years of
trouble-fi'ee operation. The easily accessible arc-

interrupting chamber and arc-runners. (Small
pieces or flakes of the ceramic arc plates may

chip off. If large pieces are broken a more
thorough examination should be made to determine
the extent of the damage.)

ably clean and free of grease. (A small amount of
petrolatum may be used on the two large guide
pins and the small Interlock pin.) Crocus cloth

may be used to dress the male connectors.

The Interrupter chamber will become discolored

with faultcurrent Interruption, (yellow, blue-green,

Primary Disconnects: The primary disconnects should
be clean and ftee of pitting. All the springs should

or brown color but Is operable unless mechanical

damage Is done to the arc-chamber or arc plates.

be tight and the entire assembly should rotate

freely on the stud. Loose springs will cause pit
ting of the contact areas and heating of the cell
bushings as well as the breaker. Primary discon
nects should be replaced as an assembly.

Arc-Contacts: The arc-contacts should be reasonably
clean and free of pits, voids, and Irregularities. A
fine file may be used to dress the arc contacts.
Minor pitting, etc., Is to be expected under service
conditions and will not necessitate replacement.
Severe fault conditions will understandably cause
more damage and may require replacement.

Lubrication

Hip Mechanism: A good grade of silicon grease or
other lubricant that does not become stiff In cold

Arc-Contact Alignment: Hie arc-contacts should make
before the main contacts and break after the main
contacts. The' stationary arcing contact is not
adjustable, but the moving arc-contacts are indi
vidually adjustable, and should make within

weather should be used to lubricate the trip mech
anism. The trip trigger should be kept fl-ee of

corrosion at all times. All of the pins, bearing,
etc., are a combination of non-ferrous metals and

no corrosion or settling should result if lightly

1/16" of each other. (Close the breaker slowly

lubricated.

with maintenance closing bar and observe three
pole operation fhim the side of the breaker.)

Closing Mechanism: A good grade of silicon grease
or other lulHlcant that does not become stiff In
cold weather should be used to lubricate the

Main Contacts: The main contacts should be reason

closing mechanism. All of the pins, bearings,

ably clean and fl-ee of irregularities. Each contact
Is spring loaded, and In the open position the

etc., are a combination of non-ferrous metals

contact surfaces may not seat parallel. No current

and no corrosion seizing should result If lightly

is interrupted by the main contacts and little or

lubricated.

no pitting should be expected.

Racklng-in Mechanism: Any good grade of heavy
Main Contact Alignment: The lower set of main
contacts should make before the upper set. Nei
ther the upper or lower main contacts are ad

grease may be used to lubricate the bearings,

justable, but are rather spring loaded. The lower
and upper contacts should deflect 1/8". The
upper main contacts should be 5/16" apart when
the arcing contacts touch. (Close the breaker
slowly with the maintenance closing bar and
observe three pole operation fix)m the side of the
breaker.) A positive check on contact alignment
Is as follows: Insert a. piece of white paper

Primary Disconnects: The leading edges should be
lightly greased with petrolatum to provide less
friction when racklng-ln. Caution: excessive pet
rolatum will melt off at high temperatures and es
tablish a potential track path In the cell bushing.

wormgear, etc.

Operational Inspection

Manual Close: Close the breaker slowly with the
maintenance closing bar (arc chutes should be
down and breaker completely operable except
interphase barrier should be off). The breaker
should close smoothly and easily.

against the fixed main contacts with a piece of
carbon paper between the white paper and moving
contacts. Close the breaker slowly with the main
tenance closing bar until it is latched closed.
Hip the breaker manually and observe the contact
line Imprints on the white paper. A line contact of
50 " per cent per contact Is acceptable.

A small amount of tremor should be experienced
after the breaker latches In. CAUTION: Do not
close breaker in operate position with maintenance

Auxiliary Switch: The "b" contacts should make in
the open position and the "a" contacts in the
closed position. The fingers of the auxiliary

closing bar or without interphase barrier.
Manual Trip: Hip the breaker by lifting the interlock
trip bar. The breaker should trip easily with a

switches contacts can be dressed with crocus

cloth If pitted. Severe pitting should be investi
gated circuit-wise and the auxiliary switch re

minimum of lifting effort.

placed.
Electrical Close: Close the breaker by means of the

test cabinet or in the test position in the cell.

Secondary Disconnects: The male prongs of the
secondary disconnect should be clean and free

Low Voltage Hip: Hip the breaker electrically with

of pitting. The molded housing should be reason

the trip voltage adjusted to the minimum voltage
indicated.
Minimum

Note: The trip voltage should be measured across
the trip coil, not at the source. The arma
ture may be blocked up to prevent tripping
to get a steady voltage reading.
Puffer and Arc Chutes:

Place a piece of thin paper

pv Ir StE

: •

Ifvl

over each arc chute and trip the breaker. The air
blast from the puffer will raise the papers if the

puffer is functioning properly and the arc-chute is
free of obstructions.

When corresponding with the Pactory, the following
information should be given:
VOLTAGE CLASS
FIGURE 28

, CONTINUOUS CURRENT
Remove these bolts and lift out the entire shunt
INTERRUPTING RATING

trip device.

The shunt-trip coil can be replaced in a few
CLOSING VOLTAGE
CLOSING VOLTAGE RANGE
TRIP VOLTAGE

minutes.

REPLACING SOLENOID COIL
DST 15-500
Remove circuit breaker from cell and tip forward as

shown in Figure 28. Disconnect the two coil-leads
TRIP VOLTAGE R.INGE

for the terminal block. Polarity is unimportant.

DATE INSTALLED

Remove circular plunger plate, etc., by removing the
two 1-1/4" socket-head cap-screws that fasten it to

OPERATION COUNTER WHEN RECEIVED
OPERATION COUNTER WHEN INSTALLED.
SERIAL NUMBER

the plunger shaft. Be careful to save the brass shims
under the plunger-plate, also the two screws.
Remove end-plate, thus exposing coil.

Lift out coil (approximately 80 lbs.) noting that leads
emerge from coil on right hand side of solenoid frame
(as seen from rear of breaker).

REPLACEMENT OF COILS

Insert new coil, have leads emerge in proper direction.

Shunt-trip coil

Reassemble carefully in reverse order.

Remove circuit breaker from cell.

Disconnect shunt-trip leads from terminal block.

REPLACING SOLENOID MECHANISM AND COIL

Two hex head bolts support the shunt-trip device.

DST 5-250

Remove circuit breaker from cell and tip forward as
shown in Figure 28. Disconnect the two coil-leads
from the terminal block. Polarity is unimportant.

Remove circular plunger-plate, etc., by removing the
two 1-1/4" socket-head cap-screws that fasten it to
the plunger shaft. Be careful to save the brass shims
•mder the plunger plate, also the two screws. Attach
crane or hoist to the plunger shaft as shown in figure.

Arcing contact, stationary

Dwg. 1551-1182

Arcing contact, movable

Dwg. 1551-1080

Main contact, upper stationary

Dwg. 1551-1073

Main contact, lower stationary

Dwg. 1551-1075

Main contact, movable

Dwg. 1551-1081

Arc chutes

Dwg. 1551-1590

Clusters (10 fingers each)

Dwg. 1551-0284

Pull-rod assembly

Dwg. 1551-1270

Solenoid coil, 250 volts DC

Dwg. 1552-1672

Solenoid coil, 125 volts DC
(230 V AC source)

Dwg. 1553-1672

Loosen puffer device.

Remove the nuts from the three holding bolts on the
bottom of the solenoid frame.

Lift complete solenoid out and set it down on floor or
bench.

Solenoid coil, 125 volts DC

Dwg. 1551-1672

Remove end-plate, thus exposing coil.

1 Shunt trip coil, 24 volts DC

Dwg. 1551-0409

Shunt trip coil, 48 volts DC

Dwg. 1551-1002

Shunt trip coil, 125 volts DC

Dwg. 1551-1003

Eight circuit auxiliary switch

Dwg. 1551-1665

One stage only of auxiliary switch Dwg.

Lift out coil (approximately 80 lbs.) noting that leads
emerge from coil on right hand side of solenoid frame
(as seen from rear of breaker).

Insert new coil, have leads emerge in proper direction.

1551-1216

Control Panel for Outdoor-Indoor Metal-Clad
Switchgear - Dwg. 2253-0387 or 3351-0454

Reassemble carefully in reverse order.

Quantity - Total for One Circuit Breaker

Lower complete solenoid into breaker frame. Adjust
so that coil leads are on the right hand side. The 3

1 Rectifier, 100 Amp

Dwg. 2701-0244

bolts on bottom plate will lineup with holes in breaker

1 Suppressor Rectifier
Reference Dwg. 3300-0006

Dwg.

1 Capacitor Trip Device

Dwg. 2753-0137

mechanism.

RECOMMENDED STOCK OF RENEWAL PARTS

1 X Relay Contactor
Bull. 501-U-151-CA-186-M,

One set of parts for every ten (10) circuit breakers.

1 Y Relay, 2 N.O. 8i 2 N.C.
Contacts, 230 V, 60 Cycle
Coil Resistance 180 Ohms

Dwg.

095-004

1 Y Relay, 2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
Contacts, 250 V DC
Continuous Duty, Coil Resistance
13,000 Ohms

1 X Relay Contactor
Bull. 501-U-151-06-M,

1 Set of arcing contacts

1 Set main disconnecting contacts assembly

230 V, 60 Cycle

1 Shuht trip coil
1 Set lift or pull rods

1 Lot of fingers and

087-004

1 X Relay Contactor

segments for auxiliary

Bull. 501-U-151-CA-187-M,

switches

250 V DC

1 Secondary disconnecting block complete

1 Y Relay, 2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
Contacts, 115 V DC
Continuous Duty, Coil Resistance

Note: When ordering any of the items listed below
the Serial Number of the breaker must be

3650 Ohms

given.

PEDSerial No..

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

1 Fixed Resistor, 25 Watt,
1250 Ohms

•DST-5, 250-1200 Amp Air Circuit Breaker

1 18 Point Contact Secondary Block Dwg. 2752-0107

General Assembly Drawing 1551-1653

1 18 Point Contact Secondary Block
Dwg. 2751-0107
(Cell)

^antity - Total for one Circuit Breaker

•See Renewal Parts Catalogs for other Rated Breakers
24

Inspector
OPERATION COUNTER

OPERATIONS SINCE SERVICING
VISUAL INSPECTION

ARC CHUTES
ARCING CONTACTS
ARCING CONTACT ALIGNMENT
MAIN CONTACTS
MAIN CONTACT ALIGNMENT
AUXILIARY SWITCH
SECONDARY DISCONNECTS
PRIMARY DISCONNECTS
LUBRICATION
TRIP MECHANISM

CLOSING MECHANISM
RACKING IN MECHANISM

PRIMARY DISCONNECTS
OPERATIONAL INSPECTION

MANUAL CLOSE

MANUAL TRIP
ELECTRICAL CLOSE

ELECTRICAL TRIP
LOW VOLTAGE TRIP
PUPPER AND ARC CHUTES
Code:

G-Good, P-Palr, X-shouId be replaced next inspection.

Ga 12-4
Asm. to adjust shock absm-ber.

AND

OPERATING TEST PROCEDURE
FOR

(d) Trip armature clearance to latch (.031 - .094)
^Ga jjl3-5

4.16 KV-75/150/250 MVA, 1200 amp.
13.8 KV-150/250/500 MVA. 1200 amp.

(e) Trip armature engagement with latch (75%min.)

4.16 KV-150/250/ 2000 amp.
13.8 KV-2S0/500/ 2000 amp.

If less, check armature spring tension.

Breaker Type DST.

(f) Trip latch free of armature throughout latch

-KV

MVA _

-AMP. DATE.

stroke after tripping
If not free for complete stroke, call

Serial No.

Inspection Leader.

Shop Ord. No. Fed.
Mfg. Ord. No.

(g) Itip armature clearance to pole face (3/87/16)
Ga #2-3

Operating voltage range;
V

Adjust by the number of shims under

TRIP

V-

Operating time at normal voltage: Close
Trip

(h) Closing lever wipe on roiler (3/32-1/8)

sec.

Breaker nameplate agrees with bill of material

Adjust by adding or removing shims
under latch frame asm.

(V)

(i) Prop wipe on roller (3/32-1/8)

1. Check all hardware to be tight and in place
(v)___

Adjust by turning adjusting nut on spring
retaining screw.

2. Control wiring continuity check
Wiring Diagram No.
Rev. No.

(j) Stop
3. Resistance of coils: Closing Coil.
Trip

clearance to main shaft (1/8-3/16)
Ga #1-2

.ohms.

nhmg

(k) Closing

Resistance to be ±10% of the following values:

overtravel ciearance to

Ga #2-3
Asm. to adjust by the number of shims
between plunger and armature

5. Contact adjustments before electrical operations:
Main Contacts

(a) Contacting surface area should be 50% min.

4. Mechanism adjustments before eiectrical oper

of bar with

ations:

Make impression using carbon and tissue.
Dress contacts, if necessary

(a) Close and open breaker slowly with manual
closing lever holding prop away from roiler.
Check for smooth operation, binding, over-

toggie, etc.

(

(b) Contact penetration (top and bottom all bars)
5KV, 15KV (1/8+1/32)

).
Adjust by turning clevis on bottom of

(b) Depress tiip armature and manually close

movement of main contacts

(

Top

left - right,
left • right

5KV (2-7/8 + 1/4-0) Ga j|l3-4

Lockout switch has overtravel with hand trip
lifted
(
).

15KV (5-1/8 + 3/8-0) Ga #1-2
0A

8. Lubrication

0C
Check all latch, cams, rollers, bearings, etc.
Adjust shock absorber

for lubrication.

Check alt contacts for grease.

(d) Primary gap at arcing contacts make 5KV,
15KV (3/8 + 1/8-0) Ga #1-3

9. Operating Control Voltage

Breaker opens at 20% below minimum voltage

(At 10% below mln. for 24V and 48V),
(after 10 sec. delay on capacitor trip)

washers under spring

guide nut.

Breako^ closes at 10% below mlnimiun voltage

Arcing Contacts

C.C.V.

(a) Contacts on the same phase make simul

10. No Load Operations

taneously

During operations observe veeder counter, sema
phore, puffer operation and general performance

(b) Contacts make within 1/16 of each other on
different phases.

6. Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Contacts

Trip
(

Free

(b) Normally open "A" contacts make (0-1/4")
before arcing contacts touch
(
),

(

10 times at normal voltage—

Reclose

10 times at normal vnltngo

Reclose

15 times at minimum voltage.

(Reclose breakers with latch check switch only)
11. Electrical Timing

arcing contacts are 60% open

15 times at minimum voltage

Trip and Trip

(a) Trip Coll - "A-A" contacts make (3/4-1)
before arcing contacts touch

10 times at maximum voltage_____

Close and

Maximum trip time at normal voltage (0.05 sec.)
Aux. contacts are adjusted by the spline

sec.. I

shaft relation to cam or operating arm.

Maximum closing time at normal voltage (0.25 sec.)

(d) Closing coil cut-off switch should make just

Maximum trip free time at normal voltage (0.06sec.)

cycles

sec.

after prop engages roller
Adjust

by moving position of switch

locaticm on mech. frame.

(Reclose breakers with latch check switch only)

(e) Latch check switch should make after trip
armature has reset at least 50%
(
).
Adjust by turning operating screw in arm.

12. Analyzer Curves

7. Hard Trip and Lockout Switch

(a) Close and trip at minimum voltage

Trip cam clearance to trip armature with breaker

(b) Close and trip at normal voltage

closed (1/32-Mln.)
Ga #5
Trip armature overtravel with hand trip lifted

(1/32-Min.)
Ga #5
Lockout switch opens simultaneously or just

(d) Reclose at normal voltage
27

L-

(ti) Tri^ free at normal voltage
(Rebound on opening to be 10% maximum,
check Orifice size.)

taneously.
(b) Contacts make within 1/16 of each other on
dinerent phases.

13. Mechanical Check After Electricol Operations
(a) Closing lever clearance to roller (1/16 - 1/8)
-

If any changes In above, re-adJust and

Ga #2-4

recheck after trip and close 5 times at
normal voltage.

(b) Trip armature clearance to latch (.063 - .094)
Ga #3-4

15. Contact Resistance

Resistance of new clean contacts

With baskets (
(d) Trip

(1200A - 60 microhms or less)

(3/8 • 7/16)

(2000A - 40 microhms or less)
Ga #2-3

Without baskets (

(e) Closing lever wipe on roller (3/32 - 1/8)

)

(1200A - 30 microhms or less)
(2000A • 20 microhms or less)

Tn.

(f) Prop wipe on roller (3/32 - 1/8)

0A.
0B.
0C

.In.

jnlcrohms
.microhms
-microhms

(g) Stop clearance to main shaft (1/8 - 3/16)
Ga #1-2

16. High Potential Test

(h) Closing armature overtravel clearance to plate

Primary Hi Pot for one minute

(3/32 - 1/8)
Ga #2-3

36 KV for 15 KV breakers, 19 KV for 5 KV

If any changes in above, re-adJust and

Ix'eakers

recheck minimum operating voltage

14. Contact Check After Electric Operations

Secondary Hi Pot for one minute

Main Contacts
ISOO volt for all breakers

(a) Contact penetration
5KV. 15KV (1/8 + 1/32)
0A left - right, 0B left - right,
0C left - right

18. Analyzer curves and contact impression record is

Top.

attached to this ropnrt

19. Signatures:

(b) Contact gap (5KV 2 7/8 + 1/4-0) Ga #3-4,
{15KV 5-1/8 + 3/8-0), Ga #1-2,

Customer's Inspector.
Date

0A
0B
0C

Note: For making adjustments use gauges 1501-1742.
Revisionrwtto

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
for

TYPE FP LOW VOLTAGE
POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
and

FM FUSEMATIC® BREAKERS
FP25-600
FP50-1600

POWER EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS DIVISION

150 AVENUE L, NEWARK, NEW JERSEY 07101

COMPANV

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
for

TYPE FP LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
and

FM FUSEMATIC®BREAKERS
Manually and Electrically Operated

Shipment, Receiving, Handling & Storage

Part 3

Inspection & Installation

Overcurrent Trip Devices

Part 7

Wiring Diagram

Part 8

Recommended Spare Parts

POWER EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS DIVISION

150 AVENUE L. NEWARK. NEW JERSEY 07101

PART 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This Instruction Manual covers the FP25-600, FP50-I600,

FM25-600 and FM50-I600 Fusematic breakers only. For

PART 3

INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION
SECTION I

Inspection - Manually Operated

Breakers

instructions on the FP 75 series breakers refer in Instruc
tion Booklet #IN810.10.

The FP line of Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and
Fusematic Breakers, which ranges from ISA through
1600A continuous current at 600 Volt ratings, are designed
for simplicity of operation, reliability and easy mainten
ance. TTie FP Breaker and FM Fusematic are equipped
with a stored energy mechanism mechanically trip free in
any position of the closing cycle, three unit pole assemblies,
fuUy field adjustable timing devices, multi-range series trip
coils, and telescoping roll-out rails. The three position
drawout mechanism is operable with the door closed.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Maintenance closing handle 1151-9252
Cell racking in handle 1101-9251

The FP and FM breakers consist of a coordinated set of

assemblies mounted on a steel frame, all carefully adjusted
and locked in place for long and trouble-free operation.
To assist in properly checking and inspecting breakers
prior to placing into service, the following steps should be
followed in the order listed:

1. Remove arc chutes and interphase barriers.
2. Chaise stored energy mechanism by rotating operating
handle to a positive stop. Return handle to normal
vertical position by counter-clockwise rotation.
NOTE: Charging Operation:
FP & FM25-600 — Rotate handle 90° counterclock

wise to engage mechanism and then 180° clockwise to
positive stop. (Figure I).

PART 2

SHIPMENT, RECEIVING, HANDLING
AND STORAGE
Raise 90° to

engage ctiarging >

Each FP Breaker and FM Fusematic is thoroughly inspect
ed and tested before leaving the factory. Breakers are
shipped in individual crates or in the cell compartment.
If breakers are crated, no hooks should be used in handling.
Examine all equipment carefully for indication of damage
sustained in transit. If damage in transit is indicated, call
for an immediate inspection by the deliveringcarrier. Upon

ratchet

Rotate 180°
clockwise to

charge springs
NORMAL HANDLE POSITION

assessment of the damage a claim should be filed with the

carrier or, depending on the nature of the damage, an in
tent to file for concealed damage should be registered. For
assistance in filing the claim, advise the area sales office of

Federal Pacific Electric Company, giving a full description
of the damage, serial number of the breaker, delivering
carrier's name, and, if shipped by rail, the car number,

waybill reference, and any offier iniformation that might be

Figure 1

FP & FM50-I600 — Unfold collapsible handle from
vertical down position to vertical up position. Rotate

180° clockwise to positive stop. Release handle slowly.
(Figure 2).

of help to the Company in aiding in the filing of the
damage claim.

When unpacking, make sure that all items are removed
from the box including packing list, instruction book, main
tenance parts and hardware. Report any shortage immed
iately. Stc that identification tags are left on the breaker.

^Roioe to extend^
handle

Lifting eyelets are furnished for handling. Do not lift or

handle breaker by the front box or the operating handle.
Clean breaker thoroughly. To remove dust an industrial
vacuum cleaner is recommended. If the breaker can be

installed in its permanent location, it is advisable to do so,
even if it is not expected to be energized for some time.
When breakers must be stored in buildings under construc
tion, be sure they are kept in a space free of dust, moisture,
dirt and in an upright position. It is recommended that
the breaker not be operated prior to final inspection.

Rotofo cioel(w}M.H

- ISO* to chorQo

Figure 2

3. Block the undervoltage trip device, when supplied, to
prevent tripping.

4. Remove right and left hand accelerating springs (Fig
ure 4).

6. With maintenance closing handle in position and trip
bar in tripped position, proceed to close breaker. Oper
ating mechanism will now be trip free and contacts
should not make.

7. Remove maintenance closing handle and trip breaker
by moving trip bar.

8. Replace one pull-off spring right side only.
9. Inspect each arc chute to be sure no plates are dam
aged. Replace chutes and interphase barriers on break
ers. Move contacts in by hand to insure contacts
move in and out freely.
10. To avoid possible injury NEVER handle or touch any
moveable part of the breaker when the stored enei^

mechanism is charged. Press close button on front

lI.E,

cover. Breaker will close. Depress red trip button

(located in chatting handle). Breaker will open.

It. Recharge stored energy mechanism and close breaker.

Slowly move series trip coil magnet (armature) to
fully closed position. Breaker should trip before arma
ture touches pole face assembly. Repeat this procedure
on all poles.

12. On a draw-out breaker, chaige stored energy mech

anism. close breaker and move draw-out interlock
Figure 4

plate to the left. Breaker will trip. D/0 Interlock plate
must be fully reset to the right before operating
breaker to prevent trip-free operations. (Figure 6).

I tjjj,
• •

•

Rgure 5

5. Insert maintenance closing handle #1151-9252 as in

Figure 5 and slowly operate until arcing contacts
touch. All arcing contacts should make rimultaneously

Figure 6

with a permissible variation of 1/32 max. Moveable

13. Charge stored energy mechanism and close breaker.
Pull padlock lever out. Breaker should trip before pad

arcing contact fingers should align with stationary
arcing contacts.

Refer to Part 4 for adjusting instructions if misalign
ment or misadjustments are observed. Moveable arcing
contacts are designed with ride clearances for better

guidance inride the arc chutes. A ride to ride move
ment of 1/8 is allowable. Close breaker and check
overtravel on main contacts: l/8"± 1/32".

lock slot is fully exposed.

14. Check retaining rings and hardware for tightness.
15. Basket and finger assembly should be secured with
Nylok retainii^ screws. Contact fingers must be free
of dirt and foreign particles. The secondary contacts
should operate freely.

SECTION II

Inspection • Electrically Operated

Breakers

The ratchet-driven stored energy mechanism is chained by
a fractional horsepower AC/DC universal motor. Identifi

cation, voltage ranges and current requirements are speci
fied IkIow. The stored energy mechanism chafes in
approximately one second.
CHARGING MOTORS FOR FP BREAKERS
STORED ENERGY MECHANISM
Voltage Rating

Maximum 240V, use conlrol power transformer for higher voltage
'Class 1330 Econ Dual element fuses

From wiring diagram supplied with equipment, or standard
diagram Part 7 of this book, locate motor terminals on

Figure 7

secondary contacts and connect required power source.
Motor will charge when power Is applied and shutofT auto

matically when charging cycle is completed.
Breaker cannot be closed with the maintenance closing
handle unless stored energy mechanism is charged. On all

electrically operated FP breakers the stored energy mech
anism will recharge immediately following a closing opera
tion ready for instant reclosure if needed.
Follow infection procedure as outlined in "Inspection —
Manually Operated Breakers."
In addition the following steps arc recommended:
16. From wiring diagram locate terminals on secondary
contacts and connect proper control power supply and
controls for shunt close and shunt trip attachments.
Close and open breaker five limes electrically and
check for proper operation.
17. Disconnect control power supply. Close and trip tripbreaker manually. Do not leave breaker in the charged
and/or closed position while in storage.
18. Move shunt close solenoid armature manually to
release closing springs without control power.

9. Draw-out mechanism on breaker should be in OUT

position.
10. Push breaker inside the cell until racking-in cranks

engage a positive stop. This is the OUT position.
11. Close and fasten the door. The metal mask provided
on outside of front box will move freely back as It
comes In contact with the door. The door should close

all the way with the breaker In the OUT position.
12. Push drawout interlock to left, insert drawout lever

1101-9251, (Figure 8) into the bottom hole of the
drawout mechanism and, with an up-strokc, rack
breaker into the TEST position. Removedrawout lever,

drawout interlock plate should snap into position com
pletely covering the holes.
13. Install control power fuses, enei^izing the circuit. The
motor will charge the stored enei^y mechanism. The
closing and tripping control circuits become eneigized
in the TEST position.
14. Open door and make sure that grounding contact in
cell Is In contact with the breaker. Close door and

SECTION ill - Installation

Before installing breaker in cell, check following points
inside cell:

1. Secondary contact support when supplied -* make
sure all connections are tight and adjusted to proper
dimensions.

2. Ground connections should be tight.
3. Extension rails should be free to move in and out;

check rail stops for tightness.
4. Rail rollers should be free and well lubricated.

5. Main contact stabs should be tight and free of dust
and dirt. Lubricate with contact grease.

6. Check condition of insulating transite plate in roof of
case. Screws should be tight.
7. Remove control power fuses.
8. Place breaker on fully extended moveablc rails. Make
sure all four rollers engage on inside grooves (Outside
grooves fit into stationary rails inside cell). (Figure 7).

check breaker electrically for proper closing and
opening operation.

If breaker operates properly, rack breaker back to OUT
position and leave there until ready to be put into service.

15. To put circuit breaker into service push drawout
interlock to left, insert drawout lever in the bottom

3. Make sure all retaining rings arc in place.

hole of the drawout mechanism (Figure 8) and with

4. Surfaces marked "F" should be lubricated by a thin

an upward stroke rack breaker into operating position.
Remove drawout lever, interlock plate should snap in
portion and red IN appears. (Figure 9 and 9A).

film of "Conducto-Lube #240-200" before assembly.
(Figure 12).

Contacts must be inspected after every known short circuit
interruption and should also be inspected at regular in
spection periods. If contacts arc found to be worn or ex

cessively pitted they should be dressed or replaced.
CAUTION: When reinstalling the arc chutes, adjust the
retaining screws on the arc chute retaining bar so that
the contact insulating block clears the arc chute base when
the breaker is closed.

CONTACT ASSEMBLY

To repair or replace moveable arcing contacts, proceed as
follows (Figure 11):
1. Charge stored energy mechanism.
2. Remove arc chutes and interphase barrier.
3. Remove insulating block and push fork assembly.

4. Tighten moveable arcing contact's adjusting screw
until springs are solid and remove retaining pins.
Figure 9 & Figure 9A

PART 4

MAINTENANCE

The breakers with all component parts have been exten
sively tested for performance as per NEMA Standards SG
3 and ANSI 037-13 and proved to be satisfactory with a
wide margin of safety.
A periodic maintenance schedule should be established. An

annual inspection should be made for clean, low-use
applications. More frequent inspections should be made

for dirty, corrosive or high-use applications.
The following instructions and adjustments should be fol
lowed carefully:

CONTACT ADJUSTMENT — Figure 10 and 11
MAIN AND ARCING CONTACTS ADJUSTMENT
FOR FP600A
AND FP1600A BREAKERS
"A" • Main Contact Pressure

600A
1600A

5. Remove arcing contact pivot pin and replace moveable
arcing contacts. Both contacts should be replaced at
one time.

6. Make sure nylon bushings on arcing contact pivot pin
are in place and in a good condition, when replacing
moveable arcing contact.

Reassemble following the reverse sequence of operations
and adjust per Figs. 10 and 11. In most cases it is not
necessary to replace contacts, but occasional redressing
and readjustments are recommended.
To replace stationary arcing contacts (Figure 10), remove
unit pole assembly, replace main stud and arcing contact
assembly, part 1151-9939, for 600A breaker and 11519937 for 1600A breaker.

Adjust contacts as per Figures 10, 11 & 12.

42-50 lbs., measured at
point of contact
25-35 lbs., measured at

point of contact

"B" - Over Travel Mains
"C" - Arcing Contact Press

^ ±%2 (Fig. 10)
22-25 lbs., measured at a

SHOWN FULLY CLOSED

point IVi below tip of
contact

"D"- Gap (distance) between 16 ±^2 (Fig. 11)
mains when arcing
contacts touch

CHECK POINTS —Figure 10, II and 12
1. Stationary arcing contacts — make sure that retaining
screws and contacts are tight.
2. Main contacts should be clean and free.

Figure 10

PART 5
ACCESSORIES
SHUNT TRIP

••I

GAPni'^i^
i;

v.! '.UN Kl

SHOWN AS ARC
CONTACTS MAKE

Figure 21

Rgure 13

The shunt trip attachment is mounted directly above the
SHOWN FULLY OPEN

trip shaft. It is a non-adjustable electro-magnet intended
for intermittent duty only, and its circuit should be inter
rupted only by an auxiliaiy contact.
SHUNT CLOSE

Bgure 12

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Check latch engagement and adjust if necessary to provide
a min. of .062" latch surface contact. Make sure springs
are in place and in good condition. On electrically
operated breakers, remove motor to make sure roller is
free and weU lubricated. Reinstall motor. Make sure that

all retaining rings are in place. Check mechanism to insure
that ail moving parts are free and well lubricated.
OPERATING MECHANISM
Make sure that all retaining rings and springs are in place
and that the mechanism is free. Replace nylon bumper

'• -A

rollers if excessive wear is evident. Make sure that the

operating mechanism resets when stored energy mech
anism is charged slowly and that the trip shaft is free. It
should take no more than 22 ounce inches of torque to
trip the breaker.
GENERAL

Make sure that all current carrying parts are secured and
associated hardware is tight. Basket and finger assembly
should be secured but free enough to compensate for mis
alignment in ceil. The free up and down movement should

be approximately %o.

h '

' ^

The shunt close attachment is mounted on top of the stored

energy mechanism and is used to electrically discharge the

stored energy mechanism and thus to close the breaker. It
is a non-adjustable intermittent duty device and its circuit
should be interrupted by an auxiliary contact.

UNDERVOLTAGE ATTACHMENT (Figure 15)

AUXILIARY SWITCH (Figure 16)
A max. 6 stage, 12 contact switch is available. It is
mounted on top of the stored energy mechanism on the

right hand side of the breaker and is operated by the main
moveable contacts. AH contacts are operated by phenolic
cams and are factory adjusted to provide "a" (normally
open) and "b" (normally closed) contacts.
The position and the condition of all contacts can be seen

and inspected through the transparent dust covers. The
contacts may be changed from a to b or b to a by

removing the cover and Inverting the contact bridge.
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
TYPE R-4 AUXILIARY SWITCH INTERRUPTING RATING IN AMPS
D.C.

D.C.

A.C.

Non-inductive I InilucUve I Nmi-lniluctlve
SINGLE CONTACT

The undervoltage attachment is a continuous duty device,
which can be provided with or without a time delay, and
which mechanically trips the breaker if the voltage drops
to 30% to 60% of normal voltage. It is mechanically re
set and hiis no auxiliary contact in its circuit. The under

voltage time delay mechanism is of the pneumatic delay

BELL ALARM SWITCH (Figure 17)

type. The time delay is controlled by the 10-32 adjusting
screw.

To inspect the undervoltage attachment, hold the move-

able armature by hand, close breaker and slowly release
armature. Before the armature is fully opened, the spring
loaded plunger will be released, strike the trip lever and
trip the breaker. Chock for misring retaining rings and
loose or missing screws and bolts. Check condition of coiL

If undervoltage attachment is noisy while being energized,
clean faces of armature and core.

Figure 17

A bell alam switch attachment is mounted on the right
hand side of the breaker and will function only when
breaker is tripped by the ovcrcurrent trip units. It can be
manually and/or electrically reset. Closing of breaker also
resets the alarm switch.

To check the alarm switch attachment, trip breaker with
trip button, then with shunt trip. In both cases the switch
Figure 16

should not be actuated. Trip breaker by moving the series
trip coil magnet and the switch should operate.

PART 6

OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The direct acting series coils and magnet assemblies pro

vide the energy to operate the over-current time delay
device and to trip the circuit breaker, interrupting sustain
ed ovcrcurrents and faults, There are seven (7) different

coils covering the range from 15 to 2,000 amperes. Each
magnet is field adjustable and calibrated for the values list

ed in Table A. Any one of the seven series coils may be
used in any one of the three ratings of FP50 circuit break
ers and FM Fusematic provided the maximum coil rating
does not exceed the maximum continuous current rating

Each of the single phase trip coils can be looked upon as
a shunt trip continuously energized by the voltage drop
across its fuse. Under normal conditions the "fuse drop"
voltage is zero, but it immediately rises to a value of "full
phase voltage — back E.M.R. (reactive load)" when the
load fuse blows. This energizes the single phase trip coil,
causing the common trip bar to unlatch and trip the Fusemalic Air Circuit Breaker. The coil is specifically rated
at '/m line voltage to assure instantaneous operation even
when the Fusematic Air Circuit Bracket is used as a motor

starter. In this case, although the back E.M.F. induced in
the motor winding is equal to phase voltage, because of
phase angle displacement the resultant voltage drop across
the fuse is sufficient to trip Fusematic Air Circuit Breakers.

of the circuit breaker frame size.

.c:
HhiIH
Mi|Ml
l«r
ewgiae CM tibm

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)
(Figure 18)
The dual magnetic overcurrent trip device, in combination
with the series coil and magnet, provides inverse long de
layed tripping for all ovcrcurrents hclow the instantaneous

pickup setting, and adjustable instantaneous tripping. All
devices arc factory calibrated and can be field adjusted.

Series Coil and Magnet

The current through the series coil provides the magneto
motive force to energize the magnet assembly. The clap
per type armature exerts the force on the push rod which
operates the trip unit and trips the circuit breaker. The
current rating of the coil and magnet may be changed by
moving the pole face assembly up or down. The calibrated
indicator plate lines up with the pointer on the armature

to indicate the proper position of the poleface for each
rating.

Selective Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-2) (Fig. 18)
The selective overcurrent trip device, in combination with

the series coil and dual armature magnet, provides inverse
long delayed tripping for all ovcrcurrents below the short

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)
(Long Time Delay and Instantaneous Trip)

delay pickup setting', and short delayed tripping for all

The long delay overcurrent trip device consists of a dash

ovcrcurrents and faults above the short delay pickup set
ting. All devices arc factory calibrated and can be field
adjusted.

pot which operates by the positive displacement of a liquid
through a fixed orifice and an adjustable tension coupling
spring which permits the push rod to move rapidly when
the force from the magnet exceeds a predetermined value.

Single Phasing Protection (Fig. 19)
When fuses arc used to protect circuits feeding three phase

motors or similar reactive apparatus there is always the
possibility, upon the blowing of one fuse only, that the
apparatus, single phased, will burn out. To eliminate this
danger, Fusematic Air Circuit Breakers incorporate three
single phase trip coils, one in parallel with each of the three
main fuses. Each trip coil is approximately a one thousand-

turn coil wound to operate down to ' in of line voltage.

I'he lever ratio between the push rod and the dash pot is

adjustable permitting the time delay to be varied. There
arc three calibrated positions or adjustment bands. The
three bands are identified as minimum, intermediate and

maximum. In addition to the long delay band .adjustment
there is an adjustable tension spring which prevents motion
of the push rod for currents below the maximum desired

continuous current. This is (he long delay pickup. It is
adjustable from 80 percent to 160 percent with calibrated
points at SC/r. 100%, 120%, 140%. and 160%.

The tension In the coupling spring determines the current
at which the dash pot will be mechanically by-passed. This
is the instantaneous pickup adjustment. The high range
instantaneous.element has calibrated settings at 7.5, 10 and
15 times the coil and magnet setting. The low range has
calibrated settings at .8, 1.5 and 2.5 times. High range

the coil retaining screws securely. This is important to pre

vent overheating and possible failure. Care should be t^en
not to damage the coil insulation.

units cannot be held modified to low range units or vice
versa.

Selective Service Trip Device (TD-2)
(Long Delay and Short Delay)

The selective service trip device is similar to the dual mag
netic trip device except that it has a rigid coupling link in
place of an instantaneous pickup coupling spring and it has
a mechanical escapement timing device which provides a
short delay for high values of overcurrents and for faults.
The long delay dash pot is identical to that used on the
dual magnetic trip device. The short delay device is oper

Dual Magnetic Overcuri^nt Trip Device (TD-1)
(Long Delay and Instantaneous Trip)

The circuit breakers are shipped with the trip devices in
stalled and properly adjusted. It is only necessary to keep
the devices reasonably clean. They are lubricated for the
life of the circuit breaker and must not be lubricated again.

It is possible to remove and replace a trip device in the
held.

To Remove a Trip Device
The trip units which are contained in transparent plastic
cases should be removed as units. Remove the two screws

ated by a separate armature in the series coil and magnet

which hold the plastic case to the breaker frame. These

assembly. It has an adjustable pickup spring with cali
brated settings at 5, 7.5 and 10 times the coil and magnet
setting. In addition, the short delay has a band adjustment
with calibrated points for the minimum, intermediate and

screws are located in the back side of the trip unit (looking

the maximum bands.

MAINTENANCE & ADJUSTMENTS
Remove breaker completely from cells before servicing.

Series Coil and Magnet Assembly

The series coil and magnet requires no maintenance other
than cleaning periodically to remove dust and dirt which
may accumulate on bearings and pivots of the magnet arm
atures. All pivots and bearings are made of nylon and no
lubrication is required.
The current rating of the coil and magnet may be adjusted
by loosening the two pole face retaining screws a few turns
and sliding the pole face of the flux shunting device up or
down to the desired position. The two retaining screws
must be tightened securely after making the adjustment.
Certain care should be exercised when adjusting the pole

face assembly to avoid bending or deforming it.
(1) Do not raise or lower the pole face assembly by
exerting force on the indicator plate. This plate is
calibrated at the factory and bending it will alter
the calibration.

(2) Move the two pole faces so that they remain par
allel, thus preventing binding on the magnet core.
The entire series coil and magnet assembly may be remov
ed and replaced in the field by removing the Vs" coil retain
ing screws and the Vi" magnet retaining screws at the rear
of the pole insulator. When replacing coils, always tighten

into the front of breaker) and can be removed by reaching
in from behind. The connecting rod which connects to the
magnet assembly must be slipped off the pin connection at
the magnet Then unscrew the plastic part of connecting
rod and remove the two nuts holding the tripping pieces
in place.

To Install a Trip Device
Insert the push rod in the proper hole in the front channel
and screw the trip unit to the channel using the two Vie"
hex. head cap screws provided. IMPORTANT: Use the
washer and lock washer provided. Run a 10-32 nut down
the push rod. Follow it with a trip finger on top of the

push rod with a spacer between the wings and another
10-32 nut. (Do not tighten it yet) Install the nylon turnbuckle and adjust its length so that it is 'A2" longer than is
just necessary to permit the trip device to reset the mag
netic armature against its stop. Install the turn buckle on
the armature pin and retain it with E-ring provided. Adjust
the position of the trip finger so that the breaker does not
trip when the magnet is closed with a Viz" thick shim in
the air gap, and does trip with a V64" thick shim in the air
gap. Tighten the linger and check this adjustment again.
The trip unit must reset the magnet armature all the way
until the armature is against the stop.

Selective Service Trip Device (TD-2)
(Long Delay and Short Delay)

The maintenance and adjustment of the selective service
trip device is the same as the dual magnetic trip device,
except that the trip finger on the short delay push rod is
installed under the push rod. Care should be taken to en
sure that the long delay trip finger on top of its push rod
docs not interfere with the short delay trip finger whjch
is installed under its push rod.

PART 7

DEFINITION OF SYMBOLS
TC

Trip coil

TCI

A phase fuse trip coil

TC2

B phase fuse trip coil

TC3

C phase fuse trip coil

Closing release coil

Anti pump relay

Spring charging motor

MC/aa
MC/bb

NO } Motor cut off switch (Shown with
NC
I closing mechanism spring discharged)

Undervoltage device
Main power circuit - A phase

Main power circuit - B phase
Main power circuit - C phase

Auxiliary switch contact (open when breaker is open)
Auxiliary switch contact (closed when breaker Is open)
A

CAfttV CLOSE
CAOtY CLOSE
mo OFCM

- • FP50 a

MiO OPCtt
CAOLV CLOSE
mo OPEN
MIO

Wtre 2S to • 06 FPMootf

TYPE FP a FM ELECTRICALU
OPERATED AX.8. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

1^ [9C|Z0E^2ZF4 24F(
,

BASIC ELECTRICAL CONTROL I |S(mNofn&

HOUSING MECHANISM ASSEMBLY

NUMBER REQUIRED
PER CIRCUIT
BREAKER
2000
400
000

Ado

Amp

1151-A-9758
llOl-A-9218

Trip Lever
Trip LeverShaft

5133-37

Trip Lever Shaft Retaining Ring

1104-9796

Trip Lever Shim Washer

As Required

1151-A-9853
llOl-A-9927

Trip Lever Rolier
Trip Lever Roiier Shaft

Trip Lever Reset Spring

TRIP FINGER ASSEMBLY
44
3D

TRIP LEVER ASSEMBLY
64
59
50
Not
Shown
69
68

ITEM

NUMBER REQUIRED
PER CIRCUIT
BREAKER
800 2000
400

29
31
45
43
48
49
47
33

32
24
23
22

1I51-A-9936
1151-A-9262
1101-A-98D4
5100-12
llOl-A-9925
llOl-A-5531
D.C.-B55
llOl-A-9883

Trtp-finger

Trip Finger Spring Lockwasher

1
1

Trip Finger Spring Nut

1
1
1
2
1
2
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1

1
2
2
2
2

1
2

Latch Bearing Assembly
Latch Bearing Pin
LatchBearing PinRetaining Ring
Trip Shaft
Trip Shaft Spacer
Trip Shaft Bearing
Trip Shaft Bearing Holder
Trip Shaft Bearing Holder Rivet
E598-3/8Lg.
554)22-0944)562; Trip Finger Roil Pin
Trip Finger Spring
llOl-A-5544
Trip Finger Spring Screw
S8-10
lW-8
N-8

1
1
1
2
1
2
2
4
2
1
1

1
1
1
2
1
2
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1

MAIN SHAFT ASSEMBLY
60
65
55
37
26

34
35
36

llOl-A-9147
llOl-A-9213
1151-A-9539
llOl-A-9216
5133-50
llOl-A-9116
lW-375
N-375

Lever Arm

LeverArm Bearing
Main Latch Link
Main Latch Shaft

Main Latch Shaft RetainingRing
LeverArm Stop
LeverArm Stop Lock Washer
Lever Arm Stop Nut

2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2

2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2

1
2
1
2
2
1
2

TRIP FINGER STOP
53
54
52
51

18
5
6
7
28

1101-9145
llOl-A-9152
llOl-A-9172
llOl-A-9191
llOl-A-9108
52-028-125
1101-9215

5133-37

61
62
20
21
56

llOl-A-9192
5133-37
llOl-A-9194
llOl-A-9196
5133-37
llOl-A-9195

5133-37

Compression Link

Lift Link
Drive Yoke
Drive Yoke Turnbuckle
Drive Yoke Turnbuckle Lock
Drive Yoke Turnbuckle Lock Pin

2
1
1
1
1
1
2

Trip Lever Stop Pin
Trip LeverStop Pin Retaining
Ring
Lift Link Pin

Drive Pin

1
2
1

Drive Pin Roiier

Drive Pin Roiier Retaining Ring
Compression Link Pin
Compression Link Pin Retaining
Ring

2
1
2

Lift Link Pin Retaining Ring

llOl-A-9543
lW-250
N-250

Trip FingerStop Pin
Stop Pin Tubing
Mounting Lockwasher
Mounting Nut

TRIP GUIDE ASSEMBLY
llOl-A-9111
5133-25
1117-B-9806

OPERATING LINKAGE
58
63

llOl-A-09934

Trip Guide Latch
Trip Guide Latch Retaining Ring
Trip Guide Latch Spring

CROSS BAR ASSEMBLY
Cross Bar

4
4'
12
11

1151-9407
1151-94D8
llDl-9219
llDl-9214

10
9
15
17

14
14*

1101-9190
5100-37
llOl-A-5543
llOl-A-9946
llOl-A-5540
llOl-A-9142
1102-9116
1104-9116

IW-IO

25
16

Cross Bar
Cross Bar Pin

Cross Bar Roiier RetainingRing
Puli-Off Spring Hook
Puli-Off Spring End
Pull-Off Spring
Cross Bar Guide

Insulation Block Mounting Screw
Insulation BlockMounting Screw
Insulation Block Mounting

4
2
1
4
2

4
2
6

Lockwasher

MOUNTING HARDWARE
Not
Shown

TRIP ROD ASSEMBLY
40
27
39
38

llOl-A-9593
Trip Rod Guide
1151-A-9942
Trip Rod
1105-B-9606
Trip Rod Spring
52-022-0494)875 Trip Rod Guide Pin
WS8-6

Trip Rod Assembly fdounting
Screw

«SIMIUR TO PART SHOWN

17
•

' J&-'

FP-50 FRAME ASSEMBLY

MAIN ASSEMBLY PARTS
400 I SOO
FIXEO
MOUNTED

1151-9392
1151-9395
1101-9162
1101-9163
1101-9266
1101-9266
1102-9272
1101-9272
1101-9160
1101-9273

Back Plate Assembly
Back Plate Assembly

Lower Right Side
Upper Right Side
Upper Left Side
Forward Cross Member
Forward Cross Member
Main Cross Member
Main Cross Member

GROUNDING STRIP ASSEMBLY
18
19
20
21

1101-9917
lS-250-10
lW-250
N-250

Grounding Strip
Grounding Strip Mounting Screw

1111
2
2
2
2

Grounding Strip Lock Washer
Grounding Strip Nut

2
2

DRAW-OUT ROLLER ASSEMBLY
1101-9686

Draw-Out Roller

1101-9685

Draw-Out Roller Shaft

W-500

Draw-Out Roller Washer

5133-50
W-375
lW-375
N-375

Draw-Out Roller Retaining Ring
Mounting Washer
Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Nut

1S-250-10
1W-250
N-250

Frame Screw
Frame Lock Washer
Frame Nut

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

FRAME FASTENERS
12
13
14

16
16
16

NAME PLATE
1101-9295
1101-9277

Name Plate
Name Plate Screw

«SlMIIJtR TO PART SHOWN

DRAW OUT AND INDICATOR MECHANISM ASSEMBLY
MANUALLY OPERATED
FIXED
DRAW-OUT
2DI0

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
DRAW-OUT
4«0
&
ZCCO
SCO

FIXED
400
S
ZOSD

FRAME ASSEMBLY
11
11*
11*
11*

1151-9710
1152-9710
1153-9710
1154-9710

Frame Assembly
Frame Assembly
Frame Assembly
Frame Assembly

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1

INDICATOR LINKS
9
10
4
5
3
12
13
16
18
15
19
20
16

1101-9944
1116-9606

SF6-40x5/32Lg.
lW-6
1101-9732
1151-9735
1101-9738
5133-15
102-023
1101-9718
1151-9739
1101-9738
5133-15

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2

O.C. Indicator Conn. Link

0.0. Indicator Conn. Spring

O.C. Indicator Conn. Screw
O.C. Indicator Conn. Washer

1
1

O.C. Indicator Conn. Return Spring

O.C. Indicator

O.C. Indicator Pin

Indicator Pin Retaining Ring
C.D. Link Spring
C.D. Link Return Spring

2
1
1

C.D. Indicator
C.D. Indicator Pin

1
1

Indicator Pin Retaining Ring

1
2

LOCAL CLOSE LINKAGE
8
8*
6

7
17
14

1151-9720
1152-9720

1101-9732
W810-4
120-001
WS6-7

Local Close Linkage
Local Close Linkage
Local Close ReturnSpring

Close Linkage Mounting Screw

1
2

Local Close Switch

Local Close Switch Mounting Screw

2
1
2

2
1

DRAW-OUT OPERATING MECHANISM
30
33
32
31
29
27
24
25
23
26
26*
22
22*
34
21

1151-9800
19S-312-24
1101-9743

llOl-A-9744
N-312
1101-9652
1108-B-9606
llOl-A-9734
52-048-219-1750
llOl-A-9663
1102-A-9663
llOl-A-9742
1102-A-9742
1151-9671
52-032-156-1250

Front GearAssembly
Front Gear Screw
Front Gear Washer

1
1

Fron Gear Spacer

Front Gear Lock Nut
Rear Gear

1
1
1
1

Rear Gear Index Pin Spring
Rear Gear Index Pin
Rear Gear Roll Pin

Operating Shaft
Operating Shaft
Left Shaft Guide

1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1

Right Shaft Guide
Drive Link Assembly

TRIP LINKAGE
35
28
36

37
38
39
40
2
1

1151-B-9528
llOl-A-5512
llOl-A-9529
llOl-A-5514

52-012-062-0500
1120-B-9606
llOl-A-5581
lW-250
N-250

Trip Link Assembly
Trip Link Spacer
Trip Link Pivot Shaft
Trip Link Washer
Trip Link Pin
Trip Link ReturnSpring
Trip Link Return Spring Pin
Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Nut

•SIMILAR TO PART SHOWN

I>>t

ARC CHUTE
MUHBER REODIRED
PER POU

Blow-Out Magnet Insulation Plate

Pressure Plate Insulation

SERIES COIL & MAGNET ASSEMBLY

PART NUMBER

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

NUMBER REQUIRED PER FOU
DUAl MABNmC
SELECTIVE SERVICE
m
22S
400
SCO 2000 20
SO 12S 2»
409
SOD

20119

SERIES COIL
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
10

1101-9771
1101-9772
1151-9994
1151-9755
1151-9756
1151-9776
1101-9440

15-20Amp Coil
30-50 Amp CdII
70-125 Amp Coil
150-225 Amp Coll
250400 Amp Coil
500-800 Amp Coll
1000-2000 Amp Coil

MAGNET CORE ASSEMBLY
11
12
13
14
15
16

1151-9769
1151-9763
1151-9106

Stationary MagAet Assembly
Magnet CoreAssembly
Mapet Core Bracket

1101-9948
1101-9099
12R5118

POLE FACE ASSEMBLY
1151-9750
S6-30
1101-9707
1101-9747
1101-9855
1101-9856
1101-9857
1101-9858
1101-9859
1101-9860
1101-9861
RT2-8A

20
17
18
19
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
28

Pole Face
Pole Face Screw
Pole Face Plate

1
2
1
1
1

Pole Face Tapped Plate
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole
Pole

Face
Face
Face
Face
Face
Face
Face
Face

Indicator Plate
Indicator Plate

1
2
1
1

Indicator Plate
indicator Plate
Indicator Plate
Indicator Plate
Indicator Plate
Indicator Plate Rivet

ARMATURE ASSEMBLY
1151-9753
1151-9754
1101-9109
5133-18
1101-9784
1101-9379

Left Hand Armature

19S-37S-40
19S-375-48

19S-375-44

S
h

19S-500-20
lW-375
W.375

3/8-16 Bolt 2-1/2" Lg.
3/8-16 Bolt 3" Lg3/8-16 Bolt 2-3/4" Lg.
1/2-13 Bolt 1-1/8" Lg.

Right Hand Armature
Armature Shaft

Armature Shaft Retaining Ring
Spacer Washer
Spacer Tube

MOUNTING HARDWARE
N

0
VT
n

lW-500
W-5Q0

3/8" Lock Washer
3/8" Washer
1/2" Lock Washer
1/2" Washer

FP-50 SERIES TRIP UNIT

Dual Magnetic Series Trip Unit
TypeTDl
Long Delay & Instantaneous Trip

1151-9081

Selecting Series Trip Unit
TypeTD2

NUMBER REOUIRED PER POLE

Long Delay &Sliort Delay Trip
1151-9879

Special Service Trip Unit
TypeTD3
Long Delay, Short Delay & Instantaneous Trip

1151-9083

Special Application Trip Unit
TypeTD4
Long Delay Trip

MOUNTING HARDWARE
TO 1 & 4

Tumbuckle Retaining Ring

2£ 9£g SE

r
s

- -t
_E1

iijuujuuuuiMjuui iuuuyyuiwju^^
z\

lAAAAAjuuiMjimf mummmm

t
STORED ENERGY MECHANISM
ITEM

Rear Plate
Rear Plate

Upper Channel
Upper Channel

Lower Channel
Lower Channel
Front Plate

1
9

lECTNICAlir
OPERATED
SOOO

2000

FRAME ASSEMBLY
1

I151-B-9533

1101-9156
1151-B-9396

2*
32
32*
21

115I-B-9365
1151-8-9362
I151-B-9364
1151-B-9230
22TM-02

FRONT PLATE ASSEMBLY
33
29

30
31
19
20
18
17
18
16

13
27
26
25
28
14
15

23
22
24

llOl-A-9164
llOl-A-9166
1101-A-9i55
5100-25
llOl-A-9450

Ratchet Gear
Ratchet Pawl

Ratchet Pawl Spring
Ratchet Pawl Retaining Ring
Cam Stop Latch Plate

llOl-A-9522

Latch Reset Piate

1105-A-979S
2701-A-0412
1103-A-9796

Shim Washer
Washer

lIOl-A-9521

Cam Stop Pin
Cam Stop Roll Pin

79-022-094-0375
1101-9222
1104-9764
1101-9151

Close Latch Pin
Close Latch Shim
Close Latch Lever

79-022-0944)525

Close Latch Level Roll Pin

1101-9248
1101-9788
1151.A-9490
Z-7756-W

Cam Stop Reset Spring Support
Cam Stop Reset Spring
Charging Lever Assembly

llOl-A-9417

Charging lever Pawl Spring
Charging Lever Return Spring

INTERNAL MECHANISM
10
9
8
3
4
5
6
7

Thrust Brachet Assembly

1101-9229
1101-A-9796
1102-A-9796
1151-9806
1152-9806
1101-9267
1112-9606
1111-9606
llOl-A-9165

Main
Main
Main
Main
Main

Spring Guide
Spring Guide
Spring Guide Screw
Spring
Spring

Tumbuchle Head

Jumbuckie'Screw
. Turnbuckle Screw Nut

Y-RELAY; CHARGING MOTOR - SHUNT CLOSE; SHUNT TRIP; SAFETY LOCK
ITEM

PART HUMBER

DESCRIPTION

AIL BREAKERS

Y (ANTI PUMP) RELAY
1
r
1*
1*
1*
2
3
Not
Shown

1151-5569
1152-5569
1153-5569
1154-5569
1155-5569
S-10-10
IW-IO

Y Relay 48VAC
YRelay 115VAC
YRelay 230V AC
YRelay 125VDC
YRelay 250V DC
YRelay Mounting Screw
YRelay Mounting Lock Washer

SHUNT TRIP & SHUNT CLOSE
6
7
8
9
15
15*
15*
15*
15*
15*
15*
15*
13
14
12
10
11
4
5

1101-9513
1101-9512
1101-9524
1101-9516
1151-9818
1152-9818
1153-9818
1154-9818
1155-9818
1156-9818
1157-9818

1158-9818
1101-9931
1101-9690
llOl-A-5583
S104
2W-10
S8-8
1W8

Magnet Frame
Magnet Core
Magnet Spring
Magnet Armature

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1

Coil 24V DC
Coil 48V DC
Coil 125V DC
Coil 250V DC

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Coil 230V AC
Coil 48V AC
Coil 115V AC
Coil 230V AC
Shunt Close Arm

ShuntTrip Arm

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
2
2
2
2

Guide Plate
Guide Plate Screw
Guide Plate Loch Washer

Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer
400

1
2
2
2
2
000

2000

1
1

SPRING CHARGING MOTOR
18
18*
18*
18*
18*
17
16
19
20

15058
14975

14977
14976
14978
1101-9220
5100-31

1/4-20 X1-1/2 Lg.

lW-250
W-250

24
25
22
23
26
27
28

IlOl-A-5543
llOl-A-5605
SF6J2-4
2W-6
lIOl-B-5604
1S8-5
2W-8

Spring Charging Motor 48V AC-DC
Spring Charging Motor 115V AC • 125V DC
SpringCharging Motor 230V AC - 250V DC
Spring Charging Motor 115VAC - 125V DC
SpringCharging Motor 230V AC - 250V DC
Motor Roller

Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor

Roller Retaining Ring
Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Washer

1
1
3
3
3

1
1
1
1
3
3
3

MOTOR CUT-OFF SWITCH
Motor Cut-Off Switch
Switch Insulation

Switch Mounting Screw
Switch Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Bracket
Mounting Screw
Mounting LockWasher

2
2

STORED ENERGY SAFETY LOCK
33
34
35
36
31
32
29
30

1151-9863
1101-9864
1113-9606
50-028-125-1250
1101-9225
WS6-2
S8-6
lW-8

Lock Frame
Lock Pin

Lock Pin Spring
Lock Pin Roll Pin
Name Plate

Name Plate Screw

Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer

2
2

'SIMILAR TO PART SHOWN

AUXILIARY SWITCH & SECTOR ASSEMBLY
MANUALLY
OPERATED

11S7-9323
3 UNITS
NO EXTRA
CONTACTS

11SS-S923
4 UNITS
2 EXTRA
CONTACTS

I1S9-9923
9 UNITS
4 EXTRA
CONTACTS

11E0-$923
G UNITS
G EXTRA
CONTACTS

4
1
1
1
8
2

5
1

6
1
1
1
12
2

t161-9923
3 UNITS
6 EXTRA

CONTACTS

AUXILIARY SWITCH
7

24
23
21
20
6

8*
8*
8*
8
8*
17*
17*
17*
17
5
4
1
3
2
25
26

18
19

C46422
1101-9914
A-356791
1102-9914
1101-9815
C45287
1101-9961

1102-9981
1103-9961
1104-9961
1105-9961
S8-38
S848
S8-58
SB-68
1151-9911
1101-9890
5133-25
1101-9501
WS64
S8-5
lW-8
lW-8
N-8

Unit Assembly
Right End Mounting Bracket
End insuiation

Left End Mounting Bracket

Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact

insuiation
insuiation
insuiation
insuiation
insuiation

Panel
Panel
Panel
Panel
Panel

Switch Assembiy Screw
Switch Assembiy Screw
Switch Assembly Screw

SwitchAssembiy Screw
Operating Shaft Assembiy
Drive Link Long
Drive Link Retaining Ring
Drive Link Short
Drive Link Lock Screw

Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer
SwitchAssembiy Lock Washer
Switch Assembiy Nut

2
1

1
1
2
1
2
3
3
2
2

1
2
1
2
3
3
2
2

UNIT ASSEMBLY C-46422
NUMBER REOUIREO PER UNIT ASSEMBLY

045276

Unit Housing

15
16
14
13

C45278
045293
C-45300
C-45299

Moving Contact Assembiy
Moving Contact Support
Moving Contact Spring
Moving Contact Spring Retainer
Lower Terminai Stud

COMMON LINKAGE ASSEMBLY
(Operates: C.O. Indicator Beii-Alarm, Under Voitage, Auxiiiaiy Switch)
XOOOA

490

31
31
33
33*

30
29
28
27
35
35*
34
34*
32

1151-9508

Sector Assembiy

1151-9821
1101-9509
1101-9822
1101-9508
W-250

Sector Assembiy

1102-5588
1503-2639
1101-9505
1101-9823
1101-5586
1103-5586
5133-25

Sector Pivot Pin
Sector Pivot Pin
Sector Drive Link

Drive Pin Spacer
Drive Pin Spacer

Drive & Pivot Pin Retaining Ring

Cotter Pin
Drive Pin
Drive Pin

^SIMILAR TO PART SHOWN

•

•M

ARC-CHUTE RETAINING BAR

INTERPHASE BARRIER

AUXILIARY CONTACT ASSEMBLY

Spacer Block
Spacer Block

ARC-CHUTE RETAINING BAR
1
1*
6
5
2
3
4

1101-9887
1101-9888
1101-9885
lS-250-40
lS-250-12
lW-250
N-250

Arc-Chute Retaining Bar
Arc-Chute Retaining Bar
Retaining Screw Holder
Retaining Screw
Mounting Screw
Mounting LockWasher
Mounting Nut

1
3
3
4
4
4

INTERPHASE BARRIER

(2 Req. Per Breaker)
9
9*
8
10
7

1101-9289
1102-9289
1101-9288
1101-9288
SA8-8

Right Barrier
Assembly Screw

1
1
1
4

SECONDARY CONTACT ASSEMBLY
DRAW-OUT BREAKERS
(I Req. Per Breaker)
11
12
13
14
Not
Shown
17
16
15

1151-9403
1151-0831
lS-250-7
lW-250
3S10-7
lW-10
13-250-12
lW-250
N-250

Secondary Contact Bracket
Secondary Contact Block
Secondary Contact Mounting Screw
Secondary Contact Mounting Lock Washer
Wire Binding Screw
Wire Binding Lock Washer
Mounting Screw

Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Nut

As Required (1 to 6)
2 Per Block (Item 12)
2 Per Block
4 Per Block
4 Per Block
4
4
4

FIXED MOUNTED
20
23
18
19
22

121-012
1101-5518
1S4-14
lW-8
lS-250-8
lW-250

Terminal Block

Mounting Bracket
Terminal Block Mounting Screw
Terminal Block Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer

«SiMIUR TO PART SHOWN

L24

\ °28 29-'-^O
'35»37

NUMBER REQUIRED PER CIRCUIT BREAKER

FM-50 FUSEMATIC ATTACHMENTS
ITEM

P1690
P1690
P1700
P1700
P1700
P1700
P1700

FUSE
Econolim Fuse "J" 201 to 400 Amp
Econolim Fuse "J" 401 to 600 Amp
Econolim Fuse "L" Type II 601 to 800 Amp
Econolim Fuse "L" Type II 801 to 1200 Amp
Econolim Fuse "L" Type II 1201 to 1600 Amp
Econolim Fuse "L" Type II 1601 to 2000 Amp
Econolim Fuse "L" Type II 2100 to 3000 Amp

FUSE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
7
8
9
9*

10
10*
24
14
15
16
16*
16*
17
18
19
20

21
22
23

1101-8108
1101-8107
1101-8102
1101-8202
1101-8101
1101-8201
1101-8103
N-312
lW-312
19S-500-32
19S-500-24
19S-250-20
W500
1W500
N500
19S-375-15
W375
1W375
N375

Right Hand "J" Fuse Adaptor
Left Hand "J" Fuse Adaptor
Fuse Support Insulator, 800 only
Fuse Support Insulator, 2000 only
Stab Adaptor, 800 only
Stab Adaptor, 2000 only
Supporting Rod
Supporting Rod Nut
Supporting Rod Lock Washer
"L" Fuse Mounting Bolt
"J" Fuse Mounting Bolt
"i" Fuse Mounting Bolt 401 to 600 Amp only
Fuse Mounting Washer

Fuse Mounting
Fuse Mounting
Fuse Mounting
Fuse Mounting
Fuse Mounting
Fuse Mounting

3
3
1

2
8
8

3
3

Lock Washer
Nut
Bolt
Washer
Lock Washer
Nut

INTERPHASE BARRIER
800A

FM-SO

FRAME

1601 -2000 AMP FUSE
am FRAME

LINE (UPPER STUD) FUSE MOUNTING
2
r

1101-8109
11018113

Not

Stlmpson

Shown
A1730
LOAD SIDE (LOWER STUD) FUSE MOUNTING
LEFT HAND BARRIER
2
1101-8109
4
1101-8104
1
1101-8110
3
SA8-8
RIGHT HAND BARRIER
1101-8109
2
1101-8114
4
1*
1101-8113
Not
Shown

40
27
30
31
32
28
29

33
34
26
25
Not
Shown

37
38
39
35
36
Not
Shown

Inside Barrier
Outside Barrier

Spacer
Assembly Screw
Inside Barrier
Outside Barrier

Spacer
Assembly Eyelet

1101-9512
S12-5B
lW-12

SINGLE PHASE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Mounting Plate
TrippingArm
Magnet Frame
Magnet Coil
Magnet Core
Magnet Core Screw
Magnet Core Lock Washer

llOl-A-9524

Magnet Core Spring

llOl-A-9516
llOl-A-5583
SlO-4

Armature Plate

2W10

Guide Plate Mounting Lock Washer

S8-5
lW-8
N-8
S 250-10
lW-250

Magnet Assembly Mounting Screw
Magnet Assembly Mounting LockWasher
Magnet Assembly Mounting Nut
Assembly Mounting Screw
Assembly Mounting LockWasher

N-250

Assembly Mounting Nut

SIO
2W10

Wire Mounting Screw
Wire Mounting LockWasher

S-250

Wire Mounting Screw

2W-250

Wire Mounting Lock Washer

llOl-B-8105
llOl-A-8106
1101-9513

1151-B-9818

Guiding Plate

Guide Plate Mounting Screw

SOOA a ZOOQA
FRAME

1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2

WIRING ACCESSi
11
12
Not
Shown
Not
Shown

^
37

"SIMILAR TO PART SHOWN

FRONT BOX ASSEMBLY
inM

1151-C-9844
1151-9998

Front Box Cover Assembly
Front Box Cover Assembly
Front Box Cover Assembly
Front Box Cover Assembly
Lock LeverSpring
Front Box Cover Mounting Screw
Front Box Mounting Screw

1151-9845
1151-9999
1101-9718
17S64
WS-10-6

MAN. a
ELECT.
DRAWOUT

2000 AMP MANUAL CHARGING HANDLE ASSEMBLY
9
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
10
11
12
18
Not
Shown

1101-9278
1101-9279
1102-A-9215
1101-9846

5133-25
1101-9560
1101-9846
1101-9561
1101-A-9562
1102-A-9563
1101-9149
6S10-32
lW-10

ChargingHandle Hub
Charging Handie
Handle Pivot Pin

Handle Spring
Handle Pivot Pin Retaining Ring
Handle Knob

Handle Knob Spring
Handle Knob Screw

Trip Button
Trip Button Pin
Trip Button Plate
Handle Mounting Screw
Handle Mounting LockWasher

FP 50-400 & -800 MANUAL CHARGING HANDLE
22
10
11*
12
18
Not
Shown

1151-9807
llOl-A-9562
llOl-A-9563
1101-9149
6S10-32

Charging Handle
Trip Button
Trip Button Pin
Trip Button Plate
Handle Mounting Screw

1111
1111
3
3
3
3
1111
1111

lW-10

Handie Mounting Lock Washer

1111

CHARGING SHAFT ASSEMBLY
(All Manual and Manual & Electrical FP-50 Breakers)

25
24
31
30
23
26
28
27

1151-9479
1101-9310
1115-9606
2703-A-0412
1101-9306
1101-9301
1101-9549
1101-9548

Charging Shaft Assembly
Manual Charging Dog
Dog Spring
Dog Washer
Handle Centering Spring
Handle Centering Spring
Spring Guide
CenteringSpring Lever

994)28-125-1000

Centering Spring Lever Retaining Pin

«SiMiUR TO PART SHOWN

31" 32 33 34 35^®^^ 38

BELL-ALARM, UNDERVOLTAGE
TRIP SHAFT EXTENSIONS

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
53
54
41

1101-9473
1101-9472
1101-9468
1533-18
1101-9470
1101-9480
1101-9471
1101-9485
1151-9495
1101-9481
1101-9500

S8-8

BELL ALARM ASSEMBLY
I

2
3
17
4
5
6

7
8
9
9*
10
11
12
13
14

1101-9896
1101-9899
1151-9902
1533-25
1101-5587
1123-9606
W-250

1503nA-2639
1101-9898
1101-9897
1102-9897
1101-9900

Mounting Plate
Deflector Arm

Operating Link

Operating Link Retaining Ring
Operating Pin
Operating Pin Spring
Operating Pin Washer
Operating Pin Cotter Pin
Deflection Shaft Drive Arm
Deflection Shaft
Deflection Shaft
Deflection Shaft Return Sorinn

59-028-125-0500 Deflection Arm &Drive Arm Pin
5133-37
Deflection Shaft Retaining Ring
1204101

Bell-Alarm Switch

Bell-Alarm Switch Mounting

Bell-Alarm Switch Mounting

1W6

16
18
19
20
21

N-6
19S-25D-8
lW-250
W-250
N-250

Lock Washer

Bell-Alarm Switch Mounting Nut
Bell-Alarm Mounting Screw

2
2

Bell-Alarm Mounting Lock Washer 2
Bell-Alarm Mounting Washer
2
Bell-Alarm Mounting Nut
2

1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4

4
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2

Armature Pivot Pin Spacer
Armature Pivot Pin Spacer
Drive Pin

Drive Pin Retaining Ring
Main Spring
Latch Pin
Armature Latch Lever
Dash Pot Gasket

Piston Assembly
Dash Pot Housing
Mounting Bracket

Undervoltage Unit Mounting
Screw

Undervoltage Unit Mounting

lW-8

43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

N8
19S-250-8

Lock Washer

lW-250
N-250
1101-9502
1101-9501
S6-4
lW-6
5133-25

Undervoltage Unit Mounting Nut
Mounting Screw
Mounting Lock Washer
Mounting Nut
Reset Link
Reset Link

Reset Link Screw
Reset Link Lock Washer

Reset Link Retaining Ring

TRIP SHAFT EXTENSIONS

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP DEVICE
INST.
TRIP

1151-9493

23
23*
23*
23*
23*
23*
22
24
26
27
28

1151-9817
1152-9817
1153-9817

1154-9817
1155-9817
1156-9817
1101-9461
1508-2639
1151-9494
1101-9478

Stationary Magnet & Bracket

DEUYED
TRIP

Assembly

Undervoltage
Undervoltage
Undervoltage
Undervoltage
Undervoltage
Undervoltage

Coil 115V AC
Coll 230V AC
Coll 460V AC
Coil 575V AC
Coil 125V DC
Coil 250V DC
Coil Retaining Spring
Coil Retaining Cotter Pin
Armature Assembly
Pull Off Spring
Pull Off Spring Pin

1
1
1
1
1

Pull Off Spring Pin Retaining

Tripping Ram Assembly
Armature Pivot Pin

Armature Pivot Pin Retaining
Ring

fp-so n>-so n>-50
400
800 ZOOO

55
55*
63
63*
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
68

1101-9779
1101-9781
1101-9778
1101-9782

Left Hand Shaft Extension
Left Hand Shaft Extension

Right Hand Shaft Extension
Right Hand Shaft Extension
59-028-125-0500 Shaft Extension Coupling Pin
1101-9531
Trip Finger
1102-9531
Trip Finger
1103-9531
Trip Finger
1101-9385
Trip Finger
1101-9309
Counter Weight

59-028-1254)625 Trip Finger Roll Pin
1101-9402

Shaft Extension Support
Shaft Extension Bearing

Shaft Extension Support
Mounting Screw
Shaft Extension Support
Mounting Screw LockWasher
Shaft Extension Support
Mounting Nut

»SIMIUR TO PART SHOWN

IfS'D APR 211983
IN-810.4

INSTRUCTION & RENEWAL PARTS MANUAL
for

TYPE FP LOW VOLTAGE
POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
and

FM FUSEMATIC BREAKER
FEBRUARY. 1963

INSTRUCTION & RENEWAL PARTS MANUAL
for

TYPE FP LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
and

FM FUSEMATIC BREAKERS
Manually and Electrically Operated

BREAKER

FUSEMATIC

Type FP-50-400
Type FP-50-800
Type FP-50-2000

Shipment, Receiving, Handling & Storage

Part 3

Inspection & Installation

Overcurrent Trip Devices

Part 7

Wiring Diagram

Part 8

Recommended Spare Parts

50 PARIS STREET, NEWARK 1, NEW JERSEY

PART 3
INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION

PART 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This Instruction Manual covers the FP50-400, FP50-800,
FP50-2000, FM50-800 and FM50-2000 Fusematic break

SECTION I

Inspection • Manually Operated

Breakers

ers only. For instructions on the FPlOO series breakers
refer in Instruction Booklet #IN810.6.

The FP line of Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and
Fusematic Breakers, which ranges from ISA through
2000A continuous current at 600 Volt ratings, are designed
for simplicity of operation, reliability and easy mainten
ance. The FP Breaker and FM Fusematic are equipped
with a stored energy mechanism mechanically trip free in
any position of the closing cycle, three unit pole assemblies,

fully field adjustable timing devices, multi-range series trip
coOs, and telescoping roll-out rails. The three position
drawout mechanism is operable with the door closed.

The FP and FM breakers consist of a coordinated set of

assemblies mounted on a steel frame, all carefully adjusted
and locked in place for long and trouble-free operation.

To assist in properly checking and inspecting breakers prior
to placing into service, the following 15 points should be
followed in the order listed:

1. Remove arc chutes and interphase barriers.
2. Charge stored energy mechanism by rotating operating

handle to a positive stop. Handle should return to
normal vertical position.
NOTE: Charging Operation:

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

Maintenance closing handle 1151-9252
Cell racking in handle 1101-9251

FP & FM50-400 and 50-800 —

Rotate handle 90®

counterclockwise to engage mechanism and then 180®
clockwise to positive stop. (Figure 1).

PART 2

SHIPMENT. RECEIVING. HANDLING
AND STORAGE
Roise 90" fo

engage chorging

for an immediate inspection by the delivering carrier. Upon
assessment of the damage a claim should be filed with the
carrier or, depending on the nature of the damage, an in
tent to file for concealed damage should be registered. For
assistance in filing the claim, advise the area sales office of
Federal Pacific Electric Company, giving a full description
of the damage, serial number of the breaker, delivering
carrier's name, and, if shipped by rail, the car number,

waybill reference! and any other information that might be

ratchet

^Rotate 160*
cicckwiae to

^chorge spring

NORMAL HANDLE POSITION

Rgure 1

FP & FM50-2000 — Unfold collapsible handle from
vertical down position to vertical up position. Rotate
180® clockwise to positive stop. Release handle slowly.
(Figure 2).

of help to the Company in aiding in the filing of the
damage claim.
When unpacking, make sure that all items are removed
from the box including packing list, instruction book, main
tenance parts and hardware. Report any shortage immed
iately. Sec that identification tags arc left on the breaker.
Lifting eyelets are furnished for handling. Do not lift or
handle breaker by the front box or the operating handle.

Roise to extend^
hoodie

normal

handle position

Clean breaker thoroughly. To remove dust an industrial
vacuum cleaner is recommended.

If the breaker can be

installed in its permanent location, it is advisable to do so,

even if it is not expected to be energized for some time.
When breakers must be stored in buildings under construc
tion, be sure they are kept in a space free of dust, moisture,
dirt and in an upright position. It is recommended that
the breaker not be operated prior to final inspection.

Rdtote clockwise

- I60* to chorge

Figure 2

3. Lock safety discharge interlock to prevent accidental
discharge of stored energy mechanism. (Figure 3).

6. With maintenance closing handle in position and trip

bar in tripped position, proceed to close breaker. Oper
ating mechanism will now be trip free and contacts

7. Remove maintenance closing handle and trip breaker
by moving trip bar.
8. Replace one pull-off spring right side only.
9. Inspect each arc chute to be sure no plates arc dam
aged. Replace chutes and intcrphase barriers on break
er. Move contacts in by hand and tighten arc chutes
only after contacts move in and out freely.
Figure 3

4. Remove right and left hand accelerating springs (Fig
ure 4).

10. Release discharge safety interlock. (Figure 3). NOTE;
To avoid possible injury NKVER handle or touch any
moveable part of the breaker when the stored energy
mechanism is charged, without first applying safety
interlock.

Press close button on front cover.

Breaker

will close. Depress red trip button (located in charging

handle) slowly. Breaker will open before trip button
reaches its extreme stop.

11. Recharge stored energy mechanism and close breaker,
Slowly move scries trip coil's magnet (armature) to

fully closed position. Breaker should trip before arma

riA%j

ture touches pole face assembly. Repeat this procedure

wM.

on ail poles.

12. On a draw-out breaker, charge stored energy mechan
ism. close breaker and move draw-out interlock plate
sideways. Breaker will trip. (Figure 6).

i '•
Figure 4

^
Hgure 5

5. Insert maintenance closing handle #1151-9252 as in
Figure 5 and slowly operate until arcing contacts touch.
All arcing contacts should make simultaneously with a
permissible variation of Wj max. Movcable arcing con
tact fingers should align with stationary arcing contacts.
If misalignment or misadjustments arc observed, refer
to Part 4 —

MAINTENANCE FOR ADJUSTING

INSTRUCTIONS. Moveable arcing contacts are de
signed with side clearances for better guidance inside
the arc chutes. A side to side movement of '.i is allow
able.

Close breaker and check overlravcl on main

contacts.

Figure 6

13. Charge stored energy mechanism and close breaker.

Pull padlock lever out. Breaker should trip before pad
lock slot is fully exposed.

14. Check retaining rings and hardware for tightness.
15. Basket and finger assembly should be secured and re
taining bolts tight. Contact finger must bo free of
dirt and foreign particles. Secondary female contacts
mounted on breaker must operate freely.

SECTION II

inspection • Electrically Operated

"fill

Breakers

Electrically the stored energy mechanism is charged by a

fractional horsepower ratchet type AC/DC universal mo
tor. Identification, voltage ranges and currents requirements
are specified below. The stored energy mechanism is charg
ed electrically in approximately one second.
CHARGING MOTORS FOR FP BREAKERS

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM
VoitaES Rating

I15VA.C./125V0.C.
230VA.C./250V D.C.

Maximum 240V, use control power transformer for higher voltage
'Class 1330 Econ Dual element fuses

From wiring diagram supplied with equipment, or standard
diagram Part 7 of this book, locate motor terminals on
secondary contacts and connect required power source.
Motor will charge when power is applied and shutoff auto

matically when charging cycle is completed.
Breaker cannot be closed with the maintenance closing

handle unless stored energy mechanism is charged. On all
electrically operated FP breakers the stored energy mech
anism will recharge immediately following a closing opera
tion ready for instant rcclosure if needed.
Follow inspection procedure Steps I through 15 exactly
as outlined in "Inspection - Manually Operated Breakers."
In addition the following steps are recommended:
16. From wiring diagram locale terminals on secondary
contacts and connect proper control power supply and
controls for shunt close and shunt trip attachments.
Close and open breaker five times electrically and
check for proper operation.
17. Disconnect control power supply. Close and trip tripbreaker manually. Do not leave breaker in the charged
and/or closed position while in storage.

Figure 7
9. Draw-out mechanism on breaker should be in OUT

position.
10. Push breaker inside the cell until racking-in cranks

engage a positive stop. This is the OUT position.
11. Close door slowly ai^d latch and make sure that the
metal mask provided on outside of front box moves
freely back as it comes in contact with the door. The
door should close all the way with the breaker in the
OUT position.
12. Push drawout interlock to left, insert drawout icver
1101-9251, (Figi^e 8) into the bottom hole of the

drawout mechanism and, with an up-stroke, rack
breaker into the TEST position. Remove drawout lever,
drawout interlock plate should snap into position com
pletely covering the holes.
13. Install control power fuses, circuit is now energized,
the motor will charge the stored energy mechanism
and closing and tripping control circuits become ener
gized in the TEST position.
14. Open door and make sure that grounding contact in
cell is now in contact with the breaker.

SECTION III - Installation

Before installing breaker in cell, check following points
inside cell:

1. Secondary contact support — make sure all connec

tions are tight and adjusted to proper dimensions.
2. Ground connections should be tight.
3. Extension rails should be free to move in and out;

check rail stops for tightness.
4. Rail rollers should be free and well lubricated.

5. Main contact slabs should be tight and free of dust
and dirt.

6. Check condition of insulating transite plate In roof of
case. Screws should be tight.
7. Remove control power fuses.
8. Place breaker on fully extended moveable rails. Make

sure all four rollers engage on inside grooves (Outside
grooves fit into stationary rails inside cell). (Figure 7).

Close door

and check breaker electrically for proper closing and
opening operation.
If breaker operates properly, rack breaker back to OUT

position and leave there until ready to be put into service.

15. When putting into service push drawout interlock to
left, inseit drawout lever in the bottom hole of the

drawout mechanism (Figure 8) and with an upward
stroke rack breaker into operating position. Remove

drawout lever, interlock plate should snap in position
and red IN appears.

4. Make sure nylon spacer is in place.
5. Roller 1101-9231 must roll free on its pivot pin.
6. Surfaces marked "F" should be lubricated by a thin film
of "Conducto-Lube #240-200" before assembly.

Contacts must be inspected after every known short circuit
intcrrtiption and should also be inspected at regular in
spection periods. If contacts are found to be worn or ex

cessively pitted they should be dressed or replaced.
CAUTION: When reinstalling the arc chutes, adjust the
retaining screw holder on the arc chute retaining bar so
that the arcing contacts do not come in contact with the
arc chute baffles.

CONTACT ASSEMBLY

To repair or replace moveable arcing contacts, proceed as
follows (Figure 11):

1. Charge stored energy mechanism and lock discharge
safely interlock (Figure 3).
2. Remove arc chutes and interphase barrier.
3. Remove arc chute retaining bar,

4. Remove insulating block and push fork assembly.

5. Tighten moveable arcing contact's adjusting screw until
springs arc solid and remove retaining pins.

Rgure 9 & Figure 9A

PART 4

MAINTENANCE

The breakers with all component part.s have been exten
sively tested for performance as per NEMA Standards
SO. 3-3-17 and SG. 3-3-18 and proved to be satisfactory
with a wide margin of safety.
In accordance with NEMA Standards SG3 • Part 6, a peri
odic maintenance schedule should be established.

For the

convenience of the user a simple log .sheet is provided with
every breaker to ensure proper maintenance and years of

6. Remove arcing contact pivot pin and replace moveable

arcing contacts. Both contacts should be replaced at
one lime.

7. Make sure nylon bushings arc in place and in a good
condition, while replacing moveable arcing contact.

Reassemble following the same sequence of operations and
adjust per Figs. 10 & 11. In most cases it is not necessary
to replace contacts, but occasional redrc.ssing and readjust
ments are recommended.

trouble-free operation. It should be kept and followed
conscientiously, especially in cases where breakers are re
quired to operate under more adverse conditions.

To replace stationary arcing contacts (Figure 11). remove

The following instructions and adjustments should be fol
lowed carefully;

1151-9432 for 2000A breaker.

CONTACT ADJUSTMENT — Figure 10 and II
MAIN AND ARCING CONTACTS ADJUSTMENT

FOR FP400/800 AND FP 2000 BREAKERS

"A" - Main Contact

Press 400/800A

42-50 lbs., measured at
point of contact

— 2000A

25-35 lbs., measured at

point of contact
"B""B" - Over Travel Mains

% ±V.i-j

"C"- Arcing Contact Press
Pre.ss

22-25 lbs., measured at a
point \Vi below tip of
contact

"D" - Gap (distance) between

±'Ac

mains when arcing
contacts touch

CHECK POINTS — Figure 10 and i I

1. Stationary arcing contacts — make sure that retaining
screws and contacts arc tight.
2. Main contacts should be clean and free.

3. Make sure all retaining ring.s are in place,

unit pole .assembly, replace main stud and arcing contact
assembly, part 1151-9339, for 400/800A breaker and
Adjust contacts as per Figures 10, 11 & 12.

PART 5

ACCESSORIES
SHUNT TRIP

The shunt trip attachment is mounted directly above the
trip shaft. It is a non-adjustable electro-magnet intended
for intermittent duty only, and its circuit should be inter
rupted only by an auxiliary contact.
SHUNT CLOSE
Figure 12

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Check latch engagement and adjust if necessary by moving
safety discharge interlock (Figure 3) to proper position.
Make sure springs arc in place and in good condition. On
electrically operated breakers, remove motor to make sure
roller is free and well lubricated. Reinstall motor. Make

sure that all retaining rings are in place. Check mechanism
to insure that all moving parts arc free and well lubricated.
OPERATING MECHANISM

Make sure that all retaining rings and springs are in place
and that the mechanism is free. Replace nylon bumper
rollers if excessive wear is evident. Make sure that the

operating mechanism resets when stored energy mechanism
is charged slowly and that the trip shaft is free, it should

take no more than 20-22 ounce inches of torque to trip the
breaker.

GENERAL

Make sure that all current 'carrying parts arc secured and

associated hardware is tight. Basket and finger assembly
should be secured but free enough to compensate for mis
alignment in cell. The free up and down movement should
be approximately •>!().

Figure 14

The shunt close attachment is mounted on top of the stored
energy mechanism and is used to electrically discharge the
stored energy mechanism and thus to close the breaker. It

is a non-adjustable intermittent duty device and its circuit
should be interrupted by an auxiliary contact.

UNDERVOLTAGE ATTACHMENT (Figure 15 & 15A)

AUXILIARY SWITCH (Figure 16)

A 4 pole or a 10pole auxiliary switch is normally provided.

It is mounted on top of the stored energy mechanism on

the right hand side of the breaker and is operated by the
main moveable contacts. All contacts are operated by nylon

cams and are factory adjusted to any of the following
combinations:

Normally Open
Early Open
Late Open

Normally Closed
Early Closed
Late Closed

The position and the condiloin of all contacts can be seen
and inspected through a transparent dust cover.
LOAD AND INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
TYPE R-4 AUXILIARY SWITCH IKTERRUPTIN6 RATIN6 IN AMPS
Volts

The undcrvoUagc attachment is a continuous duty device,
which can be provided with or without a time delay, and
which mechanically trips the breaker if the voltage drops

40
20

to 30% to 60% of normal voltage. It is mechanically reseltable with no auxiliary contact in its circuit.

The undervoltage time delay mechanism is of the surface
tension delay type. The time delay is controlled by the
viscosity of a fluid and is factory adjusted.

BELL ALARM SWITCH (Figure 17)

To inspect the undervoltage attachment, hold the movcablc
armature by hand, close breaker and slowly release arma
ture. Before the armature is fully opened, the spring load
ed plunger will be released and strike the trip lever and
trip the breaker. Check for missingretainingrings and loose
or missing screws and bolts. Check condition of coil. If
undervoltage attachment is noisy while being energized,
clean faces of both armatures.

Figure 17

A bell alarm switch attachment is mounted on the right
hand side of the breaker and will function only when
breaker is tripped by the overcurrcnt trip units. It can be
manually and/or electrically reset. Closing of breaker also
resets the alarm switch.

Figure 16

To check the alarm switch attachment, trip breaker with
trip button, then with shunt trip. In both cases the switch
should not be actuated. Trip breaker by moving the series
trip coil magnet and the switch should operate.

PART 6
OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICES
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The direct acting series coils and magnet assemblies pro
vide the energy to operate the over-current time delay

device and to trip the circuit breaker, interrupting sustain
ed overcurrents and faults. There are seven (7) different

coils covering the range from 15 to 1600 amperes.

Each magnet is set and calibrated in the factory at the
desired continuous current rating. Any one of the seven

series coils may be used in any of the FP circuit breakers
and FM Fusematic circuit breakers provided the current

The trip coils will operate from 630 volts down to 7A volts.
Each coil, when energized, releases a spring loaded plunger

which trips and locks the circuit breaker in the "TRIP
FREE," (Open) position. The plunger(s) which has been
released indicates which fuse(s) have blown. They arc

reset manually, after replacing the blown fuses, by pulling
the plimger(s) out as far as they will go and releasing
them. The reset plunger will remain latched in the "OUT"
position. The circuit breaker should be thoroughly in

spected after every "Blown Fuse" operation and returned
to service only after the conditions in part 3 Section I
& 11 "Inspection and Installation" have been satisfied.

rating does not exceed the maximum continuous current

rating of the circuit breaker frame. (IE., 600A, 1600A.]

rti,

snwcmssKceo
WMrmu.

>•

Figure 19
METHOD OF OPERATION

•

Series Coil and Magnet

Figure 18

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)

The current through the series coil provides the magneto

pickup setting, and adjustable instantaneou.s tripping. All

motive force to energize the magnet assembly. The clapper
type armature exerts a force on the push rod which
operates the trip unit and trips the circuit breaker. The
current rating of the coil and magnet may be changed by
moving the pole face assembly up or down. The trip
^stem must be recalibrated after adjusting the magnet

devices are factory calibrated and can be field adjusted.

pole face.

(Figure 18)
The dual magnetic overcurrent trip device, in combination
with the series coil and magnet, provides inverse long de
layed tripping for all overcurrents below the instantaneous

Selective Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-2) (Fig. 18)
The selective overcurrent trip device, in combination with
the series coil and dual armature magnet, provides inverse

long delayed tripping for all overcurrents below the short
delay pickup setting, and short delayed tripping for ail

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)
(Long Time Delay and Instantaneous Trip)

The long delay overcurrent trip device consists of a dash

overcurrents and faults above the short delay pickup set

pot which operates by the positive displacement of a liquid

ting. All devices are factory calibrated and can be field

through a fixed orifice and an adjustable tension coupling
spring which permits the push rod to move rapidly when

adjusted.

possibility, upon the blowing of one fuse only, that the
apparatus, single phased, will burn out. To eliminate this

the force from the magnet exceeds a predetermined value.
The lever ratio between the push rod and the dash pot is
adjustable permitting the time delay to be varied. There
are three adjustment bands, identified as minimum, inter
mediate and maximum. In addition to the long delay band
adjustment there is an adjustable tension spring which

danger, Fusematic Air Circuit Breakers incorporate three
single phase trip coils, one in parallel with each of the three

maximum desired continuous current. This is the long

main fuses.

delay pickup. It is adjustable from 80 percent to 160

The voltage drop across a blown fuse energizes the single
phase trip coil in parallel with it.

and 160%.

Single Phasing Protection (Fig. 19) (Fusematic)
When fuses arc used to protect circuits feeding three phase
motors or similar reactive apparatus there is always the

prevents motion of the push rod for currents below the

percent with calibrated points at 80%, 10(5%, 120%, 140%

The tension in the coupling spring determines the current
at which the dash pot will be mechanically by-passcd. This
is the instantaneous pickup adjustment. The high range
instantaneous element has calibrated settings at 7.5, 10 and
15 times the coil and magnet selling.

The circuit breakers are shipped with the trip devices in
stalled and properly adjusted. It is only necessary to keep
the devices reasonably clean. They are lubricated for the

life of the circuit breaker and must not be lubricated again.
It is possible to remove and replace a trip device in the
field.

Selective Service Trip Device (TD-2)
(Long Delay and Short Delay)

The selective service trip device is similar to the dual

magnetic trip device except that it has a rigid coupling link

in place of an instantaneous pickup coupling spring and it
has a mechanical escapement timing device which provides
a short delay for high values of overcurrents and for faults.
The long delay dash pot is identical to that used on the

dual magnetic trip device. The short delay device Is
operated by a separate armature in the series coil and

magnet assembly. It has a pickup adjustment range of 5 to

To Remove a Trip Device
The trip units which are contained in transparent plastic
cases should be removed as units. Remove the two screws

which hold the trip unit to the breaker frame. These
screws are located in the back of the trip unit and can be

removed by reaching in from behind. The connecting rod
which connects to the magnet assembly must be slipped
off the pin connection at the magnet. The plastic con
nector and trip fingerare then removed from the pusii-rod.

10 times the coil and magnet setting. In addition, the short
delay has an adjustable band with minimum, intermediate
and maximum settinp.

To Install a Trip Device
Insert the push rod in the proper hole in the front channel

and screw the trip unit to the channel uang the two 5/16"
hex. nuts provided. Run a special "Dyna-lock" 10-32 nut

down the push rod. Follow it with a trip finger on top of
the push rod with a spacer between the wings and another

MAINTENANCE & ADJUSTMENTS
Remove breaker completely from cells before servicing.

Series Coil and Magnet Assembly

The series coil and magnet requires no maintenance other
than cleaning periotiicaily to remove dust and dirt which
may accumulate on bearinp and pivots of the magnet arm
atures. All pivots and bearings are made of nylon and no
lubrication is required.

The entire series coil and magnet assembly may be remov
ed and replaced in the field by removing the %" coil retain
ing screws and the ^k" magnet retaining screws at the rear
of the pole insulator. When replacing coils, always tighten

the coil retaining screws securely. This is important to pre
vent overheating and possible failure. Care should be taken
not to damage the coil insulation,

10-32 nut. (Do not tighten it yet.) Install the nylon
tum-buckle and adjust its length so that it is 1/32" longer
than Is just necessary to permit the trip device to reset the
magnetic armature against its stop. InstaU the turn buckle
on the armature pin and retain it with E-ring provided.
Adjust, the position of the trip finger so that the breaker
does not trip when the magnet is closed with a 1/32" thick
shim in the air gap, and does trip with a 1/64" thick shim
in the air gap. Tighten the fingerand check this adjustment
^ain. The trip unit must reset the magnet armature all the
way until the armature is against the stop.

Selective Service Trip Device (TD-2)
(Long Delay and Short Delay)

The maintenance and adjustment of the selective service

trip device is the same as the dual magnetic trip device,
except that the trip finger on the short delay push rod is
installed under the push rod. Care should be taken to en

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)
(Long Delay and Instantaneous Trip)

sure that the long delay trip finger on top of its push rod
does not interfere with the short delay trip finger which
is installed under its push rod.

PART 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS

DEFINITION OF SYMBOLS
Trip coil

—

A phase fuse trip coil
B phase fuse trip coil

C phase fuse trip coil

Spring charging motor

Main power circuit • A phase
Main power circuit - B phase
Main power circuit • C phase

NO ) Motor cut off switch (Shown with
NC
I closing mechanism spring discharged)

Auxiliary switch contact (open when breaker is open)
Auxiiiary switch contact (closed when breaker is open)
5& *

TTTT

tn!

AUXILIARY
CONTACTS
1 — 2
3 — 4

17 — 18
19-20
21 — 22
23 — 24

SWITCH

FUNCTIONS
a
a
b
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b

CONTACT

CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT
CONTACT

TYPE FP a FM ELECTRICALtV
OPERATED A.C.B. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FP25 FP50
FM25 FM50

I2C0 140

8ASIC ELECTRICAL CONTROL

flPt I At AflM I

EXTRA AUXILIARY CONTACTS

FP BREAKER OPERATING SEQUENCE
1. Control switch 01-C closed (local close) or remote close via Terminal 1A.

2. "X" coil is energized thru "b" contact of the "Y" relay, "b" contact of the breaker auxiliary switch,
and "aa" contact of the motor cut-off switch.

3. Stored energy closing spring released via "X" coil, closing breaker.

4. Closing breaker operates auxiliary switch opening "b" contacts and closing "a" contact thus energizing
anti pump "Y" relay and de-energizing "X" coil.

5. "Y" relay remains energized via seal-in contact thus providing anti-pumping lockout of "X" coil if
01

is held closed.

6. "Y" relay is de-energized when

contact is opened.

7. Closing breaker, closes auxiliary switch "a" contacts permitting the breaker to be tripped electrically
when control power is switched to auxiliary stabs 5B and 6B.
8. Motor cut-off switch contact "bb" closes when spring discharges and re-opens when spring is fuily
charged.
9. Auxiliary switch "b" contact closes when the breaker is tripped.
10. Motor cut-off switch contact "aa" closes when the closing mechanism spring is fully charged.
11. The breaker will close when control switch

01
C1

is closed.

PART 8

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
No. Reg.

FP-25-600

6
3
6

1151-9986
1151-9939
1151-9088

li52-9380

1151-9566

No. Reg.
6
3
12

FP-50-1600
1151-9986
1151-9937
1151-9354
1152-9354
1151-0632
1151-9566

Description

Moving arcing contacts
Upper stud assembly
Main Stationary contact assembly
Leading contacts
Cluster assembly
Arc Chutes

48V AC 48V DC
nSV AC 125V DC

1151-6038
1152-6038
1153-6038

48V AC 48V DC
115V AC 125V DC

230V AC. 250V DC

1151-6039
1152-6039
1153-6039

DrawTflg
wTfli

1100-6035

MOTORS TO CHARGE STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Mounting Ref.

Voltage
48V AC

Assembly No.
48V DC

115V AC 125V OC
230V AC 250V OC

1102-6013
1103-6013

Drawing
1100-6014

1104-6013

UNDER VOLTAGE TRIP DEVICE

1I51C6138
115206138
1153C6138

-i.-A -'-i: : .;;:ir
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.s

This instruction manual coveiS the PP75-3000 circuit breaker and
FMIOO-3000 fuseraatic breaker. For instructions on the FP50 series
breaker, refer to instruction manual IN-810.4.

The FP75 line of low voltage power circuit breakers and fusematic
breakers ranging from 2000a through 3000A continuous current at

-MiS

600 volt ratings, is designed for simplicity of operation,
reliability, and easy maintenance.

The FP breaker is equipped with a stored energy mechanism whi^ch is
mechanically trip-free in any position of the glosing cycle, three
unit pole assei^lies, fully field—adjustable timing devices, series
trip coiis, and roll-out rails. The three position drawout

-V'

mechanism is operable with the door closed.

The FMlOO-3000 fusematic system consists of two individual drawout
devices. The breaker unit is identical to a standard FP75-300G, e
for addition of a Single Phasinig Protection trip device. The fuse
unit consists of fuses mounted on a breaker drawout truck.

Key

.interlocks are provided, which require the breaker to be in th TOST
position before the fuse t^ck can be racked in or out. Secondary contacts are provided on both the breaker and fuse truck to allow
connection of the Single Phasing Protection device.

AA-V:'.-;;
•

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

Maintenance closing handle, 1151-9252 (two required)
Cell rackiiig-in <^ank, 1151*-5036
;/ A
Emergency charging handle, 1151-5349
-•k:%

SHIPPING. RECEIVING. HANDLING. AMD STORING

5•

'• Vv :•

Each FP breaker and PM fuseniatic is thoroughly inspected and tested
before leaving the factory. Breakers are shipped in individual
crates. No hooks should be used in handling. Examine all equipment
carefully for indication of damage sustained in transit.. If damage
, v.^
in transit is indicated, call for an immediate inspection by. the '
delivering carrier. Upon assessment of the damage, a claim should .
be filed with the carrier or, depending on the nature of the damage,
- ^
an intent to file for concealed damage should be registered. For .!
assistance in filing the claim, advise the area sales office of
, •
Federal Pacific Electric Company, giving a full description of the
damage, serial number of the breaker, delivering carrier's name, and,
if shipped by rail, the car number, waybill reference, and any other
information that might be of help to the Company in aiding in the
filing of the dcunage claim.
^

••• - ..-..•rr--:*?/'

When unpacking, make sure that all items are removed from the box:,

- .

including packing, list, instruction book, maintenance parts, and

hardware.

Report any shortage immediately.

See that identification

tags are left on the breaker. Lifting eyelets are furnished for
handling. Do not lift or handle breaker by the front box, by the

operating handle, or by the .secondary contacts.
Clean breaker thoroughly^
cleaner is recommended.

To remove dust, an industrial vacuum
If the breaker can be installed in its

permanent location^ it is eidvisable to do so, even if it is not

e:q>ected to be energized for some time. When breakers must be stored.-^
in buildings under construction, be sure they are kept in a spiace

Vl-'.* "J-- '

free of dust, moisture, dirt, and in an upright position. It is
recommended that the breaker not be operated prior to final

TTJSPECTION Aiap INSTALLATION

Section 1.

Inspection

The PP75 breaker consists of a coordinated set of assemblies# mounted
on a steel frame, all carefully adjusted and locked in place for long
and trouble-free operation.

To assist in properly checking and inspecting breakers prior tP

placing into seiwice, the following points should be followed in the;
jorder. listed.:
:

Remove arc chutes.

2. Remove covers marked, "REMOVE THIS PLATE FOR EMERGENCY CH^ING;• 5"
Using emergency charging handle, 1151-5349, charge each ^
mechanism by rotating the handle clockwise 180 to positive stop*^ ^:^^
3,

Lock safety discharge interlocks to prevent accidental discharge'
of stored energy mechanism (Figure 2). Miere is a safety
inter].ook on each mechanism.

Remove right- and left-hand accelerating springs (Figure 3)•.
Insert maintenance closing handles, 1151-9252, as in Figure.4,

and slowly operate simultaneously until arcing contacts touch.
All arcing contacts should make simultaneously with a permissible
variation of 1/32 maximum. Movable arcing contact fingers should '
align with stationary arcing contacts.

v.,"

If misalignment or

misadjustments are obsei'ved, refer to part four of this manual,
"MAINTENANCE," for'adjusting instructions, rMovable arcing
contacts are designed'with side clearances for better guidance
inside the arc chutes. A side-to-side movement of 1/8 is

allowable. Close breaker and check overtravel on main contacts.
Remove maintenance closing handles and tripl breaker. ; r

Replace pull-off springs,

Inspect each arc chute to be sure ho plates are damaged. .
Replace chutes on breaker. Move contacts in, by hand, and
tighten arc chhtes only after contacts move in and out ffeelyi

Release discharge safety interlocks (Figure 2). NOTE: To avoid,
possible injury, NEVER handle or touch; any movable part of thd '7
breaker when the stored energy mechanism is" charged, without
first applying safety interlocks. Operate closing release
solenoid manually, with vigor, releasing both stored energy
mechanisms simultaneously. Breaker will close. NOTE: T..e
Glose button on escutcheon will NOT close breaker unless control

power is-connected.

Depress red trip lever on escutcheon to

Open the breaker.

Recharge stored energy mechanisms and close breaker. Slowly
move series trip coil magnec (armature) to fully closed positi0n.

Breaker should trip before armature- touches pole iface assentblyi
Repeat this procedure on all poles.

10. " Check retaining rings and hardware for tightness..

11.

Basket and finger assembly should be secured and retaining bolts
tightened. Contact finger must be free of dirt and foreign,
particles. Secondary female contacts mounted on breaker must,.
.operate freely. ^
. •:t'\ \

12.

Electrically, the stored energy mechanism is charged by a
fractional horsepower ratchet-type A.C./D.C. universal motor.
Identification, voltage ranges, and current requirements are

specified below. The stored energy mechanism is charged, ^
electrically, in approximately one second. Two motors of^

identical ratings are used.

CHARGING MOTORS FOR FP BREAKERS
STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Voltage Ral^incr

F.P.E. Part #

Motor

, ,48V A.C./4SV D.O. ^

162-007

,115V. A.C./125V D.C.

230V A.C./250V D.C.
162-006
; 14978
6>1
240V maxiraxMa—use control power transformer for higher voltage

12
1

life-

- -5-

Prom wiring diagram supplied with equipment, or from the
standard diagram in Part VII of this manual, locate motor
terminals on secondary contacts and connect required power
source. .

Motors will charge when power is applied and automatical!:* shut
off when charging cycle is completed.

Breaker cannot he closed with the maintenance closing handle
unless the stored energy mechanism is charged. On all

electrically operated FP breakers, the stored energy mechanism
will recharge immediately following a closing operation^—ready
for inistant reclosure,

13.

if needed.

From wiring diagram, locate terminals on secondary contacts and
connect proper control power supply and controls for shunt clpse^
and shunt trip attachments. Close and open breaker five times,
electrically, and-check for proper operation.

14.

Disconnect control power supply.

Do not leave breaker in the

charged and/br closed position while in storage.

15. When the FMlOO-SOOO is furnished, check the separate fuse truck,^^
using applicable procedures as listed above.
Section 11.

Installation

'
•
' •
• '
• •• •.
Before installing breaker in cell, check the following points inside
- -

Secondary contact support—make sure all connections are
tightened and adjusted to proper dimensions ^

•

'•I.e.,'

Ground Connections should be tight.

Removable extension rails should fit and lock properly in ceil,

Breaker wheels should be free and well lubricated.

Main contact stabs should be tight and free of dust and dirt.
•

Check condition of insulating transite plate in roof of *_ase.
Screws should, be tight.

Remove control power fuses.

Place breaker on installed extension rails.

Make sure ^11 four

wheels are in rail grooves.
9,

Drawout mechanism on breaker should be in OUT position.

10.

While depressing trip lever, push breaker inside the cell until
racking-in cfaijcs engage a positive stop. This is the OUT
position. Remove rail extensions and store in cell.

11.

Close door slowly and latch; make sure that the metal mask which;
is provided on the-outside of front box moves freeily back as it
comes in contact with the door.

The door should close all the

way with the breaker in the OUT position.

12.

v.''/,

Depress trip lever and insert racking-in crank, il5lC5036
(Figure 5).

position.

Rotate crank clockwise until breaker reaches TEST

At this point, interlock bar will drop into slpt on

cell floor when racking-in crank is removed. This locks breaker
in TEST position and releases trip interlock.
13.

Install control power fuses; circuit is now energized.

•V%(•

The

motors will charge the stored energy mechamisras, and closing and-;
tripping control circuits become energized; in the TEST position
14.

Open door and imake sure that grounding contact in cell is nov^
contact with the; breaker.

'V.'.f

Close door and check breaker

electrically for proper closing and opening operation.

•iSiV
.-,.a

If breaker operates properly, rack breaker back to OUT positionand leave there until ready to put into service.

•

15. • When" putting into service, insert racking-in handle, rotate
clockwise until breaker is in OPERATE position.

When properly

racked in, the interlock bar will be free to drop into another

slot, locking the breaker in position.

The trip interlock will

be released and the interlock bar will drop when the racking-in
crank i s removed.

When the FMlOO-3000 is furnished, the points listed above,
relative to cell, stationary contacts, contact stabs, and
racking-in assembly, should also be checked on the fuse truck.

Note that ai trip interlock is hot furnished-on the fuse truck*
Fuse truck has two positions only--"IN" and "OUT." Positi.ve
stops in the gear train determine proper location of the breaker
f ^
in both the "IN" and "OUT" positions.

PA R

MAINTENANCE

The breakers and all component parts have been tested extensively for
performance, per NiSMA Standards SG.3-3-17 and SG. 3-3-18, and have
'.
proved to be satisfactory with a wide margin of safety.

;

In accordance with KEMA Standard SG.3, Part 6, a periodic maintenance^ ^^
,

-1

schedule should be established.

.i.—

j-i__

—:

For the convenience of the user,

• N . •>;!

simple log sheet is provided with every breaker to ensure proper
maintenance and years of trouble-free operation. It should be kejpt . r
and followed conscientiously, especially in cases where breakers are
required to operate under more adverse conditions;
,

The following instructions and adjustments should be followed

.
,

' i.-;
...

carefully:
Main and Arcing Contacts Adjustment

"A" - Main contact press

"B" -

Overtravel mains

25-35 pounds, measured at
point of contact
1/8-1/32

•r'm

-8-

"C" - Arcing contact press

22-25 pounds, measured at a
point 1-1/4 below tip' of

• •''

contact

"D" - Gap (distance) between
mains when arcing
contacts touch
'• '

CHECK POINTS (Figures 6 and 7)

Stationary arcing contacts—make sure that retaining screws and
contacts are tight.

Main contaqtS should be cleari and free.

;

Make sure all retaining rings are in place.

Make sure nylon spacer is in place.

Roller, 1101-9231, must roll free oh its pivot pin.

Surfaces marked "P" should be lubricated by a thin film-of;

"Conducto-Lube," No. 240-200, before assembly.

Contacts must be inspected after every known short circuit

interruption and also should be inspected at regular inspection
periods. If contacts are. found to be worn or excessively pitted, they,.
should be dressed or replaced.

CAUTION; When reinstalling the arc chutes, adjust the retaining serw,,;^^|^
holder on the ard chute retaining bar so that the arcing cpntadts do
not come in contact with the arc chute baffles.
A;
: TO

CONTACT ASSEMBLY

To repair or replace movable arcing contacts, proceed as follows
(Figure 6).:

Charge Stored energy mechanism and lock discharge safety

interlock (Figure 2).

Remove arc chute retaining bar.
, •;

Remove insulating block and push fork assembly.

Tighten movable arcing contact's adjusting screw until springs are
solid, and remove retaining pins.

Remove arcing contact pivot pin and replace movable arcing
contacts. Both contacts should be replaced at one time.
i'"'

Make sure nylon bushings are in place and' in good condicion while

r'.'

replacing movable arcing contact.
'TV

Reassemble, following the same sequence of operations, and adjust per
Figures 6 and 7. Inmost cases, i t is not necessary to replace

contacts, but occasional redressing and readjusting are recoramehded.
To replace stationary arcing contacts (Figure 6), remove unit pole

assembly, replace main stud and arcing contact assembly, 1151-5023.

r;'';

'
n

Adjust contacts per Figures 6, 7, and 8.
•

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Check latch engagements and adjust, if necessary, by moving safety
discharge interlock (Figure 2) to proper position. Make sure springs

are in place and in good condition.
is free and well lubricated.

retaining rings are in place.

To check the alarm switch attachment, trip breaker With trip button,

then with shunt trip.
actuated.

In both cases, the switchl should not be

Trip brewer by moving the series trip, coil magnet; the

switch should operate.

OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICES

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The direct acting series coils and magnet assemblies provide the
energy to operate the overcurrent time delay device and to trip the
circuit breaker, thus, interrupting sustained overcurrents and faults.,
Each magnet is adjusted at the factory and calibrated for either
>
2000 to 2500 ampexres, or 3000 amperes.
•
n!,

DUAL MAGNETIC OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICE (TD-1) (Figure 13)
The dual magnetic overcurrent.trip device, in combination with the.
series coil and dual armature, magnet, provides inverse, long delayed
tripping for all overcurrents below the instantaneous pick-up setting
and the adjustable instantaneous tripping. All devices are factory
calibrated and can be adjusted in the field.

SELECTIVE OVERCURRENT TRIP DEVICE (TD-2)

(Figure 13)

The selective overcurrent trip device, in combination with the series
coil and dual armature magnet, provides inverse, long delayed tripping , '
for all overcurrents below the short delay pick-up setting, and

provides short delayed tripping for all overcurrents and faults above
the short delay pick-up setting. All devices are factory calibrated
and cain'be'/adjusted'dn the field..
•'.''--'-''0^^ , . ,

'r-

' '

-14-

SINGLE PHASING PROTECTION

When fuses are used-to protect circuits feeding three phase motors or

similar reactive apparatus, there is always the possibility, upon the
blowing of one fuse only, that the apparatus, single phased, will burn

out.

To eliminate this danger, fusematic air circuit breakers

incorporate three single phase trip coils, one in parallel with each
of the three main fuses.

Each trip coil is approximately a one

thousand-turn coil, wound to operate down to 1/10 Of line voltage. -

Each of the single phase trip coils can be looked upon as a shunit' tri^, / '
continuously energized by the voltage drop across its fuse.

Under

normal conditions, the "fuse drop" voltage is zero, but it immediately ,

rises to a value of full phase voltage—when the load fuse blows..

This energizes the single phase trip coil, causing the common trip bar
to unlatch and trip the fusematic air circuit breeker. The coil is
specifically rated at 1/10 line voltage to assure instantaneous
:

operation, even vAien the fusematic air circuit breaker is used as a
motor starter. In this case, although the back E.M.F. induced in the
motor winding is equal to phase voltage, because of phase angle

:r/^;
V;
-

displacement, the resultant voltage drop across the fuse i^Sufficient^^.
to trip the fusematic air circuix. breaker.

The current through the circuit;_breaker pole provides the
magnetomotive force to energize the magnet assembly.

The^i-

clapper-type armature exerts the force on the push rod whi^
operates the trip unit and trips the circuit breaker.

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1) (Long Time Delay
and Instantaneous Trip)
....

The long delay overcurrent trip device conLsists of a dash pot
which operates by the positive displacement of a liquid through i ' /

a fixed orifice, and an adjustable tension coupling^ spring whibh i^^t^^t^^r
permits the push rod to move rapidly when the force from the
magnet exceeds a predetermined value.
The lever ratio between the'
push rod and the dash pot is adjustable, permitting the time delay

to be varied.
bands.

There are three calibrated positions or adjustment

The three bands are identified as minimum, intermediate)^ ^

and maximum. In addition to the long delay band adjustment, there
is an adjustable tension spring which prevents motion of the push^^\^^^^^
rod for currents below the maximum desired continuous currents

This is the long delay pick-up. It is adjustable from 80%i tb
160%, with calibrated points at 80%, 100%, 120% 140%, -and 160%,
The tension in the coupling spring determines the current at >
which the dash pot will be mechanically by passed. This is the
instantaneous pick-up adjustment. ,The, instantaneous element has
a meiximvim setting of twelve.

Selective Service Trip Device '(TD-2)

(Long Delay and Short Delay)

The selective service trip device is similar to the dual magnetic
trip device, except that it has a rigid coupling-link in place of
an instantaneous pick-up coupling spring, and it has a mechanical
escapement timing device which provides a short delay for' high,
values of overcurrents and for faults.

The long delay dash pot

is" identical to that used on the dual magnetic trip device.

The

short delayjdevice is operated by a separate armature in the

series magnet assen&ly.

It has an adjustable pick-up spring with

calibrated settings at 5, 7.5, and 10 times the boil and ihagnet

setting.

'im.

In addition, the short delay has a band adjustment withj

calibrated points for the minimum, intermediate^ and maximimi bandb^/§>f2

•

• ••

-16-

MAINTENANCE & ADJUSTMENTS
'.t •

REMOVE BREAS^R COMPLETELY FROM CELLS BEFORE SERVICING.
A.

Series coil and Magnet Assembly

seriest magnet requires no maintenance other than cleaning;
periodically, to remove dust and dirt which may accumulate on

hearings and pivots of the magnet armatures. All pivots and
hearings are made of nylon, and no lubrication is required.

Dual Magnetic Overcurrent Trip Device (TD-1)
Instantaneous Trip)

•.,

(Long Delay and

The circuit hreakers are shipped with the trip devices installed

and properly adjusted. It is only necessary to keep rhe devices
reasonably clean. They are lubricated for thd life of the circuit. 5 >•'
'•f-'

breaker and must not be lubricated again.

Selective Service Trip Device (TD-2) (Long Delay and Short Delay)
The maintenance and adjustment of the selective service trip

'•r

: \ •

device is the same as for the dual magnetic trip device.

Series trip.units must be recalibrated, on the circuit breaker,
if they are removed or replaced in the field. The factory should
be contacted if the series trip units require servicittg.

v' i: VY'"'

.»

' • '.wAfc''. '

• ,. V,i* *... i.'v,'*."

•17^

mfST 7

,. Trip coll

, A phase fuse trip coll T : ^ ^ i
;I; B. phase fuse trip coll
:• .r j [

TCI
T02

'•}

\ TC3

iVf.! .?•{
-ifirx
•.1

C phase fuse trip coll
'• Closing release coil

01 local

Control switch

. V
;

' » I f'ii
—Undervoltage device
— ivK'. Main power circuit • A phase /.i?;,:Hk

f' AntI pump relay

SI•j.

•^;. Spring charging motor

»u •;i.; MC/aa

DEFiMm©?^ ©F' SVaViBOLS'
V
}.•';/]•
01

—

NO ). Motor cut off switch tSnown with
NO ) closing mechanism spring discharged)

i MC/bb :—
1.'

Auxiliary ^Kch contact (open when breaker is open)

r-a

Auxlliaty ^Itdi contact (closed when breaker is open)

M9 C9$ 785 M5 '-|NS*I»< teMIRtinlllfl wi

' M Vie ' 19 ' M' ' kl"< M

MIS OXB

nis t u i r
»«lll,T BBCO

-HIV' I

aowt

Wlro 19eaWWov '
• ra89.wlr.:

eOLMJUKi •'
i! )f; ; 'Mm OJCTRiCH eoimtoi !i tScafiovn^'Cxriu
mixiuAnrcoirmcn!
3

•

„ . ..

OPCRoms ox-a scifzmnc otaeaAQ

.••• i'i

•

Btri i
aC' itot(l anVA M,

FP BREAKER OPERATINGT SEQUENCE

Control swItch. Ol'C closed.

"X" coil Is energized thru "b" contact of the "V" relay, "b" contact of the breaker awtlliary switch, and "aa" contact of the motor ciit'Off switch.
:
Il\

3- Stored energy closing spring released w'a "X" coil, closing breaker.

;:i 4. Closing breaker operates auxiliary switch opening "b" contacts and closing "a" contact i
anil pump."Y" relay and de-energizing "X" coll.
r t / t n u sthus
. e nenergizing
erf
"Y'Vrelay
relay remains energized via seal-In contact thus providing antl-pumping loclwut of ;;

'X'^coll'if—ls'held closed.
S' ? •-'x"^oii"i
- 6:'"Y" relay Is de^energized when-^contact Is opened.
»

spring is fully charged.
9^ Auxiliary switch "b" contact closes when the breaker is tripped

MINIMUM RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
FP75-3000 & FMlOO-3QqO BREAKERS

Description

Required

P a r t No 2.
• •

Moving arcing, contacts

Upper stud assembly
Main stationary contact assembly
Leading contactis ;
Cluster assembly
Arc chutes

1152A9354
1151B1024
1151D9566

6*
6

t:;.

/•'tsm

*12 required for EMlOO-3000 breaker

SHUNT CLOSE ATTACHMENTS (common for all PP breakers)
-

480 volts A.C., 60 cycles
115 volts A.C., 60 cycles
230 volts A.Cw# 60 cycles
48 volts D.C.
125 volts D.C.

250 volts D.C.

1151B5359
1152B5359

115385359
1151B5359
1152B5359
115385359

SHUNT TRIP ATTACHMENTS (common for all FP breakers)

48 volts A.C., 60 cycles
115 volts A.C., 60 cycles
230 volts A.C., 60 cycles

V. t;,-

.!4

1151A5326
1152A5326
1153A5326

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS (continued)

UNDERVOLTAGE ATTACHMENT (common for all FP breakers)
Description

Part Numbers

delayed

instantaneous

115 volts A.C.
230 volts A.C.

450 volts A.C.
575 voltsA.C.

MOTORS TO CHARGE FP BREAKER STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

(common for all PP breakers)
Description

Two motors of specified voltage required for FP75-3000

48V A.C./48V D.C.
115V A.C./125V D.C.
230V A.C./250V D.C.

Maximum 240V, use control power transformer for higher voltages,

P a r t No.

Emergency manual charging handle
Maintenance closing handle

FP-50 Breaker - Revision of Retrofit {using E. Pgh. Actuator)

The original procedure to retrofit an FP-50 was to use the Beaver

Flux transfer trip. But experience has shown that the Flux transfer trip
would cause the breaker to trip free. When the breaker is closing,
mechanical shock would release the Flux transfer, causing the trip free
condition.

To eliminate this problem, an E. Pgh. actuator is used instead

of the Flux trip.

The bracket for the E. Pgh. actuator is shown in

Figure #1. The bracket is mounted using the same three holes as the original
trip unit used. The two additional holes to hold bracket in place are
shown in Figure #1 drawing of mounting bracket.

To trip the breaker, remove the aluminum paddle on trip bar on

the right side of the breaker. Remount the tripping paddle on the trip
bar to the left, approximately 1 9/16" from center of original hole, and
drill a hole in tripping bar to keep paddle from moving. The hole size
is equal to a §29 drill bit.

The paddle is just inside bracket that holds

tripping bar to the frame of breaker. When mounting this tripping paddle
to trip bar, it is best to charge the stored energy mechanism to insure
that the trip paddle is mounted correctly.

This is done because when the

stored energy mechanism is being charged the trip bar moves forward a
little. If this procedure is not followed, the breaker will trip free
due to the movement of trip bar (Figure #2).

To reset the E. Pgh. actuator, use the indicating assembly located
just behind the stored energy mechanism on the right-hand side of breaker

(Figure §3).

The reset arm on actuator may have to be bent to get the

correct position to reset the actuator.

Before mounting amptector to frame of breaker, remove the A Phase

tripping paddle and the counter-weight which is right next to A Phase

2 -

tripping paddle.

The counter-weight is placed in a downward position so

it does not interfere with amptector as shown in Picture #

The next

step is to hacksaw a little piece of metal off the racking bar which is
also shown in Picture #
to accept amptector. If this piece of metal
is not cut off, amptector will not sit in a vertical position.
not harm breaker at all.

This will

After above procedure is completed, take a piece

of Micarta to mount amptector.

Place it to the piece of metal, which is

bolted underneath the stored energy mechanism on the left-hand side of
mechanism.

Drill two holes to hold the piece of Micarta to frame.

take piece of Micarta off and countersink the two holes.

Then

The next step

is to drill three more holes in the Micarta to match the three holes on the

brackets of the Beaver amptector.

Mount the Micarta piece to the frame

first and then mount the Beaver amptector to the Micarta piece (Figure #4).

Pershing Road Breaker Lab - Chicago

(FIGURE #1)
Use same holes thatv

Actuator tripping
lever must be bent

in a downward position.
When stored energy
mechanism is charged,
trip bar and paddle
move toward actuator.

(FIGURE #2)

FP-50 RETROFIT
Reset Arm

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

I
r

FOR

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Introduction
Shipment

3
3

Storage
Unpacking
Location
Mounting
Connections

3
3
3
3
3

4
5
6
7
8

t:
Ifjr.,-

9
10
n
12
13
14
15
16
17

Inspection

Closing the breaker
Maintenance
Removing the faceplate
Stored energy mechanism
Spring mechanism
Spring release mechanism
Motor mechanism
Breaker mechanism
Adjustments

Arcing contocts
Drawout circuit breakers
Spare parts

]]
13

f
f

;

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
INTRODUCTION

FPE Type H low voltage power circuit breakers
are designed to provide many years of reliable
service even under severe conditions. The mecha

nism design employs high throw-off toggles to
ensure tripping even after long periods of inacti

vity. Current carrying parts are designed for low
current densities and the extremely efficient trip
ping relays do not require high current density
coils thus realizing a low temperature rise even

when the circuit breaker is loaded to its full rating.

FF^E

LOCATION

Unless the circuit breaker enclosure is specifi
cally designed for outdoor or unusual service con-,
ditions, circuit breakers should be installed in a

clean dry place which is free from atmospheric
contaminants and where good ventilation con be
secured. Sufficient space shduld be provided to
moke connections and so that the breaker is read

ily accessible for operation and maintenance. Re
ference should be mode to local code regulations.
MOUNTING

Normal maintenance and replacement of ore con
trol parts can be mode without special tools or
resetting factory adjustments and thus maintenance
shut down periods can be very short.

Circuit breakers should be enclosed in sheet steel
coses in accordance with recommended dimensions

SHIPMENT

bolts through the base, (Frame size 2 & 3 use 'V
bolts), while drowout type breakers will roll in or

and in general these cases provide the mounting
for the breaker.

Fixed mounted breakers ore mounted with-4-3/8"

Eoch circuit breaker is carefully inspected and
tested before leaving the factory and then packed
by workmen experienced in the proper handling
ond packing of electrical equipment. Every circuit

breaker should be examined immediately on receipt

for any damage sustained enroute. If damage is
evident or if indication of rough handling is visi
ble, 0 claim should be filed immediately with the
transportation company. FPE should be notified
immediately if replacement parts are required.

out on roils which ore fixed to the enclosure. A

worm and nut assembly is used to pull the breaker
either on or off the disconnecting contacts.

The mounting support should be a rigid structure
able to withstand the impact of breaker closing and
tripping.
CONNECTIONS

Before making any electrical connections to the
circuit breaker, every precaution must be taken to
ensure that all cables which are to be connected

STORAGE

Air circuit breakers should be stored in their ship
ping crates in the upright position in a clean dry
area. Should the breaker get wet it must be thor
oughly dried out using forced worm air over an

extended period until "infinite" readings ore
obtained using a 600 volt megger.
UNPACKING

Crates used for domestic shipment of air circuit
breakers ore of open lattice work construction so

that the breaker may be readily uncroted without
damage. The breaker is bolted into the crate using
its normal mounting holes so it is preferable to
first remove top, front and sides of the crate. The
breaker may then be unbolted and removed from the
remaining crate. Do not lift the breaker by the reor
connecting terminals or the operating handle. Lift
on the steel channel at the front and hold the base

to keep the breaker steady. The steel side plates
will support the breaker but core should be taken
to set the breaker on a level surface to avoid da

mage to the relays or the interlock linkage on draw
out type breakers. Check the breaker thoroughly to
see that no ports ofthe breaker hove been damaged
or forced out of alignment during shipment.

to the circuit breaker are safely de-energized.
Breaker terminals are silver plated for maximum
joint efficiency and cable connectors should be
clean and free from dents or burns and bolted se

curely to the breaker terminals. Poor joints lead
to breaker overheating and subsequent contact
deterioration and eventual breaker failure so that

considerable care should be exercised in making
these primary connections.
Cables or bus connections should be properly sup
ported so that the circuit breaker terminals are not

subjected to unnecessary weight or strain. Any
strain which at first has no apparent affect, may
cause poar contact alignment after prolonged peri
ods of vibration or shock from normal breaker opera
tions.

Meter shunts, resistors and similar devices which
operate at relatively high temperatures should be
mounted far enough away from the circuit breaker

so that they do not contribute to breaker heating.
Control circuit wiring where applicable should be
made in strict accordance with detailed wiring
diagrams. Wiring connections are made to terminal
blocks or to secondary drawout contacts and should
be run in a supported and protected manner such
that control wires cannot come into contact with

primary connections.

type h air circuit breakers
CLOSING THE BREAKER
ceeding with inspection.

completely before pro

fhoJld

the breaker

U'^?^®"9hly
checkedwhen
and itoperated
to ensore trouble
free operation
is placed
in

sforedthe
energy
as
opposed to spring assisted closing,
en«qy
tore the breaker con be closed.
manual CLOSING

The handle is rotated counter-clockwise to the up1. Make visible inspection after installotion to
fS:;'"9will
charging
cam.
then comp
ensure no parts have been damaged or forced ptating the handle through 180"
out of alignment.
l'^

letely chorge the springs. A rochet mechanism

allows severol short strokes instead of one 180°

2. peck door interlock lever (see page 5) for single stroke if preferred and also prevents any
freedom of movement ond block in depressed

spring fly back during the charging stroke. The
position. This Will allow normal breaker opera- springs
con be charged when the breaker is closed
tion With the door open.

3. On drowout breakers check the drowout mecha

nism to see that the breaker rolls freely on the

which will alowone immediate reclosure. Pressing
a mechanical push button on the face plate releases

breaker®^

compression springs to close the

L 1 completely
®"9oges
thethe
nutcon
and
pulls .L
the breaker
home on
tact. There should be approximotely 1/8" clear ELECTRICAL CLOSING
ance between the mole stab and the contact A universal ac/dc 120 volt '4 H.P. motor is used
tinger spacer.
to wind the spring closing mechanism and a shunt

4. On drowout breakers check the drowout inter- close releases the stored energy to close the break
l^ock. The interlock should be free with the er. Upon supplying control power with the breaker

open, the motor will automatically charge the
Spring (time 2-4 seconds). Pressing a close button
breaker as it moves from either position.
®'
*ii then close theP'breaker.
®^® ®'' When
®remote
location
will
the breaker
is
5. peck contacts to see that they ore clean and tripped
the
motor
will
immediately
rewind
the
mechtree of foreign material.

breaker fully engaged or in the test position
but should ride up on the wedge to trip the

6. peck ony control wiring to ensure it has not
been damaged during installation.

7. Check overload relays. Push on armature to en

sure that the relay will trip the breaker. If mo
derate force is used the relay armature will
move slowly because of the delay characteris

tics.

A heavier force will extend the instantaneous

springs and should trip the breaker immediately.
Note that a small amount of oil seepage may
occur during shipment if the breaker has not
been in the upright position but the relay de
sign emplays sufficient cavities to trap ample

amounts of oil for relay operation.

5. Close and trip the breaker several times to
ensure correct operations. Note that interlocks

should be voided or in normal released position
so that the spring closing mechanism will

pick up the contacts and thus avoid discharging

the mechanism without its normal load. Dis-

charging the spring closing mechanism without

load 'niposes severe stresses on the linkage

and should be avoided.

onism to charge the spring ready for the next close
operation.

An emergency closing handle is supplied which
can be used in the event of control power failure.
Ihe handle is inserted into the faceplate connect

ion and is used in the same manner as for manual

closing to store the energy in the spring. To close

the breaker insert the opposite end of the handle
in the small hole to the lower right as illustrated
figure 1, page5 .

MAINTENANCE

The breakers have been manufactured and tested

in accordance with NEMA standards SG-3 and to

ensure the safety and the successful functioning

of connected apparatus which depends upon the

proper operation of the circuit breaker, the circuit
breaker must have regular, systematic care and
inspection.

The following points require special attention:
1. Be sure that the circuit breaker and its mech
anism are disconnected from allelectric power,
both high voltage and control circuit: also be

sure that the main closing spring is discharged

before being inspected or repaired.

- v..

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2. Inspect the operoting mechanism periodically
and keep it cleon.

3. Exomine the contocts frequently, see that they
ore oMgned and that contact surfoces bear with

firm uniform pressure. Replace badly pitted
or burned contacts before they are burned away
sufficiently to cause damage to other parts of
the apporotus.

4. The contact members of all types of discon
necting or interrupting devices must be kept

clean ond bright to insure maximum operating
efficiency, it has been found by experience

that operoting the circuit breoker several times
at intervals of not over two weeks will remove

the effects of oxidation ond materially prolong

the effective life of the circuit breaker. It is
recommended that this practice be followed
except that a circuit breaker which is operated
every few days will not require much attention.

5. See that bolts, nuts, washer, clips and oil ter
minal connections are in place and tight.
6. Clean the circuit breoker at regular intervals
where obnormal conditions sucn os salt de
posits, cement dust or acid fumes prevoil to
avoid flashovers as a result of the accumulation

of foreign substances on the surface of the
circuit breaker.

7. Always check for loose nuts and bolts after any
mointenonce work has bee'n completed.

CIRCUIT BREAKER FACEPLATE

3. Floating Trim
4. Manual Trip
5. On-Off indicotor

ELECTRICAL

6. Spring chorge indicator
7. Door Interlock lever

8. Rating plate
9. Close button

10. Emergency close handle

11. Emergency spring chorge

12. Emergency manual close
13. Local close button
14. Motor cut off switch

type h air circuit breakers
REMOVING THE FACEPLATE

With the front plate and frame removed the complete

mechanism is exposed and inspectian and lubUMhe front plote, (2)the frome and (3) the fiooting ncatian
of moving ports is readily accomplished.
trim end it is mounted to the cross channel of the
consists of three ports:

Use o very light good quality machine grease such
OS lubroplateon the rochet assembly. Alight moch-

mechanism bracket.

To disassemble, first remove the 4 oval heod
be^opplied"
where grease cannot
ing the front plate turn it to the left so it will slip SPRING MECHANISM
over the trip lever (4). The floating trim will The spring mechanism is located in the steel cross
then be free to be removed. Note that one side of channel and consists of seven parts (See fig. 2).
the trim is bevelled to correspond with the hinging
ot the front cover and it must be reploced correct The spring is charged by turning the crank approx
screws in eoch corner of the front plote. In remov

imately 180° in a clockwise direction. The rochet
ly to ensure smooth action os the door closes and
holding panel prevents ony flyback during the
over the faceplate.

The monuol handle is coptive in the front plate

and moy be removed by drawing out the %" rolpin

charging stroke. The spring in the charged position
IS 10° over toggle and is held by a needle bearina

com.

holding the clutch to the shaft (See fig. 2).

SPRING RELEASE MECHANISM

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM

Before close inspection of the stored energy mech- The spring release mechanism is located behind
onism extreme core should be taken to ensure the

the frontplote and below the holding cam assembly

nncc NOT dischorgeTripping
the circuit
breakers
DOES
the spring.
On electrically

When the spring is fully charged the needle bearing

discharge the spring.

spring mechanism.

and consists of 5 ports (see Fig. 3).

ot the holding cam assembly is stopped by the
be used to prevent the motor from recharging the ground steel cam (8). When the manual close button
spring automatically. If the face plate indicotor IS pressed or when the shunt close is actuated,
snows CHARGED" closing the breaker will the cam is rotated which releases the charged'
operated breakers the motor cut off switch must

'bracket-croBs channel

PLAN VIEW

FRONT

ELEVATION
(crank and eprhg In
chorged position)

(monuol spring charging
hondle ossembly)
13. Handle
14. Clutch

15. Rolpin

(ratchet end holding
powl In charged position)
Figure 2 - Spring Mechanism
1. Main spring
2. Spring guide
3. Crank
4. Rochet

5. Holding pawl
6. Holding cover
7. Holding pawl spring

»•

FP^E

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1
m

Figure 3a

SPRING RELEASE MECHANISM

Manual Mechonism —Sprinq
" a Charqed _

Figure 3b

Pl=-..
ji l •
c • Discharged
n- l
j
tiecfncal Mechonism
- Spring

8. Ground steel cam

9. Two set screws

11. Shunt close (when used)

1 2. Return spring

10. Manual close button (when used)
13. Micro Limit Switch

MOTOR MECHANISM

The motor mechanism consists of a '4 h.p. univers
al motor with a worm gear reduction. An eccentric
lever is mounted on the end of the worm gear redution and drives the osci Hating lever. The driving
pawl is mounted on the oscillating lever and with

embly from the breoker.The eccentric driving lever
is threoded onto the end of the worm gear reduction
of the motor. Tap lightly in a counter clockwise

eoch stroke of the lever drives the ratchet around
the limit switch is actuated to cut off the motor.

A spRciol greose is used in the worm gear reduct
ion assembly and should not require replacement.
If necessary use only Led-Plate compound 250.

To remo-e the motor mechanism, remove the two

The following table lists the stondard ratings of

'4 - 20 Allen Head screws inside the steel cross

channel (see Fig.4). Tilt the motor in to disengage

motors. Note thot for a.c. applicotions 115 volt
motor is used throughout ond a control tronsformer

it from the oscilloting lever and remove the ass-

is supplied for voltages other than 115V.

one tooth at a time until the spring is charged and

direction to remove the eccentric and then remove

the motor mounting bolts.

SHUNT
CLOSE
AMPS

TRIPPING
VOLTAGE
RANGE

VOLTS

28-60
90 - 130
180 - 260

95 - 125
190 - 250
380 - 500
475 -

630

SHUNT
TRIP
AMPS

PF^E

type h air circuit breakers

1. Driving pawl
2. Oscillating lever
3. Motor assembly
4. Shunt close
5. Motor limit switch

Electrically operated breakers use a motor to rotate the cronk and fully charge the spring.
Figure 4— Motor Mechanism

BREAKER MECHANISM

The breaker mechanism is attached to the spring
closing mechanism by means of a closing cronk
(1) connected to on eccentric link (2) which pivots
on a uni-ball (3). See figure 5(a)

The breaker is closed by rotating the closing crank

cam backwards which releases the latch bearing
allowing the linkage to collapse.

When the breaker is open and the spring charged

ready for closing, the latch bearing will have a

clearance of 1/64" to 1/16" above the ground
steel cam. Figure 5 (b).

clockwise through approximately 180°. As the
crank starts to move the linkage is prevented from

If there is notsufficient clearance between the cam
and the latch bearing the cam cannot return to its

the ground steel cam (5). As the crank continues

one attempt, the vibration may assist the cam to
its proper location and the breaker will then close.

collapsing by the latch bearing (4) resting against

to rotate the pin (6) is pushed by the closing cast

ing (7)up to the stops (8) located on the mechanism
side plates. See Figure 5 (o).

The breaker is tripped by rotating the ground steel

proper position and the breaker will not latch. After

If the clearance is excessive, the lotch bearing

may bounce off the ground steel cam and the break
er will not close.

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Ff^E

ADJUSTMENTS

During the course of manufacture each circuit
breaker is operated up to 50 times. All adjustments
are set and locked and should not require adjust
ment in the field. However should the breaker fail

to operate correctly the following adjustments can
be made.

1. Latch Adjustment

(See Fig. 6)
Figure 5(o)

When the breaker fails to latch the spring mech
anism discharges without carrying the contact
assembly to the closed position. Without the in
ertia of the contact assembly to absorb the energy
from the closing spring, severe stress is imposed
on the closing mechanism and damage will result
if this process is repeated.
To adjust the latch first loosen the lock screw (9).
Turn the adjusting screw (10) counter-clockwise
two or three turns to ensure proper latching. Close
the breaker and then turn the adjusting screw clock
wise slowly until the breaker trips. Then turn the
adjusting screw back counter-clockwise one and
one quarter turn and lock with lockscrew (9). If

the breaker is subjected to severe vibration which
results in nuisance tripping more latch travel is
needed and one and a half turns can be used.

2. Holding Cam
If the holding cam does not reset properly it may

be jarred when the closing spring is charged, the
breaker will attempt to close as the closing spring
is charged without pressing the close button or
operating the shunt close device.
Figure 5b

Referring to the spring mechonism shown in Figure
3, adjustments can be made as follows and should
be tried one at a time.

1. The return spring (12) may require sHghtly more
pressure. Bend the toil of the spring a little
to increase the pressure.

2. The motor limit switch is operated by the hold
ing com and it may prevent the cam from return
ing against the top stop screw. Bend the operat
ing lever of the limit switch to overcome this.

To adjust the holding cam itself releose the
lock nut on the top screw and turn counter
clockwise one quarter of a turn and relack.
This increases the loading on the cam and it
is important that the adjustment be made care
Figure 6

fully to ensure that the resultant load will not

be too heavy for the shunt close device.

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
OVERLOAD RELAYS

LONG DELAY CALIBRATION

All type H breokers are supplied with the new type The relays ore colibrafed of the foctory at 80%,
PA direct acting overcurrent relay. These relays 100% ond 160% of trip coil rating and may be ad
are dual mognetic type consisting of long delay justed in the field to these calibrated marks.
element ond an instantaneous element.

A series coil is used on breakers below 600 amp

eres while a single conductor provides sufficient
mognetic flux for all ratings over 600 amperes.The
very efficient magnetic design permits operation of
the reloy ot very low ampere turn values ond thus
the coil normally associated with air circuit breoker reloys is completely eliminated for oil ratings
of 600 amperes and over. In addition, coils used on
the lower rotings employ much lower current dens
ities than usual for this type of device and thus
will operote ot much lower temperatures.

INSTANTANEOUS CALIBRATION

The relays are colibroted at the facto.y at 10 times
the trip coi Irating or for the range to suit the cont
inuous rating of the breaker and may be adjusted
in the field to these colibroted marks.

STANDARD TRIP RATINGS
Breaker

Type

Overcurrent Trip
Ratings (100% Calibration)
50.70. 90, 100, 125, 150

instantaneous Trip

Range (Adjustable)

175, 200. 225, 250, 300,

8-15 times

350, 400. 500. 600, 800.
1000, 1200, 1600
200, 225, 250, 300, 350,
400, 500, 600, 300, 1000.
1200 1600
20C0, 2500, 3000

Overcutrent Trip

ratings
8-15 times

4-10 times

1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
3000, 3500, 4000

4-10 limes

4000.5000. 5000

4-10 times

Adjustable Screv
OIL FILLER HOLE

The relays are shipped from the foctory filled with
oil and should not require servicing. If the relays

Ore disossembled they should be thoroughly cleoned with carbon tetracmoride and reassembled with

care to ensure they ore completely free of dirt or

lint. Refill the relay with 20 cc of the replacement

silicon oil using o squirt type oil can.
CHECKING RELAY OPERATION

Push ori both sides of moving ormature with gentle
pressure. The armature will move slowly as the
delay piston retards the movement. At a point be
fore the ormoture meets the yoke, the delay action
ceases obruptiy and the ormoture should travel
freely to meet the yoke. In so doing the insuloted
pull rod connected to the armature should pull the
the lever on the trip rod to trip the breoker. Adjust
the screw at the trip shaft end of the pull rod if
necessary to ensure the breaker trips.
1.

Fixed Yoke

This procedure may'be repeated with more severe
pressure which will extend the instantaneous spr
ings and allow the armature to touch the yoke and

2. Moving Armature
3. Loi.g delay springs

4. Instantaneous springs
5. Delay mechanism
6.

Oil filler hole

7. Long delay adjustments
8. Instantaneous adjustments

F igure 7

trip the breaker.
Reference should be made to the time current chor-

octeristic curves for proper settings to suit load
conditions.

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
of breakers, The hood is an osbestos type material
ond
will break if subjected to undue shocks, there
When a short deloy is required under short circuit
fore, care should be used in hondling.
conditions o delay device is introduced to prevent
the instantaneous action of the reloy. Three colib- ARC CHUTES
roted deloys or 5, 15 or 25 cycles ot 6 times the Where the hood does not have a front panel the arc
instantaneous pickup are provided.
chutes may be removed without removing the hood
for
inspection of contacts. A long handled screw
A mechanicol escopement device is mounted on
driver is necessary to reach the mounting screws
the moving ormature of the relay to prevent its ot the back of the base. The arc chute may dis
SELECTIVE TRIPPING ATTACHMENT

movement under short circuit conditions. The tim

ing odjustment is mode fay the amount of extension
of the escapement spindle. Release the locknut
on the side and odjust to one of the calibrated

colour from arc interruption but will not need re
placement unless heavy deposits of ore contoct
material ore present or unless parts are distorted
or cracked.

marks.

MAIN CONTACTS

ARCING CONTACTS

Main contacts are a silver alloy ond should be
clean, bright and free from pitting. They may be
gently sonded if necessory using o fine sandpaper

time the circuit breaker interrupts the current and
should be inspected at regular intervals if the

to remove pit morks. Avoid hoving particles fall
into the mechanism.

If main contocts ore severely damaged careful in

spection of all current corrying ports
made. Supporting pins, linkage and
springs should be exomined for damoge
cess heat. Annealed or distorted ports

Arcing contacts are subjected to burning every
circuit breaker is operated frequently. They should
alwoys be inspected after the breaker hos inter
rupted o short circuit and should be replaced if

should be
especiolly
due to ex

they ore showing serious pitting ond burning.
To remove the moving arcing contact from the

should be

Remove the braid connection by removing the Vt—

replaced.

breoker, remove the circlip and W dio. pin (3).
20-round head machine screw. Examine the braid

carefully for excessive broken stronds or burned

HOOD

The hood is provided to restrict ionized gases

portions. Replace if necessary by disconnecting
from the lower main contact bor. Replace in re

from direct access to the steel enclosure and in

verse order.

oddition carries interphose barriers. The hood is

To remove the fixed arcing contact refer to Figure
8. Remove mounting bolts as indicoted and replace.

held in place as illustrated for the various types

Figure 8o

Figure 8b

(1) Fixed Arcing Contacts 25H-1
(2) Moving Arcing Contacts

(5) Fixed Arcing Contact 50H—1
(6) Lower fixed orcing contoct 50H—1

(3) Pin
(4) Moin contact

(8) Contact sideplate.

(7) Blowout coil

ff^e

type h air circuit breakers
50-1600 AMP.

2000-4000 AMP
thip shaft

(1) Roller

(2) Folding Roil
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Crank Nut
Crankshaft
Interlock com
Shock Absorber
Control tab

(8) Thrust bearing
(9) Interlock lever tab

(10) Interlock trip rod
(11) Truck Stops
(12) Rolpin

Top OF BP£AH£A FAAMg

TAtP Sff4Pr

5000-6000 AMP

Figure 9 - Drowout Mechoni sm

type h air circuit breakers
DRAWOUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

FF^E

engaging the main contacts. The wedge is located

All drawout circuit breakers ore mounted on o three in the bottom of the enclosure and the trip lever
position corrioge so thot the breoker moy be moved adjusted as shown in the diagrams above.
to ony of its positions, connected, tested and with It is essential that the breaker trip after three turns
of the crank when removing the breaker to ensure
drawn without opening the door.

On the smoller frame breokers o folding roil ass

that the circuit is not broken on the drawout con
tacts.

embly is used while the large frame breakers re
quire 0 rigid self supporting truck. These ore ill If the breaker does not latch properly after it has
been moved through this interlock position, check
ustrated in Figure 9.
to see that the interlock has reset and the trip shofr
An interlock is provided which will ensure that the hos returned to its normal position and clearances

breaker is open when it is either engaging or dis

are maintained os indicated.

1. Closing Link Assembly
2. Hood
3. Arc Chute
4.

Base

5. Operating Handle
6. Dual Overload Relay
7. Main Moving Contact
8.

Yoke

9. Trip Shaft

10. Closing Casting Link
11. Operating Eccentric Link
12. Crankshaft

13. Faceplate
14. Spring Mechanism Frame
15. Braid

16. Main Fixed Contacts

17. Moving Arcing Contact
18. Faceplate Bracket
19. Terminals

SECTION VIEW25H-1

20*. Floating Trim
21. Floating Trim Springs
22. Trip Button
23.

Interlock Lever

24. Fixed Arcing Contacts
25. Ground Steel Cam
26. Ratchet Wheel

27.
28.
29.
30.

Spring Crank
Main Spring
.Holding Com Assembly
Spring Charge Indicator

31. Manual Close Button

32. Provision for Padlocking
Trip Button
33. Provision for Padlocking
Operating Handle
34. Handle Clutch

35.
36.
37.
38.

Manual Trip Rod
Interlock Lever Spring
Moving Arcing Contacts
Fixed Arcing Contacts

39. Blowout Coil
40 Blowout Core

Section View 50H-1, 75H-1

FRyE

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Section View 100H-1

1.
2.
3.

Tie Bar
Hood
Arc-chute

Base

5.
6.
7.

Operating Handle
Overload Relay
Insuloted Couplinq .

Yoke

Tripshaft

10. Operating Lever
11. Operating Link
12.

Cronkshaft

13. Faceplate
14. Spring Mechanism Frome
15.

Braid

16.

Main Contacts

17. Arcing Contacts
18. Faceplate Bracket
19.

Terminols

20.
21.

Blowout Coil
Armoture

24. Wing Nuts
25.
26.

Ground Steel Com
Ratchet Wheel

27. Spring Crank
28. Main Spring

29. Holding Com Assembly
30. Spring Charge Indicator

31. Manual Close Button
(55)
32. Provision for Padlocking
Trip Button

33. Provision for Padlocking
Operating Handle
34.

Handle Clutch

35. Interlock Lever Spring
36. Floating Trim
37. Floating Trim Springs
38.

Moving Main Contacts

TYPE H AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SPARE PARTS

ubreakers to promptly reploce
sufficient
be or
corried
in stock
operotorsappreciated
of circuit
any spore
worn,ports
broken
damaged
parts.to enable
If will the
be reodily
that a stock of parts reduces deloys in service and soves time and expense. The following spare
ports are recommended as minimum requirements for a breaker instollation.

Quantity
•(1)

DESCRIPTION

ITEM
NO.

PART NUMBER FOR BREAKER TYPE
25H.]

Moving Arcing Contact

49B-98

Stationary Arcing Contact
Upper Stationary Arc."

^hen ordering spare ports specify complete nameplote data.
* (1) Quantities listed ore totol for a 3 pole breaker except lOOH—1 which uses 6 of each arcing
contact and braid for a three pole breaker.

-P
\i> "^1
•4©

1. Arc chutes

2. Moving arcing contacts
3. Stationary arcing contacts
3a. Upper stationary arcing contact
3b. Lower stationary arcing contact
4. Main moving contact

5. Braids

6. Upper main contact
7. Lower main contact

50H-1, 75H-1, lOOH.]

FOR ELECTRICALLY OPERATED BREAKERS ADD
Qty. DESCRIPTION

VOLTAGE RATING

48V D.C. 125V D.C 250V D.C. ~U^ A.C. | 230V A.C. UsQV A.C I 575V A.C.

Motor

183A-IA-3

Closing Coil
Shunt Trip Coil

46A-9922-10B 240A-4
240A-6
240A-3
240A-4
240A-5
240A-6
46A-9922-I0B 46A-9922-10C 46A-9922-10O 46A-9922-I0A 46A-9922-10B 46A-9922-10D 46A-9922-IOO
46A-7705-J
46A-77Q5-K 45A-7705-L 240A-2A
240A-2B
240A-2C
240A-2D

No Volt Coil

t-imit Switch(SLS)
Limit Switch (CC)
Auxiliary Relay

NOTE: When ordering spore parts specify complete nameplate doto.

m ©

1. Antl-pumping relay
2. Coil assembly for No Volt Trip
3. Shunt Close assembly
4. Control transformer

5. Spring Limit Switch (S.LS.)
6. Closing Coil Limit Switch (C.C.
7. Motor

huy. Qji5t£jjj )C\J 4'

f" %*JL.

AjAajS/A'
-

Ujt

VACUUA\ /(jLTfoP*^. A^/c.

cfor esTfdh^^cJf

l2^fcJ flAU^ X67)
l2>'Lp\J C>o

j'/e^if-^/Ocy Co
doAjTt Cu/Z'e^ F/ptlJ'O

dUs'i^ C^y ^IfVDO
7f'P\/!>L^

hi'F^ (IfAyF^z-n 0OfOO5f/

TYPEH-3,HL-3
LOW VOLTAGE POWER AIR
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
•

Type H-3and HL-3 low voltage power air circuit breakers
are used in metal-enciosed switchgear and unit

switchgear conform to the following standards:
ANSI C37.13 — "Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers"

substations lor the protection and control of low voltage
power circuits up to 250 volts dc and 600 volts ac. They are
a means of safelyswitching loads and automatically
clearing circuits when such abnormal conditions as
sustained overloads, short circuits, ground faults, or

ANSI C37.16 —"Preferred Ratings, Reiated

under-voltage occur.

ANSI C37.17 —'Trip Devices for AC and General-

Requirements, and Application
Power Circuit Breakers and AC
Power Circuit Protectors"

RATINGS

Purpose DC Low-Voltage Power

600, 800,1600,2000, 3000, 3200, 4000 and 6000 ampere

Circuit Breakers"

continuous current rating are available. Interrupting
capacities from 30,000 to 130,000 amperes for Type H-3,
and up to 200,000 amperes for Type HL-3 fused air circuit
breaker are available.
DRAWOUT OR FIXED MOUNTING

Type K-3 and HL-3 breakers are available mounted on a

drawout cradle with disconnecting primary power and
secondary control contacts. Type H-3 breakers can also be

ANSI C37.19 —"Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers and Switchgear
Assemblies"

ANSI C37.20 —"Switchgear Assemblies including
metal-enclosed bus"

ANSI C37.28 —"Low-Voltage AC Integrally Fused
Power Circuit Breakers"

ANSI C37.50 —'Test Procedures for Low-Voltage
AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

provided lor fixed mounting.

Enclosures".

ELECTRICAL OR MANUAL OPERATION

The breakers are provided with either a manually operated
handle or an electric motor for charging the stored-enei^
closing mechanism.

British Standard 4752, "Part 1"
CSA
CSA

• "Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1".

C22.1
(22.2

• No. 31, "Switchgear Assemblies"
• "Switchgear Assemblies"
• 1A "Specification for Switchgear

EEMAC C8-2
USD SOLID STATE OVERCURRENT RELAY

Full overcurrent protection features include USD solid-

lEC

1S7-1,

and Control Gear for voltages up to
and including 10(X)V ac and 1200V

state relays with Federal Pioneer's ZSIF^ (ZONE SELECTIVE
INSTANTANEOUS PROTECTION).
STANDARDS

Federal Pioneer Ty^ H-3 and HL-3 circuit breakers and

FEATURES

low resistance

long time, ground fault and

characteristics

ZSIP*

Prevents magnetic heating

areas of frame

Reliability and

inierchangeability
Compression spring,

stored energy operating
mechanism

Positive control of speed
and force of closing,
independent of the
operator

Ratchet-wheel stored

energy mechanism
Easy interchangeabilityof

- "Switchgear Assemblies"

Breakers"

BENEFITS

installed in vacant cell of

different current rating.
MANUAL OR ELECTRICAL

Choice of local or remote

OPERATION

control.

TYPE HL-3 FUSED AIR
CIRCUIT BREAKER

Up to 2(X>,(X)0 ampere rms

symmetrical interrupting
capacity.

Blown fuse, single phase

Protection of rotating

protection

machinery
Rapid identification of
faulted phase

Blown fuse indicator

OPTIONAL FEATURES

Padlockable shutters on
drawout breakers
Overload lockout

SAFETY

flyback

Mechanical Interlocks

Up to 48 auxiliary contacts

arc chutes

Silver plated main drawout

Pause anywhere in
charging cycle. No handle

type H-3with Federal
Pioneer Type H-2 breaker
Fibre reinforced poiyester

NEMASC-S

Rejection feature to
prevent breaker being

Selective protection and
adjustable time current

Precision assembly

- "Low-Voltage Power Circuit

High contact pressure and

instantaneous, short time,

Stainless steel in critical

FEATURES

contacts

USD relay with

dc. Part 1, Circuit Breakers."
NEMASC-3

BENEFITS

Trip-free operation

Proven multi-segment
design double break

Recommendations for Low-Voltage

Maximum efficiencyand

Flexibility in control
schemes

contacts

low temperature rise

Shunt trip and shunt close

Remote operation possible

Individually spring-loaded

Contact pressure increases

Protection from

main draw-out contacts

with higher current flow.

Undervoliage trip

undervoltage damage to

designed for "blow-on"

Inherently dead front
Three position closed-door
racking
Safely Interlock ensures
breaker is open and spring

discharged before breaker
is connected or withdrawn

Mortitoring of maintenance
intervals

SAFETY
SAFETY

Breaker Lifting Devices

Easyhandling

PAGE
DETAILED CONSTRUCTION
SUPPORTING FRAME

TYPE HL-3 FUSED AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

ACCESSORIES FOR H-3 AND HL-3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

•^USD SOLID STATE OVERCURRENT RELAY
AVAILABLE FEATURES

ZSIP®

LOCAL AND REMOTE INDICATION

USD RELAY MODELS

TECHNICAL DATA SUMMARY
TYPE H-3 BREAKER DATA

TYPE HL-3 BREAKER DATA

SPRING CHARGING MOTOR DATA

COIL RATING DATA

USD RELAY SETTINGS

CURRENT SENSOR SIZES AND AMPERE TAPS

USD RELAY TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS

TYPICAL SPECIFICATION

TABLE OF
CONTENTS

SUPPORTING FRAME

The type H-3 and HL-3 breakers are
assembled on a moulded base of high
strength polyester-glass compound
using individual pole pieces carefully
interlocked together and supported by
a stainless steel frame. The use of

stainless steel prevents magnetic

heating. The mouldings are deeply
ribbed to provide large creepage
distances between adjacent current
carrying parts. These ribs also serve as

stiffeners to resist bending and
distortion under conditions of
DETAILED

CONSTRUCTION

maximum stress.

The circuit breaker frame is
manufactured to close tolerances and

jig-assembled to ensure accurate
alignment of all parts. Close control is

maintained over dimensional stability
to ensure complete uniformity and
interchangeability of finished breakers
of each frame size.
OPERATING MECHANISM

Two types of operating mechanisms
are available on the complete range of

Manually operated H-3breaker

Manual Operation

For manual operation the charging
handle, located centrally on the
breaker faceplate, is first rotated
counter-clockwise and then pressed in
to engage a clutch mechanism.
Rotating the handle clockwise
approximately 180° will fully charge
the closing spring. A positive ratchet
wheel mechanism allows a pause
anywhere during the charging stroke
without handle fly-back. The breaker

type H-3 and HL-3 circuit breakers;

can then be closed by pressing a direct

manual for local control and electrical

acting manual close button on the

for both local and remote operation. A
high strength compression type
closing spring is employed in all
operating mechanisms to give positive
control of closing speed and force,
independent of the operator.

KJ
0

ilectric inotorcbarged operating mechanism
(faceplate box removed)

breaker faceplate. The closing spring
can also be charged manually when
the breaker is open and left in the
charged position, to be released from a
remote position.

The manually operated mechanism

includes provision for padlocking the
handle. On frame sizes 1600 amperes
and above, the handle has a pull-out
extension for ease of operation.

dedicated tripping solenoid operated
by the USD overcurrent relay.
An electrical trip button is
provided on the faceplate and will
operate in both "connected" and
"test" positions. A manual trip button
is also provided and operates in all
breaker positions.
In addition to the electrical "close"

and "trip" buttons one additional
electrical button can be provided on
the faceplate for special purpose

controls such as electrical reset of
lockout devices.

The faceplates of both operating
mechanisms, include CLOSED-OPEN
and CHARGED-DISCHARGED

Electrical Operation

For electrical operation a universal
series-wound gear motor, suitable for
operation on a.c. or d.c. current is
provided. The motor is available in
voltage ratings of 48,120, 250V d.c. and

indicators and provision for key
interlocks and/or operation counter.

120, 240V a.c.

A toggle switch mounted on the
''aceplate permits the motor to be
deenergized during maintenance or
inspection. A spring limit switch stops
the motor when the closing spring is
fully charged. After the motor has
charged the closing spring, the breaker
can be closed remotely using a shunt
close device.

The motor operates to charge the
spring immediately after the breaker
opens so it is ready to close as soon as
the electrical close button is pressed. A
latch check switch prevents any
attempted electrical close until the trip
shaft is completely reset in readiness
to close. As an option, the motor may
be connected to charge the spring,
after the breaker closes to provide one
immediate reclosure after opening.
The electrically operated mechanism
includes provision for a manual spring
charging handle for emergency use. A
shunt trip for remote tripping of the
breaker is provided on all electrically

Sperated breakers in addition to the

H-3brea<:e/mafn and arcing contacts

MAIN CONTACTS

Type H-3 and HL-3 breakers have silver
tungsten double-break bridge type main
contacts, with wedge contact surfaces.
The angular configuration minimizes
the "blow-off" forces produced by short
circuit currents.

Individual segments of the main
moving contacts are fully insulated from

each other and the carrying arm and are
also self-aligning. Two compression
springs per contact produce high
contact pressures to ensure the
breakdown of corrosive films and dirt.

The design was optimized utilizing
extensive computer studies, to control

current flow through the segments
while minimizingtemperature rise.

ARC CONTROL

arcing by a shield located below the

When the breaker opens under loads or
short circuits, the main contacts part

stationary arcing contact. An insulating
barrier, fixed in the switchgear

first and the double break contacts

compartment above the arc chutes,
completes the arc control system.

quickly establish a wide air gap. The
current-flow is transferred to the arcing
contacts, through a heavy copper braid.
At no time are hinge pins relied on for
carrying current in the Federal Pioneer
H-3 and HL-3 breakers.

The arcing contacts part and an arc
is established and the magnetic field
produced forces the arc up into the arc
chute. The arc chutes are made of fibre

DETAILED
:ONSTRUCTION

reinforced polyester and contain the
steel arc chute plates and de-ionizing
plates. The action of the arc-quenching
and de-ionizing plates pulls the arc still
further inside the arc chute, where it is

cooled and broken into many small
series arcs. The arc is thus extended,

cooled and quickly extinguished,
without arcing on the main contacts.
During interruption, the main
contacts are further protected from the

m
Arcing contacts parted

.Arc extinguished

CONNECTEDposition

Sp^:i:
DISCONNECTEDposition

DRAWOUT CONSTRUCTION
SeK'V.'

^4-- -

^;:'

Thedrawout mechanism provides three
positions for the breaker with the door
closed.

CONNECTED —Primary and
secondary contacts energized
TEST —Primary contacts isolated;
secondary contacts energized
DISCONNECTED — Primary and
secondary contacts isolated
A positive gear drive can be
operated from the breaker faceplate
even when the enclosure door is closed

and operates a cam lever on each side of
the draw-out cradle to move the breaker

TESTposition

through its positions. Normally, the
door can be opened with the breaker in
any position. An optional door interlock
can be provided to trip the breaker if the
door is opened.

The breaker is guided accurately on
grooved steel wheels fitted to the
outside of the breaker frame. As the
breaker is moved in from the

"disconnected" position, the grounding
contact is engaged first. This is a sturdy
phosphor bronze to copper contact
which ensures a positive ground
connection to the breaker frame. The

secondary or control contacts make
next, as the breaker reaches the "test"

position. Finallythe main contacts are
made as the breaker reaches the

"connected" position. A positive stop
DETAILED

CONSTRUCTION

on the mechansim ensures that the

7jm\ \'

breaker isfully connected before it can
be closed. Breaker position is also
clearly shown by indicators on the side

.'-/.•v.,;::"

of the faceplate box.
Whenever the breaker is moved out

the reverse sequence takes place. After

Rejection Feature

the breaker reaches the "disconnected"

Rejection Safety Feature
A rejection feature is standard on all

position and the enclosure door is

opened, rugged folding tracks can be
pulled down to roll the breaker by hand
fully clear of the enclosure, exposing all
the plug-in contacts for examination.

Safety shutters are available as an option
to cover the main plug-in contacts of the
enclosure.

Safety interlock

The drawout mechanism is provided
with a safety interlock as standard to
ensure that the breaker is open and the
closing spring is discharged before the
breaker is either withdrawn from the
cell or connected into the cell.

Thedrawout mechanism operating
shaft is located behind a padlockable
sliding gate interlock on the breaker
faceplace. Lowering the gate to insert
the drawout handle trips the air circuit
breaker if it is closed, and then

discharges the closing spring if it is
charged. As long as the handle is
inserted, the breaker cannot be closed.

frame sizes and prevents entry of a
breaker into an enclosure intended for a
different frame size. Pins on both sides
of the breaker frame must match slots
cut in brackets mounted on both sides
of the cradle. If the cradle is a different

frame size than the breaker, the breaker
pins will not match the slots cut in the
cradle brackets.

M
/ain Drawout Contacts - 1600A H-3

mm,
Main Drawout Contacts

Main drawout contacts utilize electro

magnetic force to create a "blow-on"
effect to increase contact pressu re as

current flow increases. This high
pressure gripping action, along with a

wiping-action as contacts are first
engaged, maintains low contact
resistance and operating temperatu res.
These contacts are pre-loaded with
individual springsforeach pairof
contacts to provide a reliable selfaligning connection. The 600and 800
ampere breaker contacts utilize 4 pairs

Main Drawoot Contacts - 2000A H3

of segments, each 1/8"(3.18mm) thick.

rows arranged in a compact box are

The 1600 ampere breaker contacts use 6
pairs of segments, each 1/4" (6.35 mm)

used on the4000 ampere breaker.

thick. The 3000 and 3200 ampere breaker
use two sets of 1600 ampere contacts.

The 2000 and 4000 ampere breakers
^utilize rows of contact segments
designed to give "line-contact" for
maximum conductivity in minimum
space; individual springs are again used.
Two rows of these contacts are used on

the2000 ampere breaker, and four such

All main drawout contacts are silver

plated formaximum efficiency and low
temperature rise as a standard feature.

g^^ei

TYPEHL-3
FUSED AIR
CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

T/pe Hi-3 f used^/f CircoU Breaker

The use of HRC fuses increases the

HRC Fuse Protection

interrupting capacity of the fused
breaker to 200,000 amperes. The air

Faultcurrent damage is a result of the
excessive heat energy released and the
mechanical distortion produced by
magnetic forces. Both these destructive
elements are proportional to the square

circuit breaker alone retains the

interrupting rating for its frame size,
which ranges from 30,000 amperes
symmetrical at 600 volts with a 600
ampere frame size, to 85,000 amperes
symmetrical at 600 volts with a 4000
ampere frame size.
Overcurrent Protection

When a short circuit occu rs the

magnitude of the current and the
co-ordination between the fuse and the

breaker overcu rrent relay will
determine whether the breaker or the
fusewillclearthe fault. Co-ordination
must be such that the breaker will not

attempt to clear faults beyond its
ratings. As breaker contacts must
withstand the peak let-through of the

of the short circuit current. The heat

energy is also directly proportional to
the time that the short circuit current

flows. Since HRCfuses have the precise
qualities of limiting both the current and
the time through which it acts, fault
damage can be considerably reduced.

HRC fuses operate silently and safely
without expelling any ionized gas.
Selection of Ratings & Co-ordination

The frame size and trip ratings for fused
breakers are selected in the same
manner as for a conventional air circuit

fuse there is a maximum size fuse which

breaker. Toachieve the best protection
from the HRC fuse, the smallest rating
which can co-ordinate with the relay

can be supplied with each breaker

should be chosen.

frame size. Co-ordination between the

Where fused breakers are used in

breaker relay and the fuse is such that
series, co-ordination between the fuses
the breaker will operate to clear over
must also be considered. With reference
loads and faults up to its interrupting
to the |2t curves for the fuses in
rating and the fuse will clear faults above question, one must ensure that the total
the breaker rating.
clearing |2t of the load side fuse does not
exceed the melting l^tof the supply side
fuse.

Where the HRCfuse must piotect
equipment by virtue of its current

•*

limiting abilities, the maximum peak
withstand current for the equipment to
be protected must be determined. For

the circuit breaker, the maximum peak
withstand current is 2.3 times the

symmetrical short-circuit rating. Atthe
available short circuit current in RMS

symmetrical amperes, the peak letthrough current of the fuse selected
should not exceed the maximum peak
withstand current for the equipment to
be protected.
For further information on breaker-

fuse co-ordination contact Federal
Pioneer.

Fuse Truck

In ratings of 2000, 3000 and 4000 am
peres, a separate fuse truck is available
to be used in conjunction with an H-3

breaker. Key interlocking is provided
to ensure that the circuit breaker is

open before the fuse unit is withdrawn.

The fuse unit is equipped with a
rejection feature which prevents entry
^

of the fuse unit into the breaker cell.
TYPE HL-3 FUSED AIR
CIRCUIT BREAKER

Single Phase Protection and Blown Fuse Indicator

Single Phase Protection
Protection against single phasing
caused by breaker fuse interruption is a
standard feature on Type HL-3 fused air
circuit breakers. Three solenoid coils

(one per phase) are connected in
parallel with the HRC fuses. They are
provided with plungers which act
directly on the common trip shaft. The
coils are rated 1/5th line voltage so that
should a fuse blow on short circuit, the
coil will provide sufficient power to trip
the breaker, even though the line
voltage may be reduced.
Blown Fuse Indicator

The type HL-3 circuit breaker is available
in 600 to 4000 amperes frame sizes. The
HL-3 breaker is similar to a drawout Type
H-3 with the addition of a provision for
mounting NEMA HRCfuses. Optional

An indicator is provided which is
actuated by the single phase protection
coils. Should one fuse blow, the

These fuses are mounted on the line
side on a frame extension at the rear of
the breaker and are accessible for

corresponding coil will trip the breaker
and project an indicating bar through
the faceplate. The three indicators are
coloured red, yellow and blue and
correspond to left, centre and right side
fuses. When the fuse has been replaced
the linkage can be reset by pushing in

replacement when the breaker is fully

the indicator. The breaker can then be

withdrawn.

reclosed.

accessories available for the H-3 breaker
are also available for the fused breaker.

The following maximum fuse sizes
may be used:
HL-3 FRAME

(AMPERES)
800 NEMA L
1200 NEMA L
2000 NEMA L
3000 NEMA L
4000 NEMA L

6000 NEMA L

Secondary Conirol Contacts

ACCESSORIES
FORH-3AND
HL-3 CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

Secondary Control Contacts
Secondary control contacts are
provided on drawout units to

automatically connect or disconnect
control circuits, as the circuit breaker

moves through its positions in the
cradle. The contacts are designed so that
the control circuit can be energized or
isolated in the test position. These
connections can be altered in the field,

when required, by means of jumpers
between contacts of the stationary
block.

Supplied in multiples of 8 contacts, a
total of 48 can be provided, and each
contact has a continuous current rating
of 30 amperes. In applications where a
control supply voltage in excess of 250 V
is to be used, the higher voltage contacts
are double spaced (i.e. the adjoining

Shunt Trip

The shunt trip is a solenoid device
separate from the dedicated solenoid
used with the USD relay. When
energized it acts directly on the
breaker trip shaft to trip the breaker.
Coils are interchangeable with all
standard control ratings available. (See
rating data). A shunt trip is supplied as
standard on electrically operated
breakers and is available as an option on
manually operated breakers.

contact is unused).

Contacts are formed copper,
cadmium plated and mounted in a
polycarbonate moulding. The moulding
is designed with high barriers between
contacts to provide large creepage
distances. The movable secondary
contact block fitted to the breaker

assembly is spring mounted to ensure
alignment with the stationary contacts.

The device is energized directly, or
from a control transformer, and is
^mi

connected across two phases.
If voltage is available on the line
side terminals, the coil is energized
and will compress the springs. The
breaker may then be closed in the
normal manner. In operation, the coil
drops-out at 35% of rated voltage for
120V a.c. and 46% of rated voltage for
240V a.c. Both pull in at 80% rated
voltage.
Overload Lockout Device

Shunt Uose

Shunt Close
The shunt close device is used to release

the energy stored in the closing spring
to close the breaker from a remote

position. It is standard on electrically
operated breakers and is available as an
option on manually operated breakers.

The overload lockout device prevents
reclosing of the breaker either
manually or electrically after the
breaker has been tripped by the
overload relay, until this device is
manually reset.
The direct acting shunt trip
solenoid plunger mechanically holds
the closing mechanism in the trip-free
position, preventing closing of the
main contacts. The latch check switch

wired in series with the closing coil is
open in this position, to block
electrical operation of the closing coil.
The device is reset by pushing the
manual overload lockout reset button

on the breaker faceplate. This reset
button is spring returned to its normal
position.
Alarm Contacts

A Single Pole Double Throw contact is
supplied and operated In conjunction
with the overload lockout device.
Contact is reset with the overload

lockout device. Where overload

Undenoltage Trip with Time Delay Attachmenl

Undervoltage Trip
The undervoltage trip provides
protection on loss of system voltage or
low system voltage. It is an a.c.
solenoid holding two compressed
springs which will trip the breaker
mechanically when the supply voltage
-•\'^al!s too far below normal. (See rating

data). Tripping action may be
instantaneous or delayed up to 5
seconds when the adjustable timedelay attachment is specified.

lockout is not required a momentary
overload alarm contact can be supplied
to operate a remote flag relay.

N/r

Y *4

Auxiliary Sw.tch

ACCESSORIES
FORH-3AND
HL-3 CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

Auxiliary Switch
All H-3 and HL-3 units use a multi-

section rotary switch coupled directly
to the closing shaft, operated on a
snap action principle which provides
quick break switching. Switches with
up to 20 poles are available.

"i:

Mechanical Interlock

Mechanical Interlock
Mechanical interlocks are available on

all H-3 and HL-3 breakers. They are
used to mechanically interlock
breakers in a two or three breaker

transfer scheme, in the case of a two

breaker transfer scheme, mechanical

interlocks ensure only one breaker is
closed while the other is held in a tripfree position. Mechanical interlocks
connect the closing shaft of one
breaker to the trip shaft of a second
breaker by means of a flexible cable
and vice versa. In a three breaker
transfer scheme mechanical interlocks
Operations Counter

Operations Counter

A five digit mechanical counter can be
supplied, mounted in the faceplate of
the breaker.

This device is mechanically driven
by the "CHARGED-DISCHARCED"
indicator, and operates once for each
charging of the breaker closing spring.
Operations counters are

ensure only two breakers are closed
while the third is held in a trip-free
position.
Drawout breakers are interlocked

by cable connections between the
cradles. There are no permanent
connections between the breaker and

matching cradle when interlocking is
supplied, so the breaker can be freely
withdrawn from the cell. Mechanical

recommended where breakers will be

interlocks are operable only when the
breaker is in the connected position.

subjected to frequent operations as an

When withdrawn to the "test"

indicator of the recommended

position, breakers can be test operated

maintenance intervals.

in the normal manner.

With the key removed the closing
mechanism is completely trip-free,
preventing closing of the main
contacts. On electrically operated units
an auxiliary switch contact is provided
to operate in conjunction with the

interlock isolating the closing circuit.

V..-

r.ot

Door Interlock

All H-3 and HL-3 circuit breakers may
be fitted with a device which acts to

trip the unit when the cell door is
opened. In operation, the door lever
acts internally on the mechanical trip
button causing it to move in towards

^he faceplate.

Cell Switches

Cell switches mounted in the cradle

can be provided to serve as position
indicators or as an electrical interlock

bypass. The switches are operated
when the breaker is removed from the

"connected" position in the enclosure.

Each switch contains one normally
closed and one normally open contact.
A total of six switches can be supplied.
These contacts are rated 10 amperes
up to 300V a.c.

mssBm

Ke)' Interlock

^ev Interlocks
/pe VF key interlocks, single or
double lock, with 3/8 inch (9.5mm)

projection can be provided. Provision
is made for key interlocks on all frame

Shutters

Shutters are available for all frame

sizes up to and including 3200 amperes
for both line and load side main

plug-in contact stabs.
For the 600, 800,1600, 3000 and

3200 ampere H-3 frame sizes, shutters
are of the lifting type. They have a
padlock bracket in the bottom of the
enclosure for locking in the down
position.
When the breaker moves from the

"test" to the "connected" position,
shutter bolts on the frame of the

ACCESSORIES
FOR H-3 AND
HL-3 CIRCUIT
BREAKERS

breaker lift the shutter to expose the
main plug-in contacts.
For the 2000 ampere H-3 and for
the 600, 800, 1600, 2000 and 3000

Lifting Device facilitates safe handling of breaker

amperes HL-3, shutters are of the
splitting type. When the breaker

Lifting Device

moves from the test to operating

Federal Pioneer for all frame size

position, shutter bolts on the frame of
the breaker open the shutter to expose
the main plug-in contacts.
A separate blanking truck may be
used in 4000 ampere drawout breaker

breakers. The lifting device is a onepiece yoke which fits into lugs on the
breaker sideplates. This permits safe
enclosure drawout tracks. Lifting yokes

cells.

are ordered as follows.

A lifting device is available from

removal of the breaker from the

Part Number 26G-542 for 600, 800,

1600 and 2000 ampere H-3's.
Part Number 26G-151 for 3000,

3200 and 4000 ampere H-3's.
Part Number 26G-601 for 600, 800,

1600 and 2000 ampere HL-3's.
Part Number 26G-603 for 3000 and

4000 ampere HL-3's.
Part Number 26G-150 for 6000

ampere 100H-2.

v.—Ti. tTS"

I^
Shutters lift automatically as breaker moves to
••CONNECTED" position

AVAILABLE FEATURES

BENEFIT

Long time, short time
instantaneous and ground
fault protective functions
Pick up elements work independently
ZSIP® on short time and ground

Selective co-ordination

fault

Thumbwheel programming switches
with positive detents and gold plated
contacts. Factory calibrated discrete

for maximum service continuity

Relay reliability
Selectivity with minimum system
damage
Precision setting of protection
function, without in service
"drift".

^.•yaiues for pick up and time delay.
Jolour keyed faceplate

Ease of setting relay

Local and remote indication

Rapid fault location

Type H-3 and HL-3 breakers are
supplied with the Federal Pioneer Type
USD Solid State Overcurrent Relay, as
a standard feature. The USD relay
protects low voltage power systems
against damage caused by short
circuits, overloads and ground faults.
The relay may have up to four pick
up elements: instantaneous, shorttime, long time and ground fault, each
working independently of the others
for increased reliability. Local and
remote indication are availabie. In

addition ZSIP® (ZONE SELECTIVE
INSTANTANEOUS PROTECTION) is

availabie for the short-time and ground
fault elements.

USD Relay - A standard feature of H-3, HL-3 breakers

^-N>;

®||j^|£
| ^H|> ^'W
la " l^« J^-4jjl

^^^SSSlpi

[f to ^^Pl'^^j^pj'^^en-™-—jj^^l^^jf

USD SOLID
STATE
ERCURRENT
RELAY

^
Carefully matched components of the USD trip system

The Type USD Relay is mounted
low on the front of the breaker frame,
away from the arc-chutes.
Tripping energy for the operation
of the circuit breaker is obtained solely
from the circuit being protected. Other
power sources are only required for
fault indication (if specified).
The USD relay complies with ANSI
Standard C37.17 "Trip Devices for AC
and General-Purpose DC Low-Voltage
Power Circuit Breakers".

Three multiple-tap current sensors,
mounted on the breaker provide
power input to the USD relay from the
protected circuit and current signals to
the fault detection logic circuit. A
fourth sensor, can also be ordered

where four-wire ground fault
protection is required. Sensors utilize
high quality grain-oriented silicon steel
alloy cores, and are encapsulated in
POLESTIGLASS to provide moisture
protection and mechanical strength.
Sensor tap setting is shown on the
breaker faceplate by an adjustable
rotatable disc.

Solenoid Trip Device — A
dedicated direct acting solenoid
provides positive activation of the trip
latch on the breaker, and positive
resetting after operation, completes
the trip system.
Pick up levels and time delay
settings are factory programmed and
calibrated in discrete settings for
repetitive accuracy and precision. Cold
plated contacts on the thumbwheel
switches used for selecting settings,
assure long lasting, positive electrical
performance.

ZSIP®

LOCAL AND REMOTE INDICATION

Selectivity between main and feeder
breakers is conventionally obtained by
using time co-ordinated trip devices,
with the device furthest downstream

Local indication is by long-life LED's on
the relay faceplate while remote
indication is facilitated through a set of
dry contacts which can be connected

set for minimum time delay. The

to remote annunciating or alarm

disadvantages of this method is that

devices. 120 volt a.c. 2.5VA control

fault levels increase in zones closer to
the main breaker and the time to clear

power is required.

these faults increases. The power
system must withstand these high fault
current levels until the time delay on
the first device upstream of the fault

/""Spires.
' - With ZSIP® the trip device that
senses a fault in its zone of protection
trips instantaneously, minimizing
system damage.
The USD relay also sends a
restraint signal to all upstream devices
and causes them to operate according
to their time co-ordinated protection
mode, increasing service continuity.
ZSIP® is available on the short time

and ground fault elements of the USD
relay.

GROUND FAULT
WITH ZSIP®

LOCAL AND REMOTE
INDICATION

*Add the following suffixes:
6 for use with CUD 1.5 and CSD-6
sensors

8 for use with CSD-8 sensors
16 for use with CSD-16 sensors
20 for use with CSD-20 sensor
32 for use with CUD-30 and
CUD-32 sensor

40 for use with CUD-40 andCUD-60
sensors

TYPE H-3 BREAKER DATA
30H-3

BREAKER TYPE

MINIMUM ENCLOSURE
WIDTH (INCH)

1 minute withstand 2200

1600/2000 1600/2000 3000/3200 3000/3200 4000

Voltage Ratings
Rated Maximum

Voltage

600/800

INTERRUPTING

TECHNICAL
DATA
SUMMARY

CURRENT

(RMS SYMMETRIC:AL) (1)
WITH INSTANTANEOUS
TRIP

65,000 65,000 65,000 85,000 130,000 130,000
50,000 65,000 50,000 85,000 85,000 85,000
50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 85,000

WITH SHORT TIME
DELAY (2)

50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 85,000
50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 85,000
50,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 85,000 85,000

69,000 96,600 115,000 149,500 115,000 149,500 195,500 195,500

-Closing
(Contact Touch)

.025

.030

-Closing
(Breaker Latched)

-Total Clearing incl.
USD relay
operation time
-Reclosing Time (No
Intentional Time

Delay) (4)
-Motor charging
time

4.0

TEMPERATURE RISE ON

TERMINALS (40°C AMBIENT)

less than 55°C

(1) INTERRUPTING DUTY CYCLE consists,of an opening operation, a15 second interval,

followed by a close-open operation, perANSI Std. C37.50.
. . <
(2) SHORT-TIME DUTY CYCLE consists of 2 —30 cycle intervals with a 15 second period of zero
current between the two periods, perANSI Std. C37.50.

(3) Maximum Arcing Time in critical current range (Range 175-400A) is .035 seconds.
(4) Operating factor for reclosing duty is 100%.

TYPE HL-3 BREAKER DATA*
BREAKER
TYPE

FRAME
SIZE
AMPS

INTERRUPTING
RATING
BREAKER

Ml data for HL-3 is same as corresponding size H-3 air circuit breaker, except for increased
-interrupting capacity.
SPRING CHARGING MOTOR DATA
NOMINAL
VOLTAGE

48 VOLTS
DC

CURRENT REQUIRED
7 amperes

AUXILIARY SWITCH CONTACT RATINGS

10 amperes up to 254V a.c.
1 ampere at 250V d.c.
2 amperes at 125V d.c.
SECONDARY CONTROL CONTACT RATING

30 amperes
CELL SWITCH CONTACT RATING

10 amperes up to 300V a.c.

COIL RATING DATA

TECHNICAL
DATA
SUMMARY

Type Ashunt trip is continuously rated and is used only when acontinuous rated coil for aseparate
trip source is required.

Type Bshunt trip is momentary rated. It is used as the dedicated solenoid for theUSD relay or

earlier SD relay and/or when onlya separate trip coil is required.

USD RELAY SETTINGS
ELEMENT

PICK UP LEVELS IN
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR TAP

INSTANTANEOUS

4X, 5X, 6X, ex, 10X, 12X, OFF (1)

DELAY IN SECONDS

NO INTENTIONAL TIME
DELAY

mode regardless of short
time delay setting.
LONGTIME

.6X, .7X, .8X, .9X,1.0X,1.1X

2.0,4.0,6.0,8.0,
10.0,14,0,16.0,22.0,

26.0,30.0(3)
GROUND FAULT

Catalogue Numbers:
USD-6(IR)-6

.25, .50, .75,1.0,1.5, 2.0

.08, .14, .20, .26, .32,

USD-6 (IR) -8

.25, .50, .75, 1.0,1.25,1.5

.02 in ZSIP® mode

regardless of ground
fault time delay setting.

USD-6 (IR) -16

.20, .30, .40, .50, .60, .70

USD-6 (IR) -20

.20, .25, .30, .40, .50, .60

USD-6 (IR) -32

.20, .22, .24, .28, .32, .36

USD-6 (IR) -40

.20, .22, .24, .26, .28, .30

TEMPERATURE RANGE: The USD relay is
ambient temperature compensated over the
range-20°C to +55°C. Tolerances apply over
this range. Operation outside this range is
possible. Consult Federal Pioneer.
(1) DISCRIMINATOR: When the instantaneous

pick-up switch is in the "OFF" position, the
instantaneous element will not pick up unless
the breaker closes on a fault that exceeds 13X

the sensor tap setting, in wh ich case a
discriminator will initiate tripping. In addition a
trip will be initiated if a fault of 13Xthe sensor
setting, or greater occurs while the breaker

is supplying a load of less than 0.04Xthe sensor
tap setting. If the breaker closes and the cu rrent
is greater than 0.04X,but less than 13Xthe
sensor tap setting, the discriminator monitors
the current for 40ms. and if the fau It level of 13X

is not exceeded during this time, the
discriminator switches itself off.

(2) SHORTTIME Time Delay .55 sec. @6X
(3) LONG TIME
Time Delays shown @ 6X
TOLERANCES: ± 8% on pick up values
± 10% on time delay values
RELAY RESETTIME:

30ms

CURRENT SENSOR SIZES
AND AMPERE TAPS

TECHNICAL
DATA
SUMMARY

SENSOR
TYPE

TAPS
AVAILABLE IN
PRIMARY TAPS

BREAKER
FRAME

600A 30H-3, 42H-3
CUD-1.5 100,150

SENSOR
TYPE

TAPS
AVAILABLE IN
PRIMARY TAPS

800A 30H-3, 42H-3
3000A 50H-3

50H-3, 65H-3
50H-3, 65H-3

800A 30H-3, 42H-3
1600A

CSD-8

75H.3

1200, 2000, 3000 3200A SOH-3

1600A 50H-3, 65H-3
2000A

3200A

CUD-32

50H-3

1600, 2000, 3200 3200A 75H-3
4000A100H-3

50H-3, 65H-3

6000A 100H.2

1600A 50H-3, 65H-3
CSD-16

1000,1200,1600 2000A 50H-3, 65H-3

CUD-40

1600, 3000, 4000 4000A 100H-3
6000A 100H-2

TYPE USD SOLID STATE OVERCURRENT RELAY

TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS
.4

10000

.6.7.8.91

oor>too>o

Low voltage power air circuit breakers
shall be 3 pole 600 volt class with
continuous current ratings and trip
ratings as detailed on the plans.
Interrupting ratings will be in

with enclosure door closed, and shall

be equipped with an interlock to
ensure breaker contacts are open and
closing spring is discharged when
racking tool is inserted. Faceplate

accordance with NEMA Standards for

mounted control buttons, indicators

the frame and/or their application in a
fully rated system. Breakers shall have
double break main contacts, a 3 phase
solid state overload relay and shall be
trip free in operation. A compression
spring stored energy closing
mechanism (either manually or
electrically charged) shall be used for
all ratings, with breakers being closed
by means of a push button and shall
have the ability to close and latch at
interrupting rating at 600 volts. An
emergency manual spring charging
handle shall be supplied for electrically
operated breakers.
Breaker faceplate shall have
"closed-open" indicator, spring

interlocks etc. shall be accessible

"charged-discharged" indicator,
provision to padlock manual charging
handle, provision to lock breaker in
"open" position, and provision to lock
drawout mechanism. Drawout circuit

breakers shall be suitable for 3 position
(connected, test, disconnected) racking

without opening enclosure door.
Electrically operated breakers must
have provision for emergency manual
closing by inserting a special tool
through the faceplate. A control
isolating switch shall be provided on
the faceplate to isolate the supply to
the spring charging motor.
Relay pickup and time delay
settings shall be selected in discrete
factory calibrated values by means of
detent action thumbwheel actuated

switches with gold-plated contacts.
When a solidly-grounded system is
used, the relay shall be equipped with
Zone Selective Intantaneous

Protection feature on short time and

ground fault elements. A direct acting
dedicated solenoid shall be used for

initiating breaker triping.
Breakers shall be Federal Pioneer

Limited Type H-3 or HL-3.

FOR THE CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF

This manual applies to H-3and HL-3 breakers.
For H-2and HL-2 breakers, consult the following instruction
manuals:

For breakers with serial numbers BH consult Instruction
Manual C-3-221-1 dated September 1979.

For breakers with serial numljers TH consult Instruction
Manual C-3-221-1 dated March 1976.

For breakers with serial numbers T consult Instruction

Manual 0-3-414 dated August 1966.
CONTENTS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

PAGE
1

General

Basic Breaker Types
Breaker Description

RECEIVING. HANDLING AND STORAGE

BREAKER OPERATION
Drawout Mounted Breakers

Drawout Racking Mechanism
Fixed Mounted Breakers

Power Terminal Connections

Secondary Control Circuits
Pre-Service Inspection
Manual Closing
Electrical Closing
BREAKER MAINTENANCE

Removing the Faceplate

. 5

Lubrication

. 5

Close Latch Adjustment

. 7

Mechanism Latchingand TripShaft Adjustment
Spring Discharge Interlock

. 9

Shunt Trip
Unden/ollage Trip

.10

Shunt Close

..12

ClosingSpring Charging Motor
Motor ClosingSpring Limit Switch

..13

Latch Check Switch
Contact Maintenance
Main Power Contacts
Contact Differenfial

..14
..14
..14

.10
.11

..12
..13

Main Moving Contact Deflection

Arc Chutes
Overload Protection

Antl-Slngle Phase Deviceand Blown Fuse Indicator..
Secondary Control Contacts

..19

Auxiliary Switch
Mechanical Operations Counter

..19
...19
..19

Mechanical Interlock
Door Interlock

Rejection Features
Lifting Device
Spare Parts

...22
...24

Before placing in service read this Instruction Manual
completely and perform the pre-senrlce Inspection (see
page 4).

GENERAL

Type H-3 and HL-3 power Air Circuit Breakers are
suitable for controlling and protecting low voltage power
circuits up to 250 volts dc and 600 volts ac. They are a
means of safely switching loads and automatically
clearing circuits when abnonnal conditions occur such as
undervoltage, sustained overloads, and short circuits.
The proper INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE and
OPERATION of these breakers is a prime safety
consideration for the protection of personnel and
equipment Reference to this manual and adherence to
its recommendations will enhance the perfomiance of
these breakers under all conditions.

This manual does not purport to cover all details or

variations of equipment nor to provide for every possible

contingency to be met in connection with receiving,
storage, installation, maintenance or operation. Should
further information be required or particular problems

arise which are not covert sufficiently, please refer to
Federal Pioneer Limited.

RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE

Receiving

Immediately upon receipt of the breaker an examination
should be made for damage sustained in transit. If
damage has occurred or there is evidence of rough

handling a claim should be filed immediately with the
transportation company and Federal Pioneer Limited
should be notified. Check all parts against the packing
list to make sure all the correct items have been
received.

Handling and Storage

Lift the breaker by the steel channels at the front and
back. Do not lift by the connecting tenninals, arc chutes,
or operating handle. Check the unit thoroughly to see
that no parts were damaged or forced out of alignment

during shipment. If replacement parts are required, the
manufacturer should be notified promptly. The breaker
should be installed in a clean di^ ventilated area, which
is free from atmospheric contaminants.
Each circuit breaker should be stored In its shipping crate

in an upright position in a clean dry area. Should the unit
get wet, it must be thoroughly dried out using forced
warrn air over an extended period until "infinite" readings
BASIC BREAKER TYPES

Type H-3 breakers are available mounted in a drawout
cradle with disconnecting primary power and secondary
control contacts. Alternativelya stationary fixed mounting
in a suitable enclosure can be provided.

These breakers are provided with either a manually

operated handleor an electric motor forcompressing the

are obtained using a 600 volt megger.
BREAKER OPERATION

DRAWOUT MOUNTED BREAKERS

Switchgear assemblies for drawout mounted breakers
are provided with supporting rails, main power contacts

closing spring.

and secondary contacts to mate with those on the

HL-3 type breakers are available in the drawout version
only, either manually or electrically operated. HL-3 type

Drawout Racking Mechanism

breakers are similar to the H-3 type but in addition have

high rupturing capacityfuses mounted on the lineside on
a frame extension at the rear of the unit.

BREAKER DESCRIPTION

The three main functional components of a breaker are

its mechanism, the conducive members and the
interrupting devices.
The mechanism unit is designed to receive energy, store

it, and deliver it to close the breaker contacts when

required. Upon activation of the trip device, the
mechanism must allow the contacts to open regardless
of the state of the mechanism, that is the breaker
mechanism is "TRIP FREE".

The conductive members are assembled on a moulded

base of fiberglass reinforced polyester. Individual pole
pieces carefully interlocked together and supported by a
steel frame provide the mechanical support and insulat
ing structure required. The conductive members com
prise the main power contacts (drawout mounting) or
lugs (fixed mounting), the main fixed contacts and the
main moving bridge contacts.

breakers when it is racked into position.

An interlock is provided which will ensure thatthe unit is
open and the main spring is discharged when itis either
engaging or disengaging the main disconnecting con
tacts. A block is provided on the racking mechanism
which operates in conjunction with the gate interlock
lever over the racking opening. Before withdrawing
electrically operated breakers tum off the motor isolating
switch on the faceplate. To withdraw the unit, move the

gate over the crank opening down so as to expose the

socket end of the drawout racking shaft This action will

first open the unit if it is closed and then discharge the
main spring if it is charged.The racking handlemay now
be inserted in the racking shaft socket and by
counter-clockwise rotation the unit will move outward.

At the "test" position the main contacts are withdrawn
but the auxiliary contacts remain engaged in the test
position.

Further turns of the racking handle will move the unit to

the "disconnected" position. It is then free to be pulled
manually forward to the end ofthe tracks. Two lifting lugs
are provided on each side of the unit so that it can be
lifted clear of the tracks. Lifting yokes are available from
the manufacturer. (Fig. 32).

Grounding continuity is established Vb inch (3.2 mm)
before the secondary control contacts are energized. Itis
maintained throughout breaker positioning in the enclo

The interrupting devices are the fixed and moving ardng

sure until the secondary control contacts have been

contacts and the arc chutes.

de-energized by Ve inch (3.2 mm). Grounding continuity

In addition to these main functional components the
breaker is available with overload protection and other
accessories and interlocking devices.

is established when the moving ground contact on the
breaker mates with the stationary ground contact located
on the frame of the breaker enclosure.

Page 1

PART NUMBERS AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (DRAWOUT)
FIGURE 1
SECTION OF K-3 BREAKER

1. Arc Chute Assembly

41A-504D

2. Intemliase Barrier

5. Front Flash Shield

9. Crank Box Bearings

10. Holding Pawl
11. Ratchet Wheel

35A-508

12. Osciilating Lever

14. Charged-Dlscharged Link
15. Closed-Open Button
16. Charged-Oischarged Button

19. Faceplate Box Assembly

24A-8

20. Floating Trim
21. Faceplate Assembly

22. Handle Assembly
23. Close Lever
24. Close Latch

35A-509

35A-S09

35A-509

25. Trip Rod Assembly

224B-124A-1

26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.

Spring Guide Pin
Closing Casting
Closing Pin
Tie Rod Assembly
Closing Shaft
Mani Spring
Guide Bushkigs
Clamp Assembly

Trip Shaft
Trip Latch
Latch Bearing
Ixjwer Moulding
Sensor Mounting Bracket

182A-24(-25)
CSD-6(-8)

43. Centre Statlonarv Main Contact
44. Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assy)

45. Upper Stationary Main Contact

46. Closing Link Assembly

Wafer Contact Spring
Spring Holder
Moving Arcing Ck>ntact
Stationary Arcing Contact

53. Anti-Bounce Plate

56. Trip Coll Assembly
57. Lower Channel

59. Orawout Contact Assembly

62. Lower Flash Shield

45. Uppsr Stdtionary Main Contact

SECTION OF H-3 BREAKER

Page 3

Except for the mounting the following instructions for

6. Close and open the unit several times to ensure

mounted breakers.

correct operation. Interlocks should be defeated or be in
normal release position, if an undervoltage trip unit is

FIXED MOUNTED BREAKERS

mechanism will pick up the contacts, and thus avoid
discharging the mechanism without its normal contact

fixed mounted breakers equally apply to drawout

H-3 and HL-3 circuit breakers should be mounted in
sheet steel enclosures in accordance with recommended

dimensions. The mounting support should be a rigid
structure able to withstand the impact caused by the

switching operations, without any distortion and undue
vibration of the mechanism.

POWER TERMINAL CONNECTIONS

attached hold it down manually so the spring closing
spring load.

7. Manually activate the tripping devices to estaJjIish that
they are operable. These devices include manual trip
Rg. 2, spring discharge lever Rg. 9, shunt trip Rg. 11
and 12, and undervoltage trip Rg. 13.
8. Check all cable connections to ensure that they are
tight.

9. The electrical operation of drawout breakers shouldbe
checked in the "test" position.

The H-3 and HL-3 terminals are silver plated for

maximum joint efficiency and cable connectors must be
clean and free from dents or burrs, and bolted securely

to the terminals. Poor joints lead to over-heating and
subsequent contact deteriorafion, and an eventual
failure. Cables or bus connections should be properly

supported so as not to transfer any unnecessary
mechanical or short circuit stress to the terminals. Any

strain which may have no apparent effect initially may
after prolonged periods of vibration and shock from
normal operation, cause poor contact alignment.

Manual Closing

The closing mechanism compresses a mainspringwhich
is held compressed until released. The handle is rotated
counter-clockwise to the vertical position and pushed In

to engage the clutch. Rotating the handle ISO" clockwise
fully chargesthe spring and as the internal crankpasses
through top-dead-centre, rotation is stopped, and held by

Meter shunts, resistors, and similar devices which

the close release latch. Operation of tftis latch by means
of the close push button Rg. 2 in the faceplate releases
the spring energy to close the breaker. A multi-tooth
ratchet wheel prevents recoil and permits the spring

operateat relatively high temperature should be mounted
awayfrom the circuit breakerso they do not contribute to

charging to be performed in sevet^ short strokes if
desired. On frame sizes 1600 amperes and above, the

the heating of the unit.

handle is a pull-out extension typeforease of operation.
Electrical Closing

SECONDARY CONTROL CIRCUITS

Control circuit wiring, where applicable, should be made
in strict accordance with detailed wiring diagrams. Wiring
connections, which are made to terminal blocks should
be run in a supported and protected manner, so control
wiring cannot come into contact with the primary
connections.

On all electrically operated units the motor charges the
spring unit the close release latch engages. The close
latch Is operated by a solenoid energized from the push
button in the faceplate. Fig. 2 or by a remote button. The
closing stroke then follows in a similar manner to that of
the manual type described above. A removable handle is
provided to permit manual charging of the spring. A
mechanical close button similar to that on the manually

operated unitis not Included. Emergency operationof the
PRE-SERVICE INSPECTION

close release latch is accomplished by insertion of a pin

Read this instruction manual completely and inspect and

through a small aperture in the faceplate. Fig. 2. A
suitable pin is provided in the upper end of the manual

check the unit in accordance with this manual.

charging handle.

The following itemsshouldbe specifically checked.

BREAKER MAINTENANCE

1. Make a visual Inspection after installation to ensure

that no parts have been damaged or forced out of

The safe and successful operation of connected ap

alignment.

paratus depends uponthe proper operation of the circuit

2. Check the door interlock lever for freedom of

and inspection. ITie following points require special

movement, when supplied. (Fig. 27).
3. Check the main and drawout contacts to see that they

are clean and free from foreign material.

4. Check all the control wiring to ensure that it has not
been damaged or moved during the installation.

5. Check the single phase protection (when supplied) by

breaker. Therefore, it must have regular, systematic care
attention.

1. Beforeinspectingor repairing the H-3 or HL-3 be sure
it is disconnected from any electric power, either high
voltage or control voltage. Also check that the main
spring is discharged. If the breaker is electrically
operated,turnthe motor isolating switch on the faceplate

to the "off" position before tripping the unit to prevent the '

manually raising each tripping plunger in turn on the
threetripping coils, Rg. 24. If the unit is closed, itshould
trip and the correct indicator should show on the

2. Inspect the operating mechanism periodically and

faceplate. (Rg. 2).

keep It clean.

Page 4

motor from recharging the spring. (Fig. 2).

FIGURE 2(A)
FACEPLATE FOR ELECTRICALLY OPERATED

FIGURE 2(B)
FACEPLATE FOR MANUALLY OPERATED

LEGEND

1. Open-Closed indicator
2. Front Plate

3.
4.
5.
6.

Floating Trim
Spring Charged-Discharged indicator
Mechanical Operations Counter
Emergency Manual Close

9. Gate for Drawout Crank

10. Manual Trip
11. Sensor Tap Setting indication
12. Rating Plate
13. Electrical Control ButtOTis
14. Motor Cut-Off Svfltch

7. Close Button

15. Single Phase indicator and Reset

8. Key Interlock

16. Overload Lockout Reset

REMOVING THE FACEPLATE (Fig. 2)

MANUALLY OPERATED MECHANISM

(Ref. Fig. 3).
First remove the four oval head screws located at the

corners of the faceplate and remove the faceplate and
trim. The four mounting screws located at the base of the
enclosure may now be removed and the enclosure
withdrawn. When replacing the faceplate and trim it is
important that the bevelled edge of the trim be positioned
on the side nearest the enclosure door hinge.

OIL-SAE 30

1. Alllinkage pivots within the mechanism compartment.
2. Allclosing shaft bearings.
3. Holding pawl pivot (located within the faceplate
enclosure-upper left hand corner).
4. Close latch pivot (located below the main ratchet
wheel).

LUBRICATION

Grease-Lubrlplate Lo-Temp.
1. Spring guide pin (located at the lower end of the

H-3 breakers have been tested for mechanical endur

ance to the prescribed numl>er of operations by ANSI

closing spring).
2. Ratchet wheel teeth.

standards without lubrication during the tests. No seizing
of the mechanism occurred and the breakers were still

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED MECHANISM

operational. In service It Is possible to encounter dust,
corrosive atmospheres and other adverse conditions
which may Impair proper operation. Therefore, we
consider It prudent to lubricate and dean breakers
periodically. ANSI standards recommend lubrication and

(Ref. Fig. 3).

sen/icing to be carried out at the following periods.
In frame sizes 600 and 800 amps this inten/al Is 1750
operations, In sizes 1600 and 2000 amps the Interval Is
500 operations, and in sizes 3000 amps and atxive, 250
operations. The following points should receive attention:

Oil-SAE30

1. All linkage pivots within the mechanism compartment
2. All closing shaft bearings.
3. Holding pawl pivot (located within the faceplate
enclosure-upper left hand corner).
4. Motor limit switch lever pivot (located with the front
channel - left hand corner).
5. Close latch pivot (located below the main ratchet
v^eel).

Page 5

FIGURES

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED LUBRICATION

Grease-Lubriplate Lo-Temp.
FIGURES

MANUALLY OPERATED
LUBRICATION

1. Spring guide pin (located at (he lower end of the
closing spring).
2. Ratchet wheel teeth.
3. Front face of the ratchet wheel.

4. Oscillating lever - right hand end (at the motor
drive cam).
5. Driving pawl pivot and springs (located on left hand
end of the closing spring.)

CLOSE LATCH ADJUSTMENT (Figs. 6(A) and 6(B))
The function of the close latch is to arrest or hold the

ratchet wheel at a point 13 degrees past top-deadcentre. with the spring fully charged in readiness to
close. The closing stroke is initiated by release of the
latch, either manually by means of the mechanical push

button in the faceplate or electrically by means of the
close solenoid. Insuffident engagement of the latch may

allow the closing stroke to occur at completion of the
charging of the spring.
Referring to figure 6(A), the adjusbnent procedure for the
upper stopscrew is as follows.
The ratchet wheel assembly (Item 1) is made up of two

m
^ IL

plates riveted together. The two plates are held apart by
spacers located between the plates on the four rivets.
Rotate the ratchet wheel until one of the spacers on a
rivet is directly above the nose of the close latch (Item 2).
Loosen locknut (Item 3). Turning the stopscrew (Item 4)
counter-clockwise adjusts the dose latch up. Adjust the
close latch height until there is approximately Vaz inch
(0.8 mm) clearance between the spacer and the nose of
the close latch. Tighten the locknut securely.
Referring to figure 6(B). the adjustment procedure for the
lower stopscrew is as follows. Be sure that the main
spring is discharged and that the main contacts are
open. Loosen locknut (Item 5). Manually depress the
close latch (Item 2) until it stops on the lower stopscrew
(Item 6). Adjust the close latch height until there is
approximately Vsa inch (0.8 mm) clearance between the
bottom of the teeth on the ratchet wheel and nose of the

close latch. Tighten the locknut securely.
LINKAGE

X — Oil - SAE 30
Y — Grease - Lubripiate

FIGURE 4

MANUALLY OPERATED
1. Ratchet Wheel

2. Holding Pawl
3. Close Latch

4. Auxiliary Switch
5. Spring Guide Pin
6. Solid State Overcurrent Relay

m.
Page 7

FIGURES

ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
1. Ratchet Wheel

2. Holding Pawl
3. Oscillating Lever
4. Close Latdi
5. Shunt Close
6. Motor

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Auxiliary Switch
Spring Limit Sviritch
Spring Guide Pin
Solid State Overcurrent Relay
Anti-Single Phase Device and
Blown Fuse Indicator

FIGURE 6(A)

CLOSE LATCH ADJUSTMENT
1. Ratchet Wheel

2. Close Latch

3. Upper Lockout
4. Upper Stopscrew
5. Lower Lockout

6. Lower Stopscrew

FIGURE 6(B)

FIGURES

MECHANISM LATCHING AND TRIP SHAFT
ADJUSTMENT

TRIP SHAFT ADJUSTMENT

Misadjustment of latching results in failure to close, but It
does not prevent the closing spring from being compres
sed and discharged for closure.
S

There are 3 possible causes of improper latching:
A) On units equipped with an overload lockout or single
phase dewce, failure to manually reset the device after it
has operated, will prevent latching and the discharge of
the closing spring will not move the main contacts.

B) Misadjustment of the main linkage will prevent
latching with the same result as above. This adjustment
controls the engagement of the trip roller with the trip
shaft, and also the position of the toggle pin when the
main contacts are in the closed position.

':4 y

C) Insufficient overlap of the latch roller with the trip cam
secured to the trip shaft. This condition will cause the

moving contacts to pick up slightly and drop back to fully
open position when the closing spring is discharged.
To correct A — Push manual reset lever. (Fig. 2).

To correct B — Linkage adjustment must be made.(Fig.
7).

1. Locknut

This adjustment is accomplished by means of an

2. Adjusting Screw

eccentric bolt accessible from the right hand side of the

To proceed, isolate the breaker for servicing. Remove

mechanism compartment. This eccentric moves the

the arc chutes, front flash shield, interphase barriers,

toggle pin (Item 5) relative to the slop in the sides of the

faceplate assembly, and faceplate box assembly. Be
sure the main contacts are open and the main spring Is

mechanism compartment.

discharged.
s

FIGURE?

LINKAGE ECCENTRIC ADJUSTMENT

To ensure the main spring is completely discharged, a
manual charging handle must be used to remove any
spring force on the holding pawl, and driving pawl in the
case of electrically operated breakers. Lift the holding
and driving pawl away from the ratchet wheel. Releasing
the manual charging handle now allows the main spring
to completely discharge, with the crank assembly going
to the bottom dead centre position, and the spring guide
to its lowest point of travel.

Next remove the eccentric locking plate (Item 3). Rotate
the eccentric bolt clockwise until the closing casting (Item

/oV^
I„

l(o)l @
1. Spring Guide Pin
2. Main Spring Clamp
3. Locking Plate
4. Eccentric

5. Toggle Pin
6. Connecting Link
7. Closing Casting

7) pushes the closing pin to within 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
away from the stops in the mechanism sideplates. This
can be seen by viewing the mechanism sideplates from
^ove. The locking plate should now be replaced,
locating it to the nearest notch. Tighten the retainer nut
firmly. In this operation, two wrenches should be used —
one holding the head of the bolt at the left hand side —
the other tightening the nut at the right hand side.
To check the adjustment, close the main contacts. The
closing pin should be against the stops inthe mechanism
sideplate. If it is not, proceed as follows.
With the main spring discharged and the main contacts

open, remove the eccentric locking plate. Rotate the
eccentric bolt clockwise an amount required to locate it in
the next notch of the locking plate. The locking plate

should now be replaced and the retainer nut firmly
tightened. Return to the checking procedure above.

8. Stop in Mechanism Sideplates

To correct C-Latch roller engagement adjustment must

9. Mechanism Sideplate

be made.

Page 9

FIGURE 10

This adjustment, located on the left hand side of the
mechanism compartment, controls the engagement of
the trip shaft to the latch roller. If this engagement Is

ECCENTRIC ADJUSTMENT

insufficient, the roiier may release during the dosing

stroke, resulting in faiiure to close. The main contacts wiii
appear to move but not compiete the travel.

To adjust, the following procedure should be used. With
reference to Rg. 8 loosen iocknut (item 1) and turn
adjusting screw (item 2) counter-clockvrtse two turns.
Close the breaker and slowly turn the screw clockwise
until the unit trips. Now turn Ihe screw counter-clocdcwise
one and one quarter turns and tighten the iocknut.
•-1/52 IN.

NOTE: Whenever this adjustment is made the following
should be checked if present on the breaker.

(•6mm)

SEE DETAtL W

1. Latch Check Switch setting on electrically operated
breakers (Rg. 16).

2. Shunt Trip Type B striker rod adjustment (Fig. 12).
3. Undervoitage trip striker adjustment (Rg. 13).
4. Drawout gate interlock lever eccentric adjustment on
drawout breakers (Fig. 10).

1. Lockout

2. Gap Screw
3. Eccentric

SPRING DISCHARGE INTERLOCK

4. Flipper

Drawout mounted breakers are fitted vrith a gate interlock
to prevent the breaker being withdrawn while the unit is
dosed or the main spring is charged. Depressing the
gate interlock down to expose the drawout crank opening
first trips the breaker then discharges the main closing
spring.
It should be noted that "empty" discharges of the closing
spring stress the mechanism to a slightly greater extent
than on normal closure. For this reason it is advisable to

avoid additional intentional discharges to those which
occur when the breaker is withdrawn and the spring is
still charged.

drawout lever acting on the close button lever. Fig. 9.

SPRING DISCHARGE LEVER
-

Adjustment of the drawout gale interlock lever is
performed as follows. Be sure the trip shaft is rotated
down so the left hand flipper is resting against the
adjusting screw. Be sure the drawout lever is lifted to its
upward position. With reference to Fig. 10 loosen Iocknut
(Item 1) and alien head cap screw (Item 2). Using a
wrench, rotate eccentric (item 3) until the clearance
between the eccentric and right hand flipper (Item 4) on ^
flie trip shaft is approximately 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Holding the eccentric in position with wrench, tighten
alien screw securely. Tighten iocknut securely.
Discharging the main spring is accomplished by the

The lever arrangement requires no adjustment. Depres
sing the drawout lever activates the closing latch which
discharges the m^n spring. This action results in failure
to close, but discharge of the main spring.
Whenever trip shaft adjustment is perfoimed (Fig. 8), the
drawout gate interlock lever adjustment should be
checked.
SHUNT TOIP

Two types of shunt trip units are available for use on ail
H-3 and HL-3 breakers each having specific performance
features.

The two types are described as follows;—

TYPEA(Rg.ll)
This unit consists of a rectangular laminated solenoid
frame, mounted on the left hand side of the mechanism

1 1

and acting directly on die trip shaft. When used on typical
120 volt ac control, the coil has a continuous rating, with
a holding current of only 340 miiiiamperes. This makes

possible use of this trip unit without the conventional /

1. Closing Latch
2. Spring Discharge Interlock Lever

Page 10

normally open auxiliary switch contact in series with the
coil. When used in conjunction with a typical latchingtype ground fault relay the breaker is locked out and wiii

be totally trip-free until the relay has been reset Any

attempt to reclose the breaker before resetting the relay
will preclude a restriking of the ground fault. No

FIGURE 12
SHUNT TRIP TYPEB

adjustment is required on this device and the only
attention needed is that of ensuring that the plunger is

free of any binding or friction. This unit is capable of

:.f y-«4ripping at 50% of the rated voltage.
TypeB(Fig.12)
This is a cylindrical solenoid mounted within the

mechanism compartment at the lower rear and acting
directly on the trip shaft. Unlike the Type A unit, it is not

continuously rated and for any application a normally
open auxiliary switch contact must be used. In the 120
volt ac application the Type B uriit is equivalent in
performance to the Type A device (i.e. will operate at
50% of rated voltage) but in the 125 volt do rating,
tripping can be perfomied at levels as low as 25% of
nominal rating. One adjustment is provided in the Type B
trip unit to control the extent of free travel between the
plungerand the trip shaft lever. By lifting the plungeruntil
the striker rod is lightly touching the trip shaft lever a
space of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) should exist between the
end of the plunger and the stop plate as shown in Figure

1. Plunger
2. Stop Plate
3. Mechanism Sideplate

4. Shunt Trip (Separate Trip Source)

12.

If adjustment is required, loosen the 8-32 socket head

5. Shunt Trip (USD Relay Trip Source)

screw located at the bottom end of the plunger and turn

the striker rod within the plunger as required. Retighten

the set screw. If trip shaft adjustment (Fig. 8) is altered at

any time, this striker rod adjustment should be checked.
The shunt trip is identified on the wiring diagram by the
symtrol "TC".

^'''^^oth units can be installed on one breaker. With regard
_ to use, the following rules are usually adhered to:

1. A Type B is used where only a separate trip coil is
required.

2. With USD relay, a Type B is used between the
mechanism sideplaies to operate wiUi the relay, and

possibly a Type B mounted outside the left hand
mechanism sideplate to be used as a separate trip
coil.

3. A Type A. mounted only outside the left hand
mechanism sideplate, is used only when a continuous
rated coil for a separate tripsource is required.

4. Type Aand Type Bused in conjunction with the USD
relaycan both be used on the same unit.
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP (Fig. 13)

FIGURE 11

The Undervoltage Trip is a spring operated unitmounted

SHUNT TRIP TYPE A

on the left hand side of the main mechanism compart

ment and acting directly on the trip shaft. In operation
two springs are held in compression by a rectangular
solenoid.
•

Normally supplied in the 120 volt ac rating, the solenoid
has a holding currentof 340 milliamperes, with an inrush
of 2.45 amperes. A mechanical escapement time delay
attachment is available which provides a delay adjusta
ble from 0 to 5 seconds.

•mo.,-

An adjustable striker (Item 1) is provided to control the
engagement of the solenoid plunger to the trip shaft.
With the solenoid energized and the plunger seated,

adjust the striker as required to provide a gap of 5/16
inch (8 mm) between the striker and the trip shaft lever.
Tighten locknut firmly. If at any time the trip shaft
adjustment (Fig. 8) has been altered the undervoltage
striker adjusUnent should be checked.

A vernier time adjustment in the form of an eccentric is
provided for fine adjustment, independent of the scale
setting. If trimming is required, loosen the locknut located
on the inside of the lever and turn the eccentric
counter-clockwise to increase time, and clockwise to
1. Mechanism Sideplate
2. ShuntTripTypeA

shorten time. The locknut must be firmly tightened each
time the eccentric is moved.

Page 11

No adjustment is required on this unit and the only

FIGURE 13

attention needed is that of ensuring that the plunger is

UNDERVOLTAGETRIP

free of any binding or friction. The device is capable of
operating at 75% of rated voltage.

(3 - 0

•

The shunt close is identified on the wiring diagram by the
symbol "CC".
CLOSING SPRING CHARGING MOTOR

All electrically operated units employ a series-wound
gear motor, suitable for operation on alternating or direct
current, '''he reduction gear compartment is sealed and
' -

lubricated for life and the armature bearing similarly

requires no maintenance lubrication. The basic motor is
available in voltage ratings 48, 120,250 dc and 120, 240
ac. In all alternating current applications above 240V a

step down control transformer is used in conjunction with
the 120 volt motor.

A toggle switch mounted in the faceplate permits the
motor to be de-energized during maintenance or
inspection. (Fig. 2).
'

••

1. Striker

2. Trip Shaft Lever
3. Timer

4. Vernier Time Adjustment

Preferred control circuitry permits spring charging to take
place after the breaker has tripped only. While a unit can
be supplied to charge after close, this should be used
only in applications requiring high speed reclosing.
Unless otherwise specified all units are supplied to
operate in the "charge after trip" sequence.
The charging motor is identified on the wiring diagram by
the symbol "M".

FIGURE 14

In operation, the undervoltage trip has a dropout of

SHUNT CLOSE

35% of rated voltage for 120 V. a.c. and 46% of rated
voltage for 240 V. a.c. Both have a pull-in of 85% rated
voltage and are identified on the wiring diagram by the
syml5ol "27".
SHUNT CLOSE (Fig. 14)

This accessory is supplied on electrically operated circuit
breakers and consists of a rectangular laminated
solenoid frame, similar to the Type A shunt trip device. It
is mounted within the front mechanism compartment,
and its function is that of actuating the close latch to

initiate the closing stroke. It may be energized by the
normally open push button in the faceplate or by a
remote push button. In ac ratings the coil is inherently
continuously rated and in the typical 120 volt application
the holding current is 340 milliamps, with an inrush of
2.45 amperes. For dc operation a holding resistor in
conjunction with a plunger operated limit switch again
provides a continuous rating.
The shunt close unit is fitted with an independent

normally closed limit switch, operated by the solenoid
plunger. This switch is connected in series with the
spring charging motor and serves to render the motor
inoperative while the solenoid is energized. Used in
conjunction with the conventional "charge after trip"
motor operation, this performs the duties of an anti-pump
relay. The breaker will not reclose because the spring is
retained in a discharged condition. Only when the close
signal is removed will the motor operate to charge the
spring.

Page 12

1. Shunt Close Coil

2. Independent Normally Closed Limit Switch

To remove the motor, first remove the bracket assembly
from the frame channel, noting the number of shims at
the top and iDOttom faces of the motor bracket. The drive
cam and outboard bearing should then be removed. The
drive cam Is threaded to the motor output shaft and can
be readily released by a light tap in the counter-clockwise
direction. Remove the hex head bolt holding the front
bracket to the motor. Next, remove the mounting screws

at the end opposite to the drive and motor housing can
be withdrawn from the rear bracket. When replacing the
motor bracket assembly in the channel, replace the
shims as originally installed. Do not tighten the hex head
bolt holding the front bracket to the motor until the
screws holding the motor brackets in the front channel
have been tightened securely.

MOTOR CLOSING SPRING LIMIT SWITCH (Fig. 15}

fe(h® (4

All electrically operated M-3 and HL-3 units are equipped
with a limit switch which stops the motor at the end of the
charging stroke. The switch Is mounted In the left hand
end of the front channel. The switch is coupled with a
lever actuator to a cam located on the rear of the crank

assembly. As the crank passes through top-dead-centre
and the ratchet wheel bearing approaches the close
latch, the lever actuator moves to operate the switch and
de-energize the motor. The lever actuator is reset when
the main spring discharges. No adjustment Is required for
the motor closing spring limit switch.
LATCH CHECK SWITCH (Fig. 16)
The latch check switch is provided on electrically

operated units to prevent any attempted electrical close
until the trip shaft is completely reset and seated in
readiness to close. The switch is connected in series with

the shunt close solenoid and prevents operation of the
solenoid until the trip shaft is fully seated. Failure of the
trip shaft to be completely reset at the beginning of the
close stroke will result in a trip free operation. This
malfunction can occur In

1. Latch Check Switch
2. Pivot Screw
3. Lock Screw

4. Mounting Plate
5. Trip Shaft Lever
With reference to Fig. 16, adjustment of the latch check
switch is performed as follows: With the circuit breaker

open, loosen pivot screw (Item 2) and lock screw
(Item 3). By lowering mounting plate (Item 4) at the front
end, engage the switch roller to trip shaft lever (Item 5)
until the lever just begins to lift. From this reference point,
raise the front end of the mounting plate 1/16 inch (1.6
mm) and tighten both pivot and lock screws firmly.

transfer switch installations

where one circuit breaker is mechanically interlocked
with its companion, and a signal to close enters before
the trip shaft has fully returned to its stop. A key interlock
or any form of mechanical lockout presents the same set
of conditions.

In normal operation the latch check switch should require
no readjustment, but if at any time the trip shaft
adjustment (Fig. 8) is altered, the latch check switch
setting should be checked as above. This device Is
Identified on the wiring diagram by Uie symbol "LCS".

1. Cam

2. SLS Lever Actuator

3. Spring Limit Swritch

FIGURE 15

MOTOR CLOSING SPRING LIMIT SWITCH

Page 13

CONTACT MAINTENANCE

Examine the main breaker contacts (and disconnecting

MAIN MOVING CONTACT DEFLECTION

At intervals as recommended by ANSI standards (see

contacts on drawout mounting breakers) frequently to
see that they are properly aligned and that the contact

paragraph on Lubrication), the deflection of the main
moving contacts should be checked. The deflection

surfaces bear with firm uniform pressure.

should be maintained between the limits of 3/64 to 4/64

The contact surfaces of all types of disconnecting or

interrupting devices must be kept clean and bright to
ensure maximum operating efficiency. Contact surfaces
which are corroded by contaminated atmospheres will
cause overheating and subsequent failure of the device.
The alloy contacts of the type H-3 and HL-3 will resist
contamination to a great degree but in areas where
sulphur is present or other chemicals which readily
combine with silver, regular maintenance is required to

inches (1.2 to 1.6 mm) for 600, 800, 1600, and 2000
ampere frame sizes, and 2/64 to 3/64 inches (0.8 to 1.2
mm) for 3000, 3200, and 4000 ampere frame sizes. A
gauge is available for measuring purposes which carries
a scale graduated in 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) divisions. For
the 1600 amp and larger frames use Gauge Number
96A-500, and for the 600 and 800 amp frame use Gauge
Number 96A-501.

With the circuit breaker open establish the starting or

See that bolts, nuts, washers, clips and ail terminal
connections are in place and tight, espedaiiy after
completion of any maintenance work.

"zero" point for each main moving contact assembly.
Applythe gauge to the left hand side as shown in Figure
20 (A) and note the position of the pointer. To assist in
positioning the gauge the pointer should be moved
fonivard or "up scale" then released to allow the indicator

When abnormal conditions exist, such as salt deposits,

pins to locate as shown.

cement dust or add fumes the breaker should be

With the circuit breaker closed again apply the gauge as

ensure contact efficiency.

cleaned at regular intervals. This will prevent fiashovers
caused by the accumulation of foreign substances.

shown in Figure 20(B), and note the position of the
pointer. The number of divisions the pointer has moved
from "zero" position indicates the amount of main
contact deflection, each division representing 1/64 inch

MAIN POWER CONTACTS

(0.4 mm) deflection.

Main contacts are silver alloy and should be dean, bright

When adjustment is required, proceed as shown in
Figure 21. Using any suitable blocking device, position
the moving contact members toward the closed position
as shown and loosen capscrews (Item 1). Shims (Item 2)
are added as required to restore deflection to within the
limits stated above. After shims are added, it is important
that the capscrews be finnly tightened before closing the

and free from pitting. They may be gently sanded if
necessary using a fine emery to remove pit marks. Avoid
having particles fail into the mechanism, and wipe
contacts clean with doth after sanding.

If the main contacts are severely damaged make a

careful inspection of ail current carrying parts. Supporting
pins, linkage, and especially springs should be examined
for damage due to excess heat. Annealed or distorted
parts should be replaced. Before attempting this, consult

unit in the normal manner.

A supply of shims is included with tire gauges.

the manufacturer.

FIGURE 17

CONTACT DIFFERENTIAL ADJUSTMENT

CONTACT DIFFERENTIAL (Fig. 17 and 18)
At intervals as recommended by ANSI standards (see

paragraph on Lubrication), the differential between the
main and arcing contacts should be checked. The

y-® (SK

differential should be maintained between the limits of

0.050 to 0.065 inches (1.3 to 1.6 mm). Using the slow
close device (Fig. 16 (A)) close the contacts until the
moving arcing contact touches the stationary arcing
contact (Fig. 16 (B)). A gap of 0.050 to 0.065 inches (1.3
to 1.6 mm) between the main moving wafer contacts and
the main upper fixed contact should exist The gap is
checked using a feeler gauge. If adjustment is neces
sary, shims (Fig. 17, Item 4) are placed between the
stationary arcing contacts and the main upper fixed
contact. This is done by removing the stationary arcing
contacts. Shims are available from the manufacturer

(Part Number 241A-500).

Note that it is not important nor necessary that the arcing
contacts touch simultaneously. The differential should be
measured on each pole by closing the contacts until the
arcing contacts touch on the pole being measured.
Contact differential should always be checked before
main moving contact deflection.

Page 14

V4-20XVa Inch Long Hex Bolt and Lockwasher
V4-20 Hex Nut and Lockwasher

V4-20 X1 inch Long Hex Boltand Lockwasher
Shim

V4-20 X=»/4 Inch Long Hex Boltand Lockwasher

FIGURE 18(A)
SLOW CLOSE DEVICE

1. Closing Shaft Lever
2. Slow Close Device

FIGURE 18(B)
SLOW CLOSE DEVICE

1. Closing Shaft Lever
2. Slow Close Device

3. Feeler Gauge

SLOW CLOSE DEVICE

removing the two 1/4-20 hex-head bolls on each side of

A slow dose maintenance device is available which can
be attached to the drcuit breaker to permit slow

the chute. The chutes mate with the upper base and can
be lifted clear to expose the ardng contacts. A lower
flash shield mountedto the upper stationarymaincontact

operation of the contacts and closing mechanism. The
device is available from the manufacturer, FPE Part No.

115G-514. As shown in Rgures 18 (A) and 18 (B) the
tool is attached to one of the lever arms of the dosing

shaft The slow dose device requires no attaching bolts

below the stationary contact can also be removed to

expose the silver contact surfaces of the main contacts.

This shield protects the main contacts during arc/'^S,
interruption.

The arc chute may discolour from arc interruption but will
not need replacement unless heavy deposits of arc
material are present or parts are distortedor cracked.

and can be installed and removed with ease.

ARCING CONTACTS (Fig. 17)

Arcing contacts are subjected to pitting every time the
circuit breaker interrupts currentand shouldbe inspected
at regular inten/als if the unit is operated frequently. They
should always be inspected after the breaker has
interrupted a short circuit and should be replaced If they
are showing serious pitting and loss of contact material.
To remove the fixed ardng contacts from the drcuit
breaker take out the two hex-head machine screws (Item
5) at the base of each fixed contact

To remove the moving arcing contacts simply take out
the two hex-head machine screws which hold each

contact in the assembly. Note that the braid is attached
to the contad by the lower hex-head screw (Item 3).
Remove the nut and lockwasher (Item 2) at the rear of
the assembly first before removing this lower screw.
When repladng, tighten the lower screw (Item 3) firmly to
attach the braid to the moving ardng contact before
replacing the lockwasher and nut (Item 2) at the rear of
the assembly.

When repladng ardng contacts, be sure to retrieve ail
hardware Items and assemble as originally installed.
Whenever repladng ardng contacts inspect the braids
and replace them if they are discoloured or strands are
broken.
ARC CHUTES

The arc chutes are made of fiberglass reinforced

polyestermaterial. They may be removed individually by

OVERLOAD PROTECTION (Fig. 22)

Type H-3 and HL-3 breakers are normally supplied with
solid state overload protection. The solid state overcurrent trip system protects low voltage power systems

against damage caused by overloads and faults. The
types of protection offeredare overload,short drcuit and
ground fault. Zone selective instantaneous protection
(ZSIP) is also available.

The trip unit operates to open a low voltage circuit
breaker In accordance with a set of programmable
time-current characteristics. Tripping energy for the

operation of the circuit breaker is obtained solely from
the drcuit being protected. Other power sources are not
required, except for fault indication.

The complete solid state overcurrent trip system consists
of the primary current sensors, the overload relay, and
the direct acting shunt trip solenoid. Each sensor is
available with changeable tap settings to suit the rating of
the breaker. Note — Sensor tap settings must not be

changed while power is flowing through the breaker.
When the sensor tap settings are altered, the sensor tap
setting indication on the breaker faceplate (Rg. 2) should
also be changed. Turning the screw to the right of the
Indication rotates a dial behind the rating plate until the
correct tap setting indication is given.
The direct acting shunt trip solenoid Is a Type B shunt
trip, mounted between the mechanism sidb-

DEFLECTION GAUGE

FIGURE 19

MOVING CONTACT DEFLECTION

MOVING CONTACT ASS'Y

SPACER

[/ T I

FIGURE 20(A)
MOVING CONTACT DEFLECTION

1. Moving Contact in Open Position
2. Deflection Gauge

FIGURE 20(B)
MOVING CONTACT DEFLECTION

1. MovingContact in Closed Position
2. Deflection Gauge

r*
Page 17

OVERLOAD LOCKOUT DEVICE {Fig. 23)

FIGURE 21

The overload lockout device prevents reclosing of the
breaker either manually or electrically after the breaker

MOVING CONTACT ADJUSTMENT

has been tripped by the overload relay, unti this device Is
manually reset. Two micro switches with normally open
contacts are also available to act as overload alarm
contacts.

The direct acting shunt trip solenoid plunger mechani

cally holds the closing mechanism in the trip-free position
thus preventing closing of the main contacts. The latch
check switch wired in series with the closing coll is open

In this position, preventing any attempted electrical
operation of the closing coil.

The device is reset by pushing the manual overload
lockout reset button on the breaker faceplate (Fig. 2).

This reset button is spring loaded and returns to its
normal position.

1. ®/i6-18 X1 Inch Long Hex Bolt
2. Shim

FIGURE 23

plates. One adjustment is provided to give a space of
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) between the end of the plunger and
the stop plate on the trip shaft. If adjustment is required,
refer to the section entitled Shunt Trip, Type B (Fig. 12).

OVERLOAD LOCKOUT DEVICE

Many H-3 and HL-3 type breakers have been supplied
with the SO type solid state relay. This relay has been
replaced in manufacturing by the USD type solid state
relay. The USD relay Is an improved design incorporating
many features not available on the SD relay.
For complete details of the SD relay refer to instruction
manual C-3-216-2.

For complete details of the USD relay refer to instruction

TYPE USD SOLID STATE RELAY

• ur

1. Overload Lockout Reset

2. Reset Spring

3. Shunt Trip (USD Relay Trip Source)
4. Overload Lockout Flipper
5. Overload Alarm Contacts
""It

li? 01
FUSE MOUNTING — HL-3 ONLY

V. ?,.J

All HL-3 circuit breakers in frame sizes up to and
Including 4000 amps have provision for mounting NEMA
HRC fuses, mounted on the line side on a frame

extension at the rear of the unit. As an option, in ratings

of 3000 and 4000 amps, a separate fuse truck is
available used in conjunction with a standard circuit

breaker. Key interlocking Is provided to ensure that the
circuit breaker is open before the fuse unit Is withdrawn.

The fuse unit is equipped with a rejector feature which '

w
Page 18

prevents entry of the fuse unit into the breaker cell.
In all applications the circuit breaker is equipped with
anti-single phase protection.

HL-3 Frame

Rating (Amperes)

Relay Rating
(Amperes)

Maximum Fuse

Rating (Anperes)

supply voltage in excess of 250 Is to be used, the higher
voltage contacts are double spaced (I.e. the adjoining
contact Is unused).

1600NEMAL
1600 NEMAL
3000NEMAL
3000 NEMAL
4000 NEMAL
6000 NEMAL

ANTI-SINGLE PHASE DEVICE AND BLOWN FUSE

AUXILIARY SWITCH (Fig. 5)

On all H-3 and HL-3 units a multi-section rotary switch Is
used. It is coupled directly to (he closing shaft and
operates on a snap-action principle which provides quick

break switching. No adjustment is required and the
switch is available in the following contact arrangements.

INDICATOR — HL-3 BREAKER ONLY (Fig. 24)
4-pole, providing

2 normally open and

The anti-single phase device is supplied on all frame
sizes. The unit consists of three trip solenoids each
acSng upon an independent slide, which in turn acts
directly onto the trip mechanism. When activated by the

6-pole,
t2-pole,
16-pole,
20-pole,

solenoid, Uie slide moves forward and latches in this

The following contact ratings apply.

position, thus locking the breaker in a trip-free state.
Each solenoid coil is connected In parallel across the
corresponding power fuse and in normal operation the
trip coil Is, in effect, shorted out.
The slides are colour coded, red, yellow and blue and
when tripped they protrude through an aperture in the
faceplate (Ret. Fig. 2), thus providing a blown fuse
indicator. Red indicates the left hand phase, yellow
centre and blue right hand. To reset, the slide is lifted
and pushed in at the faceplate opening. The breaker
cannot be redosed until the anti-single phase device and
blown fuse indicator is reset.

Two coil voltage ratings are available, one for system
voltages 240 or less, and one for systems 480 to 600
volts. The coils are identified by colour coded leads —
the 240 volt carries blue leads, the 600 volt rating is fitted

providing 4
providing 6
provldng 8
providing 10

normally
normally
normally
normally

open
open
open
open

2 normally dosed.

and 4 normally closed.
and 6 normally closed.
and 8 normally closed.
and 10 normally closed.

10 amperes up to 254 V.a.c.
1 ampere at 250 V.d.c.
2 amperes at 125 V.d.c.

FIGURE 24
ANTI-SINGLE PHASE DEVICE

|P>

'1 vs

with red leads.

A simple mechanical check of the unit can be made by
raising each plunger by hand to observe movement of
the corresponding slide and rotation of the trip shaft. The
plunger must be raised firmly against the intemal stop to
ensure that full travel Is achieved. An electrical test may
be performed by means of a single phase variable ac
source. 250 va or larger. The test signal is applied
directly to the trip coil terminals after first disconnecting
one of the connecting leads. This is necessary to isolate
the trip coil from the power fuse. TTie 240 volt coil should
operate at approximately 50 volts and the 600 volt rating
at approximately 100 volts. In this test It should be noted

1. Solenoid
2. Slide

that these coils are short-time rated and In normal

3. Trip Shaft

operation are de-energized the Instant the breaker

4. Blown Fuse Indicator

opens. A preset voltage and a momentary on-off
switching action is recommended. Do not sustain the test
power after the coil has operated.

•T

SECONDARY CONTROL CONTACTS (Fig. 34)

MECHANICAL OPERATIONS COUNTER (Rg. 25)

Secondary control contacts are provided on drawout
units to automatically connect or disconnect control
circuits, as the circuit breaker moves through its positions
In the cradle. The contacts are designed such that the
control circuit can be energized or isolated in the test
position. These connections can be altered In the field,
when required, by means of jumpers between contacts of

A five digit mechanical counter can be supplied. It is
mounted in the faceplate of the breaker (Fig. 2).

the stationary block.

This device is mechanically driven by the "charged-

discharged" indicator. The counter operates once for
each charging of the breaker main spring. No adjustment
or maintenance is required for successful counter
operation.

Supplied In multiples of 8 contacts, a total of 48 can be
provided, and each contact has a continuous current

Operations counters are recommended where breakers

rating of 30 amperes, in applications where a control

the recommended maintenance intervals.

will be subjected to frequent operations as an indicator of
Page 19

FIGURE 26(A)
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

FIGURE 25

MECHANICAL OPERATIONS COUNTER

DrSCHARGEDl

3l»
CLOSE
I Qm\H
I

DU V9IU'
LC OISJOSCUU^

1. Breaker Frame

2. Upper Plunger (Connected to ClosingShaft)
3. Lower Plunger (Connected to Trip Shaft)
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK (Fig. 26)

FIGURE 26(B)

Mechanical interlocks are available on all H-3 and HL-3

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK

breaker frame sizes. They are used to mechanically
interlock breakers in a two or three breaker transfer
scheme. In the case of a two breaker transfer scheme,

mechanical interlocks ensure only one breaker is closed
while the other is held in a trip free position. In a three
breaker transfer scheme, mechanical interlocks ensure

only two breakers are closed while the third is held In a

trip free position.

Jl)

Mechanical Interlocks connect with flexible cable the

closing shaft of one breaker to the trip shaft of a second
breaker, and vice versa. If one breaker is closed, the

other breaker Is held in a trip free position. Drawout
breakers are interiocked by cable connections between
the two cradles. There are no permanent connections
between the breaker and matching cradle when interlock

ing is supplied, so the breaker can be freely withdrawn

t
«

from the cell. Mechanical interlocks are operable only

when the breaker is in the connected position. When
withdrawn to the test position, breakers are not
interlocked and can be test operated in the normal
manner.

Mechanical interlocks are preset at the factory and

require no adjustment. The plungers at the rear of the
breaker should be checked for freedom of movement at

intervals as recommended by ANSI standards (see
paragraph on Lubrication).
With the breaker removed from the cell, manually close

the main contacts using the slow close device (Fig. 18).
With reference to figure 26 (a), the top plunger at the rear

1. Breaker Frame
2. Cradle Frame

3. Upper Flipper
4. Lower Flipper
5. Cable Connections to Lower Cradle

DOOR INTERLOCK (Fig. 27)

All H-3 and HL-3 circuit breakers may be fitted with a

device which acts to trip the unit when the cell door is

of the breaker connected by cable to the closing shaft
should move freely with movement of the closing shaft.
Next, charge the main spring and close the breaker.
Pushinginon the lowerplunger at the rear of the breaker
should open the main contacts. If the plungers do not
move freely, the cable must be removed from the sheath

opened. In operation, the door lever acts internally on the
mechanical trip button causing it to move in towards the
faceplate. This interlock may be defeated by arresting
the movement of the trip button. A screwdriver blade or

and cleaned to restore free movement.

breaker.

Page 20

similar tool inserted through the slot in the trip button will

allow the door to be opened without tripping the circuit

CELL SWITCHES (Fig. 29)

FIGURE 27

DOOR INTERLOCK

Cell switches mounted in the cradle can be provided
when required to serve as position indicators or external

electrical interlocks. The switches are operated when the
breaker is moved from the test to operating position in
the enclosure.

Each switch contains one normally closed and one
normally open contact. A total of six switches can be
supplied. These contacts are rated 10 amperes up to 300
V.a.c.

FIGURE 29(A)
CELL SWITCHES (600, 800, 1600 & 2000 AMP)

m
KEY INTERLOCKS (Fig. 28)
Type VP key interlocks single or double lock with 3/8
Inch (9.5 mm) projection can be provided. They mount
with 3/8-16 screws behind the breaker faceplate. Key
interlocks can be installed in the factory. Provision is
made for key interlocks on all frame sizes.
The lock plunger engages the tapered section of the
manual trip button when the key Is removed. With the
key removed the dosing mechanism Is completely trip
free thus preventing ciosing of the main contacts. For
electrically operated units an auxiliary switch contact is
provided to operate in conjunction with the Interlock to
Isolate the closing circuit.

1. Breaker Frame
2. Cradle Frame

3. Operating Bracket
4. Cell Switches

FIGURE 28

KEY INTERLOCK

FIGURE 29(B)
CELL SWITCHES (3000, 3200 & 4000 AMP)

FEDERAL P ONEE

POLES

VOltS
'R. SIZE
RELAY
NT.CAP.

CONtAai.C
CONTROL

FREO.

1. Cell Switches
2. Cradle Bus Pan
3. Ground Stab

4. Shutter (In Open Position)

Page 21

For the 2000 ampere H-3 and for the 600, 800,1600 and

SHUTTERS (Fig. 30)

Shutters are available for all frame sizes up to and

including 3200 amperes for both line and load side main
plug-in contact stabs.
For the 600, 800, 1600, 3000, and 3200 ampere H-3
frame sizes, shutters are of the lifting type shown In
figure 30 (A). They have a padlock bracket In the bottom
of the enclosure for locking In the down position. When
the breaker moves from the test to operating position,
shutter bolts on the frame of the breaker lift the shutter to

expose the main plug-In contacts.

2000 ampere HL-3 shutters are of the splitting type

shown In figure 30 (B). When the breaker moves from
the test to operating position, shutter bolts on the frame
of the breaker open the shutter to expose the main
plug-In contacts.

The shutters do not require field maintenance.
REJECTION FEATURES (Fig. 31)

Rejection features are provided on all frame sizes. The
rejection feature prevents entry of a breaker into an
enclosure of a different frame size. Pins on both sides of
the breaker frame match slots cut in brackets mounted

FIGURE 30(A) SHUTTERS

on both sides of the cradle.

asi atf

(T)

If the cradle is a different frame size than the breaker, the

breaker pins will not match the slots cut In the cradle
brackets. Entry of the breaker Into the wrong frame size
enclosure Is then prevented.
FIGURE 31 REJECTION FEATURES

1. Cell Switches

2. Secondary Control Contacts
3. Ground Stab
4. Shutter Mechanism
5. Padlock Bracket

FIGURE 30(B) SHUTTERS

1. Breaker Frame

2. Rejection Pin
3. Rejection Bracket

4. Cradle Sideplate
LIFTING DEVICE (Fig. 32)

uunjvaiM'M'Jir D

A lifting device is available from the manufacturer for all
frame size breakers. The lifting device is a one-piece
yoke which fits Into lugs on the breaker sideplates. This
permits safe removal of the breaker from the enclosure
drawout tracks. Lifting yokes are ordered as follows;
Part Number 26G-542 for 600,800,1600 and
2000 ampere H-3"s.
Part Number 26G-151 for 3000,3200 and

4000 ampere H-3's.
1. Cell Switches

2. Secondary Control Contacts

Part Number 26G-601 for 600,800,1600 and

2000 ampere HL-3's.

3. Ground Stab

4. Shutter Mechanism
5. Shutter

Page 22

Part Number 26G-603 for 3000 and 4000 ampere
HL-3's.

FIGURE 32
LIFTING DEVICE

lU''

f
l«.

FIGURE 33
COIL DATA
Rated
Control

240 AC
48 DC
125 DC
250 DC

120 AC
240 AC
48 DC
125 DC

250 DC

Unden/oltage
Trip
Anti-Single
Phase
Device

120 AC
240 AC
240 AC
480 AC
600 AC
120 AC

SPARE PARTS (Fig. 34)

By the nature of its application and its switching
capability spare parts for the circuit breaker should
nomn^iy not be required. If Uie unit is going to be used
for frequent load switching, then the parts shown on the

recommended spare parts list shouid be carried in stock.
When ordering spare parts, the compiete natiepiate
data, especially the breaker serial number, shouid be
provided to ensure that the correct parts are supplied.

FIGURE 34

SPARE PARTS

MAIN DRAWOUT
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

(1600. 3000 & 3200 Amp)

MAIN DRAWOUT
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

MOVING ARCING
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY (OUTER)
ARC CHUTE

CONTACT SPRING
MAIN
BRAIDS

CHARGING MOTOR
MAIN MOVING
CONTACT SPRING GUIDE

nci -:::i

SOLENOID COIL
SHUNT TRIP TYPE A
UNDERVOLTAGETRIP

SHUNT CLOSE

SOLENOID COIL
SHUNT TRIP TYPE B
ANTI-SINGLE PHASE DEVICE

LIMIT SWITCH

SECONDARY CONTROL CONTACTS
CENTRE STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 2000, 3000, 3200 & 4000 AMP)

i.'•o "i

UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 3000 & 3200 AMP DRAWOUT)
UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

CENTRE STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 3000 & 3200 AMP FIXED,

(600 & 800 AMP)

ALL 2000 & 4000 AMP)

UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(600 & 800 AMP DRAWOUT)

(600 & 800 AMP FIXED)

FEDERAL

PIONEER

LIMITED

Offices in principal cities across Canada

••;.V-—•••-

:——i-. •-r. jr;,j,.ir^.

K'^SISIvF .t^-iii-ilr-'^-'ai:--;--

•r.

>
:!• • .!

'tj

USD Solid State Relay

The USD relay provides full overcurrent
protection for modern electrical
installations.

introduction

The USD solid state overcurrent
relay is Federal Pioneer's latest

generation of solid state protective
relays. The USD is a self powered
device which obtains its energy
from the current through the
breaker being controlled. No
auxiliary power supply is required
for tripping. The relay protects low
voltage power systems against
damage through the operation of

JO*e otftHcuaHtw Btiiv
.1 'ilK-

•

its overload, short circuit and

fjls " Sr . •

ground fault circuitry. Zone
Selective Instantaneous Protection
(ZSIP) is also available as a

standard feature on USD relays
equipped with ground fault
elements. The Federal Pioneer type
H-3 and HL-3 air circuit breakers

are supplied with the USD relay as
a standard feature.

Description
The USD overcurrent protection
package is comprised of a 3 phase
USD relay, current sensors and a

high input energy direct acting
solenoid type shunt trip. In the
case of a 3 phase 3 wire system
3 sensors are mounted in the

breaker. On a 3 phase 4 wire
solidly grounded system a fourth

sensor is required for ground
fault protection.

Available Relay Models
There are two basic types of USD
relays, the USD-3 and the USD-6.

The features of these relays are
listed below.

Reiay

USD-3

Features

Long Time, Short Time
and Instantaneous.

USD-3IR

As USD-3 -r local
indication and contacts

for remote indication.
USD-6

Long Time, Short Time with
ZSIP, Instantaneous and

Ground Fault with ZSIP.
USD-6IR

As USO-6-f local
Indication and contacts
for remote indication.

ZSIP®

Selectivity between main and

feeder breakers is conventionally
obtained by using time
co-ordinated trip devices, with the
device furthest downstream set for
minimum time delay. The
disadvantages of this method are
that fault levels increase in zones
closer to the main breaker and the
time to clear these faults increases.

The power system must withstand
these high fault current levels until
the time delay on the first device
upstream of the fault expires.

With ZSIP® the trip device that
senses a fault in its zone of

protection trips instantaneously,
minimizing system damage.
The USD relay also sends a
restraint signal to all upstream
devices and causes them to

operate according to their time

co-ordinated protection mode,
increasing service continuity.
ZSIP® is available on the short time
and ground fault elements of the
USD relay.
Local and Remote Indication

Local indication is by long-life
LED's on the relay faceplate while
remote indication is facilitated

through a set of dry contacts which
can be connected to remote

annunciating or alarm devices.

120 volt a.c. 2.5VA control power
is required.

USD Solid State Relay

Figure 2 — Remote Indication and ZSIP Connections for USD-6IR

OPENING ON LEFT
HAND SfOE OF RELAY
•

•

Elements
CONNECTOR HARNESS

Short Time
Elements

CATALOGUE NO. USO«((U4

•

COLOUR CODED IS OA. WIRES

TYPE TEW. 600V INSUt IDS CU
AU WIRES ARE LOOSE ANO

Ground Fault
Elements
with ZSIP*

piNNa

Local and Remote
Indication

coioua
OfWKtt

•

CONTROL POWER
IJOVSOHtZSVA

*Add the following sufTixes:
— 6 for use with CUD 1.5
and CSD^ sensors

—
INST./S.T.

— 8 for use with CSD-8 sensors

CONTACT RATING
4 AMP 120 VAC
4AMP24VDC

B—0

16 for use vwth CSD-16 sensors

El—0
B—H

- 20 for use with CSD-20 sensor

— 32 for use with CUD-30 and
CUD-32 sensors

RESTRAINT CN
RESTRAINT OUT

ZSIP RESTRAINT
SIGNALS

RESTRAINT COM

— 40 for use with CUD-40 and
CUD-60 sensors

Figure 1 —
USD-6IR Faceplate Layout

30*.COVeBCU»BewTRUjyTy>EUSO

«csn •mli.T

Relay Operation
The USD relay Is comprised of
current matching transformers, a
power supply, logic circuitry,

The relay has 4 elements which
operate independently and
perform the various protection
functions. They are: Short Time,

thumbwheel switches, and the

Long Time, Instantaneous and
Ground Fault The pickup settings

output pulse generator. These
components are housed in a single

LT.

and/or time bands are field

metal enclosure. Interconnection of

selectable by means of
thumbwheel switches located on

5:6

the USD relay with the primary
current sensors and the shunt trip
solenoid is accomplished through

OlGOCaiE?

4
4
Mutrwicsor

4
MC
unvNTsiucnoH

a labelled terminal block mounted

on the faceplate of the relay.
Connections for the control power
local indication, remote indication
and the Zone Selective

Instantaneous Protection (ZSIP) is

accomplished by means of a colour
coded wiring harness. The harness
is attached to a 10 pin connector
that plugs and locks into the left
hand side of the relay enclosure.
This connection is shown in

Figure 2.

the relay faceplate. The pickup and
time delay settings are factory
programmed and calibrated in •
discrete settings for repetitive
accuracy and precision. Gold
plated contacts are used on the
thumbwheel switches for selecting
settings, assuring long lasting
positive electrical performance.

3 I USD Solid State Relay

Selecting Settings

Figure 3 — USD Relay Functional Block Diagram

Thumbwheel switches for selection

of current pickup levels and time
delays are provided on the relay
faceplate, grouped in a vertical
column, and paired according to

tWST.
PtCK.UP
O.F.TRtP
CONTROL

the characteristic controlled.

CURRENT

Adjacent to each knurled
thumbwheel switch is a setting
table which correlates the setting

number on the switch face (0-9)

TIME
delay

with the actual setting.
CURREPIT

The use of thumbwheel switches

provides positive factory calibrated
settings, which are immune to
"drifting" in service.

SHORT
TIME
PtCK'UP
BYPASS DLY
IF NO
RESTRAINT

LOGIC
POWER
SUPPLY

MONTTOR t

Long Time

C.F.
PtCMJP
BYPASS OLY

The pickup setting is adjustable

IF NO
RESTRAINT

from 0.6 to 1.1 times the current

sensor tap setting with calibration
points at 0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1.0 and

1.1 times. Pickup tolerance is ±8%.
Time delay is adjustable from 2
seconds to 30 seconds with 10

calibration points at 2,4,6,8,10,
14,16,22,26 and 30 seconds. The

The definite time delay

The tolerance is ±10% of the

sensor tap setting with calibration
points at 4, 5,6,8,10 and 12 times.
There is also an "off" position on

time shown.

the selector switch. With this

current level is adjustable from
0.08 to 0.32 seconds with

Short Time

setting the instantaneous element
will not pickup unless the breaker

The pickup setting is adjustable

closes on a fault that exceeds 13

0.20, 0.26 and 0.32 seconds. When

from 2 to 10 times the current

times the sensor tap setting, in

sensor tap setting with calibration
points at 2,3,4,6,8 and 10 times.
Pickup tolerance is ±8%. The Short
Time delay characteristics are

which case a discriminator will

operated in the ZSIP mode tripping
will be instantaneous (.02 sec.)
unless the relay is operating in the
back up TCP (Time Coordinated

time intervals shown are at 6 times

the current sensor tap setting.

initiate the tripping. Pickup
tolerance is ±8%.

has an inverse time characteristic.

characteristic at the 10 times

calibration points at 0.08, 0.14,

Protection) mode. The tolerance is

adjustable from 0.11 to 0.45

Ground Fault

seconds with calibration points at

There are 6 models of USD-6 (IR)

0.11, 0.25, 0.33 and 0.45 seconds.
The band width is ±10% of the

±10% of the times shown.

Figure 4

feature on all relay types. When

relay which have varying ground
fault pick-up levels. This allows you
to match the relay and sensors in
order to comply with the 1200 amp
max. rating specified by electrical

short time ZSIP is selected and the

codes. The various models are

fault is within the relay's zone the
relay trips instantaneously

shown in Figure 4.

USD-6(IR)-16

.20. .30. .40, .50. .60, .70

(0.05 seconds).

The ground fault element has a
definite time delay characteristic

USD-6(IR}-20

.20. .25, .30, .40, .50, .60

USD-6(IR)-32

.20. .22. .24, .28, .32, .36

USD-6(IRM0

.20, .22, .24, .26, .28, .30

times shown. In addition an Pt

function is available as a standard

instantaneous

for fault currents in excess of 10

The pickup setting is adjustable

times the sensor tap setting. For

from 4 to 12 times the current

fault currents below this value it

.25, .50, .75,1.0,1.5,2.0

USD-6(IR)-8

.25. .50, .75.1.0.1.25,1.5

USD Solid State Relay

ZSIP Mode Selection

Figure 5 — Characteristics of Current Sensors

A faceplate mounted rotary switch
allows selection of ground fault

and short time operating modes.
Local and Remote Indication
When a fault of sufficient

magnitude occurs on a circuit the
USD relay will trip its associated
circuit breaker. Identification of the

fault is very important due to the
different procedures which should
be followed, (before the breaker
can be reclosed), if the breaker

trips on overload, short circuit or
ground fault Normally in the case
of an overload tripping, the breaker
can be reclosed safely, but with
short circuit and ground fauit
tripping, investigation is required
to locate and repair the fault before
reciosing the circuit breaker.

y»pcal indication is provided by
'

ng life LED's located on the relay

.110

faceplate. These LED's require
120V A.C. control power and they
indicate which element of the relay
has been operated. Indication
LED's are considered superior to

CUfrSO

"pop-out" mechanical indicators as
they provide high visibility
indication and positive reset.

•THE SECeWOMtToTuiSewlORS 1$ RATIO• AMWtSFORAa 1*9

The LED's will stay on until the
relay is reset or control power is
interrupted.
Sensors

For remote indication, 3 sets of dry
contacts which can be connected

special application 5 amp output

to a remote annunciator or alarm

secondary units which mount on

device are provided. There are also

the primary conductors of the air

separate contacts for remote

circuit breaker. These sensors then

indication of overload, short circuit

supply the fault detection logic
circuitry of the USD relay with a
current signal, through matching
transformers provided in the relay.
This signal is also supplied to a
regulator in order to provide a
power source to the USD relay's

and ground fault. The contact is

rated 4 amps, 120V AC and 4 amps,
24V DC and is terminated at the
socket on the left hand side of the

relay.

The Federal Pioneer sensors are

electronic circuitry.
The core of the current sensor is

manufactured with a high quality
grain oriented siiicon steel alloy.

The core is tape wound and then
encapsulated with polestigiass to
provide moisture protection. The
sensors have two or three tap
settings (according to the rating).
The same relay can be used for
each selectable tap, thereby, the
trip rating of the breaker can easily
be changed by simply changing
the sensor taps.

5 I USD Solid State Relay
CUD current sensors have field adjustable
tap settings which allow simple alteration of
the breakers trip rating.

Shunt Trip .

The high input energy direct acting
shunt trip is a cylindrica! solenoid
which is mounted in the circuit

breaker in such a way that the
plunger is held in the reset position
by gravity. The USD relay, while
operating in the trip level, provides
a pulse with an initial voltage of
140V. When this trip pulse is
supplied to the solenoid, the
plunger travels free striking the trip
lever of the air circuit breaker.

ipi

Relay Testing
The USD Relay has a test plug
mounted on the faceplate which is
used to connect a (type DDT-USD)
Test Set or a metering device in
order to run a complete
operational test on the relay. This

unit also checks the output tripping
energy provided by the relay to the

shunt trip. The Test Set is plugged
into a convenient test plug

Figure 6 — Current Sensor Size and Ampere Taps

provided on the faceplate of the
Sensor

Taps

Type

Available

Federal Pioneer Breaker Frame

relay. The pinout of this test plug is
as follows:

30H-3, 42H-3
50H-3, 65H-3
50H-3, 6SH-3
30H-3. 42H-3

1600A

30H-3. 42H-3
SOH-3. 65H-3

2000A

50H-3, 65H-3

Ground Fault Positive Input

800A
1600A
2000A

30H-3. 42H-3

Overcurrent Positive input

50H-3. 65H-3
50H-3, 65H-3
50H-3. 65H-3

CUD-6D

1600,3000,4000
5000. 6000

Long Time Pickup/Inhibit
8

Ground Fault Pickup/Inhibit
Overcurrent Trip Inhibit

SOH-3
75H-3
100H-3
100H-2

Short Time Pickup/inhibit

75H-3

50H-3
75H-3
100H-3

4000A
6000A

Instantaneous Pickup/Inhibit

Ground Fault Trip Signal (Delay)

Overcurrent Trip SignaUDeiay)

USD Solid State Relay

The DDT-USD test set allows on-site testing
of USD relay characteristics.

Special Applications
The USD relay can be modified to
suit custom applications. For
further details consult Federal

Pioneer. The following special
application models are available
without custom engineering.

tia25m:.=ii.

amt
^ttttrrnn

Marine Version

The USD relay is available for
marine applications under the
following catalog numbers,

USDM-21, USDM-3, USDM-3IR.

These models are specially
constructed to withstand the

rigours of marine duty. In addition

the short time and long time
responses have been modified to

suit marine applications. Ground
fault pick-up is not available in the
USDM series. Instantaneous

pick-up in the USDM series is
identical to that of the regular USD

,4glay. The short time pick-up is
lodified to provide tripping at 2.0,
2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3.0 and 4.0 times the
sensor tap.

The USDM-21 relay does not have a
long time pick-up while the
USDM-3 and USDM-3IR have the

same long time pick-up settings as
the USD-3. Time delays in all cases
are the same as the regular USD
relay.
Long Time Version

The USD relay is available with
only long time pick-up under the
catalogue number USD-LT. The
long time pick-up levels and time
delays are the same as those on

the regular USD relay. This relay
will not provide any instantaneous
or short time protection. It is also

SD 3 phase overcurrent relay. The
Test Set is completely

The relay accumulates energy on a
trip capacitor after a fault condition
has been determined and dumps it
into the shunt trip device. To
assure overall operation of the
relay, it is necessary to check that

self-contained, including a storage

this TRIP circuit does accumulate

compartment for test leads and a

the required amount of energy
when given the signal to do so by
any of the four elements. The test

USD Test Set

The Federal Pioneer type DDT-USD
Test Set is a portable instrument

used for field testing of the USD or

carrying handle, and is capable of

checking all facets of the relays'
operations. The Test Set contains a
current source and the logic
circuitry which performs the test
functions. The digital readout
display selection switches and all
controls are mounted on a fully

labelled front panel.
The Test set operates by delivering

a momentary 70 amp (14 per unit)
secondary injection current to the

available with local and remote

relay, thereby allowing the

indication under the catalogue

complete testing of the

number USD-LT-IR.

instantaneous element To allow

accurate calibration testing of the
pickup settings on all elements, the
current source of the Test Set is

controlled to provide three output
ranges with metering from 0.2 per

unit to 14 per unit.

set has a built-in feature to monitor

the trip capacitor voltage and give

indication of a LOW TRIP during
the Overall Time Delay Test.

USD Solid State Relay

Figure 7 — Time-Current Characteristics
g g s ssgsii
cutvcs
lOMC 1IMI

SHORT TtMT

INfTANIAKfOlJS
CROUNO UUIZ

CUtVfS RAMO ON NOMINAl VAtUU
INHN SiNUiOtfMi CUttlNt.
nooucviON louRANCts ano
AkOlfNT TfaintAtUtC CmCTS fCOM

>9*C TO •»SS*C WtlL CMIM MAXVHUM
10% VAtMTtON ON TttU OUAV AND

sovONoiCKur

lONCTIMI CURVfS
MMC

i.iNoiCAnovAiuu

The USD relay is the brains of the H'3

UKC

breaker.

U SIC

RlnUUNTTlMTDtUV
ATOTlMlSSfNSORTAP

3. PtC«UPATeiA,0.9.«4.
».t.l.e.*UT{MtS
SfNSOtTAP

I. MSSICtfPUSINTS

TIME DEUT AT « TIMES
SENSOR TAP.
2. PtCKUPAT2.3.4,«,0.
RIOTIMIS SENSOR TAP
SHOWN AT 3 TCMa

SENSOR TAP

ClOCNO fAUlT CURVES
PKKUP SNO%VN AT OJ TtMfi SENSOR TAP.
ncxup AT 4.S. A, 1.10 A 12
TIMES SENSOR TAP.

SHOWN AT 4 TIMES
SENSOR TAP.
t

A POOIfl

M 40 SOgRSr o

CURRENT IN TIMESSENSOR TAP

Federal Pioneer Limited

Type H-3/HL^3 Circuit Breakers
lecommended Spare Parts
le H-3 Circuit Breakers

50H-3 (1600/2000A)

30H-3,42H-S(800A)
DESCRIPTION

PART
NUMBER

Arc Chute Assembly

Stationary Arcing Contact
Upper Stationary Main Contact (Rxed)
Upper Stationary Main Contact (Drawout)

41A-504D
13A-566B
182A-S42B
4gE-552
49E-551
49E-555
49E-554

3
3

Center Stationary Main Contact
Main Drawout Contact Assembly

49E-577
49E-130

3
6

Arc Chute Lower Flash Shield
Front Flash Shield

Moving Arcing Contact

QUANTITY
PER BRKR
3
3
1

3
3

PART
NUMBER
41A-504D
13A-S66B
182A-542B
49E-552
49E-6S1
49E-649

49E-S7S
241B-532
241B-533
242A-S20

3
3
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
3
9
18
3
18
36

55B-502
13A-S74C
13A-67SC
13A-576C
27A-500

6
2
1
1
3

49E-S48 (1600A)
49E-549 (2000A)
49E-650

49E-519 (1600A)
49E-572and

49E-S73 (2000A)

Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assembly)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Outer)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Inner)
Main Moving Contact Spring
Main Moving Contact Spring Holder

49E-575
241B^32
241B-633

242A-520 (42H-3)
242A-S21 (30H-3)

interphase Barrier

S5B^02
13A-574C

R.H. End Barrier
LH. End Barrier
Main Braid

13A-S75C
13A-576C
27A-500

12
3
12
24
24
6
2
1
1
3

ouANxmr
PER BRKR

6SH-3(1600/2000A)
DESCRIPTION

PART
NUMBER

Arc Chute Assembly

41A-504D
13A-666B
182A-40A-1
182A-41A-1
49E-652
49E^1

Arc Chute Lower Flash Shield
R.H. Front Flash Shield
LH. Front Flash Shield

Moving Arcing Contact
Stationary Arcing Contact
Upper Stationary Main Contact (Fixed)
Upper Stationary Main Contact (Drawout)
Center Stationary Main Contact
Main Drawout Contact Assembly
Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assembly)
Spacer for Wafer Assemby (Outer)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Inner)
Main Moving Contact Spring
Main Moving Contact Spring Holder
Interphase Barrier
End Barrier
Main Braid

49E-5SS

49E-S54
4gE-656
49E-130
49E-575
241B-532
241B-633
242A-520
S5B-S02
13A-678C
13A-172A-1
27A-500

QUANTITY
PER BRKR

6
6
1
1
6
6

6
6
6
12
24
6
24
48
12
2
2
6

NOTE ADDITIONAL SPARE PARTS FOR BREAKERS ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ARE LISTED ON PAGE 2

FPE circuit breakers are subject to continuous product improvement which may result in minor part changes. To ensure that the correct parts

are supplied, it is essential that complete nameplate data be provided, especially the serial number, when spare parts ate ordered.

2/86
NEW ISSUE

FEDERAL PACIFIC
RELIANCE ELECTRIC

ULASS 0O125P

Parts Information

lype H-3/HI^3 Circuit Breakers
Recommended Spare Pai

lype H-3 Circuit Break^

100H-3(4000A)

7SH-3 (3200A)
DESCRIPTION

Arc Chute Assembly
Arc Chute Lower Flash Shield
R.H. Front Flash Shield
LH. Front Flash Shield

Moving Arcing Contact
Stationary Arcing Contact
Upper Stationary Main Contact (Hxed)

Upper Stationary Main Contact (Orawout)
Center Stationary Main Contact
Main Orawout Contact Assembly

Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assembly)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Outer)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Inner)
Main Moving Contact Spring
Main Moving Contact Spring Hoider
Interphase Barrier
End Barrier
Main Braid

QUANTinf

PART
NUMBER

PER BRKR
6
6

41A-504D
13A-S66B
182A-40A-1
182A-41A-1
49E-552
49E-551
49E^9
49E-548
49E-5S0
49E-519
49E-575
241B-532
241B-533
242A-520
55B^2

6
6
6
6
12

36
6
38
72
6
2

13A-578C
13A-172A-1
27A-500

2
6

PART
NUMBER
41A-504D
13A-S12
182A-40A-1
182A-41A-1
49E-SS2
49E-651
4gE-623
49E^23
49E-624
49E-S03C
49E-S75
241B^32
241B-633
242A-S20

SSB^ (Inner)
55B^ (Outer)
13A-S78C
13A-172A-1
27A-600

QUANTITY
PER BRKR
6
6
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
12
36
6
36
72
6
12
2
2
6

ADDITIONAL PARTS FOR ELECTRICALLY OPERATED BREAKERS
H-3 & HL-3
DESCRIPTION

Shunt Close Coll Type A
Undervoltage Coil Type A

46A-500-C")

Shunt Trip Coil Type B (SSD Trip Dewce)

46A-508

Shunt Trip Coil Type B (Separate Source)
Single Phase Trip Coil Type B

46A-5012,5,6,7(—)

Limit Switch DC Control

249E-a
249E-9

1
1

182A-15A-1
49E-536-1
49E-536-2

1
1
1

249A-S09B
249A-S10B
249A-511B
249A-512B
249A-513B

1
1
1
1
1-

48V DC

240V AC, DC

Limit Switch AC Control

(**)Secondary Control Contact Block (Fixed)

("isecondary Control Contact Block (Moving)
("iSecondary Control Contact Block For
600V Line Voltage Input Only

Auxiliary Switch - 4 Pole (2NO/2NC)
Auxiliary Switch - 8 Pole (4NO/4NC)
Auxiliary Switch -12 Pole (6NO/6NC)
Auxiliary Switch -16 Pole (8NO/8NC)
Auxiliary Switch - 20 Pole (10NO/10NC)
(**)8 Contact Per Block

Specify Number of Blocks
(•**)Specify Type and Voltage

FPE circuit breakers are subject tocontinuous product improvement which may result in minor part changes. To ensure that^ecorrect parts
are supplied, itisessent'el that complete nameplate data be provided, especially the serial number, when spare parts are ordered.
FFiE

FEDERAL RAOFIG
RELIANCE ELECTRIC

2/6<
NEW ISSU

e 1985 Federal l^cilic Electri
PRINTED UN US

CLASS 602SP

Parts Information

'(elUXSl

fVpe H-3/Hi^3 Circuit Breakers
Re^mmended Spare Parts

Circuit Breakers

SOHL-3 (1600/2000A)

30HL-3 (800A)
QUANTITY

Arc Chute LowerFlash Shield
Front Flash Shield

Moving Arcing Contact
Stationary ArcingContact

Upper Stationary Main Contact
Center Stationary Main Contact
Main DrawoutContact Assembly

Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assembly)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Outer)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Inner)
Main Moving Contact Spring
Main Moving ContactSpringHolder
Interphase Barrier
R.H. End Barrier
I M

PnrI Barrier

49E^52
49E-551
49E-668
49E-650
49E-573
49E-575

3
3
3
3

49E-551
4gE-567
49E-577
49E-130
49E-575

6
12
3
12
24
6
2

Z41B-532
241B-533
242A-521
55B-502
13A-574C
13A-575C
13A-576C

241B-532
241B-533
242A-520
558-502
13A-574C
13A-675C
13A-576C
27A-500

1
1
a

DESCRIPTION

Arc Chute Assembly

Arc Chute Lower Flash Shield
R.H. Front Flash Shield
LH. Front Flash Shield

Moving Arcing Contact
Stationary Arcing Contact

L.H. Upper Stationary Main Contact
R.H. Upper Stationary Main Contact
Center Stationary MainContact
Main Drawout Contact Assembly

Main Moving Contact (Wafer Assembly)

Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Outer)
Spacer for Wafer Assembly (Inner)
MainMoving Contact Spring

Main Moving ContactSpring Holder
Interphase Barrier
End Barrier

Main Braid

41A-504D
13A-566B
182A-40A-1
182A-41A-1
49E-552
49E-551
49E-569-1
49E-569-2
49E-550
49E-519
49E-575
241B-532
241B-533
242A-520
55B-502
13A-578C
13A-172A-1
27A-500

100HL-3 (40C0A)

75HL-3 (3000A)
PART
NUMBER

3
3
1
3
3
3
3
12
18
3
18
36
6
2

41A-504D
13A-566B
182A-542B

QUANTITY
PER BRKR
6
6
1
1
6
6
6
6
6
12
36
6
36
72
6
2

182A-40A-1
182A-41A-1
49E-5S2

49E-551

70.12J013B.1
70.12X)13B5
49E-624

49E-509C
49E-575

241B-532
241B-S33
242A-520

55B-504 (Inner)
S5B-S05 (Outer)
13A-578C
13A-172A-1
27A-500

6
6
6
6
6
12
36
6
36
72
6
12
2

2
6

notes:

and ampere rating offuses installed.
ADOmONALSPARE
PASTS FOR BREAKERS SLECmiCAU-TOPEBATEO ABE LISTED ON PAGES

2/86
NEW ISSUE

FEDERAL FACFIC1
RELIANCE ELECTRIC m

f-iryAUjiyfe.!!,

Parts Information

type H-3/H1^3 Circuit Breakers'
Part IdentificatiM

Type H-3 Circuit Breai"'

2000 AMP

i
SECTION OF H-3 BREAKER

4000 AMP

Arc Chute Asscably
Interphese Barrier

ft.H. End Barrier
L.H. End Barrier

24.

Close Latch

25.
2i.
27.
28.

Trip Rod Atseably
Spring Guide Pin
Closing Casting
Closing Pin

Front Flash Shield

Closed-Open Link
Crank Asseibly

Braid

Closing Link Asseably

48.

Wafer Contact Spring

49.
50.
51.

Spring Holder
Hoving Arcing Contact
Stationary Arcing Contact

Tie Rod Atseably

Closing Shalt
Hain Spring

Charged-Oischarged Button
Indicator Plate

Faceplate Bo> Atseably
Floating Trie
Faceplate Atseably
not

Hain Hoving Contact (Wafer Assyi
Upper Stationary Ham Contact

30.
31.

Bos

Charged-Oischarged Link
Closed-Open Button

Centre Stationary Main Contact

44.
45.
46.

Crank Bos Bearings
Holding Panl

Trip Latch
Latch Bearing

Leaer Houlding
Sensor Hounting Bracket

59.

Drauout Contact Asseably

FEDERAL REOFIC
RELIANCE ELECTRIC

Type H-3/HLp3 Circuit Breakers
tart Identification

lf^HL-3 Circuit Breakers

Arc Chute Actiably
Interphise Berritr

Closing Link Assenbly
Braid

3.
4.
5.

R.H. End Barrier
L.N. End Barrier
Front Flash Shield

26.
27.

Spring Guide Pin
Closing Casting

48.
49.

Haler Contact Spring
Spring Holder

Moving Arcing Contact
Stationary Arcing Contact
Load Terninal

Main Spring
Guide Bushings
Clanp Assenbly

54.
55.
56.

Base Houlding
Trip Flipper
Trip Coil Assenbly

Trip Shalt
Trip Latch

14.

Charged-Oischarged Link

Charged-Discharged Button

Finger Spacer
Orauout Contact Assenbly

38.
39.

Louer Houlding
Sensor Mounting Bracket

Faceplate Bos Assenbly
Floating Trin

42.
43.

Junper
Centre Stationary Hain Contact

63.
64.

Line Side Bar
Line Side Terninal

65.

Fuse

21.
22.

Faceplate Assenbly
Handle Assenbly

44.

Main Moving Contact (Haler Assy)

45.

Upper Stationary Hain Contact

66.
67.

Interphase Barrier
R.H.6 L.K. Orauout Wheel Assy

FEDERAL mClFIC
RELIANCE ELECTRIC

Parts Information

Type H-3/HL-3 Circuit Breakers
Recommended Spare Part^

•Y
V-'

MAIN DRAWOUT
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

(800 Amp)
MAIN DRAWOUT

(1600, 3000 & 3200 Amp)

•V

,V'

MAIN DRAWOUT
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

(2000 Amp)

ftM
•. -r.

STATIONARY ARCING
CONTACT ASSEMBLY

FEDERAL
PACIFIC f f
RELIANCE ELECTRIC mB

MOVING ARCING

CONTACT ASSEMSJv

Parts Information

Type H-3/H1^3 Circuit Breakers
Recommended Spare Parts
ARC CHUTE
ASSEMBLY

MAIN MOVING
CONTACT SPRING

MAIN

CHARGING MOTOR

BRAIDS

MAIN MOVING
CONTACT SPRING GUIDE

'W 62cr

SOLENOID COIL

jp-^T TRIP TYPE A
K

(VOLTAGE TRIP
SHUNT CLOSE

2/86
NEVV ISSUE

SOLENOID COIL
SHUNT TRIP TYPES

ANTI-SINGLE PHASE DEVICE

LIMIT SWITCH

FEDERAL PACIFIC
HeUANCE ELECTniC

Type H-3/HL-3 Circuit Breaker
Recommended Spare Pa

SECONDARY CONTROL CONTACTS

CENTER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 2000, 3000, 3200, & 4000 AMP)

UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 3000 &3200 AMP DRAWOUT)
UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(1600, 3000 & 3200 AMP FIXED,
ALL 2000 & 4000 AMP)

UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(600 AMP DRAWOUT)

LiSrw-y

CENTER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT
(800 AMP)

UPPER STATIONARY MAIN CONTACT

(800 AMP FIXED)

Federal Pacific / 2500 Blue Ridge Road / Raleigh. North Carolina / 919-783-100(

FEDERAL PACIFIC f*
RELIANCE ELECTRIC MM

!N-820.4A

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

FEDERAL PACIRC
METAL-CUD SWITCHGUR
JANUARY 1972

Moving and Lifting
Storage

Foundation

Part 11. installation

Housing
Inspection
Assembly A—Protected Work Aisle
Assembly B—Center Aisle
Assembly C—Non-Walk-in
Tightening Connections

5
5
5
6
6
6

Bus Duct

Additions to Existing Equipment

Ground Fault CT Terminations

.12

Part III. Pre^nerEization Tests
r\

Preparation

Dielectric Tests

Operational Tests

Part IV. Maintenance
Benefits

Inspection
Program

IS
IS

Part V. Safety Requirements for Power Switchgear Assemblies
Unqualified Person—General Public
Qualified Person

17
17

General Instructions to Qualified Persons

Part VI. Switchgear Accessories
Standard

Indicating Lamps

Miscellaneous

List of Illustrations

Figure 1—Lifting Gear—21 feet and Under (Dwg. 2200C0I66)
Figure 2—Lifting Gear—Over 21 feet (Dwg. 220OC0I67)
Figure 3—Installation of Floor Channels—Indoor

2
3
4

Figure 4—Installation of Floor Channels—Outdoor

Figure S—Table A—Recommended Torque Values
Figure 6—Base Assembly (Dwg. 220OC0I68)

6
7

Figure 7—Outdoor Protected Work Aisle Construction

(Dwg. 2200DOI69)
Figure 8—Outdoor Center-Aisle Construction
(Dwg. 22C0DOI70)
Figure 9—Base Connections and Cell Bolting
(Dwg. 2200C0I7I)

8
9
10

Figure 10—Additions to Existing Units (Dwg. 2200C0172)

Figure 11—Boot Installation

Figure 12—Taping Instructions ;

Figure 13—Table B—Dielectric Test Values

This manual for job orders shipped beginning March, 1971.

PART I - GENERAL
sections.

1. Switchgear Housings and DST-2 Air Circuit Breakers
are jig constructed in alignment flxtures to assure

REMOVAL FROM CARRIER AND
INSPECTION FOR DAMAGE

interchangeability of breakers. Compartmentalized
construction segregates the circuit breaker, main
bus, current transformers, potential transformers,
and control power transformers.
2. Complete interlocking between tha cell and circuit

breaker provides safety to personnel and equipment
by prevention of incorrect operating procedure;
3. Equipment is-designed to reduce installation time,
and to comply with ANSI Standards C37.20.
OUTDOOR:

4. Equipment is constructed so that additional
sections may be readily added in the fleld.
5. Protected
scheduled

work-aisle provides ample space for a
maintenance program regardless of

weather. Breakers draw out into aisle with suflicient

space for interchangeability. The service area is ventUated, waterproof, and adequately lighted; service
receptacles are provided.
6. The undercoated structural foundation supports are
designed to be self-contained making it necessary
to support foundation steel only. This design permits
elevating switchgear on supporting structures and
thereby reduces flood hazards.

7. Outdoor finish: Three-coat system consisting of a
zinc chromate primer, an intermediate coat, and a
final ASA-24 dark*gray exterior coat.
SHIPMENT

The switchgear is assembled, wired, adjusted and given
complete tests at the factory, after which it is inspected
and packed for shipment, llie air circuit breakers are

not shipped in the switchgear compartments, but are

bly drawings and floor plans for details of shipping

CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
INDOOR OR OUTDOOR:

packed in separate crates. Each crate is identified, and
a complete list of its contents is included in the shipping
papers. All instruments and relays are suitably blocked
as required to prevent damage to bearings and move
ments.

Protected work-aisle metal-clad switchgear is shipped
in completely assembled sections whenever possible to
provide ease of handling and installing. See job assem

Immediately upon receipt of the shipment, identify all
component parts and check them against the shipping
list. Make a thorough examination to detect any dam
age which may have been incurred during transit

If any dama^ is discovered, file a claim immediately
with the carrier, and send notice of the extent of the

damage to the Federal Pacific Electric Company plant
from which shipment waa mader giving complete-iden
tification, carrier's name, and railroad car number if

the shipment was made by rail.
The information will enable the company to supply
necessary information in support of claim.
MOVING AND LIFTING SWITCHGEAR^
1. It is extremely important that care be taken in
handling, rigging, hoisting, rolling, or moving
assembled switchgear into place. Metal-clad switch-

gear isdesigned to be bandit only inan upright posi
tion and should never be handled in any other way
without first consulting with the Switchgear Engineer
ing Department.
2. Each shipping section of indoor switchgear is bolted
to a heavy shipping skid which- should remain with
the gear until it is moved into final location. Each

section of outdoor gear is supplied with heavy lift
ing lugs bolted to the switchgear base.
3. When lifting shipping units with a crane, it is prefer
able to use two hooks simultaneously, one on each
end. Each pair of lifting hooks should be equipped
with a spanner bar to prevent excessive distortion.
If only a single hook crane is available, arrange
spannerfs) to lifting rig as shown on typical outdoor
gear lifting drawings 2200C0166 and 2200CX)167.
(Figures 1 and 2).
4. When cranes are not available, equipment can be
rolled into place on shipping skids (indoor) or steel

base (outdoor) provided with each shipping section.
Pushingor pullingforces should beapplied to the skid
or base and not the Switchgear.

5. Shippingskidscan be removed by using a foot jack in
each comer of the shipping section afler the switchgear has been moved to its final location.

)

WEIGHTS OF CELL SECTIONS

WIDTH OF
CELL

AATIHG of CELL

DIMENSION EQUAL 10 OR GREATERr
IRAN DEPTH OFSWITCHGEAR

DST-2 SKV-3S0
DST-2 'SKV-3S0

DST-2 ISKV-MO
OST-2 ISKV-SOO

INSERT WOODEN BLOCKS TO.PROTECT

WEIGHT DOES NOT INCLUDE BREAKER

TYPICAL OUTDOOR NON-WALK-IN
CONSTRUCTION SHOWN

RECOMMENDED METHOD OF LIFTING

CELLS(2l'-0' LG MAXJ AND ALL WORK AISLE SECTIONS

FPE DWG.NO.
2200C0I66

FIGURE 1

NOTE:FOR CELL WEIGHTS REFER TO
DWG. 2200C0I66
-INSERTWOODEN BLOCKS TO PROTECT

DIMENSION EQUAL TO OR GREATER
THAN DEPTH OF SWITCHGEAR

TYPICAL OUTDOOR NON-WALK-IN
CONSTRUCTION SHOWN

recommended
method
of LIFTING
CELLS(2|-0. LG.
AND OVER) AND
ALL WORK
A|SLE SECTIONS
FIGURE?

FPE

DWG. NO.

2200C0I67

^ STORAGE BEFORE INSTALUTiON
Protection against loss of equipment is an important
precaution. Trouble and delay will be avoided by hav
ing good storage facilities arranged so that the appa
ratus will be accessible only to authorized persons and
so that it can be quickly located when required in the
erection program.
Switchgear equipment, regardless of whether it is to be
installed immediately or stored for a while before being
erected, should be kept in a dry, clean place. Conditions
such as dampness caused by rain or change in tempera
ture, cement dust, etc., should be carefully gturded
against. Covering the equipment with a temporary
shelter or tarpaulin is frequently necessary both during
storage and erection. The longer the period of storage,
the greater must be the care taken for protection of the
equipment. If dampness or condensation may be en
countered in the storage location, heaters should be
placed inside the units to prevent moisture damage.
Approximately 600 watts of heaters per unit will be re
quired. Remove all cartons and other miscellaneous
material packed inside the units before energizing any
heaters. If the equipment has been subjected to mois
ture it should be tested with a lOOOV or 2500V megger
after heaters have been turned on for approximately one
week. A reading of at least 100 megohms should be
obtained. -

Batteries should be uncrated and put on trickle charge
.immediately on receipt.

Relay covers should never be left off since the relays are
%delicate devices and future malfunctions because of mois

ture arid dust oould prevent proper tripping of circuit
breakers.

Breakers should be prepared for storage separately.
Refer to appropriate breaker instruction book.
FOUNDATION

Federal Pacific Metal-Clad Switchgear is accurately
built on true and level betlplates. This care and accuracy
insures ease of operation and interchangeability. Equal
care during installation should be used.
True and level supports for this equipment are ofutmost
importance. Little more than ordinary care in laying out

arid preparing the foundation will be repaid in reaction
of cost and labor of installation.

The steel supporting members Used in the floor should •
be held level until the concrete is set. The surface of the

floor under the housing should not project above the
supporting members. For indoor switchgear only, the

^rface ofthe floor should not lie below the supporting
^embers by more than 'A'.
*Thefloor infrom ofthe housing should not very more then W in ony
squareyardandtmsantAptosfisX.ehovt the level ofthestqiportingmembers. A smoothfloor'willmake rolling ofthe removable element easier.
*Wheninstallingswitchgearwherefloors alretidyexist, it will usually be
desirable to pour a newfinishedfloor above with embedded channels
or cut slots for embedding and leveling the supporting channels.

Encircling loops of reinforcing or building steel aroimd
single phase conduaors should be avoided in the main
cableentrancearea ifthese are rated 600amperes orabove.
FIG. 3 or an equivalent must be used to obtain an ade
quate foundation. Bolting the switchgear to the foimdation is an acceptable method. Welding to the founda
tion is preferred because it does not require an accurate
lining up of holes.
FIG. 4 or an equivalent must be used to obtain an ade
quate foundation for outdoor equipment. Welding to
the foundation is the preferred method of securing.
*For indoor switchgear only.

SWITCHGEAR BASE

HOLES OR SLOTS PROVIDED IN SWITCHGEAR

BASE FOR WELDING (PREFERRED} OR BOLTING,
SUGGEST 3/8" HARDWARE. SEE FLOOR PLAN
FOR LOCATION.

PART 11 - INSTALLATION
HOUSING
INSPECTION

1. Before setting equipment in place, refer to switchgear
drawings and, after completely uncrating equipment,
check permanent location to see that equipment will
properly fit on channels and foundation location. Align
and bolt all shipping sections together so that a con
tinuous switchgear installation is obtained. (Refer
to Assemblies "A", "B", and "C below.)
2. Carefully inspect all portions of the circuit, breakers
for posable damage. SkV 250 MVA-circuit breakers
are shipped completely assembled with arc chutes.
15kV and SkV 350 MVA circuit breakers are shipped
separate from arc chutes and may be assembled
properly in the protected work aisle and center aisle
outdoor houses by use of the arc chute lifting bracket
attached to the aisle ceiling. After inspection, the
circuit breakers should be carefully inserted and
racked into the switchgear cells.

3. Remove shipping braces, inspect for damaged parts,
cracked epoxy bus, primary disconnect btishings,
bent secondary disconnects, cracked porcelain, in
sulators, wiring insulation — check and report evi
dence of abuse to equipment.
4. Inspect cells to be certain that power contacts and
secondary disconnect contacts located in rear of cell

ASSEMBLY "A**: OUTDOOR PROTECTED
WORK AISLE CONSTRUCTION
(See dwg. 2200D0169.)
1. Locate the cell sectionsaccurately on the foundation.
When cell equipment is in two sections, locate the
sections from the center of the foundation.

2. Check the leveling of the units; use shims where foun
dation is uneven. Remove lifting lugs.
3. When cells are in two sections and the above are pro

perly leveled and aligned, firmly bolt the bases,
cells, and roofs together with the hardware furnished
for this purpose.
4. Aisle Section:

A. When aisle section is in one piece, remove ail
protective lumber and bracing except wooden
horizontal and center vertical braces. Remove

lifting lugs.
,
B. When aisle section is in two pieces, remove all
protective lumber and bracing from each section
except wooden horizontal brace, wooden vertical
comer and vertical center brace, and open end
wooden frame bracing. Remove lifting lugs.

WARNpiG: UNDER NO CONDITION MAY
THE WOODEN HORIZONTAL ROOF SUP
PORT BE REMOVED BEFORE ITEM 5 BELOW
IS COMPLETED.

are free ofdirt and dust. Cell floor must be clear of all

dust and debris to facilitate easy handling of circuit
breaker.

5. The breaker is provided with a maintenance closing
device for manually closing the breaker. It cannot be
used as a manual device to close in the breaker when

5. Slide aisle section(s) into place, making sure that
aisle roofs overlap cells and reston top of cell roofs.
Aisle side sheets must be'on outside of cell sections.

in the cell. This handle should be used only when the
breaker is withdrawn from the compartment.

6. When aisle section is aligned with the cell portion,

6. Refer to the circuit breaker Instruction Manual

Si^e sheets together and apply cement (furnished) to

lN-820.11 before inserting breakers into cells.
7. If porcelain entrance or load bushings are mounted

in the roof, use flexible connections from incoming
and outgoing lines to reduce the strain on the por
celains.

8. Inspect all instrument doors for damage to protective
relays.

apply caulk (furnished) between overlapping roof
and sidesheet surfaces. Firmly bolt bases, roof, and

roof gasket joints.

7. Remove existing wooden braces.

8. Remove floor plates at ends and at base anchor
ing points.
9. Fasten aisle base to cell base. (See dwg. 22(X)C0171,
Figure 9).
10. Tackweld or anchor the bases to the foundation as

Control-wiring underground conduit from the control
building should terminate inside the switchgear at a level
above any existing high-water marks (4" maximum
above floor line).
Heaters are furnished in front and rear of each outdoor
unit.

The followingdescriptions and drawings give the general
arrangement, sequence of installation, method of fas

tening the gear to the foundation, location of conduit
areas, and other information for the proper location

and a&sembly of the equipment:

indicated on the floor plan drawing.
11. Re-install floor plates.
12. Check and adjust instniment doors for proper align
ment to correa possible mishandling during shipment.
13. Complete the assembly of the main and ground
buses (when required) by inserting the sections
shipped loose for the shipping breaks. (Tighten the
bus bar connections per Table **A" on page 6.)
Assemble the PVC boots around the main bus joints
and fasten together with the nylon hardware fur
nished. ($ee instruction page 12.)

G
14.Re-connect ^wiring at shipping breaks and where
required per wiring diagrams furnished.
NOTE:

A. Customer control wiring connections must be
terminated at terminal blocks only — no splicing
is permitted.
B. Allwiringin conduits must be in accordance with
National Electrical Code.

ASSEMBLY^B": OUTDOOR CENTER

All joints in the bus should be assembled and insulated
as described above for main buses. Adjustable joints
are provided to allow for variations in building construc
tion, etc. These joints should be loosened before installa
tion ofthe duct, then tightened after being set in the posi
tion required by the flxed points at the ends ofthe duct;
Outdoor bus duct must be gasketed at the joints between
shipping sections.
All removable covers on outdoor bus duct except bottom

coversmustbe gasketed.Do not bolt covers in place until

AISLE CONSTRUCTION
.1.Complete items 1, 2, 3, 10, 12, 13, and 14 per
assembly "A" above.

2. Bolt aisle-end channels in place.

all interior assembly work on the duct is completed and
access will no longer be required.
Outdoor bus duct of the 13.8 kv class are provided with
heaters. Connect these heaters in accordance with the

wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment before

. 3. Install floor plates.

energizing the bus duct.

4. Assemble end panels of the aisle section.
5. Assemble aisle roofs and seam gaskets.

6. Apply caulk (furnished) between overlapping roofand
side sheet sumces. Firmly bolt roofs and side sheets

together and apply cement to roof gasket joints.

•7. Check and adjust instrument doors for proper alignmentrtocorrect possible mishandling dunng shipment

ASSEiyiBLY'"(r:t)UTDOOR
NON^WALK-IN CONSTRUCTION
1.Complete items1,2,3.10,12,13 and 14per assembly
^A" above.

TIGHTENING CONNECTIONS

1. Bus splices at shipping break should be carefully in
spect to becertain that good clean, uncontammated
contact is obtained before bolting up tight. A torque
wrench should be used.

2. It is also important to be sure that all outgoing-cable
connections ^re tightened in the same manner as
bus splices.

ADDITIDN OF UNITS TO

EXISTING EQUIPMENT
Beforeadding units to existing equipment, consult and
study all drawings furnished with the equipment. In
addition to the usual drawingsfurnishedwith nw equip
ment, specialdrawings may be furnished covering com
plicated or special assembly work. Ako, checkto make
sureall necessary parts are«n hand.
BEFORE ANY COVERS ARE REMOVED OR ANY
DOORS OPENED WHICH PERMIT ACCESS TO
THE PRIMARY CIRCUITS, IT IS ESSENTIAL
THAT THE CIRCUIT OR CIRCUITS BE DE-ENER
GIZED AND BREAKERS BE WITHDRAWN TO A
DISCONNECTED POSITION AND TAGGED.

IF WORK IS TO BE DONE ON REMOTE EQUIP
MENT CONNECTED TO A UNIT THE BREAKER
FOR THAT UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE
DISCONNECTED POSITION ANDTAGGED. ALSO

THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE ISO

TABLE A

LATED FROM ANY OTHER POWER SOURCES

RECOMMENDED TORQUE
(Values in Foot Pounds)

'••Steel hardware must be SAE 5 or stronger.
FIGURES

Dwg. No. 2200C0172 (Figure 10) indicates the special
procedures required to add new inetal-clad units to out
doorequipment with protected aisle. For indoor equip
ment it is usually necessary only to remove the end
cover sheets and to re-assemble them on the new units
after these are located and bolted to the existing units.

Otherwise, the installation procedure is the same as
described in Part 11.

BUS DUCT

Busduct connectingbetweengroupsof metal-clad switchgear, or between metalclad switchgear and other ap
paratus, should be installed as shown on the arrange
mentdrawings furnished with the duct. Supports should
be provided as indicated on the drawings.

When the units are in place and mechanical assembly is
completed, assemble the main bus and other primary
connections. Secondary wiring and control bus con
nections should be made in accordance with the wiring
diagrams furnished with the equipment.

LEVEUN^HANNELOR *rBEAM

''TTI^REAR DCiOH

1J .11I I I l_l-l».E,
If COHOOII

tSila

CONCRETE CURBS
OR PADS

FRONT MNa
NOTES
FOR SHIPPING SECTIONS AND SPECIAL

H0UNTIN6 DIMENSIONS SEE.JOB OWGS
AND FLOOR PLAN

BOLTIHG,AISLE TO AISLE
and cell TO CELL

AISLE CHANNEL

DEPTH OF SW TCHGEAR

DEPTH OF AISU EXTENSION

-DEPTH OF STHTCHGEAR -

CENTER AISU AREA

• DEPTH OF SWITCHGEAR

CENTER AISLE

METHOD OF MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION
OF BASES FOR OUTDOOR HOUSES
F|6URP§

FPE DWG. NO.
2200COI68

)
IMPORTANT NOTE;

NOTE I: ONE PIECE AISLE SHIPPING SECTION
- 00 NOT REMOVE WOODEN HORIZONTAL AND CENTER VERTICAL

ROOF BRACES UNTIL AISLE ROOF OVERLAPS AND RESTS ON SWITCHGEAR ROOF

CAULK

MOTE 2: SPLIT AISLE SHIPPING SECTION

DO NOT REMOVE WOODEN HORIZONTAL.VERTICAL CORNER
AND VERTICAL CENTER BRACES i AND OPEN END
•WOODEN FRAME BRACING UNTIL AISLE ROOF OVERLAPS

NOTE:APPLY CAULKING COMPOUND TO ALL
BUTTING AND OVERLAPPING JOINTS

AND RESTS ON SWITCHGEAR ROOF

Vi-itx i'u.*atr t
MAUM MSMII

WOODEN
HOnZONTAL
ROOF BRACE

MTU CEMtNT

V«-nxru.aotrt
WALHCWMn

OUTDOOR ROOF GASKET

MSU
ROOT

WOODEN VERTICAL BRACE
ROOF ASSEMBLY

PROTECTED WORK AISLE
COVER aATE

545I6006S RIGHT HAND.

545280066 LEFT HAND (SHOWN)

METHOD OF JOINING AISLE AND SWITCHGEARSECTIONS AT INSTALLATION
' 2200D0I69 '

"^swItchcearroof
AISLE ROOF

ROOF A^EMBLY

iixusiAooa

N07E:AmV UULKiN& COMPOUKD TO ALL
lUTTiNO AND OVCALAfRlNG JOtMTR

CENTER AISLE SECTION
r-

SWITCHGEAR SECTION

•

CFNTER WORK AISLE

METHOD OF JOINING AISLE AND SWITCHGEAR
SECTIONS AT INSTALLATION
22Q0D0I70

FffiURES

-|h6Xs'lg. hex hd. bolt

^-Z0X.79LG.HEX HD.60LT

LOCK 4 nM WASHER

LOCKWASHER A HEX NUT

CELL SIDE SHEET

14 HEX NUT (WCLOCO)
REAR FRAME
UPRIGHT

REAR FRAME UPRIGHTS
AISLE BASE-

CELL BASE
CELL

BASE

AISLE BASE TO CELL BASE

SECTION A-A (TOP SECTIOtO

PROTECTED WORK AISLE
END OF UNIT

CELL TO CELL (REAR)

f •I4X rLfi.11EX HILBOLT
LOCK A FLAT WASHER

16 HEX NUT(WELDED)
CUT TO SUIT

ROOF GASKET

AT ASSEMBLY

I6X I^S LG.HEX HO. BOLT

LOCKWASHER.FLAT WASHER
AND HEX NUT

AISLE CHANNEL SUPPORT TO CELL BASE
CENTER WORK AISLE

Drawing2200C0171
BOLTING

DETAILS

FIGURES

-fWSTING ROOF-

IDE SKEErS.RANELS^AND DOOR
UOVCO, CAULKED AND30LTE0
IN END POSITION

FEND TRIM OIOYED A BOLTED to END POSITIOH)

TTTTym?
EXISTING UNITS

(raoiOTED WORK AISU SHOWN)

FUTURE UNITS

(FUTURE LOT END ADDITIONS SHOWN)

FIELD PROCEDURE FOR EXPANSION OF
EXISTING OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

FIGURE 10

Drawing 2200C0172

EQUIPMENT
BATTERIES
Follow batteiy manufacturer's instructions carefully
when installing the battery. Be sure that ventilation is provided to carry off the fumes. If steel work seems to
be affected by the fumes, apply black asphaltum paint
Make sure that the battery charger is functioning, and
that the charging rate is not excessive. Test for specific
graviQr regularly.

nection is necessary for every switchgear. installation.
A poor ground may be worse than no ground since it

gives a false feeling ofsafety to thoseworking aroundthe
equipment. It ^buld also be of sufficient capacity to
handle any abnormal condition that might occur on the
system and should be independent of the grounds,used
for any other apparatus.

CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSES

If battery is installed remote from the switchgear, have

FPEECON* CLASS 1330

cables of sufncient size to keep the voltage drop at a

DUAL ELEMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSES

100,000 AMP RMS A.C.

minimum.

INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

Be sure battery is charged and no abnormal loads are
evident before putting switchgear in service.

Ampere'

Catalog #-2S0V

WIRING

ECN-1
ECN-3.2
ECN-d.25
ECN-10
ECN-15
ECN-20

All incoming and. outgoing control connections
should be made i» accordance with the switchgear sche

matic and wiring diagrams. Afier wiring is completed,,
all connections should, be carefully checked against the
diagrams to insure that all coimections are correct and'

proper.

ECN-25

The wiring diagram number of each switchgear unit is
stamped on the nameplate of the control panel. The wir
ing diagram number applying to each circuit breaker

ECN-30
ECN-35
ECN-60

, 3.2

6.25
la
15
2B
2530'
35
60

isstam^ oneach breaker onthe nameplate.

These fuses provide instantaneous- protection against

Interconnecting wiring diagrams between the asso
ciated equipment are not normally supplied with metalclad switchgear.

ability within the sizes listed.

short circuits plus a hi^ degree of current limiting
DUMMY BREAKER

GROUNDING
Each switchgear assembly is provided with a ground

Dununy removable elements are used as a means of
isolating drcuits or bus sections where operation is.in
frequent and a circuit breaker caimot be economically
justified for an interim of time. The deviceconsbts of a

bus extending the full length of the complete assembly.
Sections of ground bus previously discoimected at
shipping breaks must be reconnected when the units

framework to simulate the circuit breaker removable
element with a set of six studs similar to those on the

are installed.
«

breakers. The studs are connected by shorting^ bars
which are fully insulated and metal-enclosed. The sta
tionary structure is the same as for a circuit breaker.
When the device is racked into position, it connects the

The ground bus should be connected to the station
ground at both ends with as direct a connection as pos
sible and should not be run in metal conduit. The

grounding conductor should be capable of carrying the
maximum line-to-ground current for the duration of

line and load side of bus.

the fault

Under no conditions must the dummy element be

When switchgear has center aisle construction, insure
that the connecting ground bus is connected between
opposite aisle sections.

racked into or out of the cell when the bus or the unit is

ener^zed. Key interlocks are applied to insure that all
sources of power are dbconnected before the dununy
element can be operated. Floor interlocks are provided
to prevent insertion into specific ceUs.

A reliable permanent and low resistance ground con

o
INSULATION BOOTS

ON 5 AND 15KV CLASS EQUIPMENT,BUS BAR JOINTS
ARE INSULATED-WITH MOLDEDtBUS BAR BOOTS.
THE BOOT IS:PULLED IN PLACE AROUND THE .BUS

BAR/JOINT. AFTER FITTING, HOLES ARE PUNCHED
FOR CLEARANCE OF THE NYLON HARDWARE.

NOTE; CHECK BUS BOLT TORQUE BEFORE ASSEMBLING BOOTS.

=NpTE V; PUNCH 9/32 OIA. HOLES AND ATTACH WITH NYLON HARDWARE.
TIGUREU

faults. These transformers are normally installed in a
horizontal position directly above or below the primary
cable terminals, so that the primary cable or cables can
pass through them. One transformer is required for
each three-phase circirit.

TAPED CONNECTIONS

For taped connections use materials as listed in taping
instructions. Fig. 12. Extreme care should be taken in
taping unusual contour joints with vinyl tape.

Where armored cable is used, the armor must be ter

minated aad grounded bd'ore the cable passes throu^

Taping a flat or a cylindrical surface such as a bus bar
or cable is a relatively simple process in which much
the same technique is used whether the tape is paper,
cloth, or plastic. Vinyl tape may be stretched sliehtly
to help it conform to irregular contours. This is an ad<
vantage if properly understood and used correctly, but
. can be harmful if the tape is stretched unnecessarily to
make it "conform." The pressure sensitive adhesive is
not designed to withstand large sidevise (shear) forces
for a long time; and if the contour is such that the tape
tension can be relaxed by a side slippage, some slippage
will take place.

the transformer. Armor clamps are furnished for this
ptupose when spedfied.
When lead or other condiicting sheath cable, or cable
with shielding tape or braid is used, it is recorrunended
that the sheath or shield be grounded solidly to the
switchgear ground bits. The ground lead should be'
bonded to the sheath or shield on the side of the current

transformer away from the primary terminals. In cases
where the ground cannot be applied before the cable
passes through the~transformer, bond the lead to the
sheath or shield between the transformer and the pri
mary terminals. The ground conductor must then be
passed back along the side path through the current
transformer before being connected to the ground bus.
• Where potheads are used in units provided with
ground fault current transformers, the pothead mount
ings must be' insulated from groimd.

ROUND FAULT CURRENT

TRANSFORMERS (THROUGH-TYPE)
Through-type current transformers are furnished
vhere specffied for sensitive protection against ground
12

)

D
(VARNISH CAMBRIC)

DESCAIPTION

l/jNVLPtASTIC ^lOTHK
rwiDex36Y0&. tc.

ftCD ELECTRIC At TAPE

•AT EACH STEP USE S TUIWS OF TA«.

IN CASESWHERE END MUST BE BEN^_

SUFFICIENT AREA MUST BE TAPED TQ.

MASHUA CORP.

PREVENT VARNISH CAMBRIC FROM

SUMMERVItLC« NJ.

COMING LOOSE.

ELEaRICAL GLASS
TAPE-MEDIUM WEAVE

M/2*WIDE X.004THK
3G YDS* to.
BURLINGTON

'hesgon a'or equal

SECURE BRAIO WITH 2 LAPS

TAPER
AS SHOWN

(PQUrETHYLENE)

U 310 or CAN
VARNISH
STERLING VARNISH

TAPE

(NOTE 1}

SEWICKLEY.PA.

HALF-LAPPED GLASS TAPE I VARNISH
NOTE

TAPER MAY BEMAOE WITH TYPE PT PENCILING TOOL

PLM PRODUCTS, 3871 WEST I50TH ST.,CUVLAHD,OHIO

METHOD I

NON -SHIELDED CABLE TERMINATION

COVERED

WRAPWITH HALF-LAPPED LAYERS OF TAPE BEGINNING AT ONE END.

REVERSE DIRECTION AND CONTINUE APPLYING HALF-LAPPED LAYERS
MAKING ONE-HALF OF THE NUMBERS GIVEN IN CHART
THESE LAYERS
ARE APPUED WITH JUST SUFFICIENT STRETCH TO INSURE GOOD
CONFORMANCE WITH NO AIR VOIDS OR WRINKLES.Af TER THESE LAYERS

ARE APPLIED,REVERSE DIRECTION AND APPLY BALANCE OF LAYERS

LAYER OF HALF-LAPPED TAPE

15000

TYPE 4

SPLICE (BUS OR CABLE) TO C/T OR P/T

'A*

INSULATION
OVERLAP UtH

DUX-SEAL

fILL

WITH NO STRETCH.

HALF-LAPPED
VINYL TAPE

SEE CHART -A"

Z
4

ALSO MINIMUM EXTENSION OF BUS
INSULATION THRU SUPPORT TO
ALLOW SPECIFIED OVERLAP OF TAPE

COVERED

PAD JOINTS (BOLT HEADS

PER TYPE 4

PAO JOINT AND BOLT HEADS
PER TYPE 4

PAD JOINT AND BOLT
HEADS PER TYPE 4

BUB SUPPORT
HALF-LAPPED TAPE
SECOND

TYPE 3

TAPE OVER
SECOND RING

BUS SPLICE
TYPE 7

TYPE S

*T' BUS & CABl-E TP BUS
TAPING INSTRUCTIONS

FIGURIW

BUS-FLEXIBLE CONNECTORPORCELAIN TERMINAL

CABLE TO

PORCELAIN TERMINAL

PAItr III - PRE ENERGIZATION TESTS
TABLED

PREPARATION

DIELECTRIC TEST VALUES

BEFORiE STARTING ANY INSPECTION OR TEST
ING BE SURE PRIMARY CIRCUITS ARE DEENERGIZED.

60 Cycle
Rated

Careful reference should be made to each component

Voltage

instruction leaflet before attempting to place the switchgear in servii%. If dry-type or oil askarel-fllled -power
transformers are furnished as part of the switchgear
equipment, consult their instruaion books or leaflets,
particularly regarding absorption of moisture, and

Standard
Full-Wave

Impulse
KV
Factory Test (Withstand)
Tests KV

600 V
4.16 kV

7.2 kV

effects of dust and sand, etc.

13.8 kV

The equipmentshould be checked to be certain no tools
or any other equipment have been left in the switchgear.

23
34.5

When coimections are to be made to or from an electric

kV
kV

1.6
14.25
.27.0
27.0
45.0
60.0

2.2
19
36
36
60
80

NA60
95
95
150
150

HGURE13

utility, public or privately-owned, consult their -repre
sentatives very early in the construction period, as
many of them have very strict requirements which must

When the switchgear has electrically operated circuit
breakers, they are operated in some installations from
local battery or auxiliary control supply, and in other
installations are operated from the switchgear bus, or
a connection ahead of the incoming master circuit
breaker. In the event the primary source of power is
locked open, it will be necessary to use an auxiliary
source of power to operate the circuit breakers, lamps,
bell-alarm switch, undervoltage devices, rectifiers,
capacitor shunt trips, etc. Check circuit breakers in
"test" and "operate" positions, paying particular atten
tion to good contact between movable stationary secon
dary contacts in both positions. Check puffer by placing
hand over arc chute and feeling puff of air during open
ing operation. Check that primary disconnect penetra

be met before service connections will be made.

Any indication of moisture will require that equipment
be dried out before placing in service. Care should be
exercised in diying-out operations to be certain that the
maYimiim temperature during the drying period does
not exceed70 to 75° C. on switchgear. In the event it is
desired to give the equipment a high potential test be_ fore placing in service, thb test should only be made
after the equipment is thoroughly dry. The value of
test voltage should correspond to the voltages listed
• "inTable B. Note that field tests are 75% of the factory
•

KV
Field Test

60 Cyde

test values.

tion is at least 14" on cell stabs. Check that breaker

DIELECTRIC TESTS
Dielectric tests are made at the factory to determine

mechanism closing springs discharge between "test" and
"removed" positions.
'
i
interlocks should be operated manually to make

the adequacy of insulation. Devices used as part of
switchgearassemblies shall be capable of meeting these

sure that protection is complete. Remove spare Iceys to
supervisory office.

tests.

Exception — There is certain apparatus such as poten

Each relay and trip device or other component should
be operated manually to be certain its contacts perform
their required function. Removeany material that was
installed at the factory to block parts or devices during
shipment. Preliminary settings for test purposes should
be applied to relays. The various operational functions

tial transformers, auto transformers, motor starting,
reactors, and motor-operated devices whose standards

call for a lower test voltage than those given in Table B.
When such devices are used, they must be disconnected
during these tests.

are indicated on the schematics and wiring diagrams of.
the switchgear equipment.

AltematingP.n.qoN ~ HSElffiRA^ TDBLIC

I
t

/General public "is all persons," without" exception, who'are not
-'qualified in accordance with Section 2.
o

. .*1 ^ fV.'

Gener^ public includes unqualified persons who might be authorized
,by reason of *enq>loymBnt or-conditions to havec access to the area;T
^of.Tpower switchgear. Examples are pluxnbers, janitors, owners,..etc.

'"ggMjpm T^tsotr •

^. ••;r;'

-•

'^dporsthe' purpose:of this bulletin,:^ qualified person is oneV^xo is

I :B^^5^-#s/?:i'iihoroughly trcdned, eind :understands the hazards involved in any area,
his responsibility, such as constructioa,:^ ^

rm ^ •rtpf^ya-hinn And, mai nj^finange of switChgear appeuratUS".. C
InVadditiCTi, he has th following qualifications:;
-2;' ; . r—• (1). Is able to de-i-energize, .clear and tag^circuits and.
:
equipment in accordance with established safety
' practices.
'
(2) Wescrs. protective equipment such as nibber gloves, hard
hat, dark glasses, flash-clothes, etc.,. in accordance
• with- established safety practices, and is trained in
their proper care.

(3)' Is certified in rendering first aid, especially in the
technique of removing- a person in contact with a JLive
circuit, and-in. applying artifieal respiration.

*V ;

tu-'m

GBtoftL INSTRUCTIONS TO QUALIFIED PERSCBTSr

Qualified persons shall work only on equipment that is completely
de-energized from all sources of electric power, including control
power.

A. Understand the Equipment - - Qualified persons shall leam
and understand instruction infoinnation furnished.

B. Clearing Equipment for Work - - Qualified persons shall
consider all circuits and equipment as l i ^ at all times
until .completely de-energized, tested, grounded, tagged
or properly identified, jand released for work in an
authorized manner.

C. Cleaning of Equipment No cleaning .or similar work shall
be done
qualified personnel within -the reach of parts or

equipment unless they have been de-energized and prepared
for work in accordance with (B) above.^

D. Working Alone — - Where Permitted — - Whi^ alonf, a qualified
person shall do no cleaningw^or other work inside compartments
;•

•

or Compartment-doors and cc«rers unless the, equipment toJse .

•worked on has been de-energa^ed and prepared for work in
-accordance with (B) above.

Carrying Equipment and Tools - - Qualified personnel sha^ll

at all times be aware of the hazards associated with carrying
and placing equipment and tools such as ladders, brooms,, mops,
lamp holders, tool belts,; tool boxes, keys, etc., in places.,
where circuits may become energized.
F. Removing Tools - - Qualified personnel s^ll exercise care
in not leaving tools or keys on buses, doors, panels,
equipment cases or tanks, rotating machines and in or on
compartments.

INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

Removal from Carrier and Inspection for Damage

Moving and Lifting Switchgear...

Storage Before liibiuliation

Alignment of Foundation

6.
7.

Equipment Insiaiiation
Breaker Lifting Devices

3
3

Batteries

11.

Outdoor Switchgear
Wiring
Grounding

3
3
3

12.

Ground Dettctlon

13. Control Circuit Fuses

10.

•••

14.

Tightening Connections

15.

Pqlestiglas Insulation

Getting Ready for Service

8
PART II
MAINTENANCE

1. Maintenance Benefits and Facilities

A. Maintenance Program
B.

Maintenance Records

C. Maintenance Test

D. Maintenance Equipmen.

2. Frequency of Inspection

3. Safety Practices

4. Maintenance Program for Switchgear
A. Metal-Clad Stationary Units
B. Medium Voltage Powet Circuit Breakers
C. Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

5. 600V Metal-Enicloi^ Accessories

6- 2.4 and 13.2KV Metal-Clad Accessories

7. Miscellaneous Switchgear Accessories
8, List of Equipment Instruction Books

The switchgear is assembled, wired, adjusted and given
complete tests at the factory, after which it is inspected
and packed for shipment. The air circuit breakers are not
shipped in the switchgear compartments, but are packed
in separate crates. Each crate is identified, and u com

pletelist of its contents is included in the shipping papers.
All instruments and relays are suitably blocked to pievent damage to bearings and movements.
REMOVAL FROM CARRIER & INSPECTION
FOR DAMAGE

Immediately upon receipt of the shipment, identify all
component parts and check them against the shipping list."
.Make a thorough examinationto detect any damage which

may have heen incurred during transit.
If any damage is discovered, file a claim immediately with
the carrier, and send notice of the extent of the damage
to the Federal Pacific Electric Company plant from which
shipment was made, giving complete ideuiification, car
rier's name and railroad car number if the shipment was
made by rail.

Switchgear equipment, r^ardiess of whether it is to be .

installed immediately or stored for a while before being erected, should be kept in a dry, clean place. Conditions .
such as dampness caused by rain or change in tempera
ture, cement dust, etc.,should becarefully guarded against. '
Covering the equipment with a temporary shelter ot tar
paulin is frequently necessary both during storage and .
erection. The longer the period of storage, the greater
must be the care taken for protection of the equipment.

Il| is advisable to place electric strip heaters or lamps

within enclosures to raise temperature approximately
10 degrees above outside temperature at all limes.

Crated apparatus which is not to be erected immediately
will store much better if left crated. It should, however,

be inspected to make sure that no damage has been in-

. curred during transit.

When arrangements are made prior to shipment, electric
strip heaters circuit can be taketi out of crate so that'

heaters can be energized while switchgear equipment re
mains in the crates.

The information wilt enable the compan) to supply nec

ALIGNMENT OF FOMNDaTION

essary information in support of claim.

Federal Pacific metal switchgear is accurately built on
true and level bedplates. This care and accuracy insures
ease of operation and interchangeability. Equal care in '

MOVING AND LIFTING SWITCHGEAR

1. The importance cannot be overstressed regarding the
care in handling, rigging, hoisting, roiling or moving
assembled switchgearinto place. Metal-clad switchgear
is designed to be handled only in ai. upright position
and should never be handled in any other way with
out first consulting with switchgear headquarters de
sign section.

2. Each shipping section of indoor switchgear is bolted
to a heavy shipping skid which should remain with
the gear until it is moved into final location. Each
section of outdoor gear is supplied with heavy lifting
lugs bolted to switchgcai' base.

3. When lifting shipping units with a crane, it is prefer
able to use two hooks simultaneously, one on each
end. Each pair of lifting hooks should be equipped
with a spanner bar to prevent excessive distortion.
If only a single hook crane is available, arrange spaiiner to lifting rig as shown on typical outdoor gear
drawing 2200-0114. Lifting from front and rear of
units permits placing shipping sections side by side
for bolting without interference from lifting rig or
hook.

4. When cranes are not available, equipment can be
rolled into place on shipping skids provided with each
shipping section. Pushing or pulling forces should be
applied to the skid and not the Switchgear.

5. Shipping skids can be removed by using a foot jack

installation should be used.

A true and level floor for this equipmei.i is of utmost
importance. Alittle more than ordinary care in laying out •
and prepaiing the foundation will be repaid in reduction
of cost and labor of installation.

The steel supporting members used in the floor should be
held lev<"l until the concrete is set. The surface of the

floor under the housing should not project above the sup
porting member.

The floor in front of the housing shuuld not, vary more
than Yti" in any square yard and must not project above

the level of the supporting members. The heticr this floor
is finished the easiei will be the rolling of the removable
breaker unit.

When installing metal-clad switchgear on existing floors '

it will usually be desirable to pour a new finish floor with

embedded channels or cut slots for embedditig and level
ing the supporting channels.

Encircling loops of reinforcing or building steel around

single phase conductor should be avoided in .the areas
marked foi main cables—when these circuits are rated at
600 amperes or above.

One of these methods or its equivalent must be used to

obtain an adequate foundation. Fig. 2 and 3 tack welding

equipment to floor channels is preferred since this method
does not require accurate lining up of bolts.

in each corner of the shippingsection aftei tlie switchgear has been moved to its final location.
STORAGE BEFORE INSTALLATION

Protection against loss of equipment is an important pre
caution. Trouble and delay will be avoided by having
good storage facilities arranged so that the apparatus will
be accessible only to authorized persons and so that it

t). HOLES PROVIDED IH SWGR.

2" HOLES ON
FOR

CHANNa OK PLUG
WELD SW'GR. TO
..CHANNa IRON.

THEN POUR IN CONCRETE.

can be quickly located when required in the erection
program.

Vj-16 TAP IN

BASE FOR WELDING (PREFERRED)
OR BOLTING. SUGGEST W HOWE.
SEE FLOOR PUN FOR LOCATION.

'/4" PUTS WELDED
BETWEEN EUNGES

UNDER ^ROUTING HOLES.
FIG. #2

OST-S-79 TO 5-240,1200 4.

86-

2000

OST-9-ISOTO S-2S0, 20004.

26-

5800

OST-tS-ISO TO 15-500.1200

36-

4000

AND 2000 4.

NOTE *APPBO«IMATE WEIQMTS DO HOT INCLUOt BBtAKES

OF LIFTJWO
COWOU^T OR

SOGCeST WElOtNC
BOLTING

DETAIL V
CONDUIT OR
CABLE SPACE

BREAKER OAAWOUT AREA

ACCeSS^OPENlNG
SECURING ANGLE
SUGGEST WetOING OR

DETAIL "B*
WECOMMENDEO METM003 OF J>HCHQHINB
CONCRETE RAO AND LEVELING CHANNELS TO BE SURAUEO ST CUSTONER
UNLESS OTMERWISE SPECIFIED.

RECOUUENOEO NETHODS Of ANCHORING ARE SHOWN IN DETAILS 'A' B'a'
The units UAY be bolted, welded or anchored to the CH«MNfL.

SUGCEST 1/1 INCH HARDWARE FOR BOLTING. (HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOUER I
PHDHWAL

PACIWtC

WLMTWIO

CHiMVELS SHOUID BE l-EVEl.

WITH EACH OTHER ANO LEVEL OVER THEIR

ENTIRE LENGTH I RECOUUENDED SIZE OF CHANNEL
~~ neCCMUENOEO HETHOO-W LIFTtNe

FINISHED

4-X».AiP/FTI

FLOOR SHOULD NOT BE HIGHER Than LEVELING CHANNELS'

an;- SHOULO ALSO HAVE SLIGHT PITCH AWAY FRON CH4KNEI.S.

cOUIPMENT INSTALLATION

Th'- '••iring diagram number of each Switchgear unit is

A. li'-fiirt veiling pquipmeni in place, refer to switch-

f-l?•• ;

b-<8V(J driavings and, after completely uncrating equip:n'n:, check permanent [oration to see that equipment
;r every
swikiigear installation. It should he of sufficient capacity
to handle any .abnormal condition that might occur on
the systemand should be independent of the grounds used
for any other apparatus.
A- permanent low resistance ground is essential for ade
quate protection. A poor ground may be worse, than no
ground siiice it gives a false feeling of safety to those
working around the equipment.

A. For 600 volt gear it is recoinnicuctj ihut a device for
lifting and lowering FP-25 and FP-50 brcakctj .u and
from the breaker compartments be used. For indoor
switchgear it is recommended that the purchasoi i.isiall a
monorail crane over the front of the switchgch,, ci Federa! Pacific c.m supply a hydraulically operated lift-truck
as an additional item of equipment. For outdooi .switchgear a special hydraulic lift-truck can be supplied (see
Index (or Accessories).
B. FP-75 breakers are furnished with a lifting spreader,
which provides a ready method of placing the breakers
in their compartments when a crane'is being used.

The .simplest method for two-wire single-phase systems is
to connect two clear filament lamps of the system voltage

BATTERIES

in series across the two wires with a ground connection
between the two lamps. A ground on one side will short-

Follow battery manufacturer's instructions carefully when
installing the battery. Be sure that ventilation is provided
to carry off the fumes. If steelwork seems to be affected

by the fumes," apply black asphaltum paint.
Make sure that the battery charger is functioning, and
that the charging rate is not excessive, lest for specific
gravity regularly.

GROUND DETECTION

On ungrounded low voltage systems (up to 600 volts AC)
new switchgear equipment quite often does not include
ground detection lamps or voltmeters. Nevertheless it i.s

quite important to check for grounds in the system at
intervals.

circuit and darken the lamp on that side. The same gen
eral scheme is used for multi-phase systems.
For higher voltages, use potential transformers, or
static ground detectors.
CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSES

If battery is installed remote from the switchgear, have
cables of sufTicienl size to keep the line drop at a mini

FPE ECON CLASS 1330

DUAL'ELEMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSES
100,000 RMS INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

If porcelain entrance or load bushings are mounteu in the
roof, use flexible connections from incoming and out
going lines to reduce the strain on the porcelains.

ECS-1

ECN-3

ECS-3

ECN-6
ECN-10
EC.\-15
ECN-20

Small-wiring underground conduit from the control build

ing should terminate inside the switchgear at a level

above any existing high-water marks.
Healers are furnished in front and rear of each unit.

ECS-10
ECS-IS

ECS-20

ECS.25
ECS-30
ECS-60

These Fuses provide dual proteciion.
WIRING

All incoming and outgoing control connections should be
made in accotdance with the switchgear schematic and
wiring diagrams. After wiring is completed, all connec

tions should be carefully checked against the diagrams to
insure that all connections are correct and proper.

1. Time delay protection against unnecessary blowouts
from high inrush currents of breakei solenoid coils
and control power transformers.
2.

Instantaneous protection against short circuits plus a
high degree of current limiting ability within the sizes
listed.

cent bus work also be waxed to'prevent spill or splashing

TlGHTENtNG CONNECTIONS

j Sus.sp'"''^ •'1' shipping break should be.carefully in-

.•ipecled lo be certain that good clean contact is ob

tained liefore bolting up tight, Torque* wrench should

be used.

2—It is important also to be sure that all outgoing cable

connections are tigiitened in the same manner as
bus splices.
Recommended Torque Values

casting compound from sticking to adjacent' surfaces.
Care should be taken to. be certain that n-.- wax is used

where adhesion is reqiiirerl. The fo-'.m mole!, when re
moved from the joint, may be rcysrj j'r.jviding it is
rewaxcd. it is imporlanl that all vent hob.-;- he kept rican
in t/ie compound boxes or foam molds lo prevent the
entrapment of air which will result in voids in themolding.
The entire process for assembling the mold and mixing
the Folestiglas, takes somewhat less than 15 minutes. For
the resin lo become solid may lake from ouc to four
hours, depending on the ambient temperature. It is ad
visable. however, when using the foam removable type
molds, to check with a sciew driver or a pencil, the sur

*ui>|iliiTs fur rulclirl un liux tuniii'- wrindu-:', Waldrick
Kiigr. Co.. I'.O. IV.I .?y8, HuiiliriKior, >;;ulic'.i, Ni w Yoik. .\nd tin; •
P. S. Slurtfvanl Comiianj. Adiiisuo. illiiniis.

face of the Polestiglas to see if the material has hardened,
before removing the mold. The material as supplied, will
have a viscosity, such that if mixed properly will com
plete its reaction, making a joint that is non-tracking,
corona resistant, and non-hydroscopic.

"POLESTIGLAS" INSULATION

(For !5Ki'' clasx only except when otherwise specified)
It is standard manufacturing practice wheie piatin al lo
insulate all electrical joints except shipping breaks at trie
factory before shipment. Federal Pacific Electric Co.'s

In operations with other than standard compound boxes
type Number 1 and Number 2, communicate with the
factory for specifications. Field experience will indicate
that boxes can be made in either horizonl.il or vertical

planes. Folestiglas mix can be supplied as a patching

exclusive Folestiglas flame relardent and non-tracking
molded and cast materials arc used throughout. Where it

compound or filler for small voids, etc.

is impractical to use cast on insulation such as on an
outgoing cable connection, flame relardent Polyvinyl tape
is supplied.

TAPED CONNECTIONS

Instructions for assembling and compounding bus joints,
transformer connection etc., with "Folestiglas" insulating
compound arc—

For taped connections use materials as listed on attached
instruction sheet, using copper meeh and conductive tape
as shown. Extremecare should be taken in taping unusual
contour joints with vinyl tape.

"Folestiglas" is a two part resin system. It is shipped in
separate containers, so that the catalyst, which is about
19' by weight of the resin, when completely stirred and
mixed can he poured directly from the large container
into the compound box mold.

Taping a fiat or a cylindrical surface such as a bus bar
or cable is a relatively simple pinress in which much the
same technique b used whether the tape is paper, cloth,
film or plastic. The tape lies tnitiirally in a spiral, and

Casting compound is supplied in separate containers—
each container of compound and container of catalyst,
when mixed, will fill one compound box.

a tape with some elongation so that wrinkles are not
created. This property is also u-sefui in guiding the tape
to maintain the proper overlap. \ inyl tapes possess this
elongation lo an exceptional degree. Combined with it is
a "memoiy" in the tape which causes it to contract after
application and pull down to a snug fit, mininiii:ing voids
or other irregularities in the insulation. This is an ad
vantage if properly understood and used coriectly, but
can be harmful if the tape is stretched unnecessarily to
make it "conform" to certain contours. The pressure
sensitive adhesive is not designed to withstand large sidewise (shear) forces for a long time; and if the contour
is such that the tape tension can he relaxed by a side
slippage, some slippage will take place.

The identification number of the material supplied with
each joh is as follows:

Field joints with compound boxes.

Current Transformer^ etc

Picture Number 1 - . . shows the standard assembly of
a bus joint with compound box. Assemble compound box
as indicated in picture 2, mix resin and catalyst in line
with instructions furnished with material, and described

above, and pour, as illustrated in picture 3, up to the top
of the mold. This material will then set to a hard non-

hydroscopic mass. The black compound box is left in

there are no problems of conformance. However, when a

small degree of irregularity is present, it b helpful to use

Many surfaces requiring insulation-stress cones, for in
stance—are of such shape that they cannot be wra|^>ed
spirally without excssive stretching of the tape. Usually
in such cases a taping method can be devised thai will

position in this operation, and is not removed. The final

make use of the "men.ory" or "regain" characteristics of
the tape lo insure proper insulation.

is filled with Polestiglas.

If the surface is developable (capable of being covered fay
a flat sheet without stretching), it is always possible to

joint looks exactly as picture 3, with .the exception that it
An alternate method of making compound boxes in the
field is illustrated in picture 4, where a foam mold is
supplied. This foam mold is supplied as a unit, and is
clamped lo the joint that is to be insulated. The foam

mold should be waxed inside with Johnson's paste wax
before it is assembled on the joint. It is recommended
that the outside surface of the compound box and adja

apply the tape in such a way t.hnt there are no forces

tending to make it slip sidewise. This is done by wrap
ping along the geodesies of the surface (lines of shortest

distance between two points.) The general principle is
that of letting _the tape lay itself on tlie surface to be
covered; if necessary, the tape can be cut several times
for some surfaces.

.' 'h' "'•-. ' • ••'-*•
ir-'i.

" ii; ,

^i ' ••;. '-:C:;:!^":'V;^

TAPiNG INSTRUCTIONS
(from ORAWINO Z7SI-04A2.j

a ROLLS

DESCRIPTION

ISO- 100

VINYL PLASTIC ELECTRICAL TAPE 1 INCH
WIDE X 36 YARDS LG. FLAME RETARDCNT

002-009 1 4 INCH WIDE KNtTTED COPPCA MESH.

15 FEEr

THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS SHOULD 8E FOLLOWED IN TAPING ALL
main connections as required on SWITCHGEAR.

kEM

PART NO.

1CARBON
SLACK^^,0£
BIASjg SEMI-CONOUCTlVE
1
72 yards long

1/2 ROLL

LAYER OF HALF-LAPPED TAPE.'

WRAP WITH HALF-LAPPED LAYERS OF .010 TAPE BEGINNING

SEE table -A'

AT ONE END. REVERSE DIRECTION AND CONTINUE APPLYING
HALF.LAPPEO LAYERS MAKINO ONE-HALF OF THE NUMBERS

ORDtRlNC

INSTRUCTIONS

GIVEN IN TABLE "A". THESE LAYERS ARE APPLIED WITH JUST
sufficient STRETCH TO INSURE GOOD CONFORMANCE WITH

NO AIR VOIDS OR WRINKLES. AFTER THESE LAYERS ARE APP

UAT.SPCCinEOlN
GRP. 51 WILL MAKE
KV. AMPERAGE
THE FOLLOWING
AMOUNT OF CONNS.

LIED. REVERSE DIRECTION AND APPLY BALANCE CFLAYERS
WITH NO STRETCH.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER
COVERED BUS

CABL£ INSULATION
HALF-LAPPCO TAPE

FOR STRESS RELIEF CONES

REFER TO THE RECOMMENDATION OF THE

I UNIT CCNSrcrs of material

COKNECTIONS

r'ALSO MINIMUM exTCNSION OF BUS
INSULATION THRU SUPPORT TO ALLOW

ifn^S'^ECinEO OvrQtAP oF TAPE.

SEE FIG
CURRENT

TRANSFORMER

I
Ifl
-BUS

PAD JOINT AND
BOLT HEADS WITH COPPER
MESH FOLLOWED BY I LAYER
HALF-LAPPED CONDUCTIVE TAPE

AT EACH GTEP USE 3 TURNS
OF TAPE. IN CASES WHERE END

PREVENT
VARNISH CAMBRIC FROM COMING
LOOSE.

SEMI - CONDUCTIVE
TAPE (ITEM 3)

SEE FIG. 4

MUST BE BENT. SUFFICIENT AREA

WITH 2 LAPS
OF TAPE 150-

'BUS BAR TO DISCONNECT

INSULATED WIRE TO
BUS CONNECT/ON

{folyethylene)

SWtTCH STUD CONNECTION

potential transformer
etc. cable
TERMINATION

KOTE;#l-TsMr WT to

«flth

•W peBtlling tel. product of

Pioducti, 3871 Wort
r/^ V;'••

POTENTIAL TRANSrORUER
CONNECTION IN BUS JOINT
COMPOUND
BOX

WITH COPPER MESH FOLLOWED
BY I LAYER HALF-LAPPEC
CONDUCTIVE tape.

MANUFAGTUfttft.

UNITS

HEAVY DUTY
I2O0 AMP.

1 UNIT CONSISTS OF MATERIAL
FOR 3 CONNECTIONS

Table 'a*

PAD JOINT AND BOLT HEADS

FIG. 2.CABLE CONNECTION
NOTE;

' On 5KV class equipmcn! electrical joints are insulated with
molded bus bar hoots. The boot is pulled in place around the
bus bar joint. After htting two (or three as conditions require)
holes are punched for clearance of the 10-32 nylon hardware.

(Insulation boots can be applied to I.IKV class when phase
to phase clearance is 7" min. and phase to ground clearance
is 6" min. If rodgap situation is present increase dimensions
by 1 inch.)

id . C

"Vi!..

TYPICAL BAR CONNECTIONS
TAP

l-Mi X3 MAIN, l-VL' X3 TAP

33C0A0042

\-Vi X6 MAIN, )-Vi X3 tAP

.3300A0046

I-Vj X 6 MAIN, 2-M! x 3 TAP

I-Vj X3 MAIN, l-i/j X 3 TAP

3300A0044

3307A3239

I-Vj X 6 MAIN, I-M: X 3 TAP

33(X)A0047

• 3308A3239

1-i/S ? 6 MAIN. 2-'/j X3 TAP

3300A0053

3309A3239

l-% X 6 .MAIN, l-Vi X 6 TAP

RIGHT ANGLE WITH DEAD END
DETAIL

1-% X3 MAIN, 1-¥j X3 TAP

•330OAOOte

BOOT

3307A3239

1-1^ X 6 MAIN, 1-V> X 3 TAP

3300A0b48'

33iD8A3239

1-% X 6 MAIN, 2-V4 X 3 TAP

NOTE "A": 3 EA 10-32 x 1" LG RD HD NYLON SCREENS AND
10-32 HEX HD NYLON NUTS SUPPLIED WITH EACH BOOT

•:fmhA

f •• .".MG nSADY FOR SERVICE
rcA rcnce should be made to each component in•iirrir.'ion I' -iilct before attempting to place the switchgear
in
if Irv-type or oil or askarel-filled power transforinors are furnished as part of the switchgear equip
ment. consult their instruction books or leaflets, particu

larly regarding absorption ofmoisture, and eflfects ofdust

The equipment .should be checked to be certain no tools
on any other equipment have been left in the switchgear.
When connections are to be made to or from an Electric

Utility, [ uhlic.or privately owned, consult their represen
tatives V-TV early in the construction period, as many of
them have very strict requirements which must be met
before service connections will be made.

and sand, etc.

Any indication of moisture will require that equipment

OPERATIONAL TESfiNG

be dried out before placing in service. Care sliuuld be

Upon completion of installation, and inspection of the cir
cuit breakers and other components, together with instal
lation of any incoming and outgoing control connections,
it is time to start operational testing. Outgoing feeder

exercised in drying-out operations to be certain that the

maximum temperature during the drying period docs not

exceed 70 to 75 degrees centigrade on switchgear. In the

event it is desired to give the equipment a high potential
test before placing in service, this test should only be
made after the equipment is thoroughly dry, allowing
approximately 10 days drying time. The value of test

voltage should correspond to the voltages listed below.
DIELECTRIC TESTS

The following dielectric tests shall be made to determine
the adequacy of insulation. Devices used as part of sw itchgear assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following
dielectric tests.

Exception—^There is certain apparatus such as pclenlial
transformers, auto transformers, motor starting reactors,
and motor-operated devices the standards for which call
for lower test voltage than those given below. When such

devices are used, they may be disconnected during these
tests.

Alternating-current test voltage shall have a crest value

equal to 1.41 times thevalues specified. A sine wave shape

is recommended. The frequency shall not be less than the

rated frequency of the apparatus tested. The test voltage

shall be applied for one minute.

Direct-current test voltage, if used in lieu of alternaciiigcurrent test voltage, shall be 1.41 times the specified altei/^>nBting-current voltage.
A. Equipment Rated 60 Volts and Below

That part of assembled equipment rated 60 volts or less

shall withstand an altemating-curreni voltage tesi of SCO
volts.

B. Equipment Rated 61 to 600 Volts

Alternating-current assembled equipment and alternatingcurrent circuits of equipment of higher rated voltage
rated 61 to600 volts shall withstand an alternating-current
voltage test of 1000 volts plus twice rated voltage, witii

a minimum of 1500 volts. Factory Test. When assembled

in field and connected, test voltages should be 75% of

factory test value.

cables should not be connected at start of test.

If it is a Power Center with Power Transformer and highvoltage di.sconnect or interrupter switch ahead of the

switchgear, lock the switch in the open position in order
to protect the test operator.
r
Similarly if it is a generating station, the generator
breaker should be locked opeu.
If there are low voltage manual breakers, they may be
, checked in "test" and "operate" positions. Extreme care
should be taken that all contacts and housing switches
(if any) align properly.

When the switchgear has dectrically operated circuit
breakers, they are operated in some installaiiona from
local battery or auxiliary control supply, and in other
installations are operated from the switchgear bus, or a
connection ahead of the incoming master circuit breaker.
In the event the primary source of power is locked open,
it will be neces-sary to use an auxiliary source of power
to operate the circuit breakers, lamps, belbalarm switch,
undervoltage devices, rectifiers, capacitor shunt trips, etc.
Check circuit breakers in "test" and "operate" positions,
paying particular attention to good contact between mov

able and stationary secondary contacts in both positions.
Key Interlocks should he operated manually to makesure
that protection is complete. Remove spare keys to super
visory office.

Preliminary settings for test purposes should be applied
to relays. The various operational functions are indicated
on the schematic and wiring diagrams of the switchgear
equipment.

After completion ofall operational tests, all relays should

be set. All trip indicators on the relays should be checked
to see that they function properly.
•-

C. Equipment Rated 601 to 2399 Volts—
Alternating Current

Alternating-current asseunbled equipment rated 601 to

Upon completion of device settings and tests, the main

incoming and feeder cables should be properly phased

2399 volts shall withstand an alternating current voltage
test of 20(W volts plus 2^ times rated voltage. When
assembled in field and connected, test voltages should be

75% of factory value.

strain off studs ofcircuit breakers and porcelain supports

D. Equipment Rated 2400Volts Alternating-Current

The entire switchgear structure shdud be carefully vacuum

and Above

DotedVeltoge
KV

2.4
4.16
7.2
13.8
14.4
23

34.5

Standunl
Full-Wave

60 Cytio KV
Field Conn.

60 CyeloKV
Facloty

11-25
14.25
27.0
27.0
37.50
45.0
60.0

15
19
36
36
50
60
80

Impuhe

IWIIhtland)
Tetli KV

45
60
95
95
110
150
200

out and connected to the switchgear. Incoming and out
going cables should be braced so as to take mechanical

of various types.

cleaned (preferred) or blown out, and all rear and side
plates that have been removed should be rebolted in

place. All secondary and power connections should ^

tested for grounds with high potential tester or merger.
Megger readings of one megohm per thousand volts is
acceptable. If readings are lower equipment" should be
dried out until insulation resistance vdues improve to
one megohm per thousand volts." Preferable readings are
Operating Voltage KV 1.2 2.5 5.0 8.66 15
Insulation Resistance
12 25 50 150 300
Megohm at 25

•Sir

A preventive maintenance program is outlined for me
dium-voltage, metal-clad type switchgear, low voltage

After the switchgear has been serviced and adjusted,
its operation should be checked before it is returned

metal-enclosed switchgear, and air-magnetic powei c-licuit

to service. This can be best done by putting the
breaker in the test position and operating it wWb

breakers. The outline lists benefits to be derived, recorda,
tests and facilities required, and inspection and servicing

its associated control and protective devices. If it is

steps.

desired to lest the breaker outside its compartment,

use the nine-foot test-jumper drawing #3352-0017
supplied with the switchgear.

MAINTENANCE BENEFITS AND FACatTiES

Basic elements are outlined for a maintenance program

D. MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

of switchgear installations.
A. MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Adequate maintenance equipment ^ould include:

I. Spare parts for at least those parts of the switchgear
that are vital to continued operation. Manufacturer's

A well executed program has these benefits;

1. Longer life of switchgear and fewer replacements.
2. Reduced time on repairs and overhauls, and the op
tion of scheduling them at an opportune time.

3. Fewer failures with unexpected outages.
4. Timely detection of any imdesirable o^ratingco.iditions which require correction.

5. Improv^ plant performance and increased operating
economies.

B. MAINTENANCE RECORDS
A file should be established and include:

1. A record of all installed switchgear and its mainte

recommended list of spare parts can be used as a

guide in combination with operating experience to
determine variety andquantity of parts to bestocked..
2.

A well-lighted shop equipped with following;
a. A test cabinet for air magnetic breakers or an
inspection rack. '

b. Maintenance closing device for power breakers.
c. Test jumperfor connecting breaker to control cir
cuit when it is outeide its compartment.

d- Relay test plugs for making tripping, timing and
e.

calibration tests of relays.
A selection of ammeters, voltmeters and instru
ment transformers.

An insulation resistance tester.

An overhead crane or hydraulic lifting device.

nance schedule.

FREQUENCY OF INSPEaiON

Nameplate data of the equipment and its major com

It is generally good practice to inspect equipment three

and drawings.

spect and maintain it every one. to three years depending
on its service and operation conditions. This suggest^

ponents, instruction books, renewal parts bulletins

A list of all items which have to be inspected and
what adjustments are to be checked.

4. A record of past inspections and test results.

to six months after it is first put in service and Aen in

schedule is only a guide. Conditions that can make more
frequent maintenance necessary are:

1. High humidity and ambient temperature, 2. corrosive

atmosphere, 3. excessive dust and dirt, 4. high repetitive

C. MAINTENANCE TESTS

Maintenance tests are applicable as indicated:
. Insulation resistance tests of the breakers and of the

duty, 5. frequent interruption of faults, 6, older equip*
ment, and 7. history on preceding inspections. .
SAFETY PRACTICES

readings and comparisons made. Deterioration of in
sulation and the need for corrective action can be

Maintenance employees must follow all recognized safety
practices, such as those contained in the National Electri- >
cal Safely Code and in company or other local safety regu
lations during maintenance. All of the units of switchgear
to be maintained must be de-energized, tested for poten^®1| pounded and tagged out before removing covers and '

sively lower after each test.

the solid insulation surrounding an energued conductor

High potential tests are not required and are not
recommended except in special circumstances, such

protection to personnel. Another example is the mainte
nance closing device, which is exactly what the name

switchgear bus can be useful in determining the con
dition of the insulation if they are made regularly.
Since definite limits cannot be given for satisfactory
insulation resistance, a record must be kept of the

r^gnized if the instrument readings are progres

as after repairs or modifications to the equipment

that included the primary circuit. When such tests
are necessary, they may be made using 75% of the

standard 60-cycle insulation test voltage for new
equipment.

barriers for acct^ to primary circuits. As is well known, .
in power apparatus should not be relied upon to provide

imphes and should never be used to close manually a'
circuit breaker that is connected to an energized circuit:

All removable devices, ^uch as the circuit breakers and
rollout potential transformeis, should be removed from •

the metal-clad switchgear hpqsing.

V. Clean silver-plated breaker primary disconnecting de

ance program for switchgear

vices. Wiether cleaned or not, lubricate devices by

•—'
*, nUllML
,„r, ri.nancf
lllC
Ilc-I" - prosram should include
.
f the
1
rthorough
11 • •

applying a thin film of slow aging, heat resistant

inspecliiin. servicing and adjustment of the totlowing
components for 2.4-13.8 KV operating service.

petrolatum.

' 5. Inspect breaker operating mechanism for loose hard
ware and missing or broken cotter pins, retaining,

A. METAL-CLAD STATIONARY UNITS

rings, etc. Examine cam, latch and roller surfaces
for damage or excessive wear.

1. Remove accumulated dust and dirt. Vacuum cleaning
is recommended.

6. Clean and relubricate operating mechanism. Use a

non-hardening grease to lubricate cams, rollers,

2. Wipe insulated buses and bus supports with a clean
cloth mobtened (when necessary) with a petroleum
solvent or similar cleaner. Wipe insulation dry after

latches and props, and pins and bearings. We recom

mend LUBRIFLATE, "AERO" grade, manufactured

by Fiske Bros. Refining Company, Newark, N. J.

cleaning.

7. Check breaker operating mechanism adjustments and
readjust as described in the instruction book. If these
adjustments cannot be made within specified toler
ances, it will usually indicate excessive wear and

3. Inspect buses and connection bars for physical dam
age, evidence of corona cutting or other conditions
that can indicate deterioration of the insulation.

4. If taping has been damaged or needs replacing fol

need for a complete overhaul.

low instructions on Federal Pacific drawing page 6.

8. Check control device for frradom of operation. Re
place contacts when badly worn or burned.

5. Inspect alignment and contacting of primary discon
necting devices, checking for signs of abnormal wear
or other damage. Note; Discoloration of the silvered
surface is not usually harmful unless caused by sul
phide deposits which can be removed by a solvent,

9. Inspect breaker control wiring for tightne^ of
connections.

10. After the breaker has been serviced, operate it slowly
with -closing device to check freedom from binding
or friction and check that contacts move to the fully
opened and fully closed positions. Check electrical
operation either in test position or rerhoved from

such as alcohol, or by silver polish.

6. Check adjustments and operation of safety shutters,
interlocks, auxiliary and limit switches.
7. Inspect all relays, contactors, switches, fuses and
other devices for correct operation.

compartnient.

8. Check tightness of anchor bolts and structure bolts,
also control connections and continuity of wiring.

C. LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS
600 VOLT AC

9. Check strip heaters and clean air filters at ventilation
openings when these are present.

The preceding information applies in nearly all details to
Low Voltage Metal Enclosed (600 Volt AC) switchgear,
both indoor and outdoor, the differences are only minor,
and are due to physical differences in the switchgear.

10. Repair damaged paint finishes.
B. MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR 600 VOLT

(AIR MAGNETIC TYPE) 2.4 TO 13.8 KV

MAXIMUM

Air magnetic type circuit breakers should be maintained

SWITCHGEAR ACCESSORIES

on the same schedule as the metal-clad units, or ever>2500 non-fault operations, of at least every six months,

Descriptipn

whichever comes first. It is also recommended that when

Part No.

"Breaker Racking-in Handle or Crank .

the normal operating duty is a combination of fault in
terruptions and repetitive operations, the breaker should
be inspected and serviced after a fault operation at or
near its interrupting rating. Remove the breaker from
its housing for inspection.

FP-25 and 50
FP-75

1101 B 9251
11.51 C5036

"Breaker Maintenance Closing Handle
FP-25 and 50

1151B 9252

FP:75(2Reg.)

1. Wipe insulating parts, including bushings and the

Breaker Extension Rails

inside of box barriers, clean of smoke and dust.

Repair moderate damage to bushing insulation by
sanding smooth and refinishing with a clear insulat

FP-75 (2 Req.)

1151 C 5214

"Breaker Emergency Charging Handle

ing varnish.

FP-75 Only

2. Inspect alignment and condition of movable and sta
tionary contacts. Check their adjustment as described

1.151 B 5349

Breaker Lift Yoke or Chain (Use With Overhead Crane)
FP-25 and 50 .

in the instruction book.

3. Check arc chutes for evidence of damage, and re
place damaged parts. When arc chutes are removed,

blow out dust and loose particles.
10

4051 A 3274

FP-75
Breaker Hydraulic Lift Truck
FP-25, 50 and 75 only
. FP-25 and 50 only •

167-002

2651 B 0200
2652 B 0200

FP.25, 50, 75 and 100

2653 B 0200

•'

,•

iViSTAL-ClAD SWITCHGEAR 2.4 TO 13.8 KV

Breaker Test Caliinct—Outdoor

:SWITCHGEAR ACCESSORIES

Specify circuit requirements

Description

Part No.

Breaker Racking-In Cranks
DST-5KV-15KV, 20", 30" &34"

D.ST-15-.SOO
DST-15-1000-.3n00A

Wide

Breakers
Non Walk-in

•Hand Closing Lever Gang Operated Di.sconnecf Switch

2252-0222

5 and 15KV (Manual ISG only)
•Arc Chute Lifting Yoke
DST-5-75.5-150

Walk-in (And right end cell is 17"
•Breaker Maintenance Closing Lever
2251-0215

1551-2826
1551-0429
1551-1693
15521693-

* Standard Accessories normally supplied with switchgear. All
other items included only where specified.

Breaker Test Jumper Cable—9 Ft. (18 Points) (Not

required when test cabinet is specified) 33K B0017

MISC. SWITCHGEAR ACCESSORIES

Closing Rectifiers — 240 V 60 cycle AC (264V Max)

•Breaker Test Jumper Cable—9 Ft. (30 Points) (Required only if test of hrkr. out of cell must include
circuit function of the auxiliary contacts)

125 volt DC intermittent duty. AC not to be applied

longer than one (1) second nor more than ten (10)
times in any one minute period.

3354 B 0017

Part No.

100 Amp4-8-1 Stock, 240V AC. 125 Volt DC 2701-0244
60 Amp 4-8-1 Stock. 240V AC.125 Volt DC 2702-0244

3351-1458
.

(except 5-350)

3352-1458

DST-15KV-30" Wide Breakers

Arc Suppression Rectifier (DST Breaker only)

3353-1458

125 volt DC—Service 1-Stack

Steel & Aluminum Bolted Cell Non-Walkin
DST.17".21" Alum. House
2251 D 2851
DST
30" Alum. House
2252 D 2851
DST-17".21" Steel House
DST
30" Steel House

087^^)04

Hook Stick For Disconiiecting Switches

2253 D 2851
2254 D 2851

30" Steel House 5350 &

15-1000
DST
30" Steel House 5350 &
15-1000

S-foot Stick

3751-0540

10-foot Stick
12-foot Stick
14-foot Stick

3752.8540
3753-0540
3754-0540

Cable Lugs, Cast Eyebolt—Dwg. 2701-0010
Cable Range

'Breaker Handling Dolly—Indoor
DST-5-75

#10W to #2W
2C to 4/oC

1551-2825
2251-0333

DST.5-250, 5-350, 15-500, 15-1000
Breaker Test Cabinet^—Indoor
(Except 15-10()0)

125VDC QoseS Trip
(4101 D 0116)

1250MCM to 1500MCM
1500MCM to 2000MCM -

27a'>-0010
27064)010

3354 D 0070

230V ACClose Cap.Trip.
(4101 D 0117) ;

Touch Up Paint

3355 D0070

Exterior outdoor dark gray ASA-24

230V AC Qo8eBll%iiyTrip
(4101 D 0115)

Interior indodr light gray ASA-61

3356 D 0070

250V DCQoseS Trip
(4101 D 3987)

230V ACGose Cap. Ttlp
(4101 D 0117)
230V ACGoseDCTVip
(4101 D 0115)

'Arc Chute Maintenance Prop

•Breaker Spring Charging (Stored Energy) Lever

DST

2751-0145

DST-15-500, 5-250
DST-5-350
DST-15-1000

Breaker otherwise use 2252-0222) 2253-0222*

DST-5KV-17" Wide Breaker Outdoor

DST-5-2S0, 5-350, 15-500 & 15-1000

3.351-0660

Cell Main Contact Wrench—15KV

DST-5KV-17" Wide Breaker Indoor &

•Breaker Outdoor Transfer Truck
DST-5KV-20" Wide Breakers
DST.5KV.30" Wide Breakers

I -1-•

48V DC Gose, Trip &Motor
(4101 D 5114)

Joint Compound Box Ordering information

3359 D0070

Box &Compound (1 Connection)

3360 D 0070

Joint Compound Box Ordering Information ViX 6t

3366 D 0070

Box & Compound (1 Connection)

2751-0470

V4 X 6 Conductors Kit

2752-()470

For Insulation Boot Ordering, .See Page7 - '•

3367 D 0070

Unit Heaters

Description
120-208 Volts, Complete Assembly,

3368 D 0070

125V DC Close, Trip &12SVAC Motor
(4104 D5U4)
3369 D 0070

115V AC Close, Motor &DC trip

X 3,

1/4 X 3 Conductors Kit

48V DC Gose, Trip &125V aC Motor
(4103 D 5114)

Finl^ S-20.

3357 D 0070

125V DCClose, Trip &Motor '
(4102 D 5114)

240-277 Volts, Complete Assembly,

3370 D0070

230V AC Close, Motor &DC Trip 3371 D 0070
. 230V AC Gose, Motor &Cap. Trip . 3372 D 0070

300-375 Watts

.
2751B 0569

120-240Volt Thermostat (Close55'F, Open65°C 1604)01
277 Volt Thermostat (Close 55'F; Open 65.°.C)
11

•

Switchgeor Indicating Lamps
Pataloi: No#

Lamps—not including color vcps.
Voltage

2754-0135
27554)135
27564)135
27574)135
2758-0135

2751.0135
27524)135
2753 0135

Indicating Lamp Parts

Spacer 1/32"
' Receptacle asseinbly, leas
Resistor, Bezel and Color

2701-0124
2751-0119

. blue

27040117
27054)117

24-E Lamp 24 V. .032-.b38

Cap.
Spring Retainer Washer

2701-0118

Instruction Books

MISC. SWITCHGEAR ACCESSORIES

600 V Air Circuit Breaker
IN-810.9
IN.810.10

FP-25 and 50
FP.7S.3000

2.4 to 13.8 KV Air Circuit Breaker

DST.15,250,500
DST.5, 150,250
DST.5-75.

IN.820.2
IN.820.2
IN.820.5

Supplement for
Stored Energy Spring
Supplement for
Stored Energy Hydraulic
Ground and Test Device

Oil Immersed Transformers
Oil & Askarel Transformers

Filtering &Testing Oil,

Enclo.«ed Switchgear
Switchgear

IB 5 050

CDGV

IB 5.051

Directional Overcurrent

CDD

IB 6260

Overvoltage and Undervoltage

VDG

Generator Differential

Immediate, Single Shot Reclosing
Multi.Shot Reclosing

Instantaneous Voltage
and Current Auxiliary

Instantaneous Overcurrent

#32956

IB 6300
•

' Transformer Differential

Type JA and JD Long Scale

Switchgear
Instruction and Maintenance of 4.16° and
13.8 Metal•>/•">• .''G'-'Ph

h..: •

•V

"•/r", •?;,,,

r-iKi • •;• V''t. ;':';^-'t.;-^s
i-r^'

5h;>
••',• fAiJi.
iiixi,

ii AAMf
I ;•

, Low Voltage Metal-EnclpsctI Switchgear with Type FP Air Circuit Breakers

•.-aaa-A'I'
.Vi»-I :T'---1t--v,v-.jA

Federal Pacific Metal-Gncloscd Switchgear is specifi- •
cally designed for use in industrial plants, commercial
buildings, and utility cpjppanies whore a high degree of

service continuity and reliability arc required. This
equipment may be anplied at 208, 240, 480, and 600 volts "
a-c witH vitejryptij.g ratini^S up to 130,000 amperes
synmit.k'h—.! vl'iO."?'! atnperes asymmetrical

circuit brcakei's having SPiCop a^npcrcs interrupting

G-"

Federal Pacific Low Voltage Switchgear utili-zes the|

most modern design'concepts providing maximum pro-''
tection to distrfbution equipment and complete safety to
*•?--'"••"•t

I-—".^nnel. With tell dooc

•All Federal Pacific circuit brokers employ. K stored „ .
energy mechanism. This permits safe closing on all . - ^

circuits because the fast closing, speed, of the circuit f-'. V.V'h

incrcas.-'s the range ot the breaker siisc n.atcan be safely '

g^r assembly, .Federal: PaoW builds a>pe PP50 air
capacity which:may be stacked foiir high. .

: ..A AA:' :-'•'ih^rr^rU

-/feu, circuit-.''

liieakers can be placed in either of three positions:

"C' ' •

Every switchgear unit incompletelyi^^ksemb^ed.andr .:^
wired priorto shipment. Rigid testing andfquality con- /vA. :

trol procedures insure cbihpliancc \rith thm £uierV rn . V

quirements and applicablQ industry .stahdarids, fnduding
•• '
those of ASA. NEMA, and IEEE.
' ' , '; '
.^' A; V
Signif.cant design improvements—primacny.iri the air • "A" ; '"

circuit breakor.'—enable Federal.Pacific to produce.rpli- AAri..;v:

able metal-enclosed switehgear^arid pm'TOit 'consjd«jib}*e4A'r' ' f/^^^
sayings in their applicatioiL
.-''AA-'AAAIA^'AAA

AA'•: A:•• •;-A-A-AAA'::A'AAA..AAAi^^
i'x'l

• .,• £'
' •••'.f-ii io u.t.4.'i -r

Low Voltage [ItetarEncfosed Swltchge^r
600 Volts a-c—25,000 to 150,GOG AiTiporss 10

'if.-! ; • "hk ;ife*vy.v!5l^" fe;?;''"- •'

•.ijs'rrr; asi'
' Kr)l

:.s:••;>'

V. -../
'}-.5.•

•

—
TT/V. '
r*
• "'' :'•.

Ceil for FP25-8dO clrcnit breakers

If-,.. ;;ivSid
fT'-vii.
'7 *••

*"•

Bjsigfiasas
, fe-i,'.

Federal Pacific Low Voltagre Switehgear utilizes the
most modern design concepts. Circuit breaker cells 'are
made of formed sheet steel and are jig-welded to insure
accurate alignment for interchangeability of circuit
breakers. Universal bolted frame conscruciion provides
the rigid steel framework for the switcbgear exterior.
Top, side, and rear bus compartments are covered by
removable steel plates. Bus bars arc heavily silver

Cellfor FP50-i600 circuit breakers

! v ,'5 1 - /?

plated for maximum conductivity and are securely
braced to withstard the shucks and. magnetic stresses
caused by fnu:^ "iirrents capable of being produced by
the system in which the switcbgear is installed.

•

j!'-: .v-!-

Terminal blocks for control circuits arc located a safe
distancc.from the bus, and are accessible from the rear
of the switchboard.
.
•

Each breaker cell door is louvered to provide adequate
ventilation ncce.ssa ry for the switcbgear to stay below
lb" prp«erib»f' rpmpp'o^ure rise. Prior to paiiitiiip-. all
nietal paiU are tompietely degreased and given a phos-

'ijl: •'

ISbaked on to.provide a durable finish.
V?v"v.rv-'.v.':--vrr.v:'

- .•

-lA' . I' •"•

phaiizing treatment. This preparation is followed by
.T application of a standard ASA-61 light gray paint that

Cell (orFP75-3D00 circuit breakers !
^ .
..
-t

.........

.-..-t.. . --.....j,.. ...

pv
SCTR5C
-iCOfWPA-NV

l.'i^VV'V

'V.-

Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed

•^QaT

600 Volts 2-0—25,009 to 15.0,000 Amperes !C

Oescrir -V* Sheet

r»c,- • • 3

- * <• »*i

three position drawout
Type FP Breakers cap be inovcci from •"Connecteci"

'I'.

"Tost" or "DisconnocUid" position witiiout oponiriK the

: • rm

cell door. An operating lever is inserted into a drawout

cam, and the breaker position is chanRed by a single

• W-

stroke. An indicator is clearly visible on the drawout

cam for Quick, positive identification of the breaker posi
tion at ail times. The interlock cover plate must be

moved before the drawout handle can be placed into the

cam. Movement of the cover plala automaticaiiy trips
the breaker insuring personnel complete safety by mak
ing ifimpossible to move the breaker frdm any position
with the main contacts closed.
Illl...

- Connected position
'.
•

Disconnected position

[

(A*' T-'M..,,

TELESCOPiNQ ROLLUUT
'!3

t" —i •'.

i-it'-'.' 1'
ti 1ii ^ •-

Breakers can bo completely with
drawn from the cell for examina

tion, maintenance, or replacement.
Teles-oping guide rails rigidly at^chod to the breaker cell provide
a

breaker to roli in and out A posi
tive "stop" at the end of the rails
prevents further travel after the

breaker has completely cleared the
enclosure.
s.

'FtC -HI-^CTfTJO COMP»AnV

P-r.th*.,

".'i '-" 'l

•

Low Voitage iVIetal-EncIosad SVi-dtchgear
600 Vafts a-c—25,000 ta 150,000 Arrneres !C
-i-.'iR'i-.

OUTDOOR CONSTRUCTION
A fuH sekction of both steei and aluminum outdoor
housings is availu!)lc—with standard piMtcotod-nisle
construction. Tho .basic indoor switchi^car assembly

r.V''

is mounted on a steel or aluminum base. Then an

outdoor enclosure is built around ,tbe switchgear. Tbe
outdoor housing oonfain.s lights and reeejitacles, as well
as screened ventilating louvers and heaters to prevent

condensation. Accessibility to the front and rear is pro
vided by doors. Outdoor steel housings are phgsuhatized
followed by an epoxy undercoat and given a finish coat- .
ing of ASA-2-$ dark gray paint

Aluminum outdoor housings may bo natural finish or
at user's tipt'on ol'odi'ed a light green color. The allodiz-

ing process is aiso a preparation for paint; and either at

the time of manufacturing or at a future date, a com
patible paint may be applied.

All outdoor switchgear is coated with an automotive
type "uudcrseal" to provide protection against deterio
ration to all surfaces not acceasi'ole after iiistallation.
Federal Pacific outdoor enclosures have been tested in
accordance with MEMA standards and were found to
greatly exceed the requirements in that wat«!r whb com-

•..-•-tr-vii.'.:'.'
AlURilRum Otiidoor
Hotislne
rrtl'fi'if."

te'' 'IV

"•.'V

r''

Steel Outdoor Housini

'V. .•••-,r^v.'.'v- V,-

'PSDKIRAl.

PAC

©LASS

Voitage Motal-Encbsec. /
D':i;.cnr -!•••":' Shee-i

SOO Volts 2-c—25,000 to 150,0'7o . .t;pares
1

FP Air Circuit Breakers

f^;;
IT;;'-?!;! g
I**- "u'.V

;

. FP25-600
'•'\ r .
•'
•«a

h -• "=
• >• i ' 1 •.' .

i i. '••V-'-.-V"''•' •" -';

Dependable stored energy operation j Manual—electrical—^manual/olectrical operation
Field adjustable timing device / Low-loss hinge contacts / Safe, three-position drawout

FP25 Breaker is equipped with a stored energy mech

INTERRUPTING RAHNGS

anism and may be provided as a manual,' electrical or

The breakers, though rated on a symmetrical basis, are

manual/electrical breaker.

tested under maxhmim asymmetrical conditions itn'fft

FP.'iO Breaker is equipped with a stored energy mech.nnism and may be provided as a manual, electrical or

the test eiraiit X/R ratio being not less than 6.6, which
corresponds to an average asymmetry factor of 1.17.
To determine the instantaneous symmetrical short cir

manual/electrical breaker.

The compact design of the FP50-1C00 enables it to be
stacked four high in a vertical section which reduces
the overall size or the assembly.
FP75 and FPlOO Breakers are equipped with an electri
cally operated spring charged stored energy mecha

nism. These breakers have provisions for' emergency
manual operation.

cuit current, use the sub-transient react-sncc of the
rotating apparatus (both synchronous and induction

machines) and the impedance values of all interveningportions of the circuit to the point of fault Note that'
for these low-voltage systems the impedance of short
runs of conductors, bus runs, current transformer and
intervening circuit , breakers themselves, may- become
important elements in limiting the total short circuit

as they usually represent a relatively high percentage

FP breakers should be applied within their assigned
voltage, continuous current, interrupting and "shorttime ratings and should be. selected to provide the pro
tection required by the other components of the circuit.

The following table shows both the asymmetrical and •
symmetrical current interrupting ratings.

FP breakers are equipped with a direct acting over-

TABLE II interrupting ratings

of the total system impedance.

current trip device. Trip coils should be selected so as

to provide the minimum trip setting required. Table 1
shows the standard coll ratings that are available witn
each of the different FP :breakers.

TABLE t ;.tandarcl current ra. qgs (amperes)
FP-50,

fP-25
I5X
20X
30X
40X
SOX
70
SO
too
125
ISO

175
200
225
250
300
350
400
500

FP-lOO
• 4000
5000
6000

600
800
1000
1200
1000

FP.25
FP.60
FP.75
FP-ICO

ahcrt-tlme

measured St

raring wilhcut

Instant vy cycle
ofter lault, amperes*

cerfesfrlp

asym
metrical

(overage
3-pl)39e
: rnw)
25,000
• 50,000
75,000

FP-75
rp-£o,
Fp./S
FP-lOO

50,000

asym

metrical

85,CCO •
30,000
50',c.no
;.5,cco
dS.COO

with tabTfl III due to their Ki withstoftdabilily.

.Interrupting
rating current

65,0.*.0

153,000 1 13O,'J00

25,000 .
50,000
75,000
100,CiJO

sym.

.metrical .
22,000
42,000

42,000 :
65,000
85.(03

, " -; "i.ow ^'oStege, fl*2tel-Er!do£.^d S-vitohsaaij-'iu Vci4s a-c—"5,0QQ to 15d,CD0 Amperes SC
'"K"" : , .,.;r'

.-^'awiS^'V •

STORED ENERGY MECHANISM
Fedursl I'acific sturfid energy device, iociited behiml tlie

front plate, hns springs that are charged either manu
ally or electric.iily to provide a constant quick-make of
chc tree'-:":'
-ts The fast closin-' speed of the
breaker is i':deiien:lcv,v of the operator's netion, and it is

impossible lo tense or slow-close the breaker contacts.
This consistent hitrh speed increa.scs the ranfre of
breaker sizes which can be aafoly operated n-.anually and
reduces breaker maintenance by extending,'contact life.

Control power rpquircments are virtually eliminated

with .stored enercy because the charging force is sup

pliedeither manually or by a fractional horsepowerelec
tric motor. This stored energy oponuion reduces the

".. ... isiBi;, :;y;yv;.'oSKORTofiAY

fcSii r,-^nr'.V

TD-1 Tifflliig DeylctFrontyieW. : .

.TD-2 Tiinlng bovice Front View

' '^TDiT^tlhiirig Defe

•;5y
•..

' : "I

INTEaRUPT NO RATING

ASyMMHTRlOAL
.amperes

v,
22,000:•.•
:.: 7o; •
?0,CC0'.. ^••; ; ; .•.••«,ooo--.150'
'CC.OOO
;
; '."50,000 •
' 5co;
soo
7;-.ooq •'>:•'•: • .•.•••..•:'.';;ts,oo9...:' "v .:;. 500 •.;
^.^• V . ^OO.CM:" i•.•.,• ..•>•:, •••;-';85;cyo''.
••'2ots>y, yadoo''.'
•• ..'. •MSO.OOO ••'
":-' vi30.ooo••••. y:.' r Aooo-'y

WITH SHORT DElftV TRIP

• wiTHilHSTANTANEOOS

. .. : AHPESESv'..: vj . 24pV;
•..' .-.14,000'' -'i"

J V

TD-2 TimihgDeviCB Side VioW' : .

.Max."3SHn- :•
30 CYC.

240V
70'
150 •
2;4l
1000-1000
2000 •
. 4000 .

70 : v.-w
150 . ' 150-

•••150
.-aso;' ! '250

• .150
: 2bo

- '.lOOS; . ."1000,
' iiboo.

2bG0 ' yiooo; • .2000.: y'2obo
••4000

'^,r.':A'.. Voriisge Metal-Enclosed Swfijcffgear •

••.-••

. 300 Vfilts ?i-c—23,000 to 150,000 Ainpefa$ iC

MECHAM.ISWi
Manually, Electrically or
Manually/ElDctrjcally ;>
Operated

t >•;,•:
s."), ^ ...\ '
" rAp:'
M}:..
r V

I. •.r
V ^rV-..
' - • ,
i ?.

' 3?iiS3^m-. ^\
••3--3

^BSi'Sti.S!... .w-s.-- " ••"K

• IMHRnUPTlKG RATIMC. CURRENT MEASBHED
BREAKER
TYPE
?- '

::'-fns-m':
' .'•

•-ymMt.WJ'
•••"^

SYMMETtliCAL y'•
-• •' • • • -' -

BATIMr, OF CL'i! Etii

V/IIHDUT
SERIES TRIPS

y2.woy yy'V:' ••' • • •-a«Aaa'
22000 F,;;,
-W
35000'j.:; ;-. • • ' •; • 130000 •' > - • 3:3-;2SOOO; yAj,
•' mnnn • '
,, 42000 ^

30 CYCtE SHOAT-TIWt flATIHC-WITHOUT
. SERIES TRIPS, AMPERES

AT .^ CYCU AFTER FMJLT^^

.;— 1.

'j^ono'. • •,.••
-i :

"r-C-3R.AL- i>>/.'.\C.c3=5C'' Er-EO'pHEC: C ^P'; PA^^^•^•

rtlo. rchj; •? iv>T7'.t.*

TtEiiii

'iHnRRUPTIKC RATINQ CURRtNT MEASURED:
AT Vi CYCLE AfTER FAULTS, AMPERES, .•.
ASYMMETRICAl

SYMMETRICAL

30 CYCLE SPOST-TIHt RATINfi, WITHOUT '
SERIES TRirS, AMPERES

600 Volts a-c—25,000 tc 150,0

Ai-n^HrCi: IC

Dti3C;'ip' A'O ShftOs
.
L"^;; - -

FP75-3000
AIR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
stored Energy

Mechanism

Electrically
Operated

•«, ' . •**•** -l-f '-f

•

The normal method of operating this

breaker is by an a-c/d-c electric mo

•

♦ . ,•

tor charged, stored energy mecha

i -i. • ,

nism. Provisions are made for man

ual charge for emergency closing the

i ). !.l
L \ A"
K- :"! ;

IHTERRUPTINC RAimS CURRENT MEASURED
BRtAKEa
TYPE

fP75-3000

480-2AI
240 snit Selov

•'•<

—i
;Vt^A . ; r • sesii-

IHTERRUPTIKG RATING CURRENT KEASUREO
AT U CYC.LE AFTER FAULTS, AMPERES

30 CYCLE SNORT-TIME RATING WITHOUT
SERIES TRIPS, AMPERES •

FRAME SIZE CGHTIHUOUS CURRENT
RATING OF CURRENT
CARRYING PARTS
WITHOUT
SERIES TRIPS
i' '

/
r-i=bf:(;RAL' pAo:.-?-13. BLBcrvr-,.c
•

tion only when breakei is tripped by the overcurrcnt
trip units. The bell alarm can be manually and/or elec
trically reset. Rcclosing breaker also resets the alarm
switch. Bell alarm switch- is available with either .nor
mally open or normally closed contacts.

Shunt trip: The shunt trip attachment is mounted dii-ectly above the trip shaft. It is a non-adjustable
electro-magnet intended for intermittent duty only, and
its circuit is interrupted only by an auxiliary contact.
Shunt close: The shunt close attachment is mounted on

top of the stored energy mechanism and is used to elec

trically discharge the stored energy mechanism and
thus to close the breaker. It is a non-adjustable inter
mittent duty device and its circuit is interrupted by an
auxiliary contact.

FP25
FP50

A compact, easy-to-use maintenance lift truck is avail

currcnt Trip Devices-—
one per poto
Manual Trip Button
Manual Close Button
Electrical Close Button

"Closed"
Mechanism Indicator

X• ' •

•

"Sprlnss Charced"
"Sprlnits Discharged"
Attached Manual Closing Handle
*Eleptfical Ch3rs'(^2 Mechanism
IIS a-c, 125 d-c control
Closing relay with cut off.

•

seal-in and anti-pump features
for maintained contact control
Draw-out interlock

Padlocking Provision
$hunt Close device
Shunt trip deviceAuxiliary $wi(cn--6 circuit

—

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Overcurrcnt liell alarmhand reset
Electrical lockout device

Key Interlock

X .

X - '

draulically foot-oper.ated, the mainton.aiice truck enables

SERIES OV*; 'CURRENT TRl
Long delay and tn^isntaneous
. (Standard) TD-1
Long delay and Short delay

(Optional) TO-2
Long delay. Short delay

sation with extremely fast arc extinction.

.•

—

the removal and handing of the largest type Federal
Pacific Circuit Bre.-iker by one man. Refer to fact-

arcs. The arc is confined within tv/o low-volume, highpressure parallel arc chamber.'.. This means rapid deioni-

•X

"Test", "Disconnected"
Condition Indicator—"Opcn"-

iiircnupf the arc by dividing the current between two

X
'

Position Indicator "Connected",

Manual/Electric Close Button

A pa'alU-l arc-splitting system is used to effectively

Manual Close Button

ARC CHUTES

FPIOO

able for Use with Federal Pacific Switchgear. Hy-

for details.

fP75

TO-l Dual Magnetic Time Ovcr-

••Auxiliary Swilch—fi Circuits
tindervoltdge device—

CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE TRUCK

Electrteal

Instantaneous (Cptlcnall TO-3

Motor Starling fOr-lional) TD-4
Long delay only rOp'lonai)

•• MSJitnum—'.J Circuit
• 4S volt

Dt!- p AU

plastic material—not readily breakable. • '
Single Rating Lamp—For all operating voltages.

2702-0116
2703-0116
2704-0116

V-' •^' -i

50
70
US

125

5800 .
• 6500.'•
7100 ,

1 .24-£ Lamp 24 V. .032-.O38 amp.'

. '«a
0{> NSCES&stY SPACeRS.CAT.'Isa ;/OI'OI}4

tHICX WHEN PANEL TrOCKNESS IS LESS IHAN-b

' I

•

•;

n HDETRA*. PAOIF'IC EUS.CTRIC OOMPANV'

Key interlocks are attached to mschantcal and electrical
device? to insure a safe prtxictermined sequence of oper
ations. Hie intcrlc^c':? are a simple mechanical device
that a.rc pi'.titivc ir ->ction but very difficult to defeat and
may bt .itlached 'n any equipmeni v;h:'re it is possible
to engage irio'.'iny operators.
Various acccssrries are available to extend the basic

operation of tiic interlock for control circuit switching.

However,,it shotildbe rcmemhcrci tliat ilie reliabflityof
such arratigomeni? mus' dcpem' on tho rcliabiUty of the
control source and .should "iai' safe" in the event of a

power failure.
INTERLOCKS - Typf- VB. VF. VFN
These imerhiuk.s f^rm the basic group of mierlocks used
in aH application-. Tlte choice bet'voyn locks in this
group depends entirely on the •mounting arrangement
preferred; Honslttgs arc of brass either machined from

bar stock or cast, and carry the 5/P" diameter, bfass
plunger in exactly rhc same relatioasblp to the lock.
Plunger travel is 3/4' and the plunger exren'sion from
the Uv;k body in the ret<-.,ctcd position may be any one
of six siaiKi. .-'1 irnyi'ts. Nisii standard pmjecdons can
be stippficd •I. additjonal cost.

S'cindard arrangement is for the key to be renpNT
the "plunger extended" position only. The opposite
be supplied at no addilicnal charge when specified.
TYPE VD

This lock is used on removable or hinged panels a:.d
supplied with
vr«1(l an
»dUi^ iatch
iUlViJ block which
VYXiiWU 19
is illVAlll'.V.
moiintc
ic mounted on the fArMj^xrnKfn
unH once
t^nia It ir
Ii.'
mg is
removable rxairfr
part and
^cmo^'ed from the latch block tlie ke\' is trapped pnd can-

iTi^T

•'

II.X' be removed. In all other respects tltis lock asse.a'-ly
is identical .o the Haste locks previously described.
TYPE T

the type T is a traasfcr'interlock desigilcd for .a key
;ni-.:rcliangc and usually consists of.a master IcKk and
or more Tclsase locks.

In operation the key to the,master lock is retjuned. ilntO - .-m
all. the release keys are.'insened in the lock'.assembty,'
then the master key can bc r^oved and ia.s.? doing •
traps all the release keys.
•'

Nry combi:=ation of master and release ,s is posrir'e
b'ji it should be noted there is no extc ual pluTrger.fo:-

to &B Stationary part oi' the mechanism. The lock hdus >.

rAOTr-'^'o' -eLETO-TRiC "o

r:Ol'NTiNG 0:MFNS', ::.5
U

rf-

rJ —«

- -f

IBBi
SEMI-FLUSH MOUNTING
FLAT PANEL

vrt-j v---:-LSEMI-FLUSH MOUNTING
DISHED FANEL

.Hi-ECTRJC
i;. _ ^•'••'eET.'.NPWAR«;-N =w'JEPSEy

COrV3:RANY

Lo'v- ''>"^

K "ai^r^einT?;- ''-r"* "' " :."•-

Federal Pacific Lons Scale In«lriimenU aro deslitie'l

specifically for eojitri^ and distriUtion .•ivi'.chboartLs^
Th'.' iiislriimenta combin«! the case '>f reading aiTonk'Jby ;i 7 inch acale and the compa< "icss of a' 4'::-i"cb
pawl size- A clearly distinguished cijlntcr, o^iatmp
over a 250' fire scnie, provides fdi tinicfe iind''frcc»ra'"

•15(1

w;;

•

readings at c'onsicieroble distances.

.: • M

CONSTRUCTION

A sturdy meuil housing and tiYodern styifd front are

,25

standardizcfi 'ur nil ranges .aJid types in both d-c and
ii-c movemruu.

l>ireet Curfn' (i'lass 1^150 Ty'a= JP) instruments e •
ploy a hign stren'p.h magnet
moving •:>••
accurately balanced o!i steel p>\-ots m jewel hearings. .
Aitdrnating Current' (Class 0155 Type JA) amroe'Lpi'a
and voltmew
opcr.Te on the irott icpuls'ion p.rineiple •

with nip daiiij'.pj. AsUmeters ore of ihe dynam'micter
type with nuignelic damping.
FEATURES

Tamper Proof: Stiids permanently mounted on case

' 1 1'^""

'Vv-

])roliibit removnl of instrument cover by unauthorized

personnel. Instruments nre flush mounted on panels

,8-5 iRJjjBtnsrtt—.. .•]<,•!

uptolVi''.

Accurate: 1% of full scale value,
Zero Adjustment*. Zero adjuster is provide'>

"'Explflflw!, Visrr c( t C

fiW.

F.EDERAI. iPACI.FlO ei-ECTF?IC COMRANV^^

August, fSiSe: ^
•)-'"-Jl!7 'lifts

V j..[o enit capacity of 50 mv.

atid furnished with pair of
i. Insert value in place of ®"
' e to suit application, and insert
•D.001M.\-:5000y\'. KxternaJ re-

a. re!|uired; availauie separately.
vaiiie to suit priuiary of current
3/•-p secondary. Insert this value

'>•1 I . -I-'X,

rV • • 005AA-250AA.

fspr S

A. Select lull scale vofe'e: to siiit primary of potential
traasformor having 150 v secondary. Insert this
value.fn place of

e.g. JA-150W-1500VV

o. Select full sc.ale value to suit application and insert
m ylace uf * Indicate product of current transfonner i-a:io and potential transformer ratio e.a
JA-0011CW/.141/I2r:e"rT;tfe7r.^
-r—Wv. 1 Sl>>tlrh»;;
'•'

'intsmiiitlirBtiffl •

'^1^.
FU^E KIT PURCHASING DATA*
. .,

EJO-l-O"

E30;!-a0

Fata fypt ..
sa'c- "j
wST
- SM-*- 1 • Cl'£-r

£»-l-0
E)9-l-90
E»-l^£

$M-4
SM-S

SA-200. w<)A
'
-.;r-nplet* Switoh«s ^ aun? to.supply
l!w f<'How!iiijini;on;'r;ttf.n:

•• '
, Storwi-Energy

.Switch CatP.lop Noml^-r
Voitsge Rating

,
Motor

' •!, i^iiard CataloR Number

d.c,

A 'I'lT-

•A-'JT:;: ONI.Y I-'RCNT C.ONNISCTED S'ATiOHES

-..r, - • V :.l.e.

• 'L'"

' "

If Mutirr Opwatetl, Control'Velta^: .......a.c. —

jp,.
Rptin;/

. - i::.

OptTating- Mechaniam; Manual _

AVAILABtJ!

•

•"•"VWAL.'i FS/\e.ii"T
,

INSTRUCTiaNS FCR INSTA.^AiiON,

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

•T

of
TYPE TH" DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

AU Federal Paeifie's Tvpu I'FH" trarisformers arc shipped

niountcd on ciiiicr a sHid. or In the case of the snral.f'cr sizes,
on a pallet. Adequate size and strength of the skid- or pallet
insures protection during shipment and ease of handling. The

Type "FH" trar..sfornK-r.s 225 KVA and below arc supplied with
Korfund isohitors which .should he placed under the four, cor

ners of tlie unit wh-en it is floor mounted for full isolation of
vibration.frora the buiiiiing stcucfure. This isolation in adiiftion-

transformer lionsing is covered with a he.'ivy laminated'paper
and the complete tfansformcr is cither b.andcd to the.-pallet or

to the internal isolating monnis will provide a ma.ximuni of

.bolted to the skid. :

suitable,.for wail hiounting art- equipped with brackets for this

vibration isolation and sound reduction. Those transformers

purpose; The heavy angle.br.-ickets mounted to.the base are

Core and Coils
Core and cods shipped from the Federal Pacific factory i.s

designed, to carry the transformer's weight when bolted lo the
building structure. The top .slide-type brackets are intended to
hold the transformer in an upright position. ..

.skid moiinletl .an! overcd with protcoled iv.per wrapping, and

ha-.-c !i protccti-.-e box frame covering the complete'structure'

Type "FH" transformers 300 KVA and'aboive are also equipi\c(i

to insure that ilu itaiisformcr will not be 'l;un.e:ed with normal
handling durinesh.nnnoi:.-

trnnsformcrs, the vibrrition isviviors ,-uc made ineffective (•iifim:

with vibration Isolators, l lbwevci-.-becaiise of the weight o'" iht-se

.shipment .by the piaccmeni of r.-d -nipping bars in parailci -,vi;l:
the isdlallng maieriiil. Upon insiaiiaiion f/ie hnli iloy.i: iteim;
painted red and the shipping bars also painted red shnni'd he

ypoEHS

R12CB5PT'

removed io permit the core and-coils to be eifectivciy i.solaidd.

... •

• 'v.-.'I;

Ail transformers leaving the Federal Pacific Fleci'ric factory arc
in first-cl.iss condition. Therefore, upon arrival at destination a

The bolt down items and isolation shipping bar ctin b'o stored
within the transformer housing so 'as to be readily r>v.tilabie

visual inspection should he m.ade pi lor to unloading, to deter-'
mine any evidence of rough handling. If damage is.cvidcnt or

from its installation site.

for use in the event the transformer ever need be removed

.. i;

•

•;any'indication of rough handling visible, a claim shouici be filed
• •.immediately

with the carrier and noilficailon of this claim

If fishould be.sent to the Federal Pacific Electric salcsntan.

•

1.0CATi0N
For satisfactory operation transformers should be so positioned
as not to restrict free air flow through the transformex louver.s.

'' I .

:•

: .PalJel-s and skids are constructed so.that all inmsformers may
be,moved by a forkiift truck. All tra'hsformers in.iy be skidded,

'. <'V.,

• draped or rolled into position on their shipping forms. Lifting
• 1 / eyes are provided on all transformers and are of sufficient

I •;

' ..strength, to permit overhead* lifts with a crane.
i ...
! --.'vr. .5
••i;OkVdv
Federal Pacific trarisformer shouid'bevlhid on-its
'- V-1.

/'•'iside fof'any reason. All transformers arc supported on vibra"tion_.isolators underneath the core-and coll stru'cture find this

••.. isolating material could be damaged beyond repair if the trans-:
. •T'fornier is.tnrncd on its side. :
'
V '"fi' ;t'A .spreader bar need only Iks'us^d
I'*!?'

'l'!.

on the large power sized

encased dry-typc trnnsformcrsi This is because the lifting
arc-fastened to the base and long lifting cables or sling might ^
• possibly crush the casing unless a spreader is used.

-No fixed rule applies; however, the larger tlte air: circulation
louver, the farther from a wdU it should-'be piaccdt Tlte small

lighting transformer need only' be placed two inches froni a .
wail whereas a large power transformer should be ptaecd at'
least six inches from a wall. Good air circulation is essential '

in the-area in which a dry-type transformer is installed. There

shoiild be available at least one. hundred.cubic feet:of air per
minute per kilowatt loss of 'thc trahsforfher. Sticli a volume
of air will iestrict the ambient afr ris'e.in the rbom to less-than

10° centigrade. To determine the air requirements of a planned
instalintidn, :the KVA size of-transformer to be used and its
full load total watts loss,should be used -to calculate the above

i,/',;

air requirements.

Transformers weighing in excess of "one thoiisand pounds

should be installed close to a main, building, support to insure
a minimum of vibration transmission throughout the structure.
• iH

STORAGB
Dry-type transformers preferably should be .stored in a warm

, do' location with uniform tcmpcraiiire. 'Ventilating openings

should be kept covered to keep out dust. If It is necessary
.to leave a transformer put of doors it should be thoroughly
'.protected to prevent moisture and foreign material froth ciiteiing. Conden.salion and the alisorptihn of moi.sture can be greatly
; reduced by the insiaiiaiion of either heat lampsor space heaters.

Transformers arc e.iipensive items^of electrical equipment and
should be treated with reasonable care in choice of storage
location.

•

COL^SiMECtSO'^S
Wiring compartments are provided at the bottom .of the trans
former enclosure. Knockouts arc not provided because.of the
difficulty of insuring the correct size and the chrrcct location

.for eachvinstallation. However, both cnds..as';wolI as Ihb: rear
and bottom, of the wiring comparlnienl arc :suitabie cable en

trance'areas. All'transformer terminals'are rigidly supported
to insure that no damage occurs to the coils during the period
the connections arc.made-to the transformer. A complete per-,
mancnt connection diagram is included as: arf intcgral part of
the transformer nameplate.

•|':-v

All COP,- and coil sliuc'iircs. aUiioiigli isolated from thi:. trans
former casing by vibration isolators, have a flexible grounding
connection which insures that all non-ciirrent carrying parts

arc at the same potential. Standard practice of adequately
grounding the ti-ansformer to the station or circuit ground
should be followed. If this procedure is followed no danger
a,

r--

qiiir; - .-.•e
moisture iron: : -

•• a'l

•••
••.•.andiTei;:ic

.dirt upon ir.ialaiioii h.oconiL.-, r

In., in .vhnion

absorbs, a consicici'.ibic anionni , t moj-i'nre .iud the sui-aec i-,
contaminated; It h atit isr.bie to

•.spec; aiiil clean any

-f ne

transformer susnccted of havi'v; ireen cont.'smiiiatcd v ti' diji,

and moisture, especially print lo rc-encrgizins

opcaf'tS or maintenance personnel.

dry-type transforniei jvliea

been known to have beer

eXDOSttd to long |ieri'HK

.To maintain safe operating conditions do not remove covers,
of panels over openings in the trtinsformcr housing while the

humidity-or other moisinre. Whenever mpiiiur ;

..;;otr.

transformer is energized.

the surface.of ihc in'-.v.irnioTi. ii must be cii-i-.-.i i

• iri.

n::ir-

Caution: No attempt should ever be made to change the tap
connection while the transformer is energized.

For all relatively clean and dry indoor inslall:itions the Type
"FH" transformer will continue to operate satisfactorily under
all normal conditions of energization and load. No concern
need be expressed over periods of shut down as to the trans-

./ormer's ability to retain its electrical strength. However, in-

gization. The applica'':-:. jf ;joi air, radian. • • . in .-rivd
heat siiiTicicni to remove visiidc signs of moi.S;;. • • r.'nri.dlv
air that is required. Fniiurn due to cxce.S5 inoa. n •
.-c. Illover external cretpagc Siirf.iccs readily coiitan-. Ma i-,; iv. a'.'f'-.ture. Therefore, removal of this su.d'ace mois; ' t ; .

dielectric integrity.

Unfortunately insiiialion resistance

of: ib-

• liqtiid f-iled transformer!,'-aic of liltl,-.

i.e on a

.'.

former. ,\ttempts htivc it.-cn made to :-.feei/y'rcs!siu:ic

I-.S-

DCS;

sonic instances if is necessary to install Type "FH" transform-

which wiirindicate, IninMormcr uryr.csr, .nal dielecliic tiieii.eib.

,ers opt of doors with the proieclibh afforded cither by rain

The nature of the'-insuhiiioh ti.scd; in drynyite irwvtV.rnttTs is
such thtit megger feaUinyt cannot be relied upt.T,.

shields or a building shelter. Under sueh conditions of operation

the greatest reliability will be obtaincci if the tra'iisfpfmer ,is

continually, under load./Condensate,may form and ti'ltimaicly
be absorbed in the insulation" if an outdoor triinsformer is de-

.energized for .long periods of time. If such a situation arises,
.the transformer should be inspected for visible signs of moisture
.oil the core and coils, before rc-energizihg. If moisture is ob-:.
served the transformer, shdiild bo dried as indic.aicd in the
paragraph under DRYING.

Type "FH" transformers may be loaded in accordance with
the ASA loading giiidc for dry-type transformers.

Caution: Under no conditions should Type "FH" transformers
be.asked to carry more than 110% overload for a long period
of time for the reason that extreme temperatures may de
velop and cause transformer failure. If It is necessary under
emergency conditions to exceed this value of loading, fan
cooling should be added as an emergency measure. Adequate
•forced air cooling will permit load increases of 33'/<% of
nameplate rating. Type "FH". transformers 501 KVA and

above may.be purchased with factory supplied supplemental.
fan cooled rating,

TVansformers/iiypc "HH" 50t kVA and above may l-r tup-' :
plied with supplemenlti! fan cooling. Fan motor mtiiiMcnance
consists only of. periodic iiibricalion if used froiiueidK. No

maintenance is feqiiired on thc'diai-iype thcrmoipelct and al im
cbmaets which coiitro! the circuit.. Since the dial-type

eter is of the bourdon type, the therniometcr cither uvil.s/.

accurately"or not at till. It will only fail to oper.ite .i iht
bourdon tube ;is punctured and loses its liquid pressure. The.
control and alarm, contacts are of the micro .switch v.iricty and

suitable for many hundreds of thousands of oportitions.

.SURGE pnoTtBormm
For normal opcrtition on protected lines dry-type transfornii r>
need no surge proicctiou. However, when these ininsfonuers

are. applied to circuit.s with some exposure to lightning surges •
it is advisable, to protcct with'suitable lightning avrcstors. The
•Form 28 and: Typo RM arrestors. will give adcqnute protection,

when properly,'chosen for thc'vqliage rating they are to protect..
A continuously energized transformer needs periodic mainte
nance oniy for the purpose of removing accumulations of dust
and din from the cooling ducts and conducting surfaces.
Failure to remove large accumulations of dust and dirt will
ultimately lead to overheating. of Ihe transformer and its

ultimate failure.

Frequency of such cleaning should depend

on the environment of the transformer.

Caution: Extreme care should be taken .to assure that the
vdre enamel is never darna.ged. The. v/ire enamel is of an

extrerheiy high dielectric strength, it has an exceptional high
temperature normallife.;
. .

rr':'?.'^,-''^/;;'V; •••

=- tw .V>-'.;-. f-»
. -.te* >v- I'V.

•

:..i:£L::,..,j-i:;i:yv q. - 1

i. : t

•r»rf r'«-»i»*

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2015:05:26 10:55:41-05:00 Creator : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.2.10 #iX500 Modify Date : 2015:05:26 12:15:08-05:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15 Metadata Date : 2015:05:26 12:15:08-05:00 Creator Tool : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.2.10 #iX500 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:19ead5d5-98df-4002-a49f-a0095eeefe97 Instance ID : uuid:0f306848-9dce-4a50-8a79-9e2e74df98e5 Producer : Adobe PDF Scan Library 3.2 Page Count : 382
EXIF Metadata provided by ~~EXIF.tools~~

(GE) AK Breakers Vol 2 Of

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation